Use these links to rapidly review the document
2013 FORM 10-K ANNUAL REPORT TABLE OF CONTENTS
Item 8. Financial Statements and Supplementary Data
PART IV

Table of Contents

 

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549



FORM 10-K

(Mark One)    

ý

 

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013

o

 

TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from                    to                  

Commission File Number 001-32722



INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

DELAWARE
(State of incorporation)
  95-2848406
(IRS Employer Identification No.)

165 Broadway, New York, New York
(Address of principal executive offices)

 

10006
(Zip Code)
(212) 588-4000
(Registrant's telephone number, including area code)

SECURITIES REGISTERED PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(B) OF THE ACT:

Common Stock, $0.01 par value
(Title of class)

 

New York Stock Exchange
(Name of exchange on which registered)

SECURITIES REGISTERED PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(G) OF THE ACT: None



         Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act. Yes  ý     No  o

         Indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or Section 15(d) of the Act. Yes  o     No  ý

         Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. Yes  ý     No  o

         Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Website, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files). Yes  ý     No  o

         Indicate by check mark if disclosure of delinquent filers pursuant to Item 405 of Regulation S-K (§229.405 of this chapter) is not contained herein, and will not be contained, to the best of registrant's knowledge, in definitive proxy or information statements incorporated by reference in Part III of this Form 10-K or any amendment to this Form 10-K  o

         Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or a smaller reporting company. See definitions of "large accelerated filer," "accelerated filer," and "smaller reporting company" in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer  o   Accelerated filer  ý   Non-accelerated filer  o
(Do not check if a smaller
reporting company)
  Smaller reporting company  o

         Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined by Rule 12b-2 of the Act)

Yes  o     No  ý

Aggregate market value of the voting stock
held by non-affiliates of the
Registrant at June 30, 2013:
$506,073,889
  Number of shares outstanding of the
Registrant's Class of common stock
at February 19, 2014:
35,839,452

DOCUMENTS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE:

         Proxy Statement relating to the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders (incorporated, in part, in Form 10-K Part III)

   


Table of Contents


2013 FORM 10-K ANNUAL REPORT

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 
   
 
Page
 

  Forward Looking Statements     ii  

PART I

 

Item 1.

  Business     1  

Item 1A.

  Risk Factors     9  

Item 1B.

  Unresolved Staff Comments     18  

Item 2.

  Properties     19  

Item 3.

  Legal Proceedings     19  

Item 4

  Mine Safety Disclosures     19  

PART II

 

Item 5.

  Market for Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities     20  

Item 6.

  Selected Financial Data     23  

Item 7.

  Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations     23  

Item 7A.

  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk     46  

Item 8.

  Financial Statements and Supplementary Data     49  

Item 9.

  Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure     98  

Item 9A.

  Controls and Procedures     98  

Item 9B.

  Other Information     100  

PART III

 

Item 10.

  Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance     100  

Item 11.

  Executive Compensation     100  

Item 12.

  Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters     100  

Item 13.

  Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence     100  

Item 14.

  Principal Accounting Fees and Services     100  

PART IV

 

Item 15.

  Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules     100  

        Investment Technology Group, ITG, the ITG logo, AlterNet, ITG Algorithms, ITG List-Based Algorithms, ITG Net, ITG Single-Stock Algorithms, ITG TCA, POSIT, POSIT Alert, POSIT Marketplace, Triton and MATCH Now are registered trademarks or service marks of the Investment Technology Group, Inc. companies. ITG Derivatives and ITG Smart Router are trademarks or service marks of the Investment Technology Group, Inc. companies.

i


Table of Contents


PRELIMINARY NOTES

        When we use the terms "ITG," the "Company," "we," "us" and "our," we mean Investment Technology Group, Inc. and its consolidated subsidiaries.


FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

        In addition to the historical information contained throughout this Annual Report on Form 10-K, there are forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the "Securities Act"), Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act") and the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. All statements regarding our expectations related to our future financial position, results of operations, revenues, cash flows, dividends, financing plans, business and product strategies, competitive positions, as well as the plans and objectives of management for future operations, and all expectations concerning securities markets, client trading and economic trends are forward-looking statements. In some cases, you can identify these statements by forward-looking words such as "may," "might," "will," "should," "expect," "plan," "anticipate," "believe," "estimate," "predict," "potential" or "continue" and the negative of these terms and other comparable terminology.

        Although we believe our expectations reflected in such forward-looking statements are based on reasonable assumptions and beliefs, and on information currently available to our management, there can be no assurance that such expectations will prove to have been correct. Important factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from the expectations reflected in the forward-looking statements herein include, among others, general economic, business, credit and financial market conditions, both internationally and domestically, financial market volatility, fluctuations in market trading volumes, effects of inflation, adverse changes or volatility in interest rates, fluctuations in foreign exchange rates, evolving industry regulations, changes in tax policy or accounting rules, the actions of both current and potential new competitors, changes in commission pricing, rapid changes in technology, errors or malfunctions in our systems or technology, cash flows into or redemptions from equity mutual funds, ability to meet liquidity requirements related to the clearing of our customers' trades, customer trading patterns, the success of our products and service offerings, our ability to continue to innovate and meet the demands of our customers for new or enhanced products, our ability to successfully integrate companies we have acquired, our ability to attract and retain talented employees and our ability to achieve cost savings from our cost reduction plans.

        Certain of these factors, and other factors, are more fully discussed in Item 1A, Risk Factors , Item 7, Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations , and Item 7A, Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk, in this Annual Report on Form 10-K, which you are encouraged to read.

        We disclaim any duty to update any of these forward-looking statements after the filing of this report to conform our prior statements to actual results or revised expectations and we do not intend to do so. These forward-looking statements should not be relied upon as representing our views as of any date subsequent to the filing of this report.

ii


Table of Contents


PART I

Item 1.    Business

        Investment Technology Group, Inc. was formed as a Delaware corporation on July 22, 1983. Its principal subsidiaries include: (1) ITG Inc., AlterNet Securities, Inc. ("AlterNet") and ITG Derivatives LLC ("ITG Derivatives"), institutional broker-dealers in the United States ("U.S."), (2) Investment Technology Group Limited ("ITG Europe"), an institutional broker-dealer in Europe, (3) ITG Australia Limited ("ITG Australia"), an institutional broker-dealer in Australia, (4) ITG Canada Corp. ("ITG Canada"), an institutional broker-dealer in Canada, (5) ITG Hong Kong Limited ("ITG Hong Kong"), an institutional broker-dealer in Hong Kong, (6) ITG Software Solutions, Inc., our intangible property, software development and maintenance subsidiary in the U.S., and (7) ITG Solutions Network, Inc., a holding company for ITG Analytics, Inc., a provider of pre- and post-trade analysis, fair value and trade optimization services, ITG Investment Research, Inc. ("ITG Investment Research"), a provider of independent data-driven investment research, and ITG Platforms Inc., a provider of trade order and execution management technology and network connectivity services for the financial community.

        ITG is an independent execution and research broker that partners with global portfolio managers and traders to provide unique data-driven insights throughout the investment process. From investment decision through to settlement, ITG helps clients understand market trends, improve performance, mitigate risk and navigate increasingly complex markets. A leader in electronic trading since launching the POSIT crossing network in 1987, ITG takes a consultative approach in delivering the highest quality institutional liquidity, execution services, analytical tools and proprietary research. The firm is headquartered in New York with offices in North America, Europe, and the Asia Pacific region.

        ITG's business is organized into four reportable operating segments (see Note 22, Segment Reporting , to the consolidated financial statements):

    U.S. Operations

    Canadian Operations

    European Operations and

    Asia Pacific Operations

        These four operating segments offer a wide range of solutions for asset managers and broker-dealers in the areas of electronic brokerage; research, sales and trading; platforms and analytics. These offerings include trade execution services and solutions for portfolio management, as well as investment research, pre-trade analytics and post-trade analytics and processing, summarized below.

Electronic Brokerage

        ITG electronic brokerage services include self-directed trading using algorithms, smart routing and matching through POSIT in cash equities (including single stocks and portfolio lists), futures and options.

ITG Algorithms and ITG Smart Router

        ITG Algorithms and ITG Smart Router offer portfolio managers and traders a way to trade orders quickly, comprehensively and cost-efficiently from any ITG Execution Management System ("EMS") or ITG Order Management System ("OMS") and most third-party trading platforms. The algorithms execute orders anonymously and discreetly, thereby potentially lowering market impact costs and improving overall performance. ITG Algorithms help users pursue best execution through two suites: ITG Single-Stock Algorithms and ITG List-Based Algorithms.

1


Table of Contents

        ITG Smart Router offers an alternative to routing trades that can help capture liquidity with a combination of speed and confidentiality. These routers continuously scan markets for liquidity with an emphasis on trading without displaying the order. ITG Smart Router uses proprietary techniques to quickly execute at the best available prices.

POSIT

        POSIT was launched in 1987 as a point-in-time electronic crossing network. Today, POSIT operates as an Alternative Trading System ("ATS"), providing anonymous continuous and scheduled crossing of non-displayed (or dark) equity orders and price improvement opportunities within the National Best Bid and Offer ("NBBO").

        POSIT Alert is a buy-side-only block crossing mechanism within POSIT. POSIT Alert scans uncommitted shares from participating clients. When a crossing opportunity is detected, POSIT Alert notifies the relevant users that a matching opportunity exists.

        POSIT Marketplace provides access to POSIT liquidity, the dark pools of other ATSs, and certain exchange hidden order types. POSIT Marketplace is a dark pool aggregator that provides clients with access to a large range of non-displayed liquidity destinations. POSIT Marketplace uses advanced quantitative techniques in an effort to protect clients from gaming and to interact with quality liquidity.

ITG Derivatives

        ITG Derivatives provides electronic listed futures and options trading, including algorithmic trading and direct market access. ITG Derivatives offers advanced options features for traders employing volatility-neutral or delta-neutral strategies and also provides low-latency application programming interfaces.

Commission Management Services

        ITG offers guidance, administration, and consolidation of client commission arrangements across a wide range of our clients' preferred brokerage and research providers through ITG Commission Manager, a robust, multi-asset, web-based commission management portal.

Securities Lending Services

        Through stock borrow and stock loan transactions, ITG facilitates shortened or extended settlement periods to help clients meet their internal cash flow needs. ITG also locates and borrows securities for clients to accommodate short sales and reduce fails.

Research, Sales & Trading

ITG Investment Research

        ITG provides differentiated, unbiased, data-driven equity research through its ITG Investment Research subsidiary. This offering has expanded ITG's client relationships beyond the trading desk to chief investment officers, portfolio managers and analysts. Through the use of innovative data mining and analysis and exclusive data partnerships, as well as detailed analysis of energy asset plays, ITG Investment Research identifies key metrics that may influence a company's future performance. ITG Investment Research currently provides research on more than 300 companies.

ITG Market Research

        ITG Market Research offers market research capabilities to corporate clients within the healthcare, telecom and energy industries. The healthcare market research practice combines survey results with

2


Table of Contents

proprietary empirical data to deliver innovative syndicated and custom reporting capabilities. The telecom research practice triangulates multiple data sources to provide insights into the mobile handset market in North America. We also provide our syndicated energy research product to, and perform custom analyses for, corporations in the oil and gas industry.

High-Touch Trading

        ITG provides high-touch sales trading and portfolio trading for institutional clients. ITG's high-touch trading desk is staffed with experienced trading professionals who provide ITG clients with execution expertise and also convey trading ideas based on ITG investment research.

Platforms

Execution Management and Order Management

        ITG EMSs are designed to meet the needs of disparate trading styles. Triton is ITG's award-winning, multi-asset and broker-neutral EMS, which brings a complete set of integrated execution and analytical tools to the user's desktop for global list-based and single-stock trading, as well as futures and options capabilities. Triton Derivatives is a broker-neutral, direct-access EMS that provides traders with access to scalable, low-latency, multi-asset trading opportunities.

        ITG OMS combines portfolio management, compliance functionality (ITG Compliance Monitoring System), trading and post-trade processing (ITG Trade Operations Outsourcing), and a fully integrated and supported financial services communications network (ITG Net) with a consolidated, outsourced service for global trade matching and settlement (ITG Trade Operations Outsourcing) that provides connectivity to the industry's post-trade utilities, as well as support for multiple, flexible settlement communications methods and a real-time process monitor.

ITG Net

        ITG Net is a global financial communications network that provides secure, reliable and fully supported connectivity between buy-side and sell-side firms for order routing and indication-of-interest messages from ITG and third-party trading platforms. ITG Net supports approximately 9,000 billable connections to more than 500 unique brokerage firms and execution venues worldwide. ITG Net also integrates the trading products of third-party brokers and ATSs into our OMS and EMS platforms.

ITG Single Ticket Clearing

        ITG's commitment to best execution platforms also extends to broker-neutral operational services to help ensure that trades clear and settle efficiently, and to significantly lower the transaction costs associated with trade tickets. ITG Single Ticket Clearing is a broker-neutral service that aggregates executions across multiple destinations for settlement purposes. ITG Single Ticket Clearing helps reduce the number of trade tickets and resulting charges imposed by custodians, reducing the costs of trade processing due to market fragmentation.

Analytics

ITG Trading Analytics

        The ITG Smart Trading Analytics suite enables portfolio managers and traders to improve execution performance before the trade happens (pre-trade) and during trading (real-time) by providing reliable portfolio analytics and risk models that help them perform predictive analyses, manage risk, change strategy and reduce trading costs. Trading costs are affected by multiple factors, such as execution strategies, time horizon, volatility, spread, volume and order size. ITG Smart Trading

3


Table of Contents

Analytics gauges the effects of these factors and aids in the understanding of the trade-off between market impact and opportunity cost.

        ITG Transaction Cost Analysis ("TCA") offers unique measurement and reporting capabilities to analyze costs and performance across the trading continuum. ITG TCA assesses trading performance and implicit costs under various market conditions so users can adjust strategies and potentially reduce costs and boost investment performance. ITG TCA is also available for foreign exchange (ITG TCA for FX).

        ITG Alpha Capture Reporting measures cost at every point of the investment process and provides portfolio managers with quarterly analytical reviews, written interpretations and on-site consultative recommendations to enhance performance.

ITG Portfolio Analytics

        ITG provides market-leading tools to assist asset managers with portfolio decision-making tasks from portfolio construction and optimization to the enterprise challenges of global, real-time portfolio compliance monitoring and the fair valuation of securities.

        ITG Portfolio Fair Value Service helps mutual fund managers meet their obligations to investors and regulators to fairly price the securities within their funds, and helps minimize the impact of market timing.

        ITG Portfolio Optimization System allows portfolio managers to develop new portfolio construction strategies and solve complex optimization problems. ITG Portfolio Optimization System allows users to accurately model tax liability, transaction costs and long/short objectives, while adhering to diverse portfolio-specific constraints.

Non-U.S. Operations

        ITG has established a strong and growing presence in key financial centers around the world to serve the needs of global institutional investors. In addition to its New York headquarters and its Boston, Chicago, Los Angeles and San Francisco offices in the U.S., ITG has additional offices in Canada in Toronto and Calgary. In Europe, ITG has offices in London, Dublin and Paris. In the Asia Pacific region, ITG has offices in Sydney, Melbourne, Hong Kong and Singapore. Local representation in regional markets provides an important competitive advantage for ITG. ITG also provides electronic and high-touch trading for Latin American equities from its New York headquarters, including algorithms for Brazil, Mexico and Chile, and direct market access into Colombia and Peru.

Canadian Operations

        ITG Canada was founded in 2000 and ranks in the Top 10 investment dealers in Canada. ITG Canada provides electronic brokerage services, including ITG Algorithms, ITG Smart Router and MATCH Now, as well as high-touch agency execution and portfolio trading services. In addition, ITG Canada provides Triton, Triton Derivatives, connectivity services, ITG Single Ticket Clearing, ITG Portfolio Optimization System, ITG Smart Trading Analytics, ITG TCA and investment research services. ITG Canada also engages in principal trading activities. ITG Canada's customers primarily consist of asset and investment managers, broker-dealers and hedge funds.

        In July 2007, ITG Canada launched MATCH Now, an alternative marketplace for Canadian-listed equities, operated by ITG's wholly-owned subsidiary, TriAct Canada Marketplace LP ("TriAct"). MATCH Now is a leading anonymous crossing system in Canada, offering continuous execution opportunities within a fully confidential non-displayed book at the mid-point of the Canadian NBBO.

4


Table of Contents

European Operations

        ITG Europe was established as a broker-dealer in 1998. Today, ITG Europe focuses on trading European, Middle Eastern and African equities as well as providing ITG's technologies to its clients. ITG Europe provides electronic brokerage services including ITG Algorithms, ITG Smart Router, and the POSIT suite, as well as high-touch agency execution services, portfolio trading services and commission management services. ITG Europe also provides ITG OMS, Triton, connectivity services, ITG Single Ticket Clearing, ITG TCA, ITG Alpha Capture Reporting, ITG Smart Trading Analytics and ITG Portfolio Fair Value Service.

Asia Pacific Operations

    Australia

        In 1997, ITG launched ITG Australia, an institutional brokerage firm specializing in execution and analytics for Australia and New Zealand equities. ITG provides institutional investors with a range of ITG's products and services including trade execution, trade execution management through Triton, connectivity services and pre- and post-trade analysis through ITG TCA and ITG Smart Trading Analytics. Trade execution services include electronic brokerage products such as ITG Algorithms and the POSIT suite, and high-touch agency trading.

    Hong Kong

        In 2001, ITG formed ITG Hong Kong, an institutional broker-dealer focused on developing and applying ITG's technologies across the Asian markets. Execution services are provided through electronic brokerage products such as ITG Algorithms and the POSIT suite and through an experienced high-touch agency trading services team. Other trading tools provided by ITG Hong Kong include Triton, connectivity services, ITG TCA and ITG Smart Trading Analytics.

    Singapore

        In 2010, ITG Singapore Pte Limited ("ITG Singapore") obtained a Capital Markets Services License from the Monetary Authority of Singapore ("MAS"). ITG Singapore provides institutional investors in Singapore with a range of ITG's products and services including trade execution management through Triton and trading analysis through ITG TCA and ITG Smart Trading Analytics.

Competition

        The financial services industry generally, and the institutional securities brokerage business in which we operate, are extremely competitive, and we expect them to remain so for the foreseeable future. Our full suite of products does not directly compete with a particular firm; however, individual products compete with various firms and consortia:

    Our trading analytics compete with offerings from several sell-side-affiliated and independent companies.

    POSIT competes with various national and regional securities exchanges, ATSs, Electronic Communication Networks, Multilateral Trading Facilities ("MTFs"), and systematic internalizers for trade execution services. These venues have proliferated in recent years.

    Our EMSs, OMS and connectivity services compete with offerings from independent vendors, agency-only firms and other sell-side firms.

    Our algorithmic and smart routing products, as well as our high-touch agency execution and portfolio trading services, compete with agency-only and other sell-side firms.

5


Table of Contents

    Our ITG Investment Research offering competes with the research divisions of large and regional investment banks and brokerages as well as a number of independent research firms.

Regulation

        Certain of our U.S. and non-U.S. subsidiaries are subject to various securities regulations and capital adequacy requirements promulgated by the regulatory and exchange authorities of the countries in which they operate. In the U.S., the SEC is the federal agency responsible for the administration of the federal securities laws, with the regulation of broker-dealers primarily delegated to self-regulatory organizations ("SROs"), principally the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority ("FINRA") as well as other national securities exchanges. In addition to federal and SRO oversight, securities firms are also subject to regulation by state securities administrators in those states in which they conduct business. Furthermore, our non-U.S. subsidiaries are subject to regulation by central banks and regulatory bodies in those jurisdictions where each subsidiary is authorized to do business, as further discussed below. The SROs, central banks and regulatory bodies conduct periodic examinations of our broker-dealer subsidiaries in accordance with the rules they have adopted and amended from time to time.

        ITG's principal regulated subsidiaries are listed below. The principal self-regulator of all our U.S. broker-dealers is FINRA.

    ITG Inc. is a U.S. broker-dealer registered with the SEC, FINRA, The NASDAQ Stock Market ("NASDAQ"), New York Stock Exchange, NYSE Arca, Inc. ("ARCA"), NYSE MKT LLC ("NYSE MKT"), BATS Y-Exchange, Inc. ("BYX"), BATS Z-Exchange, Inc. ("BZX"), Chicago Board Options Exchange ("CBOE"), Chicago Stock Exchange Inc., EDGA Exchange, Inc. ("EDGA"), EDGX Exchange, Inc. ("EDGX"), NASDAQ OMX BX, Inc. ("NASDAQ BX"), NASDAQ OMX PHLX, Inc. ("NASDAQ OMX PHLX"), National Stock Exchange, National Futures Association ("NFA"), Ontario Securities Commission ("OSC"), all 50 states, Puerto Rico and the District of Columbia.

    ITG Derivatives is a U.S. broker-dealer registered with the SEC, FINRA, NYSE MKT, ARCA, BYX, BZX, BOX Options Exchange LLC, EDGA, EDGX, CBOE, C2 Options Exchange Incorporated, International Securities Exchange, NASDAQ, NASDAQ BX, NASDAQ OMX PHLX, Commodities and Futures Trading Commission ("CFTC"), Miami International Securities Exchange, Topaz Exchange LLC, the NFA and 28 states.

    AlterNet is a U.S. broker-dealer registered with the SEC, FINRA, NASDAQ, EDGA, EDGX and 14 states.

    ITG Canada is a Canadian broker-dealer registered as an investment dealer with the Investment Industry Regulatory Organization of Canada ("IIROC"), the OSC, the Autorité Des Marchés Financiers in Quebec, Alberta Securities Commission, British Columbia Securities Commission, Manitoba Securities Commission, New Brunswick Securities Commission, Nova Scotia Securities Commission and Saskatchewan Financial Services Commission. ITG Canada is also registered as a Futures Commission Merchant in Ontario and Manitoba and Derivatives Dealer in Quebec. ITG Canada is a member of the Toronto Stock Exchange ("TSX"), TSX Venture Exchange, the Canadian National Stock Exchange and the Montreal Exchange. TriAct operates MATCH Now, an ATS under National Instrument 21-101, and is registered as an investment dealer with IIROC, the OSC and the Alberta Securities Commission.

    Our European operations include ITG Ventures Limited, ITG Europe and its wholly-owned subsidiary Investment Technology Group Europe Limited ("ITGEL"). ITG Europe and ITGEL are authorized and regulated by the Central Bank of Ireland under the European Communities (Markets in Financial Instruments) Regulations 2007. ITG Europe is a member of the main national European exchanges, including the London Stock Exchange, Deutsche Börse and

6


Table of Contents

      Euronext, as well as most of the European-domiciled MTFs. It also operates the POSIT crossing system in Europe as a MTF under the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive ("MiFID"). ITGEL's London Branch is registered with the Prudential Regulation Authority and the Financial Conduct Authority and ITGEL's Paris branch is registered with the Banque de France.

    ITG Australia is a market participant of the Australian Securities Exchange ("ASX") and Chi-X Australia Limited. It is also a holder of an Australian Financial Services License issued by the Australian Securities and Investments Commission ("ASIC"). ITG Australia's principal regulators are the ASX and ASIC.

    ITG Hong Kong is a participating organization of the Hong Kong Stock Exchange and a holder of a securities dealer's license issued by the Securities and Futures Commission of Hong Kong ("SFC"), with the SFC acting as its principal regulator.

    ITG Singapore is a holder of a Capital Markets Services License from the MAS, with the MAS acting as its principal regulator.

        Broker-dealers are subject to regulations covering all aspects of the securities trading business, including sales methods, trade practices, investment research distribution, use and safekeeping of clients' funds and securities, capital structure, record keeping and conduct of directors, officers and employees. Additional legislation or changes in the interpretation or enforcement of existing laws and rules may directly affect the mode of operation and profitability of broker-dealers. The SEC, SROs, state securities commissions and foreign regulatory authorities may conduct administrative proceedings or commence judicial actions, which can result in censure, fines, the issuance of cease-and-desist orders or the suspension or expulsion of a broker-dealer, its directors, officers or employees. The principal purpose of regulation and discipline of broker-dealers is the protection of investors and the securities markets, rather than the protection of creditors and stockholders of broker-dealers.

        ITG Inc., AlterNet, and ITG Derivatives are required by law to belong to the Securities Investor Protection Corporation ("SIPC"). In the event of a U.S. broker-dealer's insolvency, the SIPC fund provides protection for client accounts up to $500,000 per customer, with a limitation of $250,000 on claims for cash balances. ITG Canada and TriAct are required by Canadian law to belong to the Canadian Investors Protection Fund ("CIPF"). In the event of a Canadian broker-dealer's insolvency, CIPF provides protection for client accounts up to CAD $1 million per customer. ITG Europe and ITGEL are required to be members of the Investor Compensation Protection Schemes which provides compensation to retail investors in the event of certain stated defaults by an investment firm. ITG Hong Kong is regulated by the SFC. The SFC operates the Investor Compensation Fund which provides compensation to retail investors in the event of a default by a regulated financial institution. ITG Australia is obligated to contribute to the ACH Clearing Fund and/or the National Guarantee Fund if and when requested by ASIC. In the past twelve months, no such requests have been made of ITG Australia.

Regulation ATS

        Regulation ATS permits "alternative trading systems" such as POSIT to match orders submitted by buyers and sellers without having to register as a national securities exchange. Accordingly, POSIT is not registered with the SEC as an exchange. We continue to review and monitor POSIT's systems and procedures to ensure compliance with Regulation ATS.

Net Capital Requirement

        ITG Inc., AlterNet and ITG Derivatives are subject to the Uniform Net Capital Rule (Rule 15c3-1) under the Exchange Act, which requires the maintenance of minimum net capital.

7


Table of Contents

        ITG Inc. has elected to use the alternative method permitted by Rule 15c3-1, which requires that ITG Inc. maintain minimum net capital equal to the greater of $1.0 million or 2% of aggregate debit balances arising from customer transactions. AlterNet and ITG Derivatives have elected to use the basic method permitted by Rule 15c3-1, which requires that they maintain minimum net capital equal to the greater of 6 2 / 3 % of aggregate indebtedness or $100,000, and in the case of ITG Derivatives, $1 million, which is due to the fact that ITG Derivatives is a registered Futures Commission Merchant pursuant to CFTC Regulation 1.17.

        For further information on our net capital position, see Note 17, Net Capital Requirement , to the consolidated financial statements.

Research and Product Development

        We devote a significant portion of our resources to the development and improvement of technology-based services. Important aspects of our research and development efforts include enhancements of existing software, the ongoing development of new software and services and investment in technology to enhance our efficiency.

        The amounts expensed for research and development costs for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 are estimated at $40.9 million, $44.6 million and $47.5 million, respectively.

Intellectual Property

        Patents and other proprietary rights are important to our business. We also rely upon trade secrets, know-how, continuing technological innovations, and licensing opportunities to maintain and improve our competitive position.

        We own a portfolio of patents that principally relate to financial services. Patents for individual products extend for varying periods according to the date of patent filing or grant and the legal term of patents in the various countries where patent protection is obtained. We also own and maintain a portfolio of trademarks. The extent and duration of trademark rights are dependent upon national laws and use of the trademarks.

        While we consider our patents and trademarks to be valued assets, we do not believe that our competitive position is heavily dependent on patent or trademark protection or that our operations are dependent upon any single patent or group of related patents.

        It is our practice to enter into confidentiality and intellectual property ownership agreements with our clients, employees, independent contractors and business partners, and to control access to, and distribution of, our intellectual property.

Clients

        For the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, no single client accounted for more than 5% of our consolidated revenue.

Employees

        On December 31, 2013, the Company employed 1,001 staff globally, of whom 716, 83, 100 and 102 staff were employed by the U.S., Canadian, European and Asia Pacific Operations, respectively.

Website and Availability of Public Reports

        Our website can be found at http://www.itg.com . The investor relations sector can be found at investor.itg.com . We are not including the information contained on our website as part of, or incorporating it by reference into, this Annual Report on Form 10-K.

8


Table of Contents

        Our Annual Reports on Form 10-K, Quarterly Reports on Form 10-Q and Current Reports on Form 8-K, together with any amendments to those reports, are available without charge on our website at http://investor.itg.com . We make this information available on our website as soon as reasonably practicable after we electronically file such information with, or furnish it to, the SEC. You may also obtain copies of our reports without charge by writing to: ITG, One Liberty Plaza, 165 Broadway, New York, NY 10006, Attn: Investor Relations.

Item 1A.    Risk Factors

Certain Factors That May Affect Our Financial Condition and Results of Operations

        While our management's long-term expectations are optimistic, we face risks or uncertainties that may affect our financial condition and results of operations. The following conditions, among others, should be considered in evaluating our business and growth outlook.

Decreases in equity trading activity by active fund managers and declining securities prices could harm our business and profitability.

        Declines in the trading activity of active fund managers generally result in lower revenues from our trading solutions, which generate the majority of our revenues globally. In addition, securities' price declines adversely affect our non-North American trading commissions, which are based on the value of transactions. The demand for our trading solutions is directly affected by factors such as economic, regulatory and political conditions that may lead to decreased trading activity and prices in the securities markets in the U.S. and in all of the foreign markets we serve. Over the past several years, global trading activity has declined significantly and may continue to do so. Increased risk aversion brought about by the impact of the financial crisis of 2008, ongoing concerns over sovereign debt levels and increased demand for passive investments such as index funds and exchange-traded funds (ETFs) has resulted in a significant flow of funds out of actively-managed equity funds, thereby curtailing their trading activity, which has weighed heavily on our buy-side trading volumes and the use of our higher value services. While there is a historical correlation between recovering share prices and the flow of money back into equity funds, there is uncertainty as to when a real, sustainable recovery in institutional equity activity will materialize, as well as the extent to which it will recover.

Decreases in our commission rates and other transactional revenues could adversely affect our operating results.

        Commission rates on institutional trading activity have declined historically and we anticipate a continuation of the competitive pricing environment for the foreseeable future. In addition, reduced activity from our active fund manager clients has resulted in a shift in the mix of our business to include an increased portion from higher-turnover lower-rate clients, particularly sell-side firms. A decline in commission rates or revenue capture from future mix shifts or from rate reductions within client segments could materially reduce our margins and harm our financial condition and operating results.

Our fixed costs may result in reduced profitability or losses.

        We incur significant operating and capital expenditures to support our business that do not vary directly, at least in the short term, with fluctuations in executed transaction volumes or revenues. In addition, changes in market practices have required us, and may require us in the future, to invest in additional infrastructure to increase capacity levels without a corresponding increase in revenues. To ensure that we have the capacity to process projected increases in trade orders and executed transaction volumes, we have historically made substantial infrastructure investments in advance of such projected increases, including during periods of low revenues. We have also made substantial investments in our research products to attract additional trade flows from our buy-side clients. In the

9


Table of Contents

event of reductions in trade executions and/or revenues, we may not be able to reduce such expenses quickly and, as a result, we could experience reduced profitability or losses. If the growth in executed volumes does not occur or we are not able to successfully implement and monetize our investments, including by failing to accurately forecast the demand for new products, effectively deploy new products or decommission legacy products, the expenses related to such investments could cause reduced profitability or losses.

A failure in the design, operation or configuration of our technology could adversely affect our profitability and reputation.

        A technological failure or error of one or more of our products or systems, including but not limited to POSIT, our algorithms, smart routers, and order and execution management systems, could result in lost revenues and/or significant market losses. We operate complex trading systems, algorithms and analytical products that may fail to correctly model interacting or conflicting trading objectives, unusual market conditions, available trading venues and other factors, which may cause unintended results. Similarly, the operation and configuration of our systems can be quite complex and departure from standard procedures can result in adverse trading outcomes. Such problems could cause us to incur trading losses, lose clients or experience other reputational harm resulting in lost revenues and profits. Our quality assurance testing cannot test for all potential scenarios or ensure that the technology will function as designed and intended in all cases.

Failure to keep up with rapid changes in technology while continuing to seek to provide leading products and services to our customers could negatively impact our results of operations.

        The institutional brokerage industry is subject to rapid technological change and evolving industry standards. Our customers' demands become greater and more sophisticated as the dissemination of products and information to customers increases. If we are unable to anticipate and respond to the demand for new services, products and technologies, innovate in a timely and cost-effective manner and adapt to technological advancements and changing standards, we may be unable to compete effectively, which could have a material adverse effect on our business. Many of our competitors have significantly greater resources than we do to fund such technological advances. Moreover, the development of technology-based services is a complex and time-consuming process. New products and enhancements to existing products can require long development and testing periods. Budgetary constraints on funding new product initiatives related to our core business or strategic initiatives in the current environment, significant delays in new product releases, failure to meet key deadlines, or significant problems in creating new products could negatively impact our revenues and profits.

Insufficient system capacity, system operating failures, disasters or security breaches could materially harm our reputation, financial position and profitability.

        Our business relies heavily on the computer and communications systems supporting our operations, which must monitor, process and support a large volume of transactions across numerous execution venues in many countries and multiple currencies. As our business expands, we will need to expand our systems to accommodate an increasing volume of transactions across a larger client base and more geographical locations. In addition, certain changes in market practices may require us to invest in infrastructure to increase capacity levels. Unexpectedly high volumes or times of unusual market volatility could cause our systems to operate slowly, decrease output or even fail for periods of time, as could general power or telecommunications failures, natural disasters or other business disruptions. The presence of computer viruses can also cause failure within our systems. If any of our systems do not operate properly, are disabled, breached or attacked by hackers or other disruptive problems, we could incur financial loss, liability to clients, regulatory intervention or reputational damage. System failure, degradation, breach or attack could adversely affect our ability to effectuate transactions and lead our customers to file formal complaints with industry regulatory organizations,

10


Table of Contents

initiate regulatory inquiries or proceedings, file lawsuits against us, trade less frequently through us or cease doing business with us.

        Our corporate headquarters and largest concentration of employees and technology is in the New York metropolitan area. Our other offices are also located in major cities around the globe. If a business system disruption were to occur, especially in New York, for any reason including widespread health emergencies, natural disasters or terrorist activities, and we were unable to execute our disaster recovery plan, it could have a material effect on our business. Moreover, we have varying levels of disaster recovery plan coverage among our non-U.S. subsidiaries.

        Our business relies on the secure storage, processing and transmission of data, including our clients' confidential data, in our internal systems and through our vendor networks and communications infrastructure. Third parties who are able to breach or disrupt our or our vendors' security systems may be able to cause system damage or failures or perform unauthorized trading that could result in significant losses. There is no guarantee that our systems can prevent all unauthorized access or that our third party vendors will be able to secure their networks and systems. If our or one of our vendors' security is breached and unauthorized access is obtained to the confidential information of our clients, it could cause us reputational harm and our clients may then reduce or cease their use of our services, which would adversely impact our results of operations.

        Any system, operational or security failure or breach could result in regulatory or legal claims. We could incur significant costs in defending such regulatory or legal claims, even those without merit. Moreover, such failures could result in the need to remediate issues and repair or expand our networks and systems. Any obligation to expend significant resources to defend claims or repair and expand infrastructure could have an adverse effect on our financial condition and results of operations.

We are dependent on certain third party vendors for key services.

        We depend on a number of third parties to supply elements of our trading systems, computers, market and research data, data centers, FIX connectivity, communication network infrastructure, other equipment and related support and maintenance. We cannot be certain that any of these providers will be willing or able to continue to provide these services in an efficient and cost-effective manner or to meet our evolving needs. Moreover, we are dependent on our communications network providers for interconnectivity with our clients, markets and clearing agents to service our customers and operate effectively. If our vendors fail to meet their obligations, provide poor, inaccurate or untimely service, or we are unable to make alternative arrangements for the supply of these services, we may fail, in turn, to provide our services or to meet our obligations to our customers, and our business, financial condition and our operating results could be materially harmed.

Our securities and clearing business exposes us to material liquidity risk.

        We self-clear equity transactions in the U.S., Hong Kong and Australia. In those markets, we may be required to provide considerable additional capital to regulatory agencies or increase margin deposits with clearing and settlement organizations, such as the National Securities Clearing Corporation or Depository Trust and Clearing Corporation in the U.S., especially during periods of high market volatility. In addition, regulatory agencies may require these clearing and settlement organizations to increase the level of margin deposit requirements. We rely on our excess cash and certain established credit facilities to meet those demands. While we have historically met requests for additional margin deposits, there is no guarantee that our excess cash and our established credit facilities will be sufficient for future needs, particularly if there is an increase in requirements. There is also no guarantee that these established credit facilities will be extended beyond their expiration.

        In addition, each of our broker-dealer subsidiaries worldwide is subject to regulatory capital requirements promulgated by the applicable regulatory and exchange authorities of the countries in which they operate. The failure by any of these subsidiaries to maintain its required regulatory capital

11


Table of Contents

may lead to suspension or revocation of its broker-dealer registration and its suspension or expulsion by its regulatory body. Historically, all regulatory capital needs of our broker-dealers have been provided by cash from operations. However, if cash from operations, together with existing financing facilities are not sufficient, we may not be able to obtain additional financing.

As a clearing member firm in certain jurisdictions we are subject to significant default risk.

        We are required to finance our clients' unsettled positions from time to time and we could be held responsible for the defaults of our clients. Default by our clients may also give rise to our incurring penalties imposed by execution venues, regulatory authorities and settlement systems. Although we regularly review our credit exposure, default risk may arise from events or circumstances that may be difficult to detect or foresee. In addition, concerns about, or a default by, one institution could lead to significant liquidity problems, losses or defaults by other institutions that could in turn adversely affect us.

Our equity trading operations in jurisdictions other than the U.S., Hong Kong and Australia are dependent on their clearing agents and any failures by such clearing agents could materially impact our business and operating results.

        Certain of our international operations are dependent on agents for the clearance and settlement of securities transactions. If our agents fail to properly facilitate the clearance and settlement of our customer trades, we could be subject to financial, legal and regulatory risks and costs that may impact our business and operating results. In addition, it could cause our clients to reduce or cease their trading with us, which would adversely affect our revenues and financial results.

        Moreover, certain of our agreements with clearing agents may be terminated upon short notice. There is no guarantee that we could obtain alternative services in a timely manner and any interruption of the normal course of our trading and clearing operations could have a material impact on our business and results of operations.

Our business exposes us to credit risk that could affect our operating results and profitability.

        We are exposed to credit risk from third parties that owe us money, securities or other obligations, including our customers and trading counterparties. These parties may default on their obligations to us due to bankruptcy, lack of liquidity, operational failure or other reasons, and we could be held responsible for such defaults. In addition, client trading errors which they are unable to cover may cause us to incur financial losses. Volatile securities markets, credit markets and regulatory changes may increase our exposure to our customers' credit profiles, which could adversely affect our financial condition and operating results. While our broker-dealer subsidiaries that are not self-clearing have clearing agreements with their clearing agents who review the credit risk of trading counterparties, we have no assurances that those reviews or our own are adequate to provide sufficient protection from this risk.

We may incur material losses on foreign exchange transactions entered into on behalf of clients and be exposed to material liquidity risk due to counterparty defaults or errors.

        We enable clients to settle cross-border equity transactions in their local currency through the use of foreign exchange contracts. These arrangements typically involve the delivery of securities or cash to a counterparty that is not processed through a central clearing facility in exchange for a simultaneous receipt of cash or securities. We may operate as either a principal or agent in these transactions. As a result, a default by one of our counterparties prior to the settlement of their obligation could materially impact our liquidity and have a material adverse affect on our financial condition and results of operations.

12


Table of Contents

        In addition, we are exposed to operational risk. Employee and technological errors in executing, recording or reporting foreign exchange transactions may result in material losses due to the large size of such transactions and the underlying market risk in correcting such errors.

We incur limited principal trading risk in our Canadian Operations.

        A limited portion of our revenues is derived from principal trading in our Canadian Operations, including arbitrage trading and the net spread on foreign exchange contracts executed to facilitate equity trades by clients in different currencies. As a result of this trading, we may incur losses relating to the purchase or sale of securities for our own account. Although we attempt to close out all of our positions by the end of the day, we bear the risk of market fluctuations and we may incur losses due to changes in the prices of such securities. Any principal gains or losses resulting from these positions could have a disproportionate effect, positive or negative, on our revenues and profits, and could also result in reputational damage.

Our Canadian market making activities expose us to the risk of significant losses.

        ITG Canada is registered as a market maker in a limited number of ETFs and inter-listed stocks. In our role as a market maker, we are required to maintain active bids and offers that may be executed against, resulting in inventory positions that subject us to market risk. There can be no assurance that we will be able to manage such risk successfully or that we will not experience significant losses from such activities.

Our risk management policies and procedures may not be effective and may leave us exposed to unidentified or unexpected risks.

        We seek to monitor and control our risk exposure through a risk and control framework encompassing a variety of separate but complementary financial, credit, operational, technological, compliance and legal reporting systems, internal controls, management review processes and other mechanisms. Our policies, procedures and practices used to identify, monitor and control a variety of risks may fail to be effective. As a result, we face the risk of losses, including, for example, losses resulting from trading errors, customer defaults, fraud and money laundering. Our risk management methods rely on a combination of technical and human controls and supervision that are subject to error and failure.

        Internal control over financial reporting, no matter how well designed, has inherent limitations. Therefore, internal control over financial reporting determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and may not prevent or detect all misstatements. Moreover, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate. As such, we could lose investor confidence in the accuracy and completeness of our financial reports, which may have a material adverse effect on our stock price.

The business in which we operate is extremely competitive worldwide.

        Many of our competitors have substantially greater financial, technical, marketing and other resources than we do, which, among other things, enable them to compete with the services we provide on the basis of price, including lowering prices for certain of our key services to gain business in their higher margin areas, and a willingness to commit their firms' capital to service their clients' trading needs on a principal, rather than on an agency basis. In addition, many of our competitors bundle multiple services as part of their equity trading offering. To the extent we seek to unbundle any of our products or services, we may lose clients which would also result in a loss of revenues and profits. Many of them offer a wider range of services, have broader name recognition, and have larger

13


Table of Contents

customer bases than we do. Some of our competitors have long-standing, well-established relationships with their clients, and also hold dominant positions in their trading markets. Moreover, new entrants may enter the market with alternative methods of providing trade execution and related services, and existing competitors often launch new initiatives. Many of our competitors have undertaken measures to link various electronic trading systems and platforms in an effort to attract order flow to off-exchange venues and increase internal executions.

        Although we believe that our products and services have established certain competitive advantages, our ability to maintain these advantages will require continued enhancements to our products, investment in the development of our services, additional marketing activities and enhanced customer support services. There can be no assurance that we will have sufficient resources to continue to make this investment, that our competitors will not devote significantly more resources to competing services or that we will otherwise be successful in maintaining our market position. If competitors offer superior services, our market share would be affected and this would adversely impact our business and results of operations.

We face certain challenges and risks to our international business that may adversely affect our strategy.

        Global client coverage is a key component of our business plan. We have invested significant resources in our foreign operations and the globalization of our products and services. However, there are certain risks inherent in the operation of our business outside of the U.S., including, but not limited to, additional regulatory capital requirements, less developed technology and infrastructure, and higher costs for infrastructure. These risks may limit our ability to provide services to clients in certain markets. There also may be difficult processes for obtaining regulatory approvals. This could result in delays in our global business plans, difficulties in staffing foreign operations and adapting our products to foreign markets, practices and languages, exchange rate risks and the need to meet foreign regulatory requirements. Each of these could force us to alter our operational plans and this may adversely impact our strategy.

We incur risks related to our international business due to currency exchange rate fluctuations that could impact our financial results and financial position.

        A significant amount of our business is conducted in foreign currencies. Conducting business in currencies other than the U.S. Dollar subjects us to exchange rate fluctuations. These fluctuations can materially impact our financial results.

We are dependent on certain major customers and a decline in their use of our services could materially impact our revenues.

        Our customers may discontinue their use of our trading services at any time. The loss of any significant customer could have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

        The chart below sets forth our dependence on our three largest clients individually, as well as on our ten largest clients in the aggregate, expressed as a percentage of total revenues:

 
  % of Total Consolidated Revenue  
 
  2013   2012   2011  

Largest customer

    2.4 %   2.4 %   2.9 %

Second largest customer

    2.1 %   2.1 %   2.0 %

Third largest customer

    1.8 %   1.9 %   1.7 %

Ten largest customers

    16.8 %   14.9 %   15.4 %

14


Table of Contents

The securities markets and the brokerage industry in which we operate globally are subject to extensive, evolving regulation that could materially impact our business.

        We currently operate POSIT in the U.S. under Regulation ATS, our European operations are subject to MiFID and we must comply with the requirements of the U.S. PATRIOT Act and its foreign equivalents for monitoring our customers and suspicious transactions. Moreover, most aspects of our broker-dealer operations are highly regulated, such as sales and reporting practices, operational compliance, capital requirements and licensure of employees. Accordingly, we face the risk of significant intervention by regulatory authorities in all jurisdictions in which we conduct business, such as the SEC and FINRA in the U.S. and their equivalents in other countries. As we expand our business, we may be exposed to increased and different types of regulatory requirements.

        We are subject to, and in the future, we may become subject to new regulations or changes in the interpretation or enforcement of existing regulations, which may adversely affect our business. Also, regulatory changes that impact how our customers conduct their business may impact our business and results of operations. The current U.S. administration and other members of the U.S. federal government and other governments outside of the United States have implemented new regulatory requirements for the financial services industry and have indicated that there may be more to come. These newly implemented rules could cause us to expend more significant compliance, business and technology resources, and create additional regulatory exposure. In addition, we cannot predict the extent to which any future regulatory changes would affect our business.

        Securities Exchange Act Rule 13h-1 ("Large Trader Rule") partially went into effect on November 30, 2012 and is scheduled for full implementation on November 1, 2015. The Large Trader Rule imposes new filing requirements on market participants that conduct substantial trading activity in exchange-listed securities, and new record keeping, reporting, and monitoring requirements on broker-dealers. Furthermore, in June 2012, the SEC approved the Plan to Address Extraordinary Market Volatility (Limit Up—Limit Down Plan) and changes to the Market Wide Circuit Breakers that were proposed by national securities exchanges and FINRA in an effort to reduce volatility in the U.S. equity markets following the May 6, 2010 Flash Crash. The Limit Up—Limit Down Plan and Market Wide Circuit Breakers both commenced on April 8, 2013 and the Limit Up—Limit Down Plan was fully implemented on February 24, 2014. Moreover, the SEC adopted the Consolidated Audit Trail rule ("CAT") in July 2012, which requires SROs to establish an order trail reporting system that would enable regulators to track, within 24 hours of the trade date, information related to trading orders received and executed across the securities markets. Although approved, the reporting requirements under CAT have not yet taken effect.

        As a result of certain trading incidents over the last few years, in March 2013, the SEC proposed Regulation Systems Compliance and Integrity ("Regulation SCI") following industry roundtable discussions. This proposed rule would require SCI entities (i.e., exchanges, SROs, clearing and settlement agencies, and certain ATSs—including POSIT) to establish extensive policies, procedures, and/or controls to ensure the capacity, stability, integrity, and resiliency of their trading and regulatory reporting systems. Regulation SCI, among other things, would also require 30 days advanced notice of material changes to an SCI entity's systems, prompt reporting of systems issues, the establishment of geographically diverse backup capabilities, and the provision of real-time systems access to the SEC.

        In addition, new regulatory obligations have been proposed, adopted or implemented pertaining to markets outside of the United States which may have a material impact upon our business model.

    In Europe, these include MiFID II which is now agreed in principle. In particular, under MiFID II, multilateral trading facilities ("MTF")—the European equivalent to an SEC registered ATS—that trade in dark cash equity orders would be required to cross such orders at the midpoint of the primary venue (where displayed orders in those securities are traded) and adhere to volume limits on dark trading. These limits would be set at 4% of all the displayed

15


Table of Contents

      and dark regulated venue trading volume for any individual dark venue and 8% of such volume for all dark trading venues in the aggregate. The calculations would be performed at an individual stock level over a 12 month rolling period. In the event that the relevant limit is breached, the crossing of that particular stock in the individual dark trading venue or in all such venues (as applicable depending on whether the 4% or 8% threshold is breached) would cease for the following 6 months. MiFID II provides an exception from these requirements for large sized orders, which may be crossed at any price point and without regard to the above mentioned volume limits.

      In addition, a financial transaction tax (the "European FTT") is being considered which would include at least nine of the twenty-eight members of the European Union. In addition to the impact that such tax would have on the affected securities and signatory countries, the current proposals would include an extra-territorial scope that may impact the trading activities of entities which are and trade entirely outside the European FTT zone.

    With regard to Canada, in October 2013, the IIROC and the Canadian Securities Administrators implemented regulations that require certain minimum price improvement in dark liquidity pools.

    Similarly, in Australia, new regulations requiring dark liquidity pools to offer meaningful price improvement over displayed market prices were implemented in May 2013. Accordingly, Australian dark pool operators are now required to provide executions at the midpoint of the current NBBO for non-displayed orders. In addition, regulations related to dark liquidity pools in Hong Kong are anticipated in 2014. Moreover, in Hong Kong, the Securities and Futures Commission ("SFC") implemented new direct market access ("DMA") and algorithmic trading requirements on January 1, 2014. These new regulations require broker-dealers to test their DMA systems, algorithms, and risk management controls and provide information and training to clients concerning the use of such trading systems on an annual basis.

        Compliance with certain of these adopted laws, rules or regulations of the various jurisdictions in which we operate could result in the loss of revenue and has caused us, and could cause us, to incur significant costs. In addition, if any new regulatory obligations are implemented, ITG and other market participants could incur significant costs to establish the appropriate processes, systems, and/or controls.

Increased regulatory scrutiny may lead to increased costs for compliance and the potential for monetary penalties, negatively impacting our profitability.

        In the recent past, there has been increased regulatory scrutiny by regulators in the areas of trading risk management controls and undisclosed trading practices, resulting in an increase in regulatory investigations and reviews. Such enhanced scrutiny could cause ITG and other market participants to incur significant costs in light of the legal and compliance resources needed to respond to such investigations and reviews, in addition to the potential for monetary penalties arising from such investigations and reviews.

If we are unable to obtain sources of data to create our differentiated research product, we could see a reduction in revenues and profitability.

        Our investment research product leverages data derived from, among other sources, industry data providers and web harvesting technology. If there is a limitation on the availability of data from these sources or if new regulations or laws restrict their use in investment research products, the quality of our research product could be negatively impacted along with the amount of revenue and profitability we derive from this offering.

16


Table of Contents

We could be subject to challenges by U.S. and foreign tax authorities that could result in additional taxes and penalties.

        We are subject to income and other taxes in each jurisdiction in which we operate. We are also subject to reviews and audits by U.S. and foreign tax authorities. Our determination of our tax obligations in each jurisdiction requires us and our advisers to make judgment calls and estimations. Our determination may differ, even materially, from the judgment of the tax authorities and therefore cause us to incur additional taxes and related interest and penalties, which could impact our financial results.

Inability to protect our intellectual property may result in increased competition, loss of business or other negative results on our business and financial condition.

        Our success is dependent, in part, upon our proprietary intellectual property. We generally rely upon patents, copyrights, trademarks and trade secrets to establish and protect our rights in our proprietary technology, methods, products and services. We cannot assure that any of the rights granted under any patent, copyright or trademark that we may obtain will protect our competitive advantages. A third party may still try to challenge, invalidate or circumvent the protective mechanisms that we select. In addition, the laws of some foreign countries do not protect our proprietary rights to the same extent as the laws of the U.S., so we cannot predict our ability to properly protect our intellectual property in those jurisdictions. Third parties operating in jurisdictions in which we have not filed for protection may obtain rights in intellectual property that we have protected in the U.S. and other jurisdictions or may be able to misappropriate our intellectual property with impunity.

        There can be no assurance that we will be able to protect our proprietary intellectual property from improper disclosure or use, or that others will not develop technologies that are similar or superior to our technology without violating our intellectual property. Violations of our intellectual property by third parties could have an adverse effect on our competitiveness and business. In addition, the cost of seeking to enforce our intellectual property rights could have an adverse effect on our financial results.

If we were to unknowingly infringe third party intellectual property or be accused of doing so without merit, we would bear significant costs of defense and litigation, which could impact our financial results.

        In the past several years, there has been a proliferation of patents applicable to the technology and financial services industries. Under current law, U.S. patent applications remain secret for 18 months and may, depending on how they are prosecuted, remain secret until the issuance of a patent. In light of these factors, it is not always possible to determine in advance whether any of our products or services may infringe the present or future patent rights of others. From time to time, we may receive notices from others of claims or potential claims of intellectual property infringement or we may be called upon to defend our products, customers, vendees or licensees against such third party claims. Responding to these kinds of claims, regardless of merit, could consume valuable time and result in costly litigation that could have a material adverse effect on us. Such claims could also result in our entering into royalty or licensing agreements with the third parties claiming infringement on terms that could have a material impact on our profitability.

Financial and operational problems with our acquisitions and strategic initiatives could have a material impact on our results of operation.

        Over the last several years, we have undertaken several strategic acquisitions, including the acquisitions of Majestic Research Corp. and Ross Smith Energy Group, Ltd. (together now ITG Investment Research), as well as various organic strategic initiatives. We may elect to pursue strategic acquisitions and strategic initiatives in the future. Acquisitions entail numerous risks, including but not limited to difficulties in valuing the acquired businesses, combining personnel and firm cultures,

17


Table of Contents

integrating acquired products, services and operations, achieving anticipated synergies that were inherent in our valuation assumptions, the assumption of unknown material liabilities of acquired companies and the potential loss of key clients or employees of acquired companies. Similarly, strategic initiatives may be important to our business prospects and we may not be able to successfully execute such initiatives. In either case, we may have clients with whom we have established trading relationships that seek to negatively bundle our products or services without increasing the amount of revenue they pay us resulting in lost revenues and profits. If we are unable to successfully complete acquisitions and integrate the acquired businesses, suffer a material loss due to an acquired business or fail to execute strategic initiatives, we may not achieve appropriate levels of return on these significant investments, which may have a material effect on our operating results.

Our business could be adversely affected by our inability to attract and retain talented employees, including sales, technology and development professionals.

        Our business operations require highly specialized knowledge of the financial industry and of technological innovation as it applies to the financial industry. If we are unable to hire or retain the services of talented management, sales, research, technology and development professionals, we would be at a competitive disadvantage. In addition, recruitment and retention of qualified staff could result in substantial additional costs.

Misconduct and errors of our employees could cause us reputational and financial harm.

        Employee errors in recording or executing transactions for customers can cause us to enter into transactions that customers may disavow and refuse to settle. These transactions expose us to risk of loss, which can be material, until we detect the errors in question and unwind or reverse the transactions. As with any unsettled transaction, adverse movements in the prices of the securities involved in these transactions before we unwind or reverse them can increase this risk. We may incur losses as a result of these transactions that could materially impact our financial results.

        In addition to trading errors, other employee errors or misconduct could subject us to financial losses or regulatory sanctions and seriously harm our reputation. It is not always possible to prevent employee errors or misconduct and the precautions we take to prevent and detect this activity may not be effective in all cases. Misconduct by our employees could include hiding unauthorized activities from us, improper or unauthorized activities on behalf of customers or improper use of confidential information. Such misconduct could result in losses, litigation or other material adverse effects on the Company.

Our inability to effectively manage any management structure changes could create uncertainty regarding our ability to execute our future business plans.

        We continue to review our businesses in each region to measure our performance by product or service offering. Our inability to effectively manage any management structure changes related to this undertaking could challenge our ability to execute our business plans which could materially impact our financial results.

Item 1B.    Unresolved Staff Comments

        None

18


Table of Contents


Item 2.    Properties

U.S.

        Our principal offices are located at One Liberty Plaza, in New York, New York, where we occupy approximately 132,000 square feet of office space pursuant to a lease agreement expiring in January 2029.

        We maintain a facility in Los Angeles, California where we occupy approximately 54,000 square feet of office space pursuant to a lease agreement expiring in December 2016. This facility is used primarily for technology research and development and support services.

        We have a regional office in Boston, Massachusetts where we occupy approximately 54,000 square feet of office space pursuant to a lease expiring in May 2021.

        We also have additional regional offices in Chicago, Illinois where we occupy approximately 10,300 square feet pursuant to a lease agreement expiring in October 2015, and in San Francisco, California where we occupy approximately 3,900 square feet pursuant to a lease agreement expiring in June 2018.

Canada

        ITG Canada has an office in Toronto where we occupy approximately 19,900 square feet of office space pursuant to a lease expiring in December 2016. We also have an office in Calgary where we occupy approximately 7,600 square feet pursuant to a lease expiring in March 2015.

Europe

        ITG Europe has offices in Dublin and London where we occupy approximately 6,200 and 12,200 square feet of office space, respectively. The Dublin space is leased pursuant to an agreement that expires in November 2017, and the London space is leased pursuant to an agreement that expires in July 2018. ITG Europe also leases office space for its regional office in Paris, France.

Asia Pacific

        ITG Australia has offices in Melbourne and Sydney, where we occupy approximately 5,600 and 3,400 square feet of office space, respectively, pursuant to leases expiring in February 2016 and June 2017.

        ITG Hong Kong occupies approximately 7,500 square feet of office space in Hong Kong pursuant to a lease that expires in September 2015. We also lease space for our regional office in Singapore.

Item 3.    Legal Proceedings

        We are not a party to any pending legal proceedings other than claims and lawsuits arising in the ordinary course of business. In addition, our broker-dealers are regularly involved in reviews, inquiries, examinations, investigations and proceedings by government agencies and self-regulatory organizations regarding our business, which may result in judgments, settlements, fines, penalties, injunctions or other relief. Although there can be no assurances, at this time, the Company believes, based on information currently available, that the outcome of any such proceeding, review, inquiry, examination and investigation will not have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial position or results of operations.

Item 4.    Mine Safety Disclosures

        Not applicable

19


Table of Contents


PART II

Item 5.    Market for Registrant's Common Equity, Related Stockholder Matters and Issuer Purchases of Equity Securities

Common Stock Data

        Our common stock trades on the NYSE under the symbol "ITG".

        The following table sets forth, for the periods indicated, the range of the intra-day high and low sales prices of our common stock as reported on the NYSE.

 
  High   Low  

2012:

             

First Quarter

    12.36     10.26  

Second Quarter

    11.95     8.27  

Third Quarter

    9.46     7.43  

Fourth Quarter

    9.82     7.75  

2013:

   
 
   
 
 

First Quarter

    12.81     9.12  

Second Quarter

    14.64     9.82  

Third Quarter

    17.89     14.07  

Fourth Quarter

    20.87     14.66  

        On February 24, 2014, the closing price per share for our common stock as reported on the NYSE was $17.16. On February 24, 2014, we believe that our common stock was held by approximately 6,279 stockholders of record or through nominees in street name accounts with brokers.

        In October 2011, our Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of 4.0 million shares. In May 2013, our Board of Directors authorized the repurchase of an additional 4.0 million shares. Neither of these authorizations has an expiration date. As of December 31, 2013, there were 3.5 million shares remaining available for repurchase under ITG's stock repurchase program. The specific timing and amount of repurchases will vary based on market conditions and other factors.

        During 2013, the Company repurchased approximately 2.4 million shares of our common stock at a cost of approximately $32.7 million, which was funded from our available cash resources. Of these shares, approximately 2.0 million were purchased under our Board of Directors' authorization for a total cost of $28.2 million (average cost of $14.05 per share). An additional 0.4 million shares ($4.5 million) pertained solely to the satisfaction of minimum statutory withholding tax upon the net settlement of equity awards.

        The following table sets forth our stock repurchase activity during 2013, including the total number of shares purchased, the average price paid per share, the number of shares repurchased as part of a publicly announced plan or program, and the number of shares yet to be purchased under the plan or program.

20


Table of Contents


ISSUER PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES

Period
  Total Number of
Shares (or Units)
Repurchased
(a)
  Average
Price Paid per
Share (or Unit)
  Total Number of
Shares (or Units)
Repurchased as Part of
Publicly Announced
Plans or Programs
  Maximum Number
of Shares (or Units)
that May Yet
Be Purchased
Under the Plans or
Programs
 

From: January 1, 2013

                         

To: January 31, 2013

                1,452,640  

From: February 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: February 28, 2013

    640,978     11.92     348,100     1,104,540  

From: March 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: March 31, 2013

    400,000     12.19     400,000     704,540  

From: April 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: April 30, 2013

                704,540  

From: May 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: May 31, 2013

    430,000     12.94     430,000     4,274,500  

From: June 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: June 30, 2013

    248,945     13.96     245,000     4,029,540  

From: July 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: July 31, 2013

    818     14.87         4,029,540  

From: August 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: August 31, 2013

    70,418     15.86     64,922     3,964,618  

From: September 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: September 30, 2013

    305,078     16.49     305,078     3,659,540  

From: October 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: October 31, 2013

    37,146     16.15         3,659,540  

From: November 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: November 30, 2013

    6,502     17.43         3,659,540  

From: December 1, 2013

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

To: December 31, 2013

    217,366     19.65     212,100     3,447,400  
                     

Total

    2,357,251     13.87     2,005,200        
                     
                     

(a)
This column includes the acquisition of 352,051 shares of common stock from employees in order to satisfy minimum statutory withholding tax requirements upon settlement of equity awards.

        We have not paid a cash dividend to stockholders during any period of time covered by this report. Our current policy, which is reviewed continually, is to retain earnings to finance the operations and expansion of our businesses and to return capital to stockholders through repurchases. As a result, we are not currently paying cash dividends on common stock.

21


Table of Contents

Performance Graph

        The following line graph compares the total cumulative stockholder return on our common stock against the cumulative total return of the Russell 2000 index and the mean of the NASDAQ Other Finance Index and the AMEX Securities Broker/Dealer Index, for the five-year period ended December 31, 2013.

GRAPHIC

22


Table of Contents

Item 6.    Selected Financial Data

        The selected Consolidated Statements of Income data and the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition data presented below for each of the years in the five-year period ended December 31, 2013, are derived from our consolidated financial statements. Such selected financial data should be read in connection with the consolidated financial statements contained in this report.

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
 
  2013   2012   2011   2010   2009  
Consolidated Statements of Operations Data:
($ in thousands, except per share amounts)
   
   
   
   
   
 

Total revenues

  $ 530,801   $ 504,436   $ 572,037   $ 570,754   $ 633,069  

Total expenses

    487,746     774,891     778,665     521,421     556,618  
                       

Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)

    43,055     (270,455 )   (206,628 )   49,333     76,451  

Income tax expense (benefit)

    11,970     (22,596 )   (26,839 )   25,353     33,617  
                       

Net income (loss)

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 ) $ 23,980   $ 42,834  

Basic earnings (loss) per share

  $ 0.84   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 ) $ 0.56   $ 0.98  
                       
                       

Diluted earnings (loss) per share

  $ 0.82   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 ) $ 0.55   $ 0.97  
                       
                       

Basic weighted average number of common shares outstanding (in millions)

    36.8     38.4     40.7     42.8     43.5  

Diluted weighted average number of common shares outstanding (in millions)

    38.1     38.4     40.7     43.5     44.0  

Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition Data:
($ in thousands)

 

 


 

 


 

 


 

 


 

 


 

Total assets

  $ 2,209,887   $ 2,196,759   $ 2,178,069   $ 2,530,853   $ 1,703,103  

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 261,897   $ 245,875   $ 284,188   $ 317,010   $ 330,879  

Short-term bank loans

  $ 73,539   $ 22,154   $ 1,606   $   $  

Term debt

  $ 30,332   $ 19,272   $ 23,997   $   $ 46,900  

Total stockholders' equity

  $ 417,432   $ 409,770   $ 671,114   $ 870,068   $ 867,700  

Item 7.    Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

        The following discussion and analysis should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements, including the notes thereto.

Overview

        ITG is an independent execution and research broker that partners with global portfolio managers and traders to provide innovative financial technology and unique data-driven insights throughout the investment process. From investment decision through settlement, ITG helps clients understand market trends, improve performance, mitigate risk and navigate increasingly complex markets. A leader in electronic trading since launching the POSIT crossing network in 1987, ITG takes a consultative approach in delivering the highest quality institutional liquidity, execution services, analytical tools and proprietary research. ITG is headquartered in New York with offices in North America, Europe and the Asia Pacific region.

        Our business is organized into four reportable operating segments: U.S. Operations, Canadian Operations, European Operations and Asia Pacific Operations (see Note 22, Segment Reporting, to the

23


Table of Contents

consolidated financial statements). Our four operating segments provide the following types of products and services:

    Electronic Brokerage—includes self-directed trading using algorithms, smart routing and matching through POSIT in cash equities (including single stocks and portfolio lists), futures and options

    Research, Sales and Trading—includes (a) differentiated, unbiased, data-driven equity research through the use of innovative data mining and analysis, as well as detailed analysis of energy asset plays, and (b) portfolio trading and high-touch trading desks providing execution expertise and trading ideas based on investment research

    Platforms—includes trade order and execution management software applications in addition to network connectivity

    Analytics—includes (a) tools enabling portfolio managers and traders to improve pre-trade and real-time execution performance, (b) portfolio construction and optimization decisions and (c) securities valuation

    Sources of Revenues

        Revenues from our products and services are generated from commissions and fees, recurring (subscriptions) and other sources.

        Commissions and fees are derived primarily from (i) commissions charged for trade execution services (including those to compensate for research services), (ii) income generated on net executions, whereby equity orders are filled at different prices within or at the National Best Bid and Offer ("NBBO") and (iii) commission sharing arrangements between ITG Net (our private value-added FIX-based financial electronic communications network) and third-party brokers and alternative trading systems ("ATSs") whose trading products are made available to our clients on our order management system ("OMS") and execution management system ("EMS") applications in addition to commission sharing arrangements for our ITG Single Ticket Clearing Service. Because commissions are earned on a per-transaction basis, such revenues fluctuate from period to period depending on (a) the volume of securities traded through our services in the U.S. and Canada, (b) the contract value of securities traded in Europe and the Asia Pacific region and (c) our commission rates. Certain factors that affect our volumes and contract values traded include: (i) macro trends in the global equities markets that affect overall institutional equity trading activity, (ii) competitive pressure, including pricing, created by a proliferation of electronic execution competitors and (iii) potential changes in market structure in the U.S. and other regions. In addition to share volume, revenues from net executions are also impacted by the width of spreads within the NBBO. Trade orders are delivered to us from our OMS and EMS products and other vendors' products, direct computer-to-computer links to customers through ITG Net and third-party networks and phone orders from our customers.

        Recurring revenues are derived from the following primary sources: (i) connectivity fees generated through ITG Net for the ability of the sell-side to receive orders from, and send indications of interest to, the buy-side, (ii) software and analytical products and services, (iii) maintenance and customer technical support for our OMS and (iv) subscription revenue generated from providing investment research.

        Other revenues include: (i) income from principal trading in Canada, including arbitrage trading, (ii) the net spread on foreign exchange transactions executed to facilitate equity trades by clients in different currencies, (iii) the net interest spread earned on securities borrowed and loaned matched book transactions, (iv) non-recurring consulting services, such as one-time implementation and customer training related activities, (v) investment and interest income, (vi) interest income on securities borrowed in connection with customers' settlement activities and (vii) market gains/losses

24


Table of Contents

resulting from temporary positions in securities assumed in the normal course of our agency trading business (including client errors and accommodations).

    Expenses

        Compensation and employee benefits, our largest expense, consists of salaries and wages, incentive compensation, including cash and deferred share-based awards, as well as employee benefits and taxes. Incentive compensation fluctuates based on revenues, profitability and other measures, taking into account the landscape for key talent. Incentive compensation includes a combination of cash and deferred share-based awards. Only the cash portion, which represents a lesser portion of our total compensation costs, is expensed in the current period. As a result, our ratio of compensation expense to revenues may fluctuate from period-to-period based on revenue levels.

        Transaction processing expense consists of costs to access various third-party execution destinations and to process, clear and settle transactions. These costs tend to fluctuate with share and trade volumes, the mix of trade execution services used by clients and the rates charged by third parties.

        Occupancy and equipment expense consists primarily of rent and utilities related to leased premises, office equipment and depreciation and amortization of fixed assets and leasehold improvements.

        Telecommunications and data processing expenses primarily consist of costs for obtaining market data, telecommunications services and systems maintenance.

        Other general and administrative expenses primarily include software amortization, consulting, business development, professional fees and intangible amortization.

        Interest expense consists primarily of costs associated with outstanding debt and credit facilities.

Non-GAAP Financial Measures

        To supplement our financial information presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP, management uses certain "non-GAAP financial measures" as such term is defined in SEC Regulation G, to clarify and enhance understanding of past performance and prospects for the future. Generally, a non-GAAP financial measure is a numerical measure of a company's operating performance, financial position or cash flows that excludes or includes amounts that are included in, or excluded from, the most directly comparable measure calculated and presented in accordance with U.S. GAAP. For example, non-GAAP measures may exclude the impact of certain unique and/or non-recurring items such as acquisitions, divestitures, restructuring charges, large write-offs or items outside of management's control. Management believes that the following non-GAAP financial measures described below provide investors and analysts useful insight into our financial position and operating performance.

        Adjusted expenses and adjusted net income together with related per share amounts are non-GAAP performance measures that we believe are useful to assist investors in gaining an understanding of the trends and operating results for our core business. These measures should be viewed in addition to, and not in lieu of, results reported under U.S. GAAP.

25


Table of Contents

        Reconciliations of adjusted expenses and adjusted net income to expenses and net income (loss) and related per share amounts as determined in accordance with U.S. GAAP for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 are provided below.

 
   
   
  Non-U.S.  
 
  ITG Consolidated    
 
Year Ended December 31, 2013:
  U.S.   Canada   Europe   Asia Pacific  

U.S. GAAP expenses

  $ 487,746   $ 302,349   $ 63,553   $ 73,686   $ 48,158  

Less:

                               

Restructuring charges (1)

    75     1,264     348     (1,537 )    

Duplicate rent expense (2)

    (2,568 )   (2,568 )            

Office move (3)

    (3,910 )   (3,910 )            
                       

Adjusted expenses

  $ 481,343   $ 297,135   $ 63,901   $ 72,149   $ 48,158  
                       
                       

U.S. income tax expense

  $ 11,970                          

Net effect of adjustments (1)

    405                          
                               

Adjusted income tax expense

  $ 12,375                          
                               
                               

U.S. GAAP net income

  $ 31,085                          

Net effect of adjustments

    5,998                          
                               

Adjusted net income

  $ 37,083                          
                               
                               

U.S. GAAP diluted loss per share

  $ 0.82                          

Net effect of adjustments

    0.15                          
                               

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

  $ 0.97                          
                               
                               

 

 
   
   
  Non-U.S.  
 
  ITG Consolidated    
 
Year Ended December 31, 2012:
  U.S.   Canada   Europe   Asia Pacific  

U.S. GAAP expenses

  $ 774,891   $ 569,480   $ 66,516   $ 91,616   $ 47,279  

Less:

                               

Goodwill and other asset impairment charge (4)

    274,285     245,103         28,481     701  

Restructuring charges (1)

    9,499     6,798     1,145     615     941  

Duplicate rent expense (2)

    1,378     1,378              
                       

Adjusted expenses

  $ 489,729   $ 316,201   $ 65,371   $ 62,520   $ 45,637  
                       
                       

U.S. GAAP net loss

  $ (247,859 )                        

Net effect of adjustments

    256,034                          
                               

Adjusted net income

  $ 8,175                          
                               
                               

U.S. GAAP diluted loss per share

  $ (6.45 )                        

Net effect of adjustments

    6.66                          
                               

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

  $ 0.21                          
                               
                               

26


Table of Contents


 
   
   
  Non-U.S.  
 
  ITG Consolidated    
 
Year Ended December 31, 2011:
  U.S.   Canada   Europe   Asia Pacific  

U.S. GAAP expenses

  $ 778,665   $ 597,858   $ 65,515   $ 68,407   $ 46,885  

Less:

                               

Goodwill and other asset impairment charge (4)

    229,317     229,317              

Restructuring charges (1)

    24,432     22,471     685     962     314  

Acquisition-related costs (5)

    2,523     2,523              
                       

Adjusted expenses

  $ 522,393   $ 343,547   $ 64,830   $ 67,445   $ 46,571  
                       
                       

U.S. GAAP net loss

  $ (179,789 )                        

Net effect of adjustments

    208,375                          
                               

Adjusted net income

  $ 28,586                          
                               
                               

U.S. GAAP diluted loss per share

  $ (4.42 )                        

Net effect of adjustments

    5.11                          
                               

Adjusted diluted earnings per share

  $ 0.69                          
                               
                               

(1)
In the second quarter of 2013, we incurred a $1.6 million charge to implement a restructuring plan to close our technology research and development facility in Israel and migrate that function to an outsourced-service-provider model effective January 1, 2014. This plan primarily focused on reducing costs by limiting our geographic footprint while maintaining the necessary technological expertise via a consulting arrangement. This restructuring plan triggered the recognition of a tax charge of $1.6 million in the second quarter of 2013 associated with the anticipated withdrawal of capital from Israel. We also reduced previously-recorded 2012 and 2011 restructuring accruals of $1.6 million to reflect the sub-lease of previously-vacated office space and certain legal and other employee-related charges deemed unnecessary. During the fourth quarter of 2012, we incurred a $9.5 million charge to implement a restructuring plan to reduce operating costs by reducing workforce, market data and other general and administrative costs across our businesses. The charge consisted entirely of employee separation costs. In 2011, we implemented a restructuring plan to improve margins and enhance shareholder returns primarily focused on reducing employment, consulting and infrastructure costs. The 2011 cost reduction plan resulted in a restructuring charge totaling $24.4 million, including $17.7 million recorded in the second quarter of 2011 and $6.8 million recorded in the fourth quarter of 2011. These costs included employee separation and related costs of $19.2 million and lease consolidation costs of $5.2 million.

(2)
During the fourth quarter of 2012, we began to build out and ready our new lower Manhattan headquarters while continuing to occupy our then-existing headquarters in midtown Manhattan and as a result incurred duplicate rent charges through June 2013.

(3)
In the second quarter of 2013, we moved into our new headquarters and incurred a non-operating charge, which included a reserve for the remaining lease obligation for the previous midtown Manhattan headquarters.

(4)
In the second quarter of 2011, goodwill with a carrying value of $470.1 million in the U.S. Operations reporting segment was deemed impaired and its fair value was determined to be $245.1 million, resulting in an impairment charge of $225.0 million. In the second quarter of 2012, the remaining balance in the U.S. Operations and Europe Operations reporting segments of $274.3 million was deemed impaired and its fair value was determined to be zero, resulting in a full impairment charge. During the fourth quarter of 2011, we determined that the carrying value of our investment in Disclosure Insight, Inc. was fully impaired, resulting in a write-off of $4.3 million.

27


Table of Contents

(5)
During the second quarter of 2011, we acquired Ross Smith Energy Group Ltd., a Calgary-based independent provider of research on the oil and gas industry. In connection with the acquisition, we incurred acquisition-related costs, including legal fees, contract settlement costs and other professional fees.

Executive Summary for the Year Ended December 31, 2013

Consolidated Overview

        Our profitability in 2013 improved sharply over 2012 as we realized the benefits of targeted investments in our international capabilities and we improved our operating efficiency through a more detailed focus on our cost structure. This occurred against the backdrop of a mixed global trading environment. While market-wide trading activity was generally higher across major European and Asia Pacific markets compared to 2012, market volumes in North America were lower.

        The investments we made in our infrastructure and in our product capabilities, including global POSIT Alert, helped drive record European revenues and profitability in 2013. Our growth in Europe significantly outpaced the growth in market-wide trading. As of the end of 2013, POSIT was the third largest dark pool in Europe representing more than 12% of total European dark trading, up from less than 5% in early 2011.

        Conversely, business conditions in North America were far from optimal as cash equity volumes in the U.S. were lower for a fourth consecutive year. While there has been some redirection of fixed income assets into international equity funds, to date we have not yet seen the large scale rotation out of fixed income investments into domestic equities that would be expected in an environment where equity valuations attained numerous record highs. Domestic equity funds saw net inflows of $23 billion in 2013 (according to the Investment Company Institute), capturing a small share of the $83 billion in net outflows from fixed income funds and reversing little of the historic net outflows of $156 billion in 2012. In spite of this, our U.S. results improved significantly over 2012 due to a sharper focus on operating efficiency.

        On a U.S. GAAP basis, our net income for 2013 was $31.1 million or $0.82 per diluted share compared to a net loss of $247.9 million, or ($6.45) per diluted share for 2012. Adjusted net income in 2013 (see Non-GAAP financial measures ) was up more than 350% to $37.1 million, or $0.97 per diluted share. Gains in Europe and Asia Pacific drove consolidated revenues to $530.8 million, or 5% over 2012. Our focus on managing costs enabled us to reduce overall expenses even as we incurred incremental variable costs associated with our revenue growth. Expenses on a U.S. GAAP and adjusted basis were down 37% and 2%, respectively compared to 2012.

        Given the continued uncertainty surrounding the equity trading environment in the foreseeable future, we will continue to look for efficiencies in our business model while we selectively invest in initiatives to grow our business. The measures we have taken to expand our international capabilities and to build further operating leverage into our business model has improved our competitive position relative to other agency brokers and positions us well for the global environment.

Segment Discussions

        Our U.S. average daily executed volume during 2013 was 168.1 million shares per day, down 7% versus 2012 compared with the 5% decline in the overall combined average daily market volume of NYSE- and NASDAQ-listed securities during the same period. Despite the lower volume, our U.S. commissions and fees were flat as we mitigated the impact of the challenging volume environment with continued improvements in our average revenue per share through increased use of our POSIT Alert block crossing system as well as through more clients paying for research through trading at a higher bundled rate. Our average U.S. revenue per share rose to 47 mils in 2013, up from 44 mils in 2012. This rate improvement was achieved without a change in the proportion of lower rate sell-side volume, which held steady for the year at approximately 50%. We are also continuing to focus on expense management in the U.S. to enhance profitability, with total U.S. GAAP and adjusted expenses (see Non-GAAP financial measures ) down 47% and 6%, respectively compared to 2012.

28


Table of Contents

        Average daily trading volumes on all Canadian markets were down 4% amid persistently difficult market conditions. Commissions and fees in Canada declined 7% compared to 2012, driven by declines in average daily volumes and rates from clients using our high-touch desk trading services, as well as unfavorable currency translation.

        In Europe, institutional asset managers returned to invest in the European equity market. Pan European market-wide trading activity was up 9% over 2012 according to BATS. Our growth in European commissions and fees during 2013 of 46% significantly outpaced the improvement in the environment due to investments in our local infrastructure and our global product suite as well as our efforts to diversify our client base and grow liquidity in POSIT. Average daily value executed in POSIT was up almost 80%, while the average daily value traded in POSIT Alert jumped almost 250%. Our record revenues coupled with improved margins from a higher crossing rate in POSIT and our efforts to reduce settlement and clearing costs significantly improved our reported results in the region.

        In the Asia Pacific region, market conditions improved due to increased investor confidence stemming from the growth momentum in developed economies and their connection to Asian export economies, as well as monetary policy easing in Japan. With the exception of Korea, growth in market-wide trading activity was seen across all key markets in the region with value traded in Japan, Hong Kong and Australia increasing 72%, 14% and 7%, respectively compared to 2012. Our regional commissions and fees increased 20% over the prior year primarily due to strong order flow by local clients and by U.S. clients trading into Japan, Korea and Hong Kong.

Capital Resource Allocation

        During 2013, we returned $28.2 million to stockholders through the repurchase of approximately 2.0 million shares at an average price of $14.05. We intend to continue to use share repurchases to offset dilution from the issuance of stock under employee compensation plans and to opportunistically return capital to shareholders depending on market conditions.

Results of Operations

Year Ended December 31, 2013 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2012

U.S. Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2013   2012   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 231,140   $ 231,197   $ (57 )    

Recurring

    76,720     82,766     (6,046 )   (7 )

Other

    10,176     7,416     2,760     37  
                     

Total revenues

    318,036     321,379     (3,343 )   (1 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    125,672     128,458     (2,786 )   (2 )

Transaction processing

    41,995     45,225     (3,230 )   (7 )

Other expenses

    133,231     141,354     (8,123 )   (6 )

Goodwill and other asset impairment

        245,103     (245,103 )   (100 )

Restructuring charges

    (1,264 )   6,798     (8,062 )   (119 )

Interest expense

    2,715     2,542     173     7  
                     

Total expenses

    302,349     569,480     (267,131 )   (47 )
                     

Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)

  $ 15,687   $ (248,101 ) $ 263,788     106  
                     
                     

29


Table of Contents

        Commissions and fees remained flat as a 7% reduction in our average daily trading volumes was offset by a 7% increase in our average revenue per share to $0.0047. The increase in our average revenue per share was primarily attributable to increased use of our POSIT Alert block crossing system as well as more clients paying for research through trading at a higher bundled rate. The proportion of our average daily volume from sell-side clients remained relatively constant at 50% for both 2013 and 2012.

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
   
   
 
U.S. Operations: Key Indicators *
  2013   2012   Change   % Change  

Total trading volume (in billions of shares)

    42.4     45.4     (3.0 )   (7 )

Average trading volume per day (in millions of shares)

    168.1     181.6     (13.5 )   (7 )

Average revenue per share

  $ 0.0047   $ 0.0044   $ 0.0003     7  

U.S. market trading days

    252     250     2     1  

*
Excludes activity from ITG Derivatives and ITG Net commission share arrangements.

        Recurring revenues decreased 7% reflecting the impact of client attrition from our OMS product, which resulted in lower OMS subscription revenues and connectivity fees, as well as lower research subscription revenues.

        Other revenues increased 37% due primarily to an increase in revenues generated by our stock loan matched book business, which included a gain of $2.5 million related to adjustments to historical dividend withholdings.

        Total expenses for 2013 of $302.3 million include duplicate rent charges of $2.6 million associated with the build out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan while we still occupied our then-current headquarters in midtown Manhattan, $3.9 million related to our office move and a $1.3 million reversal of previously-recorded 2012 and 2011 restructuring liabilities. Total expenses for 2012 of $569.5 million include a goodwill impairment charge of $245.1 million, restructuring charges of $6.8 million and duplicate rent charges of $1.4 million. Excluding these items, adjusted expenses decreased 6% in 2013 to $297.1 million compared to $316.2 million in 2012 (see Non-GAAP Financial Measures ).

        Compensation and employee benefits decreased 2%, resulting from a reduction in headcount largely attributable to our restructuring in 2012, partially offset by higher incentive-based compensation costs associated with improved profitability in 2013.

        Transaction processing costs decreased due to the lower level of trading volumes. As a percentage of commissions and fees, transaction processing has declined due primarily to the increased revenue per share described above.

        Other expenses decreased $8.1 million despite an increase of $1.2 million in duplicate rent charges associated with the build-out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan and the $3.9 million non-operating charge we incurred upon completion of the move, which includes a reserve for the remaining lease obligations at our previous headquarters. This decrease was attributable to lower market data and connectivity costs resulting from our cost reduction initiatives, lower marketing costs due to our 2012 rebranding efforts, lower software amortization and a reduction of bad debt reserves from improved collection efforts. These reductions were partially offset by a reduced credit for research and development costs charged to other regional segments.

        In 2012, we recorded goodwill impairment charges of $245.1 million, reflecting the weakness in institutional trading volumes which resulted in lower estimated future cash flows of the U.S. Operations reporting segment, and a decline in industry market multiples (see Critical Accounting Estimates ).

30


Table of Contents

        In the second quarter of 2013, previously-recorded 2012 and 2011 restructuring accruals were reduced to reflect the sub-lease of previously-vacated office space in Los Angeles and certain legal and other employee-related charges deemed unnecessary.

        Interest expense incurred in 2013 and 2012 primarily relates to interest cost on our term debt and commitment fees relating to the three-year, $150 million revolving credit agreement we entered into in January 2011, including debt issuance cost amortization.

Canadian Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2013   2012   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 57,507   $ 61,776   $ (4,269 )   (7 )

Recurring

    9,294     9,117     177     2  

Other

    8,193     6,020     2,173     36  
                     

Total revenues

    74,994     76,913     (1,919 )   (2 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    25,929     22,795     3,134     14  

Transaction processing

    10,691     11,584     (893 )   (8 )

Other expenses

    27,281     30,992     (3,711 )   (12 )

Restructuring charges

    (348 )   1,145     (1,493 )   (130 )
                     

Total expenses

    63,553     66,516     (2,963 )   (4 )
                     

Income before income tax expense

  $ 11,441   $ 10,397   $ 1,044     10  
                     
                     

        Currency translation decreased total Canadian revenues and expenses by $2.1 million and $1.8 million, respectively, resulting in a $0.3 million reduction to pre-tax income.

        Canadian commissions and fees declined 7%, primarily due to lower revenue from high-touch desk trading services and from unfavorable currency translation, offset in part by an increase in activity from clients using our electronic brokerage services.

        Recurring revenues increased slightly due to an increase in the number of billable connections through ITG Net and from our billing for market data consumed by clients, offset by lower research subscription revenues.

        Other revenues increased as a result of additional income earned on foreign exchange transactions and on principal trading, as well as from lower trading errors and client trade accommodations.

        Compensation and employee benefits costs increased primarily due to an increase in share-based compensation, partially offset by a decrease from reduced headcount. Since historical awards granted to Canadian employees are settled in cash, the related expense fluctuates based on changes in the market price of our stock, which increased more than 100% in 2013. Going forward, we expect to grant awards to Canadian employees that settle through the issuance of our stock, which will reduce the variable nature of these charges over time.

        Transaction processing costs decreased due to the impact of lower execution costs on lower volumes and the elimination of an accrual for sales tax on exchange fees due to the resolution of a contingency, offset in part by higher clearing and settlement charges due to an increase in the number of trade tickets settled.

31


Table of Contents

        The decrease in other expenses was primarily driven by lower data-center-related costs following our migration to a new location, lower consulting and market data costs from our cost reduction efforts and lower research and development costs.

        In the second quarter of 2013, previously-recorded restructuring accruals were adjusted to reflect our current expectations. Restructuring charges in 2012 include costs related to employee separation.

European Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2013   2012   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 79,639   $ 54,390   $ 25,249     46  

Recurring

    12,508     12,971     (463 )   (4 )

Other

    (355 )   (95 )   (260 )   (274 )
                     

Total revenues

    91,792     67,266     24,526     36  

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    30,216     26,085     4,131     16  

Transaction processing

    19,567     15,156     4,411     29  

Other expenses

    22,366     21,279     1,087     5  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

        28,481     (28,481 )   (100 )

Restructuring charges

    1,537     615     922     150  
                     

Total expenses

    73,686     91,616     (17,930 )   (20 )
                     

Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)

  $ 18,106   $ (24,350 ) $ 42,456     174  
                     
                     

        Currency translation decreased total European revenues and expenses by $1.3 million and $0.5 million, respectively, resulting in a $0.8 million reduction to pre-tax income.

        European commissions and fees increased 46%, far outpacing the 9% growth in market-wide trading activity due primarily to the impact from the investments we made in our infrastructure and our products helping us expand our client base. This has led to increased activity from buy-side and sell-side clients using our electronic brokerage offerings, including our trading algorithms and POSIT, and from buy-side clients using our POSIT Alert block crossing system.

        Recurring and other revenue declined due to the cancellation of OMS subscriptions and an increase in trading errors and client trade accommodations, which totaled $0.5 million in 2013, compared to $0.4 million in 2012.

        Compensation and employee benefits expense increased due primarily to increased incentive-based compensation related to improved performance.

        Transaction processing costs increased 29% due to the significantly higher value traded in 2013, but fell as a percentage of commissions and fees due to the impact of a higher percentage of our value traded crossed in POSIT and our initiatives to reduce settlement and clearing costs.

        Other expenses increased 5% due primarily to increases in market data costs and facility costs relating to our new London office and London data center partially offset by lower research and development costs.

        In the second quarter of 2012, we recorded a goodwill impairment charge of $28.5 million reflecting the continued weakness in institutional trading activity experienced in 2012, which resulted in lower estimated future cash flows for the European Operations reporting segment (see Critical Accounting Estimates ).

32


Table of Contents

        In the second quarter of 2013, we implemented a restructuring plan to close our technology research and development facility in Israel and outsource that function to a third-party service provider effective January 1, 2014. Restructuring charges in 2012 include costs related to employee separation.

Asia Pacific Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2013   2012   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 40,333   $ 33,613   $ 6,720     20  

Recurring

    5,650     4,913     737     15  

Other

    (4 )   352     (356 )   (101 )
                     

Total revenues

    45,979     38,878     7,101     18  

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    19,437     19,024     413     2  

Transaction processing

    11,539     9,208     2,331     25  

Other expenses

    17,182     17,405     (223 )   (1 )

Goodwill and other asset impairment

        701     (701 )   (100 )

Restructuring charges

        941     (941 )   (100 )
                     

Total expenses

    48,158     47,279     879     2  
                     

Loss before income tax expense

  $ (2,179 ) $ (8,401 ) $ 6,222     74  
                     
                     

        Currency translation decreased total Asia Pacific revenues and expenses by $1.4 million and $1.3 million, respectively, resulting in a $0.1 million reduction to pre-tax income.

        Asia Pacific commissions and fees increased 20% over the prior year period primarily due to strong order flow by U.S. clients and local Asian clients trading into Japan, Korea and Hong Kong.

        The growth in recurring revenues primarily reflects growth in the number of billable network connections through ITG Net. The decrease in other revenues is due primarily to lower investment income and higher trading errors and client trade accommodations, which totaled $0.3 million in 2013, compared to $0.2 million in 2012.

        Compensation and employee benefits increased slightly due to an increase in incentive-based compensation related to improved performance.

        Transaction processing costs increased due to the higher value of securities traded and a higher proportion of our trades executed in Japan where costs are higher.

        The slight increase in other expenses reflects the additional connectivity and market data fees related to business growth and higher rental expenses for our Hong Kong office, partially offset by lower research and development costs.

        In the second quarter of 2012, we recorded a goodwill impairment charge of $0.7 million reflecting the continued weakness in institutional trading volumes (see Critical Accounting Estimates ). Restructuring charges in 2012 primarily include costs related to employee separation.

Consolidated Income Tax Expense

        Our effective tax rate was 27.8% on our pre-tax income in 2013 compared to 8.4% on our pre-tax loss in 2012. In 2013, our low effective tax rate was favorably impacted by a higher proportion of earnings coming from our international operations, where we incur lower tax rates, together with the resolution of a tax contingency in Europe and the recognition of the full year 2012 research and

33


Table of Contents

experimentation credit in the U.S. during the first quarter of 2013 due to the timing of tax legislation. These reductions to our effective tax rate were partially offset by increases associated with the lack of a deduction on the restructuring charge related to closing the Israel technology research and development facility and the tax charges associated with the anticipated withdrawal of capital from Israel. The low rate in 2012 was primarily attributable to the significant impairment charges in the U.S., Europe and Asia Pacific, which were either partially or fully non-deductible. Furthermore, 2012 was favorably impacted by a net benefit recorded of $0.9 million following the resolution in the U.S. of a state tax contingency.

Year Ended December 31, 2012 Compared to Year Ended December 31, 2011

U.S. Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2012   2011   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 231,197   $ 279,781   $ (48,584 )   (17 )

Recurring

    82,766     87,229     (4,463 )   (5 )

Other

    7,416     8,511     (1,095 )   (13 )
                     

Total revenues

    321,379     375,521     (54,142 )   (14 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    128,458     145,905     (17,447 )   (12 )

Transaction processing

    45,225     52,200     (6,975 )   (13 )

Other expenses

    141,354     143,417     (2,063 )   (1 )

Goodwill and other asset impairment

    245,103     229,317     15,786     7  

Restructuring charges

    6,798     22,471     (15,673 )   (70 )

Acquisition-related costs

        2,523     (2,523 )   (100 )

Interest expense

    2,542     2,025     517     26  
                     

Total expenses

    569,480     597,858     (28,378 )   (5 )
                     

Loss before income tax expense

  $ (248,101 ) $ (222,337 ) $ (25,764 )   (12 )
                     
                     

        Following the acquisition of the Ross Smith Energy Group Ltd. ("RSEG"), a Calgary-based independent provider of research on the oil and gas industry in June 2011, the U.S. Operations in 2012 include a full year of revenues from RSEG's U.S. clients, which comprise a majority of its client base, along with all of RSEG's operating expenses, net of a charge to our Canadian Operations pursuant to a distribution agreement for costs attributable to RSEG revenue recognized in Canada.

        Our average daily U.S. trading volumes fell 6% from 2011, while overall daily U.S. equity volumes (as measured by the combined share volume in NYSE- and NASDAQ-listed securities) were 15% lower. While trading activity by fund managers continued to be weak during 2012, our average daily volumes benefited from increased sell-side client activity, which offset much of the reduced volume flows from our core fund manager clients. The sell-side client segment comprised 50% of our average daily volume in 2012, compared to 40% in 2011. The change in business mix was responsible for the

34


Table of Contents

10% reduction in our average revenue per share as the average revenue per share from buy-side clients was up 5% over 2011.

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
   
   
 
U.S. Operations: Key Indicators *
  2012   2011   Change   % Change  

Total trading volume (in billions of shares)

    45.4     48.8     (3.4 )   (7 )

Average trading volume per day (in millions of shares)

    181.6     193.7     (12.1 )   (6 )

Average revenue per share

  $ 0.0044   $ 0.0049   $ (0.0005 )   (10 )

U.S. market trading days

    250     252     (2 )   (1 )

*
Excludes activity from ITG Derivatives and ITG Net commission share arrangements.

        Recurring revenues declined 5% reflecting the impact of client attrition from our OMS product, resulting in lower OMS subscription revenues and connectivity fees.

        Other revenues decreased $1.1 million as 2011 included a gain of $0.5 million on the sale of our entire common stock holdings in NYSE Euronext, Inc. as well as a gain of $0.5 million on the sale of two software patents.

        Total expenses for 2012 of $569.5 million include a goodwill impairment charge of $245.1 million, restructuring charges of $6.8 million and duplicate rent charges of $1.4 million associated with the build out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan while we occupied our then-existing headquarters in midtown Manhattan. Total expenses for 2011 of $597.9 million include charges for goodwill and other asset impairment of $229.3 million, restructuring charges of $22.5 million and acquisition-related costs of $2.5 million. Excluding these charges, adjusted expenses were $316.2 million in 2012, 8% lower than the $343.5 million of adjusted expenses for 2011 (see Non-GAAP Financial Measures ).

        Compensation and employee benefits decreased 12%, resulting from a reduction in headcount largely attributable to our restructuring activities in the second quarter of 2011, lower incentive compensation costs associated with lower revenue levels, and lower share-based compensation as a result of a change in accounting estimate related to forfeitures. These reductions were partially offset by lower capitalized compensation for software development and higher severance charges.

        Transaction processing costs were down 13%, outpacing the 7% decline in total trading volume, due in part to lower execution costs as a result of improved routing capabilities and an increase in the portion of trades internally crossed through POSIT.

        Other expenses decreased $2.1 million primarily from lower software amortization and the consolidation of leased facilities, offset by $1.4 million of duplicate rent charges associated with the build-out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan.

        In the second quarters of 2012 and 2011, we recorded goodwill impairment charges of $245.1 million and $225.0 million, respectively, reflecting the continued weakness in institutional trading volumes which resulted in lower estimated future cash flows for the U.S. Operations reporting segment, and a decline in industry market multiples (see Critical Accounting Estimates ). In the fourth quarter of 2011, we wrote down the remaining $4.3 million carrying value of a minority interest investment.

        Restructuring charges in 2012 include costs related to employee separation. In 2011, restructuring charges reflect costs related to employee separation and lease consolidation.

        Acquisition-related costs were incurred in connection with the June 2011 acquisition of RSEG, consisting of $0.7 million in professional services, such as legal and accounting services, as well as $1.8 million in costs to terminate a distribution agreement with a third party, net of a $1.0 million recovery from RSEG's former owners.

35


Table of Contents

        Interest expense incurred in 2012 primarily relates to interest cost on our term debt financing obtained in the second quarter of 2011 and commitment fees relating to the three-year, $150 million revolving credit agreement we entered into in January 2011, including debt issuance cost amortization relating to both facilities.

Canadian Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2012   2011   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 61,776   $ 72,518   $ (10,742 )   (15 )

Recurring

    9,117     6,750     2,367     35  

Other

    6,020     6,282     (262 )   (4 )
                     

Total revenues

    76,913     85,550     (8,637 )   (10 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    22,795     23,230     (435 )   (2 )

Transaction processing

    11,584     13,630     (2,046 )   (15 )

Other expenses

    30,992     27,970     3,022     11  

Restructuring charges

    1,145     685     460     67  
                     

Total expenses

    66,516     65,515     1,001     2  
                     

Income before income tax expense

  $ 10,397   $ 20,035   $ (9,638 )   (48 )
                     
                     

        Currency translation decreased total Canadian revenues and expenses by $0.9 million and $0.7 million, respectively, resulting in a $0.2 million reduction to pre-tax income. Our Canadian results in 2012 include a full year of revenues and expenses related to RSEG's Canadian clients following the June 2011 acquisition.

        Trading across all Canadian markets declined 21% from 2011, while our commissions and fees declined 15%. The decline was largely due to a decrease in the volume traded, as well as a reduction in rate on our electronic brokerage services.

        Recurring revenues increased due to Canadian client usage of investment research services for a full period in 2012, as well as an increase in the number of billable connections through ITG Net.

        Compensation and employee benefits costs decreased due to lower incentive compensation, partially offset by increases in share-based compensation, and from new sales staff added to market our investment research products to Canadian clients.

        Transaction processing costs decreased as a result of lower volumes and improved routing capabilities.

        The increase in other expenses was primarily driven by a full period of distribution charges for rights granted by our U.S. operations to sell investment research in Canada, increases in telecommunications and occupancy costs related to moving our Canadian data center, software licenses for our foreign exchange trading and settlement operations and higher software amortization.

        Restructuring charges in 2012 and 2011 include costs related to employee separation.

36


Table of Contents

European Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2012   2011   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 54,390   $ 57,280   $ (2,890 )   (5 )

Recurring

    12,971     13,182     (211 )   (2 )

Other

    (95 )   208     (303 )   (146 )
                     

Total revenues

    67,266     70,670     (3,404 )   (5 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    26,085     29,353     (3,268 )   (11 )

Transaction processing

    15,156     16,978     (1,822 )   (11 )

Other expenses

    21,279     21,114     165     1  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

    28,481         28,481     100  

Restructuring charges

    615     962     (347 )   (36 )
                     

Total expenses

    91,616     68,407     23,209     34  
                     

(Loss) income before income tax (benefit) expense

  $ (24,350 ) $ 2,263   $ (26,613 )   NA  
                     
                     

        Currency translation decreased total European revenues and adjusted expenses (excluding the currency impact on the goodwill impairment and restructuring charges) by $0.9 million and $1.6 million, respectively, resulting in a $0.7 million increase to adjusted pre-tax income (see Non-GAAP Financial Measures ).

        Commissions and fees revenues decreased 5%, including unfavorable currency translation of $0.7 million, while overall market turnover decreased 24%. The decrease in commissions is attributable to less institutional business, partially offset by higher crossing activity in POSIT and a growth in sell-side activity.

        Recurring revenues were flat year on year, excluding the impact of currency translation, as growth in billable connections through ITG Net was offset by cancellations of OMS subscriptions. The decline in other revenues reflects the impact of client accommodations.

        Our European expenses increased $23.2 million due to goodwill impairment and restructuring charges totaling $29.1 million, which more than offset significant savings in compensation and transaction processing costs, and adversely impacted our profitability for 2012.

        The decrease in compensation and employee benefits expenses was primarily driven by lower headcount and lower incentive compensation, partially offset by a decrease in capitalized compensation for software development and increases in share-based compensation and severance.

        Transaction processing costs were lower due to the decrease in trading volumes as well as the impact of crossing a higher portion of traded value in POSIT.

        Other expenses were relatively flat reflecting the offsetting impacts of increases from investments in our London and Stockholm data centers, which were established for the purpose of reducing latency, and from the impact of lower allocations out from our Israeli development group and decreases in software amortization and various other costs.

        In the second quarter of 2012, we recorded a goodwill impairment charge of $28.5 million reflecting the continued weakness in institutional trading activity, which resulted in lower estimated future cash flows for the European Operations reporting segment (see Critical Accounting Estimates ).

        Restructuring charges in 2012 and 2011 include costs related to employee separation.

37


Table of Contents

Asia Pacific Operations

 
  Year Ended December 31,    
   
 
$ in thousands
  2012   2011   Change   % Change  

Revenues:

                         

Commissions and fees

  $ 33,613   $ 36,222   $ (2,609 )   (7 )

Recurring

    4,913     3,758     1,155     31  

Other

    352     316     36     11  
                     

Total revenues

    38,878     40,296     (1,418 )   (4 )

Expenses:

                         

Compensation and employee benefits

    19,024     20,819     (1,795 )   (9 )

Transaction processing

    9,208     8,794     414     5  

Other expenses

    17,405     16,958     447     3  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

    701         701     100  

Restructuring charges

    941     314     627     200  
                     

Total expenses

    47,279     46,885     394     1  
                     

Loss before income tax expense

  $ (8,401 ) $ (6,589 ) $ (1,812 )   (28 )
                     
                     

        Currency translation had virtually no impact on Asia Pacific revenues or expenses, and thus no effect on pre-tax loss.

        Asia Pacific commissions and fees decreased 7% due to reduced average commission rates. Our executed value in the region remained flat during 2012 while overall market turnover in the Asia Pacific markets where we operate decreased approximately 19%.

        The growth in recurring revenues primarily reflects growth in the number of billable network connections through ITG Net.

        The decrease in compensation and employee benefits costs reflects lower incentive compensation and share-based compensation, as well as an increase in capitalized compensation for software development.

        Transaction processing costs increased primarily due to an increase in the portion of trades being executed in costlier venues, such as Taiwan and the Philippines, where we pay higher clearing and settlement costs.

        The increase in other expenses reflects increases in market data and connectivity to support client growth and costs related to the restoration of former office space pursuant to the terms of the lease.

        In the second quarter of 2012, we recorded a goodwill impairment charge of $0.7 million reflecting the continued weakness in institutional trading activity, which resulted in lower estimated future cash flows for the Asia Pacific Operations reporting segment (see Critical Accounting Estimates ).

        Restructuring charges in 2012 primarily include costs related to employee separation while those recorded in 2011 reflect lease abandonment charges.

Consolidated Income Tax Expense

        Our effective tax rate was 8.4% in 2012 compared to 13.0% in 2011. The low effective tax rates on the reported pre-tax loss in both periods are directly attributable to the significant impairment charges in the U.S., Europe and Asia Pacific in 2012 and in the U.S. in 2011 which are either only partially deductible or fully non-deductible. 2012 also includes the impact of a net benefit recorded of $0.9 million following the resolution of a state tax contingency. Our consolidated effective tax rate can

38


Table of Contents

vary from period to period depending on, among other factors, the geographic and business mix of our earnings.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

Liquidity

        Our primary source of liquidity is cash provided by operations. Our liquidity requirements result from our working capital needs, which include clearing and settlement activities, as well as our regulatory capital needs. A substantial portion of our assets are liquid, consisting of cash and cash equivalents or assets readily convertible into cash. Cash is principally invested in money market mutual funds and demand deposits. At December 31, 2013, unrestricted cash and cash equivalents totaled $261.9 million. Included in this amount is $110.0 million of cash and cash equivalents held by subsidiaries outside the United States. Due to our current capital structure, we currently do not foresee a need to repatriate funds from certain foreign subsidiaries to the U.S. by way of dividends. Should we need to do so in the future, our effective tax rate may increase.

        As a self-clearing broker-dealer in the U.S., we are subject to cash deposit requirements with clearing organizations that may be large in relation to total liquid assets and may fluctuate significantly based upon the nature and size of customers' trading activity and market volatility. At December 31, 2013, we had interest-bearing security deposits totaling $74.8 million with clearing organizations in the U.S. for the settlement of equity trades. In the normal course of our settlement activities, we may also need to temporarily finance customer securities positions from short settlements or delivery failures. These financings may be funded from existing cash resources, borrowings under stock loan transactions or short-term bank loans under our committed facility. In January 2014, we entered into a new $150 million two-year revolving credit agreement ("New Credit Agreement") with a syndicate of banks and JP Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. as administrative agent. The New Credit Agreement is substantially identical to the three-year credit agreement we originally established in January 2011 and is specifically designed to finance these temporary positions and to satisfy temporary spikes in clearing margin requirements.

        We self-clear equity trades in Hong Kong and Australia and maintain restricted cash deposits of $25.8 million to support overdraft facilities. In Europe, we maintain $28.5 million in restricted cash deposits supporting working capital facilities primarily in the form of overdraft protection for our European clearing and settlement needs.

Capital Resources

        Capital resource requirements relate to capital purchases, as well as business investments and are generally funded from operations. When required, as in the case of a major acquisition, our strong cash generating ability has historically allowed us to access U.S. capital markets.

39


Table of Contents

Operating Activities

        The table below summarizes the effect of the major components of operating cash flow.

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
(in thousands)
  2013   2012   2011  

Net income (loss)

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 )

Non-cash items included in net income (loss)

    78,220     321,199     278,620  

Effect of changes in receivables/payables from/to customers and brokers

    (25,274 )   (32,563 )   4,045  

Effect of changes in other working capital and operating assets and liabilities

    (38,839 )   (13,985 )   (35,817 )
               

Net cash provided by operating activities

  $ 45,192   $ 26,792   $ 67,059  
               
               

        The positive cash flow from operating activities during 2013 was driven by the combination of our net income and operating cash flow adjustments. These increases were offset in part by an increase in cash used in settlement activities, a substantial portion of which was financed by an increase in short-term bank loans of $51.4 million.

        In the normal course of our clearing and settlement activities worldwide, cash is typically used to fund restricted or segregated cash accounts (under regulations and other), broker and customer fails to deliver/receive, securities borrowed, deposits with clearing organizations and net activity related to receivables/payables from/to customers and brokers. The cash requirements vary from day to day depending on volume transacted and customer trading patterns.

Investing Activities

        Net cash used in investing activities of $56.6 million includes $23.3 million related to the build-out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan, as well as investments in computer hardware, software and software development projects.

Financing Activities

        Net cash provided by financing activities of $30.4 million primarily reflects our short-term bank borrowings of $51.4 million from overdraft facilities to support our clearing requirements and $20.6 million of borrowings under a long-term facility to finance the build-out of our new headquarters, offset by repurchases of our common stock, shares withheld for net settlements of share-based awards and repayments of term debt.

        On August 10, 2012, Investment Technology Group, Inc. ("Group") entered into a $25.0 million master lease facility with BMO to finance equipment and construction expenditures related to the build-out of our new headquarters in lower Manhattan. The facility contained an initial interim funding agreement which was succeeded by a capital lease. During 2013, we borrowed $20.6 million under the BMO facility following borrowings of $0.6 million in 2012.

        Under the terms of the interim funding agreement, Group was reimbursed for expenditures made during an interim funding period which ended on July 29, 2013 ("Interim Funding Period"). Interest-only payments on the aggregate outstanding borrowings during the Interim Funding Period were paid monthly. On July 29, 2013, the $21.2 million of interim borrowings were converted to a 3.39% fixed-rate term financing structured as a capital lease with a 48-month term, at the end of which Group may purchase the underlying equipment for $1.

        During 2013, we repurchased approximately 2.4 million shares of our common stock at a cost of approximately $32.7 million, which was funded from our available cash resources. Of these shares,

40


Table of Contents

approximately 2.0 million were purchased under our Board of Directors' authorization for a total cost of $28.2 million (average cost of $14.05 per share). An additional 0.4 million shares ($4.5 million) pertained solely to the satisfaction of minimum statutory withholding tax upon the net settlement of equity awards. As of December 31, 2013, there were 3.5 million shares remaining available for repurchase under ITG's stock repurchase program. The specific timing and amount of repurchases will vary based on market conditions and other factors.

        We have not paid a cash dividend to stockholders during any period of time covered by this report. Our current policy, which is reviewed continually, is to retain earnings to finance the operations and expansion of our businesses and to return capital to stockholders through repurchases. As a result, we are not currently paying cash dividends on common stock.

Regulatory Capital

        Under the SEC's Uniform Net Capital Rule, our U.S. broker-dealer subsidiaries are required to maintain at least the minimum level of net capital required under Rule 15c3-1 at all times. Dividends or withdrawals of capital cannot be made from these entities if the capital is needed to comply with regulatory requirements.

        Our net capital balances and the amounts in excess of required net capital at December 31, 2013 for our U.S. Operations are as follows (dollars in millions):

U.S. Operations
  Net Capital   Excess Net Capital  

ITG Inc. 

  $ 106.5   $ 105.5  

AlterNet

    5.9     5.8  

ITG Derivatives

    5.5     4.5  

        As of December 31, 2013, ITG Inc. had a $10.6 million cash balance in a Special Reserve Bank Account for the benefit of customers under the Customer Protection Rule pursuant to SEC Rule 15c3-3, Computation for Determination of Reserve Requirements and $0.4 million under Proprietary Accounts for Introducing Brokers agreements.

        In addition, the Company's Canadian, European and Asia Pacific Operations have subsidiaries with regulatory requirements. The net capital balances and the amount of regulatory capital in excess of the minimum requirements applicable to each business as of December 31, 2013, are summarized in the following table (dollars in millions):

Canadian Operations
  Net Capital   Excess Net Capital  

Canada

  $ 43.9   $ 43.5  

European Operations
         
 
 

Europe

    57.5     35.9  

Asia Pacific Operations
         
 
 

Australia

    11.9     4.1  

Hong Kong

    28.3     21.0  

Singapore

    0.4     0.2  

Liquidity and Capital Resource Outlook

        Historically, our working capital, stock repurchase and investment activity requirements have been funded from cash from operations and short-term loans, with the exception of strategic acquisitions and long-term investments such as our new headquarters, which at times have required long-term financing. We believe that our cash flow from operations, existing cash balances and our available credit facilities will be sufficient to meet our ongoing operating cash and regulatory capital needs, while also complying with the terms of our New Credit Agreement. However, our ability to borrow additional funds may be inhibited by financial lending institutions' ability or willingness to lend to us on commercially acceptable terms.

41


Table of Contents

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements and Aggregate Contractual Obligations

Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

        We are a member of various U.S. and non-U.S. exchanges and clearing houses that trade and clear, respectively, equities and/or derivative contracts. Associated with our membership, we may be required to pay a proportionate share of financial obligations of another member who may default on its obligations to the exchanges or the clearing house. While the rules governing different exchange or clearing house memberships vary, in general, our guarantee obligations would arise only if the exchange had previously exhausted its resources. The maximum potential payout under these memberships cannot be estimated. We have not recorded any contingent liability in the consolidated financial statements for these agreements and believe that any potential requirement to make payments under these agreements is remote.

Aggregate Contractual Obligations

        As of December 31, 2013, our contractual obligations and other commercial commitments amounted to $230.7 million in the aggregate and consisted of the following (dollars in thousands):

 
  Payments due by period  
Contractual obligations
  Total   Less than
1 year
  1-3 years   3-5 years   More than
5 years
 

Purchase of goods and services

  $ 55,464   $ 28,504   $ 23,744   $ 3,216   $  

Long-term debt

    9,020     6,367     2,653          

Capital lease obligations

    21,312     6,184     15,128          

Operating lease obligations

    140,133     16,265     31,432     18,208     74,228  

Minimum payments under certain employment arrangements (a)

    4,798     4,657     27     27     87  
                       

Total

  $ 230,727   $ 61,977   $ 72,984   $ 21,451   $ 74,315  
                       
                       

(a)
Pursuant to employment arrangements, in the event of termination of employment without cause on December 31, 2013, we would be obligated to pay separation payments totaling $4.8 million.

        The above information excludes $13.1 million of gross unrecognized tax benefits discussed in Note 13, Income Taxes , to our consolidated financial statements because it is not possible to estimate the time period when, or if, it might be paid to tax authorities.

        As part of the $150 million, two-year credit agreement we entered into on January 31, 2014, we are required to pay a commitment fee of 0.50% on any unborrowed amounts.

Critical Accounting Estimates

        Our consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. In many instances, the application of such principles requires management to make estimates or to apply subjective principles to particular facts and circumstances. A change in the estimates or a variance in the application, or interpretation of accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. could yield a materially different accounting result. Below is a summary of our critical accounting estimates where we believe that the estimations, judgments or interpretations that we made, if different, would have yielded the most significant differences in our consolidated financial statements. In addition, for a summary of all of our significant accounting policies see Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies , in the notes to the consolidated financial statements.

42


Table of Contents

Goodwill Impairment: Testing Methodology and Valuation Considerations

        We obtained goodwill and intangible assets as a result of the acquisitions of subsidiaries. Goodwill represents the excess of the cost over the fair market value of net assets acquired. Prior to the full impairment of our goodwill in the second quarter of 2012, we tested goodwill for impairment at least annually and more frequently if an event occurred or circumstances changed that would more likely than not reduce the fair value of a reporting unit below its carrying value in accordance with Accounting Standards Update ("ASC") 350, Intangibles—Goodwill and other . Goodwill impairment testing uses a two-step process as follows:

    Step one—the fair value of each reporting unit is compared to its carrying value in order to identify potential impairment. If the fair value of a reporting unit exceeds the carrying value of its net assets, goodwill is not considered impaired and no further testing is required. If the carrying value of the net assets exceeds the fair value of a reporting unit, potential impairment is indicated at the reporting unit level and step two of the impairment test is performed in order to determine the implied fair value of the reporting unit's goodwill and measure the potential impairment loss.

    Step two—when potential impairment is indicated in step one, we compare the implied fair value of goodwill with the carrying amount of that goodwill. Determining the implied fair value of goodwill requires a valuation of the reporting unit's tangible and (non-goodwill) intangible assets and liabilities in a manner similar to the allocation of the purchase price in a business combination. Any excess in the value of a reporting unit over the amounts assigned to its assets and liabilities is referred to as the implied fair value of goodwill. If the carrying amount of the reporting unit goodwill exceeds the implied fair value of that goodwill, an impairment loss is recognized in an amount equal to that excess.

        The impairment assessment requires management to make estimates regarding the fair value of the reporting unit to which goodwill has been assigned. The fair values of our reporting units were determined by considering the income approach, and where appropriate, a combination of the income and market approaches to valuation.

        Under the income approach, the fair value of the reporting unit is estimated based on the present value of expected future cash flows. The income approach is dependent on a discounted cash flow model for each of our reporting units, which incorporates a cash flow forecast plus a terminal value (a commonly used methodology to capture the present value of perpetual cash flows assuming an estimated sustainable long-term growth rate). Such forecasts consider business plans, historical and anticipated future results based upon our expectations for future product offerings, our market opportunities and challenges and other factors. The discount rates used to determine the present value of future cash flows are based upon an adjusted version of the Capital Asset Pricing Model ("CAPM") to estimate the required rate of return on equity capital. The CAPM measures the rate of return required by investors given a company's risk profile.

        Under the market approach, the fair value is derived from multiples which are (i) based upon operating data of similar guideline companies, (ii) evaluated and adjusted based on the strengths and weaknesses of our company compared to the guideline companies and (iii) applied to our company's operating data to arrive at an indication of value. We also consider prices paid in recent transactions that have occurred in our industry or related industries. In the latter case, valuation multiples based upon actual transactions are used to arrive at an indication of value. Under the market approach, certain judgments are made about the selection of comparable guideline companies, comparable recent company and asset transactions and transaction control premiums. Although we had based the fair value estimate on assumptions we believed to be reasonable, those assumptions are inherently unpredictable and uncertain and actual results could differ from the estimate.

43


Table of Contents

        In our impairment testing, we also examined the sensitivity of the fair values of our reporting units by reviewing other scenarios relative to the initial assumptions we used to see if the resulting impact on fair values would have resulted in a different step one conclusion. Accordingly, we performed sensitivity analyses based on more conservative terminal growth scenarios and higher discount rates in which the fair values of these reporting units are recalculated. In the first sensitivity analysis, we lowered our terminal growth rate assumptions (holding all other critical assumptions constant), while in our second sensitivity analysis; we increased each reporting unit's discount rate (holding all other critical assumptions constant). We then evaluated the outcomes of the sensitivity analyses performed to assess their impact on our step one conclusions.

        As a corroborative source of fair value reasonability assessment, we reconciled the aggregate fair values of our reporting units to the market capitalization of ITG to derive an implied control premium (an adjustment reflecting the estimated incremental fair value of a controlling stake in a company). In performing this reconciliation, we used either the stock price on the valuation date or the average stock price over a range of dates around the valuation date, generally 30 days. We then compared the implied control premium to premiums paid in observable recent transactions of comparable companies to verify the reasonableness of the fair value of our reporting units obtained through our primary valuation methods.

        Prior to the full impairment of our goodwill in the second quarter of 2012, we continually monitored and evaluated business and competitive conditions that affected our operations for indicators of potential impairment. As a result, we performed quarterly interim impairment testing in addition to our annual tests since 2010 due to the presence of adverse economic and business conditions such as significant outflows from domestic equity mutual funds (which comprise a core component of our client base), a prolonged decrease in our market capitalization below book value, a decline in our current and expected financial performance, and the significant near-term uncertainty related to both the global economic recovery and the outlook for our industry. Our interim impairment tests applied the same valuation techniques, terminal growth rates and sensitivity analyses used in our prior annual impairment tests to each updated quarterly cash flow forecast.

        During the first two months of 2012, outflows from domestic equity funds moderated significantly, averaging less than $2 billion per month before spiking to nearly $12 billion in March. This moderation followed outflows averaging $20 billion per month in the last six months of 2011. These somewhat mixed indications caused us to adjust our March 31, 2012 cash flow and earnings forecasts below the levels projected during our 2011 year-end impairment testing. These downwardly revised forecasts as well as current market data formed the basis upon which we performed our goodwill impairment testing at March 31, 2012. Based upon our assessments, we concluded that none of the goodwill allocated to any of our reporting units was impaired at that time.

        In the second quarter, industry conditions deteriorated further. Outflows from domestic equity funds re-accelerated while trading activity in major global equity markets fell further below prior year levels, driving our revenues below the levels projected in our March 31, 2012 forecast. More significantly, the challenges previously experienced in our U.S. brokerage environment spread to our European and Asia Pacific businesses during the quarter, both of which reported second quarter revenues which were significantly below first quarter levels. These developments cast a decidedly more uncertain outlook on our near term business fundamentals as well as the length and severity of the decline in global institutional equity market activity. Consequently, we downwardly revised our earnings and cash flow forecasts to reflect our adjusted expectations for a significantly slower and more prolonged earnings recovery in our global businesses and reduced the multiple used in our market approach to reflect the decline in industry market multiples. Although the revised forecasts continued to result in a fair value for our Canadian reporting unit that was well above its carrying value (which does not include goodwill), the fair values for our U.S., European and Asia Pacific reporting units were determined to be below their carrying values, indicating a potential impairment of the goodwill held in

44


Table of Contents

these units and requiring us to proceed to step two impairment testing. Our step two valuation test yielded aggregate fair values for the tangible and (non-goodwill) intangible assets in our U.S., European and Asia Pacific reporting units above their aggregate carrying values, which reduced the amount of the implied fair value attributable to goodwill. As a result, goodwill in each of these reporting units was determined to be fully impaired, requiring us to record a total goodwill impairment charge of $274.3 million.

Intangible Assets Subject to Amortization

        Intangible assets with definite useful lives are subject to amortization and are evaluated for recoverability when events or changes in circumstances indicate that an intangible asset's carrying amount may not be recoverable in accordance with ASC 360, Property, Plant, and Equipment . If such an event or change occurs, we estimate cash flows directly associated with the use of the intangible asset to test its recoverability and assess its remaining useful life. The projected cash flows require assumptions related to revenue growth, operating margins and other relevant market, economic and regulatory factors. If the expected undiscounted future cash flows from the use and eventual disposition of a finite-lived intangible asset or asset group are not sufficient to recover the carrying value of the asset, we then compare the carrying amount to its current fair value. We estimate the fair value using market prices for similar assets, if available, or by using a discounted cash flow model. We then recognize an impairment loss for the amount by which the carrying amount exceeds its fair value. While we believe our assumptions are reasonable, changes in these assumptions may have a material impact on our financial results.

Share-Based Compensation

        In accordance with ASC 718, Compensation—Stock Compensation , share-based payment transactions require the application of a fair value methodology that involves various assumptions. The fair value of options awarded is estimated on the date of grant using the Black-Scholes option valuation model that uses the following assumptions: expected life of the option, risk-free interest rate, expected volatility of our common stock price and expected dividend yield. We estimate the expected life of the options using historical data and the volatility of our common stock is estimated based on a combination of the historical volatility and the implied volatility from traded options. The fair value of restricted share awards with a market condition is estimated on the date of grant using a Monte Carlo simulation model. A Monte Carlo simulation is an iterative technique designed to estimate future payouts by taking into account our current stock price, the volatility of our common stock, risk-free rates, and a risk-neutral valuation methodology.

        Although both models meet the requirements of ASC 718, the fair values generated by the model may not be indicative of the actual fair values of the underlying awards, as it does not consider other factors important to those share-based compensation awards, such as continued employment, periodic vesting requirements and limited transferability.

Fair Value

        Securities owned, at fair value, and securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition are carried at fair value or amounts that approximate fair value, with the related unrealized gains or losses recognized in our results of operations (except for available-for-sale securities, for which unrealized gains or losses are reported in accumulated other comprehensive income unless we believe there is an other-than-temporary impairment in their carrying value). The fair value of these instruments is the amount at which these instruments could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced liquidation. Where available, we use the prices from independent sources such as listed market prices or broker/dealer

45


Table of Contents

quotations. For investments in illiquid and privately held securities that do not have readily determinable fair values, we use estimated fair values as determined by management.

Income Taxes and Uncertain Tax Positions

        ASC 740, Income Taxes , establishes financial accounting and reporting standards for the effect of income taxes. The objectives of accounting for income taxes are to recognize the amount of taxes payable or refundable for the current year and deferred tax liabilities and assets for the future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in an entity's financial statements or tax returns. A valuation allowance may be recorded against deferred tax assets if it is more likely than not that such assets will not be realized. Judgment is required in assessing the future tax consequences of events that have been recognized in our financial statements or tax returns. Fluctuations in the actual outcome of these future tax consequences could materially impact our financial position or results of operations.

        We recognize the tax benefit from an uncertain tax position only if it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities, based on the technical merits of the position. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such a position are measured based on the largest benefit for each such position that has a greater than fifty percent likelihood of being realized upon ultimate resolution. We consider many factors when evaluating and estimating our tax positions and tax benefits. Such estimates involve interpretations of regulations, rulings, case law, etc. and are inherently complex. Our estimates may require periodic adjustments and may not accurately anticipate actual outcomes as resolution of income tax treatments in individual jurisdictions typically would not be known for several years after completion of any fiscal year. The impact of our reassessment of uncertain tax positions in accordance with ASC 740 did not have a material impact on the results of operations, financial condition or liquidity.

Item 7A.    Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

        Market risk refers to the potential for adverse changes in the value of a company's financial instruments as a result of changes in market conditions. We are exposed to market risk associated with changes in interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates and equity prices. We do not hold financial instruments for trading purposes on a long-term basis. We continually evaluate our exposure to market risk and oversee the establishment of policies, procedures and controls to ensure that market risks are identified and analyzed on an ongoing basis.

        We have performed sensitivity analyses on different tests of market risk as described in the following sections to estimate the impacts of a hypothetical change in market conditions on the U.S. Dollar value of non-U.S. Dollar-based revenues associated with our Canadian, European and Asia Pacific Operations. Estimated potential losses assume the occurrence of certain adverse market conditions. Such estimates do not consider the potential effect of favorable changes in market factors and also do not represent management's expectations of projected losses in fair value. We do not foresee any significant changes in the strategies we use to manage interest rate risk, foreign currency risk or equity price risk in the near future.

Interest Rate Risk

        Our exposure to interest rate risk relates primarily to interest-sensitive financial instruments in our investment portfolio (primarily mutual fund investments) and our revolving credit facility as well as our variable rate term debt. Given that our $150.0 million credit facility is specifically earmarked for limited short-term borrowings to support U.S. brokerage clearing operations, the impact of any adverse change in interest rates on this facility should not be material. Similarly, because only a small portion of our term debt is subject to a variable rate, the impact of any adverse change in interest rates should not be material. Interest-sensitive financial instruments in our investment portfolio will decline in value if

46


Table of Contents

interest rates increase. Our interest-bearing investment portfolio primarily consists of short-term, high-credit-quality money market mutual funds. The aggregate fair market value of our portfolio including restricted cash was $320.0 million and $243.5million as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively. Our interest-bearing investments are not insured and, because of the short-term high quality nature of the investments, are not likely to fluctuate significantly in market value.

Foreign Currency Risk

        We currently operate and continue to expand globally, principally through our operations in Canada, Europe and Asia Pacific as well as through the development of specially tailored versions of our services to meet the needs of our clients who trade in international markets. Our investments and development activities in these countries expose us to currency exchange rate fluctuations primarily between the U.S. Dollar and the British Pound Sterling, Euro, Australian Dollar, Canadian Dollar and Hong Kong Dollar. When the U.S. Dollar strengthens against these currencies, the U.S. Dollar value of non-U.S. Dollar-based revenue decreases. To the extent that our international activities recorded in local currencies increase in the future, our exposure to fluctuations in currency exchange rates will correspondingly increase. We have not engaged in derivative financial instruments as a means of hedging this financial statement risk. Non-U.S. Dollar cash balances held overseas are generally kept at levels necessary to meet current operating and capitalization needs. At times, we may hedge small amounts of the Non-U.S. Dollar cash balances to mitigate exposure.

        Approximately 40% and 36% of our revenues for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, were denominated in non-U.S. Dollar currencies. For the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively, we estimate that a hypothetical 10% adverse change in the above mentioned foreign exchange rates would have resulted in a decrease in net income of $0.2 million and $4.3 million, respectively.

Equity Price Risk

        Equity price risk results from exposure to changes in the prices of equity securities on positions held due to trading errors, including client errors and our own errors, and from principal trading activities, primarily on an intra-day basis. Equity price risk can arise from liquidating all such principal positions. Accordingly, we maintain policies and procedures regarding the management of our principal trading accounts, which require review by a supervisory principal. It is our policy to attempt to trade out of all positions by the end of the day. However, at times, we hold positions overnight if we are unable to trade out of positions during the day. In addition, certain positions may be liquidated over a period of time in an effort to minimize market impact, and we may incur losses relating to such positions. We may also have positions in exchange-traded funds ("ETFs") with offsetting positions in the underlying securities as part of an ETF creation and redemption service that we provide to clients.

        We manage equity price risk associated with open positions through the establishment and monitoring of trading policies and through controls and review procedures that ensure communication and timely resolution of trading issues. In addition, our operations and trading departments review all trades that are open at the end of the day.

Cash Management Risk

        Our cash management strategy seeks to optimize excess liquid assets by preserving principal, maintaining liquidity to satisfy capital requirements, minimizing risk and maximizing our after-tax rate of return. Our policy is to invest in high quality credit issuers, limit the amount of credit exposure to any one issuer and invest in tax efficient strategies. Our first priority is to reduce the risk of principal loss. We seek to preserve our invested funds by limiting default risk, market risk, and re-investment

47


Table of Contents

risk. We attempt to mitigate default risk by investing principally in U.S. government money market mutual funds and other short-term government debt-based instruments.

        For working capital purposes, we invest only in money market instruments. Cash balances that are not needed for normal operations may be invested in a tax efficient manner in instruments with appropriate maturities and levels of risk to correspond to expected liquidity needs. To the extent that we invest in equity securities, we ensure portfolio liquidity by investing in marketable mutual fund securities with active secondary or resale markets. We do not use derivative financial instruments in our investment portfolio. At December 31, 2013 and 2012, our unrestricted cash and cash equivalents and mutual fund securities owned were $266.4 million and $250.5 million, respectively.

48


Table of Contents

Item 8.    Financial Statements and Supplementary Data

49


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Investment Technology Group, Inc.:

        We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial condition of Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries (the Company) as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2013. These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company's management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audits.

        We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

        In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2013, in conformity with U.S. generally accepted accounting principles.

        We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), Investment Technology Group, Inc.'s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO), and our report dated March 13, 2014, expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of the Company's internal control over financial reporting.


/s/ KPMG LLP  

 

 

 

New York, New York
March 17, 2014

50


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition

(In thousands, except par value and share amounts)

 
  December 31,  
 
  2013   2012  

Assets

             

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 261,897   $ 245,875  

Cash restricted or segregated under regulations and other

    71,202     61,117  

Deposits with clearing organizations

    74,771     29,149  

Securities owned, at fair value

    7,436     10,086  

Receivables from brokers, dealers and clearing organizations

    1,018,342     1,107,119  

Receivables from customers

    591,004     546,825  

Premises and equipment, net

    66,171     54,989  

Capitalized software, net

    37,892     43,994  

Other intangibles, net

    31,201     35,227  

Income taxes receivable

    54     7,460  

Deferred taxes

    34,130     39,155  

Other assets

    15,787     15,763  
           

Total assets

  $ 2,209,887   $ 2,196,759  
           
           

Liabilities and Stockholders' Equity

             

Liabilities:

             

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

  $ 175,931   $ 165,062  

Short-term bank loans

    73,539     22,154  

Payables to brokers, dealers and clearing organizations

    1,025,268     1,337,459  

Payables to customers

    469,264     226,892  

Securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value

    2,953     5,249  

Income taxes payable

    14,805     10,608  

Deferred taxes

    363     293  

Term debt

    30,332     19,272  
           

Total liabilities

    1,792,455     1,786,989  
           

Commitments and contingencies

             

Stockholders' Equity:

             

Preferred stock, $0.01 par value; 1,000,000 shares authorized; no shares issued or outstanding

         

Common stock, $0.01 par value; 100,000,000 shares authorized; 52,158,374 and 52,037,011 shares issued at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively

    522     520  

Additional paid-in capital

    240,057     245,002  

Retained earnings

    436,570     405,485  

Common stock held in treasury, at cost; 16,005,500 and 14,677,872 shares at December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively

    (268,253 )   (253,111 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (net of tax)

    8,536     11,874  
           

Total stockholders' equity

    417,432     409,770  
           

Total liabilities and stockholders' equity

  $ 2,209,887   $ 2,196,759  
           
           

   

See accompanying Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

51


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Statements of Operations

(In thousands, except per share amounts)

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
 
  2013   2012   2011  

Revenues:

                   

Commissions and fees

  $ 408,619   $ 380,976   $ 445,801  

Recurring

    104,172     109,767     110,919  

Other

    18,010     13,693     15,317  
               

Total revenues

    530,801     504,436     572,037  
               

Expenses:

                   

Compensation and employee benefits

    201,254     196,362     219,307  

Transaction processing

    83,792     81,173     91,602  

Occupancy and equipment

    69,022     62,637     60,191  

Telecommunications and data processing services

    53,607     59,850     58,460  

Other general and administrative

    77,431     88,543     90,808  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

        274,285     229,317  

Restructuring charges

    (75 )   9,499     24,432  

Acquisition-related costs

            2,523  

Interest expense

    2,715     2,542     2,025  
               

Total expenses

    487,746     774,891     778,665  
               

Income (loss) before income tax expense (benefit)

    43,055     (270,455 )   (206,628 )

Income tax expense (benefit)

    11,970     (22,596 )   (26,839 )
               

Net income (loss)

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 )
               
               

Earnings (loss) per share:

                   

Basic

  $ 0.84   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 )
               
               

Diluted

  $ 0.82   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 )
               
               

Basic weighted average number of common shares outstanding

    36,788     38,418     40,691  
               
               

Diluted weighted average number of common shares outstanding

    38,114     38,418     40,691  
               
               

   

See accompanying Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

52


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)

(In thousands)

 
  Year Ended December 31,  
 
  2013   2012   2011  

Net income (loss)

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 )

Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:

                   

Currency translation adjustment

    (3,338 )   3,533     (2,066 )

Net change in securities available for sale

            (86 )
               

Other comprehensive income (loss)

    (3,338 )   3,533     (2,152 )
               

Comprehensive income (loss)

  $ 27,747   $ (244,326 ) $ (181,941 )
               
               

   

See accompanying Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

53


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity

For the Years Ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011

(In thousands, except share amounts)

 
  Preferred
Stock
  Common
Stock
  Additional
Paid-in
Capital
  Retained
Earnings
  Common
Stock
Held in
Treasury
  Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income/(Loss)
  Total
Stockholders'
Equity
 

Balance at December 31, 2010

        518     246,085     833,133     (220,161 )   10,493     870,068  
                               

Net loss

                (179,789 )           (179,789 )

Other comprehensive loss

                        (2,152 )   (2,152 )

Issuance of common stock for stock options (111,792 shares), restricted share awards (787,399 shares) and employee stock unit awards (288,917 shares), including tax benefit shortfall and award cancellations of $3.3 million

            (19,285 )       24,514         5,229  

Issuance of common stock for the employee stock purchase plan (108,621 shares)

        1     1,253                 1,254  

Purchase of common stock for treasury (2,974,200 shares)

                    (38,928 )       (38,928 )

Shares withheld for net settlements of share-based awards (369,099 shares)

                    (5,984 )       (5,984 )

Share-based compensation

            21,416                 21,416  
                               

Balance at December 31, 2011

        519     249,469     653,344     (240,559 )   8,341     671,114  
                               

Net loss

                (247,859 )           (247,859 )

Other comprehensive income

                        3,533     3,533  

Issuance of common stock for restricted share awards (670,933 shares) and employee stock unit awards (71,580 shares), including tax benefit shortfall and award cancellations of $4.1 million

            (16,306 )       13,722         (2,584 )

Awards reclassified to liability for cash settlement (259,840 shares)

            (2,838 )               (2,838 )

Issuance of common stock for the employee stock purchase plan (137,782 shares)

        1     1,130                 1,131  

Purchase of common stock for treasury (2,470,000 shares)

                    (23,457 )       (23,457 )

Shares withheld for net settlements of share-based awards (270,467 shares)

                    (2,817 )       (2,817 )

Share-based compensation

            13,547                 13,547  
                               

Balance at December 31, 2012

  $   $ 520   $ 245,002   $ 405,485   $ (253,111 ) $ 11,874   $ 409,770  
                               
                               

Net income

                31,085             31,085  

Other comprehensive loss

                        (3,338 )   (3,338 )

Issuance of common stock for restricted share awards (1,029,623 shares), including tax benefit shortfall and award cancellations of $1.5 million

            (19,774 )       17,559         (2,215 )

Issuance of common stock for the employee stock purchase plan (121,363 shares)

        2     933                 935  

Purchase of common stock for treasury (2,005,200 shares)

                    (28,169 )       (28,169 )

Shares withheld for net settlements of share-based awards (352,051 shares)

                    (4,532 )       (4,532 )

Share-based compensation

            13,896                 13,896  
                               

Balance at December 31, 2013

  $   $ 522   $ 240,057   $ 436,570   $ (268,253 ) $ 8,536   $ 417,432  
                               
                               

   

See accompanying Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

54


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC. AND SUBSIDIARIES

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

(In thousands)

 
  Year ended December 31,  
 
  2013   2012   2011  

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

                   

Net income (loss)

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 )

Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash provided by operating activities:

                   

Depreciation and amortization

    53,606     56,493     59,057  

Deferred income tax expense (benefit)

    3,051     (27,156 )   (32,593 )

Provision for doubtful accounts

    (405 )   1,401     203  

Share-based compensation

    20,861     15,628     20,156  

Fixed asset disposal

    649          

Non-cash restructuring charges, net

    357     548     2,480  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

    101     274,285     229,317  

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

                   

Cash restricted or segregated under regulations and other

    (9,491 )   11,700     (2,625 )

Deposits with clearing organizations

    (45,622 )   (3,611 )   (11,303 )

Securities owned, at fair value

    2,445     (4,689 )   18,403  

Receivables from brokers, dealers and clearing organizations

    86,593     (230,137 )   (6,671 )

Receivables from customers

    (72,989 )   (59,252 )   134,913  

Accounts payable and accrued expenses

    2,614     (22,905 )   (18,079 )

Payables to brokers, dealers and clearing organizations

    (315,724 )   241,231     (59,605 )

Payables to customers

    276,846     15,595     (64,592 )

Securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value

    (2,086 )   4,695     (18,915 )

Income taxes receivable/payable

    12,148     (1,459 )   (6,053 )

Excess tax benefit

    (510 )        

Other, net

    1,663     2,284     2,755  
               

Net cash provided by operating activities

    45,192     26,792     67,059  
               

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

                   

Acquisition of subsidiaries and minority interests, net of cash acquired

    (474 )       (36,185 )

Capital purchases

    (33,549 )   (33,424 )   (22,857 )

Capitalization of software development costs

    (22,579 )   (24,635 )   (29,061 )

Proceeds from sale of investments

            2,095  
               

Net cash used in investing activities

    (56,602 )   (58,059 )   (86,008 )
               

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

                   

Proceeds of short-term bank loans, net

    51,385     20,548     1,606  

Proceeds from term loans

            25,469  

Repayments of term loans

    (9,505 )   (7,185 )   (4,043 )

Proceeds from interim funding facility

        605      

Proceeds from sales-lease back transactions

    20,565     1,855     2,571  

Debt issuance costs

            (2,908 )

Excess tax benefit

    510          

Common stock issued

    177     2,674     9,753  

Common stock repurchased

    (28,169 )   (23,457 )   (38,928 )

Shares withheld for net settlements of share-based awards

    (4,532 )   (2,817 )   (5,984 )
               

Net cash provided by (used in) financing activities

    30,431     (7,777 )   (12,464 )
               

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

    (2,999 )   731     (1,409 )
               

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

    16,022     (38,313 )   (32,822 )
               

Cash and cash equivalents—beginning of year

    245,875     284,188     317,010  
               

Cash and cash equivalents—end of year

  $ 261,897   $ 245,875   $ 284,188  
               
               

Supplemental cash flow information:

                   

Interest paid

  $ 3,343   $ 2,673   $ 2,453  

Income taxes (refunded) paid

  $ (4,079 ) $ 5,495   $ 15,508  

   

See accompanying Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

55


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(1)   Organization and Basis of Presentation

        Investment Technology Group, Inc. was formed as a Delaware corporation on July 22, 1983. Its principal subsidiaries include: (1) ITG Inc., AlterNet Securities, Inc. ("AlterNet") and ITG Derivatives LLC ("ITG Derivatives"), institutional broker-dealers in the United States ("U.S."), (2) Investment Technology Group Limited ("ITG Europe"), an institutional broker-dealer in Europe, (3) ITG Australia Limited ("ITG Australia"), an institutional broker-dealer in Australia, (4) ITG Canada Corp. ("ITG Canada"), an institutional broker-dealer in Canada, (5) ITG Hong Kong Limited ("ITG Hong Kong"), an institutional broker-dealer in Hong Kong, (6) ITG Software Solutions, Inc., our intangible property, software development and maintenance subsidiary in the U.S., and (7) ITG Solutions Network, Inc., a holding company for ITG Analytics, Inc., a provider of pre- and post-trade analysis, fair value and trade optimization services, ITG Investment Research, Inc. ("ITG Investment Research"), a provider of independent data-driven investment research, and ITG Platforms Inc., a provider of trade order and execution management technology and network connectivity services for the financial community.

        ITG is an independent execution and research broker that partners with global portfolio managers and traders to provide unique data-driven insights throughout the investment process. From investment decision through to settlement, ITG helps clients understand market trends, improve performance, mitigate risk and navigate increasingly complex markets. A leader in electronic trading since launching the POSIT crossing network in 1987, ITG takes a consultative approach in delivering the highest quality institutional liquidity, execution services, analytical tools and proprietary research. The firm is headquartered in New York with offices in North America, Europe, and the Asia Pacific region.

        Our business is organized into four reportable operating segments (see Note 22, Segment Reporting, to the consolidated financial statements):

    U.S. Operations

    Canadian Operations

    European Operations and

    Asia Pacific Operations.

        Our four operating segments offer a wide range of solutions for asset managers and broker-dealers in the areas of electronic brokerage; research, sales and trading; platforms; and analytics. These offerings include trade execution services and solutions for portfolio management, as well as investment research, pre-trade analytics and post-trade analytics and processing.

        The consolidated financial statements and accompanying notes are prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the U.S. ("U.S. GAAP"). The consolidated financial statements reflect all adjustments, which are in the opinion of management, necessary for the fair presentation of results.

(2)   Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

Principles of Consolidation

        The consolidated financial statements represent the consolidation of the accounts of ITG and its subsidiaries in conformity with U.S. GAAP. All intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated in consolidation. Investments in unconsolidated companies (generally 20 to 50 percent ownership), in which the Company has the ability to exercise significant influence but neither has a

56


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

controlling interest nor is the primary beneficiary, are accounted for under the equity method. Investments in entities in which the Company does not have the ability to exercise significant influence are accounted for under the cost method. Under certain criteria indicated in Accounting Standards Codification ("ASC") 810, Consolidation , a partially-owned affiliate would be consolidated when it has less than a 50% ownership if the Company was the primary beneficiary of that entity. At the present time, there are no interests in variable interest entities.

Use of Estimates

        The preparation of financial statements in conformity with U.S. GAAP requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses and the disclosure of contingent assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses. Actual results could differ from those estimates.

Revenue Recognition

        Transactions in securities, commissions and fees and related expenses are recorded on a trade date basis. Commissions and fees are derived primarily from (1) commissions charged for trade execution services, (2) income generated from net executions, whereby equity orders are filled at different prices within or at the National Best Bid and Offer and (3) commission sharing arrangements.

        Recurring revenues are derived from the following primary sources: (1) connectivity fees, (2) software and analytical products and services, (3) maintenance and customer technical support for the Company's order management system and (4) investment and market research services.

        Substantially all of the Company's recurring revenue arrangements do not require significant modification or customization of the underlying software. Accordingly, the vast majority of software revenue is recognized pursuant to the requirements of ASC 985, Software . Specifically, revenue recognition from subscriptions, maintenance, customer technical support and professional services commences when all of the following criteria are met: (1) persuasive evidence of a legally binding arrangement with a customer exists, (2) delivery has occurred, (3) the fee is deemed fixed or determinable and free of contingencies or significant uncertainties and (4) collection is probable. Where software is provided under a hosting arrangement, revenue is accounted for as a service arrangement since the customer does not have the contractual right to take possession of the software at any time during the hosting period without significant penalty (or it is not feasible for the customer to run the software on either its own hardware or third party hardware).

        Subscription agreements for software products generally include provisions that, among other things, allow customers to receive unspecified future software upgrades for no additional fee, as well as the right to use the software products with maintenance for the term of the agreement, typically one to three years. Under these agreements, once all four of the above noted revenue recognition criteria are met, revenue is recognized ratably over the term of the subscription agreement. If a subscription agreement includes an acceptance provision, revenue is not recognized until the earlier of the receipt of written acceptance from the customer or, if not notified by the customer to cancel the license agreement, the expiration of the acceptance period.

        Revenues for investment research and analytical products sold on a subscription basis are recognized when services are rendered provided that persuasive evidence of a legally binding arrangement exists, the fees are fixed or determinable and collectability is reasonably assured.

        Other revenues include: (1) income from principal trading in our Canadian Operations, including arbitrage trading, (2) the net spread on foreign exchange contracts entered into to facilitate equity

57


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

trades by clients in different currencies, (3) the net interest spread earned on securities borrowed and loaned matched book transactions, (4) non-recurring consulting services, such as one-time implementation and customer-training-related activities, (5) investment and interest income, (6) interest income on securities borrowed in connection with customers' settlement activities and (7) market gains/losses resulting from temporary positions in securities assumed in the normal course of agency trading (including client errors and accommodations).

        Revenues from professional services, which are sold as a multiple-element arrangement with the implementation of software, are deferred until go-live (or acceptance, if applicable) of the software and recognized in the same manner as the subscription over the remaining term of the initial contract. Professional services that are not connected with the implementation of software are recognized on a time and material basis as incurred.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

        The Company considers all highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less to be cash equivalents.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

        Substantially all of the Company's financial instruments are carried at fair value or amounts approximating fair value. Cash and cash equivalents, securities owned and securities sold, not yet purchased and certain payables are carried at market value or estimated fair value.

Securities Transactions

        Receivables from brokers, dealers and clearing organizations include amounts receivable for fails to deliver, cash deposits for securities borrowed, amounts receivable on open transactions from clearing organizations and non-U.S. broker-dealers and commissions and fees receivable. Payables to brokers, dealers and clearing organizations include amounts payable for fails to receive, amounts payable on open transactions to clearing organizations and non-U.S. broker-dealers, securities loaned and execution cost payables. Receivables from customers consist of customer fails to deliver, amounts receivable on open transactions from non-U.S. customers, commissions and fees earned and receivables billed for research services, net of an allowance for doubtful accounts. Payables to customers primarily consist of customer fails to receive and amounts payable on open transactions to non-U.S. customers. Commissions and fees and related expenses for all securities transactions are recorded on a trade date basis.

        Securities owned, at fair value consist of common stock and mutual funds. Securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value consist of common stock. Marketable securities owned are valued using market quotes from third parties. Unrealized gains and losses are included in other revenues in the Consolidated Statements of Operations, except for unrealized gains and losses on available-for-sale securities which are reported in other accumulated comprehensive income unless there is an other than temporary impairment in their carrying value.

Securities Borrowed and Loaned

        Securities borrowed and securities loaned transactions are reported as collateralized financings. Securities borrowed transactions require the Company to deposit cash, letters of credit, or other collateral with the lender. With respect to securities loaned, the Company receives collateral in the form of cash or other collateral in amounts generally in excess of the fair value of securities loaned. The Company monitors the fair value of securities borrowed and loaned on a daily basis, with

58


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

additional collateral obtained or refunded as necessary. Securities borrowed and securities loaned transactions are recorded at the amount of cash collateral advanced or received, adjusted for additional collateral obtained or received.

        The Company engages in securities borrowed and securities loaned transactions as part of its U.S. self-clearing process primarily to facilitate customer transactions, including shortened or extended settlement activities and for failed settlements. On these transactions, interest income for securities borrowed is recorded in other revenue while interest expense from securities loaned is recorded in transaction processing expense on the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

        The Company also operates a matched book business where securities are borrowed from one party for the express purpose of loaning such securities to another party, generating a net interest spread. The Company records the net interest earned on these transactions in other revenue on the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

Client Commission Arrangements

        Institutional customers are permitted to allocate a portion of their gross commissions to pay for research products and other services provided by third parties and the Company's subsidiaries. The amounts allocated for those purposes are commonly referred to as client commission arrangements. The cost of independent research and directed brokerage arrangements is accounted for on an accrual basis. Commission revenue is recorded when earned on a trade date basis. Payments relating to client commission arrangements are netted against the commission revenues. Prepaid research, including balance transfer receivables due from other broker-dealers, net of an allowance is included in receivables from customers and receivables from brokers, dealers and clearing organizations, while accrued research payable is classified as accounts payable and accrued expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition.

        Client commissions allocated for research and related prepaid and accrued research balances for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 were as follows (dollars in millions):

 
  2013   2012   2011  

Client commissions

  $ 122.8   $ 112.1   $ 130.8  
               
               

Prepaid research, gross

  $ 4.5   $ 5.1   $ 3.7  

Allowance for prepaid research

    (0.2 )   (0.4 )   (0.4 )
               

Prepaid research, net of allowance

  $ 4.3   $ 4.7   $ 3.3  
               
               

Accrued research payable

  $ 52.0   $ 38.6   $ 50.7  
               
               

Capitalized Software

        Software development costs are capitalized when the technological feasibility of a product has been established. Technological feasibility is established when all planning, designing, coding and testing activities have been devised to ensure that the product can be produced to meet its design specifications, including functions, features, and technical performance requirements. All costs incurred to establish technological feasibility are expensed as incurred. Capitalized software costs are amortized using the straight-line method over a three-year period beginning when the product is available for general release to customers.

59


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

Research and Development

        All research and development costs are expensed as incurred. Research and development costs, which are primarily included in other general and administrative expenses and compensation and employee benefits in the Consolidated Statements of Operations, are estimated at $40.9 million, $44.6 million and $47.5 million for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

Business Combinations, Goodwill and Other Intangibles

        Assets acquired and liabilities assumed are recorded at their fair values on the date of acquisition. The cost to be allocated in a business combination includes consideration paid to the sellers, including cash and the fair values of assets distributed and the fair values of liabilities assumed. Both direct (e.g., legal and professional fees) and indirect costs of the business combination are expensed as incurred. Certain agreements to acquire entities include potential additional consideration that is payable, contingent on the acquired company maintaining or achieving specified earnings levels in future periods. The fair value of any contingent consideration is recognized on the acquisition date with subsequent changes in that fair value reflected in income. The consolidated financial statements and results of operations reflect an acquired business from the date of acquisition.

        An intangible asset is recognized as an asset apart from goodwill if it arises from contractual or other legal rights or if it is separable (i.e., capable of being separated or divided from the acquired entity and sold, transferred, licensed, rented, or exchanged). Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of each acquired entity over the amounts assigned to the tangible and identifiable intangible assets acquired and liabilities assumed.

        The judgments that are made in determining the estimated fair value assigned to each class of assets acquired and liabilities assumed, as well as asset lives, can materially impact net income in periods following a business combination. Traditional approaches used to determine fair value include the income, cost and market approaches. The income approach presumes that the value of an asset can be estimated by the net economic benefit to be received over the life of the asset, discounted to present value. The cost approach presumes that an investor would pay no more for an asset than its replacement or reproduction cost. The market approach estimates value based on what other participants in the market have paid for reasonably similar assets. Although each valuation approach is considered in valuing the assets acquired, the approach or combination of approaches ultimately selected is based on the characteristics of the asset and the availability of information.

        Any goodwill was previously assessed no less than annually for impairment. The fair values used in the Company's impairment testing were determined by the discounted cash flow method (an income approach) and where appropriate, a combination of the discounted cash flow method and the guideline company method (a market approach). An impairment loss is indicated if the estimated fair value of a reporting unit was less than its net book value. In such a case, the impairment loss was calculated as the amount by which the carrying value of goodwill exceeded its implied fair value. In determining the fair value of each of the Company's reporting units, the discounted cash flow analyses employed required significant assumptions and estimates about the future operations of each reporting unit. Significant judgments inherent in these analyses included the determination of appropriate discount rates, the amount and timing of expected future cash flows and growth rates. The cash flows employed in the Company's discounted cash flow analyses were based on financial budgets and forecasts developed internally by management. The Company's discount rate assumptions were based on a determination of its required rate of return on equity capital.

60


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Other intangibles with definite lives are amortized over their useful lives. All other intangibles are assessed at least annually for impairment. If impairment is indicated, an impairment loss is calculated as the amount by which the carrying value of an intangible asset exceeds its estimated fair value.

Premises and Equipment

        Furniture, fixtures and equipment are carried at cost and are depreciated using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the assets (generally three to seven years). Leasehold improvements are carried at cost and are amortized using the straight-line method over the lesser of the estimated useful lives of the related assets or the non-cancelable lease term.

Impairment of Long-Lived Assets

        Long-lived assets to be held and used are reviewed for impairment whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of such assets may not be recoverable. Determination of recoverability is generally based on an estimate of undiscounted future cash flows resulting from the use of the asset and its eventual disposition, as well as specific appraisal in certain instances. Measurement of an impairment loss for long-lived assets that management expects to hold and use is based on the fair value of the asset as estimated using a cash flow model. Long-lived assets to be disposed of are reported at the lower of carrying amount or fair value less costs to sell.

Income Taxes

        Income taxes are accounted for using the asset and liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are recognized for the future tax consequences attributable to differences between the financial statement carrying amounts of existing assets and liabilities and their respective tax bases. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured using enacted tax rates expected to apply to taxable income in the years in which those temporary differences are expected to be recovered or settled. The effect on deferred tax assets and liabilities of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. A valuation allowance is recorded against deferred tax assets if it is more likely than not that such assets will not be realized. Contingent income tax liabilities are recorded when the criteria for loss recognition have been met. An uncertain tax position is recognized based on the determination of whether or not a tax position is more likely than not to be sustained upon examination based upon the technical merits of the position. If this recognition threshold is met, the tax benefit is then measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than fifty percent likelihood of being realized upon ultimate resolution.

Taxes Collected from Customers and Remitted to Governmental Authorities

        Taxes assessed by a governmental authority that are directly imposed on a revenue producing transaction between the Company and its customers, including but not limited to sales, use, value added and some excise taxes are presented in the consolidated financial statements on a net basis (excluded from revenues).

Earnings per Share

        Basic earnings per share is determined by dividing earnings by the average number of shares of common stock outstanding, while diluted earnings per share is determined by dividing earnings by the average number of shares of common stock adjusted for the dilutive effect of common stock

61


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

equivalents by application of the treasury stock method. Common stock equivalents are excluded from the diluted calculation if their effect is anti-dilutive.

Share-based Compensation

        Share-based compensation expense requires measurement of compensation cost for share-based awards at fair value and recognition of compensation cost over the vesting period, net of estimated forfeitures. For awards with graded vesting schedules that only have service conditions, the Company recognizes compensation cost evenly over the requisite service period for the entire award using the straight-line attribution method. For awards with service conditions as well as performance or market conditions, the Company recognizes compensation cost on a straight-line basis over the requisite service period for each separately vesting portion of the award as if the award was, in-substance, multiple awards.

        The fair value of stock options granted is estimated using the Black-Scholes option-pricing model, which considers, among other factors, the expected term of the award and the expected volatility of the Company's stock price. Although the Black-Scholes model meets the requirements of ASC 718, Compensation—Stock Compensation , the fair values generated by the model may not be indicative of the actual fair values of the underlying awards, as it does not consider other factors important to those share-based compensation awards, such as continued employment, periodic vesting requirements and limited transferability.

        The risk-free interest rate used in the Black-Scholes option-pricing model is based on the U.S. Treasury yield curve in effect at the time of grant. The expected option life is based on historical experience of employee exercise behavior. Expected volatility is based on historical volatility, implied volatility, price observations taken at regular intervals and other factors deemed appropriate. Expected dividend is based upon the current dividend rate. No options were granted in 2013 or 2012.

        The fair value of restricted share awards is based on the fair value of the Company's common stock on the grant date.

        Certain restricted stock awards granted have both service and market conditions. Awards with market conditions are valued based on (a) the grant date fair value of the award for equity-based awards or (b) the period-end fair value for liability-based awards. Fair value for market condition based awards is determined using a Monte Carlo simulation model to simulate a range of possible future stock prices for the Company's common stock. Compensation costs for awards with market conditions are recognized on a graded vesting basis over the estimated service period calculated by the Monte Carlo simulation model.

        Phantom stock awards are settled in cash and are therefore classified as liability awards. The fair value of the liability is remeasured at each reporting date until final settlement using the fair value of the Company's common stock on that date.

        Cash flows related to income tax deductions in excess of the compensation cost recognized on share-based awards exercised during the period presented (excess tax benefit) are classified in financing cash flows in the Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows.

Foreign Currency Translation

        Assets and liabilities denominated in non-U.S. currencies are translated at rates of exchange prevailing on the date of the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition, and revenues and expenses are translated at average rates of exchange during the fiscal year. Gains or losses on

62


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

translation of the financial statements of a foreign operation, where the functional currency is other than the U.S. Dollar, together with the after-tax effect of exchange rate changes on intercompany transactions of a long-term investment nature, are reflected as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income in stockholders' equity. Gains or losses on foreign currency transactions are included in other general and administrative expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

Common Stock Held in Treasury, at Cost

        The purchase of treasury stock is accounted for under the cost method with the shares of stock repurchased reflected as a reduction to stockholders' equity and included in common stock held in treasury, at cost in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition. When treasury shares are reissued, they are recorded at the average cost of the treasury shares acquired. The Company held 16,005,500 and 14,677,872 shares of common stock in treasury as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, respectively.

Recently Adopted Accounting Standards

        In July 2013, the Financial Accounting Standards Board ("FASB") issued Accounting Standards Update ("ASU") 2013-11, Income Taxes (Topic 740), Presentation of an Unrecognized Tax Benefit When a Net Operating Loss Carrryforward, a Similar Tax Loss, or a Tax Credit Carryforward Exists . These provisions require unrecognized tax benefits to be presented as a decrease in a net operating loss, similar tax loss or tax credit carryforward if certain criteria are met. The adoption of these provisions did not have a material impact on ITG's consolidated financial statements.

        In February 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-02, Reporting of Amounts Reclassified Out of Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income , which amends certain provisions in FASB ASC 220, Comprehensive Income . These provisions require the disclosure of significant amounts that are reclassified out of other comprehensive income into net income in their entirety during the reporting period. These provisions are effective for fiscal and interim periods beginning after December 15, 2012. The adoption of these provisions did not have a material impact on ITG's consolidated financial statements.

        In December 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-11, Disclosures about Offsetting Assets and Liabilities , which amends certain provisions in ASC Topic 210, Balance Sheet . Subsequently in January 2013, the FASB issued ASU 2013-01, Clarifying the Scope of Disclosures about Offsetting Assets and Liabilities , which amends the scope of ASU 2011-11. ASU 2013-01 clarifies that ASU 2011-11 applies only to derivatives, repurchase agreements and reverse purchase agreements, and securities borrowing and securities lending transactions that are either offset in accordance with specific criteria contained in ASC Topics 210 and 815, Derivatives and Hedging , or subject to a master netting arrangement or similar agreement. These provisions require additional disclosures for the abovementioned financial instruments and are effective for fiscal and interim periods beginning on or after January 1, 2013. The adoption of these provisions did not have a material impact on ITG's consolidated financial statements.

        In July 2012, the FASB issued ASU 2012-02, Testing Indefinite-lived Intangible Assets for Impairment , an update to existing guidance on the impairment assessment of indefinite-lived intangibles. This update simplifies the impairment assessment of indefinite-lived intangibles by allowing companies to consider qualitative factors to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of an indefinite-lived intangible asset is less than its carrying amount. This option is in lieu of performing a quantitative fair value assessment. The Company elected to early adopt this update effective for the

63


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

interim reporting period, which began on October 1, 2012. The adoption of this update did not have a material impact on the Company's consolidated financial statements.

        In September 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-08, Intangibles—Goodwill and Other (Topic 350): Testing Goodwill for Impairment , in an effort to simplify goodwill impairment testing. The amendments permit companies to first assess qualitative factors to determine whether it is more likely than not that the fair value of a reporting unit is less than its carrying amount as a basis for determining whether it is necessary to perform the two-step goodwill impairment test described in Topic 350. The more-likely-than-not threshold is defined as having a likelihood of more than 50%. This standard became effective for the Company on January 1, 2012, the adoption of which changed the process and procedures for the Company's goodwill impairment testing, but did not have an impact on its results of operations, financial position or cash flows.

        In June 2011, the FASB issued ASU 2011-5, Comprehensive Income (Topic 220). Companies now have two choices of how to present items of net income, comprehensive income and total comprehensive income. Companies can create one continuous statement of comprehensive income or two separate consecutive statements. This standard became effective for the Company on January 1, 2012, the adoption of which changed the presentation of its comprehensive income, but did not have an impact on its results of operations, financial position or cash flows.

(3)   Restructuring Charges

2013 Restructuring

        In the second quarter of 2013, the Company implemented a strategic plan to close its technology research and development facility in Israel and outsource that function to a third party service provider effective January 1, 2014. This plan is primarily focused on reducing costs through limiting the Company's geographic footprint while maintaining the necessary technological expertise via a consulting arrangement.

        The following table summarizes the pre-tax charges incurred in the European Operations reporting segment (dollars in thousands). Employee severance costs relate to the termination of approximately 40 employees. These charges are classified as restructuring charges in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

 
  Total  

Employee separation and related costs

  $ 1,452  

Consolidation of leased facilities

    100  
       

Total

  $ 1,552  
       
       

64


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Activity and liability balances recorded as part of the 2013 restructuring plan through December 31, 2013 are as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  Employee
separation costs
  Consolidation
of leased
facilities
  Total  

Restructuring charges recognized in 2013

  $ 1,452   $ 100   $ 1,552  

Cash payments

    (915 )       (915 )

Acceleration of share-based compensation in additional paid-in capital

    (357 )       (357 )

Other

    55         55  
               

Balance at December 31, 2013

  $ 235   $ 100   $ 335  
               
               

        The remaining accrued costs are expected to be paid by the first quarter of 2014.

        In addition to the charges noted above, this restructuring also triggered the recognition of a tax charge of $1.6 million in the second quarter of 2013 associated with the anticipated withdrawal of capital from Israel.

2012 Restructuring

        In the fourth quarter of 2012, the Company implemented a restructuring plan to reduce annual operating costs by approximately $20 million. The initiative was designed to improve financial performance and enhance stockholder returns while maintaining ITG's competitiveness and high standard of client service. This plan primarily focused on reducing workforce, market data and other general and administrative costs across ITG's businesses. The Company incurred a charge of $9.5 million related to this restructuring, entirely for employee separation costs. During the second quarter of 2013, the Company reversed $0.8 million of this expense as actual payments made were less than originally estimated.

        Activity and liability balances recorded as part of the 2012 restructuring plan through December 31, 2013 are as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  Employee
separation costs
 

Balance at December 31, 2012

  $ 6,908  

Cash payments

    (5,087 )

Other

    (1,746 )
       

Balance at December 31, 2013

  $ 75  
       
       

        The remaining accrued costs are expected to be paid by the end of 2014.

2011 Restructuring

        In the second and fourth quarters of 2011, the Company implemented restructuring plans to improve margins and enhance stockholder returns. The restructuring charges consisted of employee separation costs and lease abandonment costs. During the second quarter of 2013, the Company reversed $0.7 million of expense as the Company sub-let vacated office space and actual payments made were less than originally estimated.

65


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        The following table summarizes the changes during 2012 in the Company's liability balance related to the 2011 restructuring plans, which is included in accounts payable and accrued expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition (dollars in thousands):

 
  Employee
separation costs
  Consolidation
of leased
facilities
  Total  

Balance at December 31, 2012

  $ 117   $ 3,098   $ 3,215  

Adjustment for sub-lease

        (700 )   (700 )

Utilized—cash

    (12 )   (831 )   (843 )

Other

    (98 )       (98 )
               

Balance at December 31, 2013

  $ 7   $ 1,567   $ 1,574  
               
               

        The remaining accrued employee separation costs reflect the settlement of restricted share awards, which continued through February 2014. The payment of the remaining accrued costs related to the vacated leased facilities will continue through December 2016.

2010 Restructuring

    U.S.

        In the fourth quarter of 2010, the Company closed its Westchester, NY office, relocated the staff, primarily sales traders and support, to its New York City office, and incurred a restructuring charge of $2.3 million for lease abandonment and employee separation. The following table summarizes the changes during 2013 in the Company's liability balance related to the 2010 U.S. restructuring plan, which is included in accounts payable and accrued expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition (dollars in thousands):

 
  Consolidation
of leased
facilities
 

Balance at December 31, 2012

  $ 2,172  

Utilized—cash

    (388 )
       

Balance at December 31, 2013

  $ 1,784  
       
       

        The remaining accrued costs related to the leased facilities will continue to be paid through December 2016.

(4)   Fair Value Measurements

        Fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. In determining fair value, various methods are used including market, income and cost approaches. Based on these approaches, certain assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability are used, including assumptions about risk and/or the risks inherent in the inputs to the valuation technique. These inputs can be readily observable, market-corroborated, or generally unobservable firm inputs. Valuation techniques that are used maximize the use of observable inputs and minimize the use of unobservable inputs. Based on the observability of the inputs used in the valuation techniques, fair value measured financial instruments are categorized according to the fair value hierarchy prescribed by ASC 820, Fair Value Measurements and Disclosures . The fair value hierarchy ranks the quality and

66


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

reliability of the information used to determine fair values. Financial assets and liabilities carried at fair value are classified and disclosed in one of the following three categories:

    Level 1: Fair value measurements using unadjusted quoted market prices in active markets for identical, unrestricted assets or liabilities.

    Level 2: Fair value measurements using correlation with (directly or indirectly) observable market-based inputs, unobservable inputs that are corroborated by market data, or quoted prices in markets that are not active.

    Level 3: Fair value measurements using inputs that are significant and not readily observable in the market.

        Level 1 consists of financial instruments whose value is based on quoted market prices such as exchange-traded mutual funds and listed equities.

        Level 2 includes financial instruments that are valued based upon observable market-based inputs.

        Level 3 is comprised of financial instruments whose fair value is estimated based on internally developed models or methodologies utilizing significant inputs that are generally less readily observable.

        Fair value measurements for those items measured on a recurring basis are as follows (dollars in thousands):

December 31, 2013
  Total   Level 1   Level 2   Level 3  

Assets

                         

Cash and cash equivalents:

                         

Tax free money market mutual funds

  $ 33   $ 33   $   $  

Money market mutual funds

    2,695     2,695          

Securities owned, at fair value:

                         

Corporate stocks—trading securities

    2,894     2,894          

Mutual funds

    4,542     4,542          
                   

Total

  $ 10,164   $ 10,164   $   $  
                   
                   

Liabilities

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

Securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value:

                         

Corporate stocks—trading securities

  $ 2,953   $ 2,953   $   $  
                   

Total

  $ 2,953   $ 2,953   $   $  
                   
                   

67


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)


December 31, 2012
  Total   Level 1   Level 2   Level 3  

Assets

                         

Cash and cash equivalents:

                         

Tax free money market mutual funds

  $ 4,555   $ 4,555   $   $  

U.S. government money market mutual funds

    97,203     97,203          

Money market mutual funds

    6,231     6,231          

Securities owned, at fair value:

                         

Corporate stocks—trading securities

    5,438     5,438          

Mutual funds

    4,648     4,648          
                   

Total

  $ 118,075   $ 118,075   $   $  
                   
                   

Liabilities

   
 
   
 
   
 
   
 
 

Securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value:

                         

Corporate stocks—trading securities

  $ 5,249   $ 5,249   $   $  
                   

Total

  $ 5,249   $ 5,249   $   $  
                   
                   

        Cash and cash equivalents other than bank deposits are measured at fair value and primarily include U.S. government money market mutual funds.

        Securities owned, at fair value and securities sold, not yet purchased, at fair value include corporate stocks, equity index mutual funds and bond mutual funds, all of which are exchange traded.

        Certain items are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis. The table below details the portion of those items that were re-measured at fair value during 2012 and the resultant loss recorded (dollars in thousands):

 
   
  Fair Value Measurements Using    
 
December 31, 2012
  Total   Level 1   Level 2   Level 3   Total Losses  

Goodwill—U.S. Operations

  $   $   $   $   $ 245,103  

Goodwill—European Operations

                    28,481  

Goodwill—Asia Pacific Operations

                    701  
                       

Total

  $   $   $   $   $ 274,285  
                       
                       

Goodwill

        Goodwill allocated to the Company's U.S., European and Asia Pacific Operations reporting segments was written down in the second quarter of 2012 to their implied fair value of zero. These charges are included in goodwill and other asset impairment in the Company's Consolidated Statements of Operations.

(5)   Acquisitions

Ross Smith Energy Group Ltd.

        On June 3, 2011, the Company completed its acquisition of Ross Smith Energy Group Ltd. ("RSEG"), a Calgary-based independent provider of research on the oil and gas industry.

68


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        The results of RSEG have been included in the Company's consolidated financial statements since its acquisition date. The $38.6 million purchase price for RSEG consisted of all cash with no contingent payment provisions. In connection with the acquisition, the Company also incurred approximately $0.7 million of acquisition-related costs, including legal fees and other professional fees, as well as $1.8 million in connection with the termination of a distribution agreement with a third party, net of a $1.0 million recovery from RSEG's former owners. These costs were classified in the Consolidated Statements of Operations as acquisition-related costs.

        The assets and liabilities of RSEG were recorded as of the acquisition date, at their respective fair values, under business combination accounting. The purchase price allocation is based on estimates of the fair value of assets acquired and liabilities assumed as follows (dollars in thousands):

Cash

  $ 2,540  

Accounts receivable, net

    1,422  

Customer related intangible asset

    6,950  

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

    (1,505 )

Deferred income

    (2,151 )

Other assets and liabilities, net

    611  

Goodwill

    30,715  
       

Total purchase price

  $ 38,582  
       
       

        Goodwill and the customer-related intangible asset were assigned to the U.S. Operations reporting segment, which, at the time of the acquisition, was expected to be the primary beneficiary of the synergies achieved from the business combination. The goodwill, although written down to zero in 2012, (see Note 6, Goodwill and Other Intangibles , below) is deductible for corporate income tax purposes over 15 years. The acquired customer-related intangible asset of $7.0 million has a 10 year useful life. The pro forma results of the RSEG acquisition would not have been material to the Company's results of operations.

(6)   Goodwill and Other Intangibles

Goodwill

        The following table presents the changes in the carrying amount of goodwill by reportable segment for the year ended December 31, 2012 (dollars in thousands). There was no goodwill activity for 2013.

 
  U.S.
Operations
  European
Operations
  Asia Pacific
Operations
  Total  

Balance at December 31, 2011

  $ 245,105   $ 28,486   $ 701   $ 274,292  

2012 Activity:

                         

Impairment losses

    (245,103 )   (28,481 )   (701 )   (274,285 )

Currency translation adjustment

    (2 )   (5 )       (7 )
                   

Balance at December 31, 2012

  $   $   $   $  
                   
                   

69


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

Goodwill Impairment

        Prior to the full goodwill impairment charge taken in the second quarter of 2012, the Company tested the carrying value of goodwill for impairment at least annually and more frequently if an event occurred or circumstances changed that indicated a potential impairment had occurred. The impairment tests were conducted at the reporting unit level, which for the Company is based on geographic segments and not products and services.

        Since 2010, indicators of potential impairment prompted the Company to perform goodwill impairment tests at the end of each quarterly interim period. These indicators included a prolonged decrease in market capitalization, a decline in operating results in comparison to prior years, and the significant near-term uncertainty related to both the global economic recovery and the outlook for the Company's industry. As the indicators of potential impairment did not improve, the Company continued to perform interim goodwill impairment testing at the end of each quarterly period through the second quarter of 2012. All interim impairment tests applied the same valuation techniques and sensitivity analyses used in the Company's annual impairment tests to updated cash flow and profitability forecasts.

        Based upon tests performed for the June 30, 2011 interim test, the Company recorded an impairment charge of $225.0 million in connection with the goodwill allocated to its U.S. Operations reporting segment. This impairment charge reflected continued weakness in institutional trading volumes, which lowered estimated future cash flows of the U.S. Operations reporting segment, as well as a decline in industry market multiples.

        Based upon tests performed during the second quarter of 2012, the Company recorded an impairment charge of $274.3 million in connection with the goodwill allocated to its U.S., European and Asia Pacific reporting segments. This impairment charge reflected continued weakness in global institutional trading volumes and an increasingly uncertain outlook on then near-term business fundamentals as well as the length and severity of the decline in global institutional equity market activity. Consequently, the Company downwardly revised its earnings and cash flow forecasts to reflect adjusted expectations for a significantly slower recovery and more prolonged downturn in its global businesses and reduced the multiple used in its market approach to reflect the decline in industry market multiples. Although the revised forecasts continued to result in a fair value for the Canadian reporting unit that was well in excess of its carrying value (which did not include goodwill), the fair values for the U.S., European and Asia Pacific reporting units were determined to be below their carrying values, indicating potential impairment of the goodwill held in these units and requiring step two impairment testing. The step two valuation test yielded aggregate fair values for the tangible and (non-goodwill) intangible assets in each of these reporting units above their aggregate carrying values, which reduced the amount of the implied fair value attributable to goodwill. As a result, goodwill in each of these reporting units was determined to be fully impaired requiring the Company to record a goodwill impairment charge in the second quarter of 2012.

70


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

Other Intangible Assets

        Acquired other intangible assets consisted of the following at December 31, 2013 and 2012 (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012    
 
 
  Gross Carrying
Amount
  Accumulated
Amortization
  Gross Carrying
Amount
  Accumulated
Amortization
  Useful
Lives
(Years)
 

Trade names

  $ 8,400   $   $ 10,400   $ 2,000      

Customer-related intangibles

    27,851     8,923     27,851     6,712     13.1  

Proprietary software

    21,501     17,921     21,501     16,106     6.4  

Trading rights

    243         243          

Other

    50         50          
                         

Total

  $ 58,045   $ 26,844   $ 60,045   $ 24,818        
                         
                         

        At December 31, 2013, indefinite-lived intangibles not subject to amortization amounted to $8.7 million, of which $8.4 million related to the POSIT trade name. Amortization expense for definite-lived intangibles was $4.0 million, $5.0 million and $4.2 million for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively and was included in other general and administrative expense in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

        The Company's estimate of future amortization expense for acquired other intangibles that exist at December 31, 2013 is as follows (dollars in thousands):

Year
  Estimated
Amortization
 

2014

    4,087  

2015

    2,654  

2016

    2,654  

2017

    2,500  

2018

    2,294  

Thereafter

    8,320  
       

Total

  $ 22,509  
       
       

        The Company performed its annual impairment testing as of October 1, 2013 and determined that there was no impairment of the carrying values of other intangible assets in the periods presented.

(7)   Cash Restricted or Segregated Under Regulations and Other

        Cash restricted or segregated under regulations and other represents (i) funds on deposit for the purpose of securing working capital facilities for clearing and settlement activities in Hong Kong, (ii) a special reserve bank account for the exclusive benefit of customers ("Special Reserve Bank Account") maintained by ITG Inc. in accordance with Rule 15c3-3 of the Exchange Act ("Customer Protection Rule") or agreements for proprietary accounts of introducing brokers ("PAIB"), (iii) funds on deposit for European trade clearing and settlement activity, (iv) segregated balances under a collateral account control agreement for the benefit of certain customers, and (v) funds relating to the securitization of bank guarantees supporting the Company's Australian and Israeli lease.

71


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(8)   Securities Owned and Sold, Not Yet Purchased

        The following is a summary of securities owned and sold, not yet purchased at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  Securities Owned   Securities Sold, Not Yet
Purchased
 
 
  2013   2012   2013   2012  

Corporate stocks—trading securities

  $ 2,894   $ 5,438   $ 2,953   $ 5,249  

Mutual funds

    4,542     4,648          
                   

Total

  $ 7,436   $ 10,086   $ 2,953   $ 5,249  
                   
                   

        Trading securities owned and sold, not yet purchased primarily consists of temporary positions obtained in the normal course of agency trading activities, including positions held in connection with the creation and redemption of exchange-traded funds on behalf of clients.

(9)   Receivables and Payables

Receivables from and Payables to Brokers, Dealers and Clearing Organizations

        The following is a summary of receivables from and payables to brokers, dealers and clearing organizations at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  Receivables from   Payables to  
 
  2013   2012   2013   2012  

Broker-dealers

  $ 254,031   $ 297,916   $ 284,681   $ 513,529  

Clearing organizations

    23,033     12,391     2,798     728  

Securities borrowed

    742,307     798,228          

Securities loaned

            737,789     823,202  

Allowance for doubtful accounts

    (1,029 )   (1,416 )        
                   

Total

  $ 1,018,342   $ 1,107,119   $ 1,025,268   $ 1,337,459  
                   
                   

Receivables from and Payables to Customers

        The following is a summary of receivables from and payables to customers at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  Receivables from   Payables to  
 
  2013   2012   2013   2012  

Customers

  $ 592,139   $ 548,287   $ 469,264   $ 226,892  

Allowance for doubtful accounts

    (1,135 )   (1,462 )        
                   

Total

  $ 591,004   $ 546,825   $ 469,264   $ 226,892  
                   
                   

        The Company maintains an allowance for doubtful accounts based upon estimated collectability of receivables. The allowance was decreased by $0.4 million in 2013 and increased by $1.4 million in 2012 and $0.2 million in 2011. Total write-offs against the allowance of $0.3 million, $0.2 million and $0.1 million were recorded during 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

72


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

    Securities Borrowed and Loaned

        As of December 31, 2013, securities borrowed as part of the Company's matched book operations with a fair value of $710.6 million were delivered for securities loaned. The gross amounts of interest earned on cash provided to counterparties as collateral for securities borrowed, and interest incurred on cash received from counterparties as collateral for securities loaned, and the resulting net amount included in other revenue on the Consolidated Statements of Operations for 2013, 2012 and 2011 were as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012   2011  

Interest earned

  $ 17,756   $ 19,242   $ 19,130  

Interest incurred

    (10,786 )   (14,589 )   (14,646 )
               

Net

  $ 6,970   $ 4,653   $ 4,484  
               
               

        Interest earned in 2013 includes a gain of $2.5 million related to adjustments to historical dividend withholdings on securities borrowed. Deposits paid for securities borrowed and deposits received for securities loaned are recorded at the amount of cash collateral advanced or received. Deposits paid for securities borrowed transactions require the Company to deposit cash with the lender. With respect to deposits received for securities loaned, the Company receives collateral in the form of cash in an amount generally in excess of the market value of the securities loaned. The Company monitors the market value of the securities borrowed and loaned on a daily basis, with additional collateral obtained or refunded, as necessary.

        The Company's securities borrowing and lending is generally done under industry standard agreements ("Master Securities Lending Agreements") that may allow, following an event of default by either party, the prompt close-out of all transactions (including the liquidation of securities held) and the offsetting of obligations to return cash or securities, as the case may be, by the non-defaulting party. Events of default under the Master Securities Lending Agreements generally include, subject to certain conditions: (i) failure to timely deliver cash or securities as required under the transaction, (ii) a party's insolvency, bankruptcy, or similar proceeding, (iii) breach of representation, and (iv) a material breach of the agreement. The counterparty that receives the securities in these transactions generally has unrestricted access in its use of the securities. For financial statement purposes, the Company does not offset securities borrowed and securities loaned.

73


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        In accordance with ASU 2013-01, the following table summarizes the transactions under certain Master Securities Lending Agreements that may be eligible for offsetting if an event of default occurred and a right of offset was legally enforceable (dollars in thousands):

 
  Gross Amounts of
Recognized Assets/
(Liabilities)
  Gross Amounts
Offset in the
Consolidated
Statement of
Financial Condition
  Net Amounts
Presented in the
Consolidated
Statement of
Financial Condition
  Collateral
Received or
Pledged
(including Cash)
  Net
Amount
 

As of December 31, 2013:

                               

Deposits paid for securities borrowed

  $ 742,307   $   $ 742,307   $ 742,083   $ 224  

Deposits received for securities loaned

    (737,789 )       (737,789 )   (721,821 )   (15,698 )

As of December 31, 2012:

                               

Deposits paid for securities borrowed

    798,228         798,228     789,317     8,911  

Deposits received for securities loaned

    (823,202 )       (823,202 )   (822,382 )   (820 )

(10) Premises and Equipment

        The following is a summary of premises and equipment at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012  

Furniture, fixtures and equipment

  $ 145,226   $ 142,235  

Leasehold improvements

    49,554     45,944  
           

    194,780     188,179  

Less: accumulated depreciation and amortization

    128,609     133,190  
           

Total

  $ 66,171   $ 54,989  
           
           

        Depreciation and amortization expense relating to premises and equipment amounted to $21.0 million; $19.5 million and $19.2 million during the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively, and is included in occupancy and equipment expense in the Consolidated Statements of Operations. During 2013, premises and equipment costs and related accumulated depreciation and amortization were reduced by $ 23.8 million and $22.8 million, respectively, for assets that are no longer in use.

(11) Capitalized Software

        The following is a summary of capitalized software costs at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012  

Capitalized software costs

  $ 88,912   $ 94,177  

Less: accumulated amortization

    51,020     50,183  
           

Total

  $ 37,892   $ 43,994  
           
           

74


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Software costs totaling $22.6 million and $24.6 million were capitalized in 2013 and 2012, respectively, related to the continued development of new features and functionalities across the entire ITG product line. During 2013, capitalized software costs and related accumulated amortization were each reduced by $27.5 million for fully amortized costs that are no longer in use.

        As of December 31, 2013, capitalized software costs of $0.2 million were not subject to amortization as the underlying products were not yet available for release. As of December 31, 2012, there were no capitalized software costs not subject to amortization because all underlying products were available for release. Other general and administrative expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Operations included $28.5 million, $32.1 million and $35.7 million related to the amortization of capitalized software costs in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

(12) Accounts Payable and Accrued Expenses

        The following is a summary of accounts payable and accrued expenses at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  December 31,
2013
  December 31,
2012
 

Accrued research payables

  $ 52,015   $ 38,591  

Accrued compensation and benefits

    47,622     39,762  

Trade payables

    15,222     22,624  

Accrued rent

    19,938     10,947  

Deferred revenue

    12,533     12,177  

Deferred compensation

    4,552     4,650  

Accrued restructuring

    3,768     12,295  

Accrued transaction processing

    2,972     3,359  

Other

    17,309     20,657  
           

Total

  $ 175,931   $ 165,062  
           
           

(13) Income Taxes

        Income tax expense (benefit) consisted of the following components (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012   2011  

Current:

                   

Federal

  $ 2,628   $ 416   $ (1,160 )

State

    1,634     782     1,282  

Foreign

    4,657     3,362     5,632  
               

    8,919     4,560     5,754  

Deferred:

                   

Federal

    1,606     (19,423 )   (25,146 )

State

    992     (7,565 )   (8,409 )

Foreign

    453     (168 )   962  
               

    3,051     (27,156 )   (32,593 )
               

Total

  $ 11,970   $ (22,596 ) $ (26,839 )
               
               

75


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Income (loss) before income taxes consisted of the following (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012   2011  

U.S. 

  $ 15,687   $ (248,101 ) $ (222,337 )

Foreign

    27,368     (22,354 )   15,709  
               

Total

  $ 43,055   $ (270,455 ) $ (206,628 )
               
               

        Deferred income taxes are provided for temporary differences in reporting certain items. The tax effects of temporary differences that gave rise to the net deferred tax assets (liabilities) at December 31 were as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012  

Deferred tax assets:

             

Compensation and benefits

  $ 12,844   $ 9,474  

Net operating loss and capital loss carryover

    17,121     19,012  

Share-based compensation

    6,959     8,506  

Allowance for doubtful accounts

    889     1,149  

Tax benefits on uncertain tax positions

    2,697     2,696  

Goodwill and other intangibles

    21,138     24,746  

Depreciation

        649  

Other

    9,757     9,203  
           

Total deferred tax assets

    71,405     75,435  

Less: valuation allowance

    20,541     20,774  
           

Total deferred tax assets, net of valuation allowance

    50,864     54,661  
           

Deferred tax liabilities:

             

Depreciation

    (3,916 )    

Capitalized software

    (12,838 )   (15,226 )

Other

    (343 )   (573 )
           

Total deferred tax liabilities

    (17,097 )   (15,799 )
           

Net deferred tax assets

  $ 33,767   $ 38,862  
           
           

        The deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities above are presented on a net basis on the accompanying Statements of Financial Condition by tax jurisdictions in which the deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities relate to. At December 31, 2013, the Company believes that it is more likely than not that future reversals of its existing taxable temporary differences and the results of future operations will generate sufficient taxable income to realize the deferred tax assets, net of valuation allowance. The Company's valuation allowance is primarily the result of historical operating losses in the Asia Pacific entities, where we maintain a full valuation for all deferred tax assets and net operating losses and in certain entities in the European Operations where we currently have net operating losses.

        Net operating loss carry forwards expire as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  Amount   Years remaining

Hong Kong, Australia, U.K. and Ireland operating losses

  $ 72,943   Indefinite
         

  $ 72,943    
         
         

76


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        The effective tax rate varied from the U.S. federal statutory income tax rate due to the following:

 
  2013   2012   2011  

U.S. federal statutory income tax rate

    35.0 %   35.0 %   35.0 %

State and local income taxes, net of U.S. federal income tax effect

    3.9     1.8     2.2  

Foreign tax impact, net

    (6.4 )   (3.6 )   (0.9 )

Non-deductible costs *

    1.0     (24.3 )   (23.7 )

Other, net

    (5.7 )   (0.5 )   0.4  
               

Effective income tax rate

    27.8 %   8.4 %   13.0 %
               
               

*
Non-deductible costs in 2012 and 2011 include goodwill impairment charges.

        For the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, the tax benefits realized on the exercises of employee stock options and the vesting of employee restricted share awards in total were less than the deferred benefits that were recorded based on grant date fair values. The resulting net tax shortfalls on these awards, along with the impact of cancelled awards reduced additional paid-in capital by $1.5 million, $4.1 million and $3.3 million in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively. For further discussion, see Note 19, Employee and Non-Employee Director Stock and Benefit Plans .

Tax Uncertainties

        Under ASC 740, Income Taxes , a tax benefit from an uncertain tax position may be recognized only if it is more likely than not that the tax position will be sustained on examination by the taxing authorities. The tax benefits recognized in the financial statements from such a position are measured based on the largest benefit that has a greater than fifty percent likelihood of being realized upon ultimate resolution.

        During 2013, uncertain tax positions in the U.S. were resolved for the 2003-2006 and 2008-2010 fiscal years resulting in a decrease in the recorded liability of $0.5 million and the related deferred tax asset of $0.2 million. Also, in 2013, an uncertain tax position in Europe for the 2011 year was resolved, resulting in a decrease in the recorded liability of $0.9 million. As a result of these resolutions, the Company recognized a tax benefit of $1.2 million. Furthermore, we reduced reserves related to prior years following the resolution of tax contingencies primarily in Europe.

        A reconciliation of the beginning and ending amounts of unrecognized tax benefits is as follows (dollars in thousands):

Uncertain Tax Benefits
  2013   2012   2011  

Balance, January 1

  $ 13,726   $ 14,542   $ 12,380  

Additions based on tax positions related to the current year

    404     568     2,402  

Additions based on tax positions of prior years

    434     857     647  

Reductions for tax positions of prior years

    (148 )   (2,024 )   (42 )

Reductions due to settlements with taxing authorities

    (124 )   (217 )   (516 )

Reductions due to expiration of statute of limitations

    (1,218 )       (329 )
               

Balance, December 31

  $ 13,074   $ 13,726   $ 14,542  
               
               

77


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Included in the balance at December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, are $11.9 million, $12.4 million, and $12.0 million, respectively, of unrecognized tax benefits (net of federal benefits) which, if recognized, would affect the Company's effective tax rate.

        With limited exception, the Company is no longer subject to U.S. federal, state, local or foreign income tax audits by taxing authorities for years preceding 2007. The Internal Revenue Service is currently examining the Company's U.S. federal income tax returns for 2007 through 2010. Certain state and local returns are also currently under various stages of audit. The Company does not anticipate a significant change to the total of unrecognized tax benefits within the next twelve months.

        At December 31, 2013, interest expense of $3.8 million, gross of related tax effects of $1.6 million, was accrued related to unrecognized tax benefits. As a continuing policy, interest accrued related to unrecognized tax benefits is recorded as income tax expense. During 2013, 2012 and 2011, the Company recognized $0.5 million, $0.8 million and $0.7 million, respectively, of tax-related interest expense. No penalties were incurred during 2013, 2012 or 2011.

(14) Borrowings

Short Term Bank Loans

        The Company's international securities clearance and settlement operations are funded with operating cash or with short-term bank loans in the form of overdraft facilities. At December 31, 2013, there was $38.5 million outstanding under these facilities for settlement transactions and margin requirements at a weighted average interest rate of approximately 2.2%.

        The Company's U.S. securities clearance and settlement operations are funded with operating cash, securities loaned or with short-term bank loans.

        ITG Inc., as borrower, and Investment Technology Group, Inc. ("Parent Company"), as guarantor, maintained a $150 million three-year revolving credit agreement ("Credit Agreement") with a syndicate of banks and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., as Administrative Agent that matured on January 31, 2014 (see Note 24, Subsequent Event ). The purpose of this credit line was to provide liquidity for ITG Inc.'s brokerage operations to satisfy clearing margin requirements and to finance temporary positions from delivery failures or non-standard settlements. Under the Credit Agreement, interest accrued at a rate equal to (a) a base rate, determined by reference to the higher of the (1) federal funds rate or (2) the one month Eurodollar London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR) rate, plus (b) a margin of 2.50%. Available but unborrowed amounts under the Credit Agreement were subject to an unused commitment fee of 0.50%. Depending on the borrowing base, availability under the Credit Agreement was limited to either (i) a percentage of the clearing deposit required by the National Securities Clearing Corporation, or (ii) a percentage of the market value of temporary positions pledged as collateral. Among other restrictions, the terms of the Credit Agreement included (a) negative covenants related to liens, (b) financial covenant requirements for maintaining a consolidated leverage ratio (as defined) and a liquidity ratio (as defined), as well as maintenance of minimum levels of tangible net worth (as defined) and regulatory capital (as defined), and (c) restrictions on investments, dispositions and other restrictions customary for financings of this type.

        The events of default under the Credit Agreement included, among others, payment defaults, cross defaults with certain other indebtedness, breaches of covenants, loss of collateral, judgments, changes in control and bankruptcy events. In the event of a default, the Credit Agreement required ITG Inc. to pay incremental interest at the rate of 2.0% and, depending on the nature of the default, the commitments will either automatically terminate and all unpaid amounts immediately become due and

78


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

payable, or the lenders may in their discretion terminate their commitments and declare due all unpaid amounts outstanding.

        At December 31, 2013 there was $35.0 million outstanding under the Credit Agreement. At December 31, 2012, there were no amounts outstanding.

Term Debt

        The following is a summary of term debt at December 31 (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012  

Term loan

  $ 9,020   $ 15,388  

Obligations under capital leases

    21,312     3,884  
           

Total

  $ 30,332   $ 19,272  
           
           

        On June 1, 2011, Parent Company as borrower, entered into a $25.5 million Master Loan and Security Agreement ("Term Loan Agreement") with Banc of America Leasing & Capital, LLC ("Bank of America"). The four-year term loan established under this agreement ("Term Loan") is secured by a security interest in existing furniture, fixtures and equipment owned by the Parent Company and certain U.S. subsidiaries as of June 1, 2011. The primary purpose of this financing was to provide capital for strategic initiatives. The events of default under the Term Loan Agreement include, among others, cross default on the Credit Agreement, default on payment, failure to maintain required equipment insurance, certain negative judgments and bankruptcy events. In the event of a default, the terms of the Term Loan Agreement require the Company to pay additional interest at a rate of 3.0% and, the lender may in its discretion terminate the loan agreement and declare all unpaid amounts outstanding to be immediately due and payable.

        The Term Loan is payable in monthly principal installments of $530,600 and accrues interest at 3.0% plus the average one month LIBOR for dollar deposits. The remaining scheduled principal repayments are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Year
  Aggregate
Amount
 

2014

  $ 6,367  

2015

    2,653  
       

  $ 9,020  
       
       

        Along with the Term Loan Agreement, Parent Company entered into a $5.0 million master lease facility with Bank of America ("Master Lease Agreement"), under which purchases of new equipment may be financed. Each equipment lease under the Master Lease Agreement is structured as a capital lease and has a separate 48-month term from its inception date, at the end of which Parent Company may purchase the underlying equipment for $1. Each lease under the Master Lease Agreement requires principal repayment on a monthly schedule and accrues interest at the same rate prescribed for the Term Loan.

        In September 2011, $2.6 million was drawn on the lease facility to finance purchased assets that had a fair value of $2.4 million on the date of financing, resulting in the recording of a principal balance of $2.4 million and deferred gain of $0.2 million. In June 2012, $1.9 million was drawn on the lease facility to finance purchased assets that had a fair value slightly under $1.9 million on the date of

79


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

financing, resulting in the recording of a principal balance of nearly $1.9 million and a negligible deferred gain. The leases are payable in straight-line monthly installments plus interest at the average one month LIBOR for dollar deposits plus 3.0%. The reductions to the remaining principal balance applying the interest method to the estimated minimum lease payments are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Year
  Aggregate
Amount
 

2014

  $ 1,086  

2015

    893  

2016

    237  
       

  $ 2,216  
       
       

        On August 10, 2012, Parent Company entered into a $25.0 million master lease facility with BMO Harris Equipment Finance Company ("BMO") to finance equipment and construction expenditures related to the build-out of the Company's new headquarters in lower Manhattan. The facility contained an initial interim funding agreement, which was succeeded by a capital lease. During 2013, the Parent Company borrowed $20.6 million under the BMO facility following borrowings of $0.6 million in 2012.

        Under the terms of the interim funding agreement, Parent Company was reimbursed for expenditures made during an interim funding period which ended on July 29, 2013 ("Interim Funding Period"). Interest-only payments on the aggregate outstanding borrowings during the Interim Funding Period were paid monthly at an annual rate of 2.25% plus the 30-day LIBOR. On July 29, 2013 the $21.2 million of interim borrowings were converted to a 3.39% fixed-rate term financing structured as a capital lease with a 48-month term, at the end of which Parent Company may purchase the underlying assets for $1. At December 31, 2013, there was $19.1 million outstanding under the BMO facility. The reductions to the remaining principal balance applying the interest method to the estimated minimum lease payments are as follows (dollars in thousands):

Year
  Aggregate
Amount
 

2014

  $ 5,098  

2015

    5,274  

2016

    5,455  

2017

    3,269  
       

  $ 19,096  
       
       

        The Term Loan, Master Lease Agreement and the BMO facility all required compliance with the financial covenants of the Credit Agreement while the Credit Agreement was outstanding (see Note 24, Subsequent Event ).

        Interest expense on the Credit Agreement, the Term Loan Agreement, the Master Lease Agreement and the BMO facility, including commitment fees and the amortization of debt issuance costs totaled $2.7 million $2.5 million and $2.0 million in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively.

80


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(15) Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income

        The components and allocated tax effects of accumulated other comprehensive income for the periods ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 are as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  Before Tax
Effects
  Tax
Effects
  After Tax
Effects
 

December 31, 2013
                   

Currency translation adjustment

  $ 8,536   $   $ 8,536  
               

Total

  $ 8,536   $   $ 8,536  
               
               

December 31, 2012
         
 
   
 
 

Currency translation adjustment

  $ 11,874   $   $ 11,874  
               

Total

  $ 11,874   $   $ 11,874  
               
               

        Deferred taxes have not been provided on the cumulative undistributed earnings of foreign subsidiaries or the cumulative translation adjustment related to those investments since such amounts are expected to be reinvested indefinitely.

(16) Off-Balance Sheet Risk and Concentration of Credit Risk

        The Company is a member of various U.S. and non-U.S. exchanges and clearing houses that trade and clear equities and/or derivative contracts. The Company also accesses certain clearing houses through the memberships of third parties. Associated with these memberships and third-party relationships, the Company may be required to pay a proportionate share of financial obligations of another member who may default on its obligations to the exchanges or the clearing houses. While the rules governing different exchange or clearing house memberships vary, in general the Company's obligations would arise only if the exchanges and clearing houses had previously exhausted other remedies. The maximum potential payout under these memberships cannot be estimated. The Company has not recorded any contingent liability in the consolidated financial statements for these agreements and believes that any potential requirement to make payments under these agreements is remote. In the ordinary course of business, the Company guarantees obligations of subsidiaries which may arise from third-party clearing relationships and trading counterparties. The activities of the subsidiaries covered by these guarantees are included in the Company's consolidated financial statements.

        The Company's customer financing and securities settlement activities may require the Company to pledge customer securities as collateral in support of various secured financing transactions such as bank loans. In the event the counterparty is unable to meet its contractual obligation to return customer securities pledged as collateral, the Company may be exposed to the risk of acquiring the securities at prevailing market prices in order to satisfy its customer obligations. The Company controls this risk by monitoring the market value of securities pledged on a daily basis and by requiring adjustments of collateral levels in the event of excess market exposure.

        Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk are primarily cash and cash equivalents, securities owned at fair value, receivables from brokers, dealers and clearing organizations and receivables from customers. Cash and cash equivalents and securities owned, at fair value are deposited with high credit quality financial institutions.

81


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        The Company loans securities temporarily to other brokers in connection with its securities lending activities. The Company receives cash as collateral for the securities loaned. Increases in security prices may cause the market value of the securities loaned to exceed the amount of cash received as collateral. In the event the counterparty to these transactions does not return the loaned securities, the Company may be exposed to the risk of acquiring the securities at prevailing market prices in order to satisfy its client obligations. The Company controls this risk by requiring credit approvals for counterparties, by monitoring the market value of securities loaned on a daily basis, and by requiring additional cash as collateral or returning collateral when necessary.

        The Company borrows securities temporarily from other brokers in connection with its securities borrowing activities. The Company deposits cash as collateral for the securities borrowed. Decreases in security prices may cause the market value of the securities borrowed to fall below the amount of cash deposited as collateral. In the event the counterparty to these transactions does not return collateral, the Company may be exposed to the risk of selling the securities at prevailing market prices. The Company controls this risk by requiring credit approvals for counterparties, by monitoring the collateral values on a daily basis, and by depositing additional collateral with counterparties or receiving cash when deemed necessary.

        The Company may at times maintain inventories in equity securities on both a long and short basis. Whereas long inventory positions represent the Company's ownership of securities, short inventory positions represent obligations of the Company to deliver specified securities at a contracted price, which may differ from market prices prevailing at the time of completion of the transaction. Accordingly, both long and short inventory positions may result in losses or gains to the Company as market values of securities fluctuate. To mitigate the risk of losses, long and short positions are marked to market daily and are continuously monitored by the Company.

(17) Net Capital Requirement

        ITG Inc., AlterNet and ITG Derivatives are subject to the SEC's Uniform Net Capital Rule (Rule 15c3-1), which requires the maintenance of minimum net capital. ITG Inc. has elected to use the alternative method permitted by Rule 15c3-1, which requires that ITG Inc. maintain minimum net capital equal to the greater of $1.0 million or 2% of aggregate debit balances arising from customer transactions, as defined. AlterNet and ITG Derivatives have elected to use the basic method permitted by Rule 15c3-1, which requires that they each maintain minimum net capital equal to the greater of 6 2 / 3 % of aggregate indebtedness or $100,000 and in the case of ITG Derivatives, $1 million, which is due to the fact that ITG Derivatives is a regulated Futures Commission Merchant pursuant to Commodity Futures Trading Commission Regulation 1.17. Dividends or withdrawals of capital cannot be made if capital is needed to comply with regulatory requirements.

        Our net capital balances and the amounts in excess of required net capital at December 31, 2013 for our U.S. Operations are as follows (dollars in millions):

 
  Net Capital   Excess Net Capital  

U.S. Operations

             

ITG Inc. 

  $ 106.5   $ 105.5  

AlterNet

    5.9     5.8  

ITG Derivatives

    5.5     4.5  

        As of December 31, 2013, ITG Inc. had a $10.6 million cash balance in a Special Reserve Bank Account for the benefit of customers under the Customer Protection Rule pursuant to SEC

82


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

Rule 15c3-3, Computation for Determination of Reserve Requirements and $0.4 million under Proprietary Accounts for Introducing Brokers agreements.

        In addition, the Company's Canadian, European and Asia Pacific Operations have subsidiaries with regulatory requirements. The net capital balances and the amount of regulatory capital in excess of the minimum requirements applicable to each business as of December 31, 2013, are summarized in the following table (dollars in millions):

 
  Net Capital   Excess Net Capital  

Canadian Operations

             

Canada

  $ 43.9   $ 43.5  

European Operations

   
 
   
 
 

Europe

    57.5     35.9  

Asia Pacific Operations

   
 
   
 
 

Australia

    11.9     4.1  

Hong Kong

    28.3     21.0  

Singapore

    0.4     0.2  

(18) Stockholders' Equity

        The Company's current policy, which is reviewed continually, is to retain earnings to finance the operations and expansion of its businesses and to return capital to stockholders through repurchases. As a result, the Company is not currently paying dividends on common stock.

Stock Repurchase Program

        To facilitate its stock repurchase program, designed to return value to stockholders and minimize dilution from stock issuances, the Company repurchases shares in the open market. The table below summarizes the Company's share repurchases beginning January 1, 2010 under its Board of Directors' authorizations:

 
   
  Amount
Authorized
by Board
(Shares in
millions)
   
  Shares
Remaining
Under Board
Authorization
(millions)
  Shares Repurchased
Under Board
Authorization
 
 
   
  Total
Shares
Purchased
(millions)
 
 
  Expiration
Date
 
Repurchase Program Authorization Date
  2013   2012   2011  

July 2010

  none     4.0     4.0                 2.9  

October 2011

  none     4.0     4.0         1.5     2.5     0.1  

May 2013

  none     4.0     0.5     3.5     0.5          
                                     

Total shares repurchased under authorization

                          2.0     2.5     3.0  
                                     
                                     

Cost (millions)

                        $ 28.2   $ 23.5   $ 38.9  
                                     

Average share price

                        $ 14.05   $ 9.50   $ 13.09  
                                     

        The Company also repurchased approximately 0.4 million, 0.3 million and 0.3 million shares of common stock during 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively, to satisfy the minimum statutory employee withholding tax upon the net settlement of equity awards.

83


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(19) Employee and Non-Employee Director Stock and Benefit Plans

        The 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the "2007 Plan") was approved by the Company's stockholders and became effective on May 8, 2007 (the "Effective Date") and was last amended and restated effective February 5, 2014. As of the Effective Date, the Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan (the "Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan"), the Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors' Equity Subplan (the "Directors' Equity Subplan") and the Stock Unit Award Program Subplan, as amended and restated (the "SUA Subplan" and, collectively with the Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan and the Directors' Equity Subplan, the "Subplans") were merged with and into the 2007 Plan. Since the Effective Date, the Subplans (except for the SUA Subplan which was frozen on January 1, 2009 as described below) have continued to be, and shall continue to be, in effect as subplans of the 2007 Plan and grants and/or deferrals may continue to be made under the Directors' Equity Subplan and the Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan. In October 2008, the compensation committee adopted the Equity Deferral Award Program, another subplan under the 2007 Plan. This subplan was last amended and restated on February 5, 2014, is now known as the Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan, and continues to be a subplan under the 2007 Plan (the "VCSUA Subplan").

        Under the 2007 Plan, 10,468,208 shares of the Company's common stock are authorized. Shares of common stock which are attributable to awards which have expired, terminated, cash settled or been canceled or forfeited during any calendar year are generally available for issuance or use in connection with future awards. Options that have been granted under the 2007 Plan are exercisable on dates ranging through February 2019. The 2007 Plan will remain in effect until May 7, 2017, unless terminated, or extended, by the Board of Directors with the approval of the Company's stockholders. After this date, no further awards shall be granted pursuant to the 2007 Plan, but previously- granted awards will remain outstanding in accordance with their applicable terms and conditions.

        In January 2006, the Board of Directors adopted the Directors' Equity Subplan which became effective January 1, 2006 and merged into the 2007 Plan as referenced above. The Directors' Equity Subplan was amended and restated on February 7, 2008 and more recently on April 30, 2012. The Directors' Equity Subplan provides for the grant of restricted stock unit awards to non-employee directors of the Company. Under the Directors' Equity Subplan, a newly appointed non-employee director will be granted restricted stock unit awards valued at $100,000 at, or shortly after, the time of appointment to the Board of Directors. Such initial restricted stock unit award will vest annually in three equal installments, beginning on the first anniversary of the date of grant. In addition, non-employee directors will be granted restricted stock unit awards valued at $72,000 annually on the day of each of the Company's annual meetings of stockholders at which directors are elected or reelected by the Company's stockholders. Such annual restricted stock unit awards will vest in full on the day immediately preceding the Company's next annual meeting of stockholders at which directors are elected or reelected by the Company's stockholders.

        Under the 2007 Plan, the Company is permitted to grant performance-based stock options, in addition to time-based option awards to employees and directors, however the Company did not grant any performance-based option awards under the 2007 Plan during the three years ended December 31, 2013. The Company did not grant any time-based option awards during 2013. Time-based option awards either vest in full on the third anniversary of the grant or annually in three equal installments, beginning on the first anniversary of the date of grant, in each case, if the employee has remained continuously employed or if the director has continued to serve on the board of directors from the grant date to the applicable vesting date. The Company recognizes share-based compensation expense

84


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(see Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies ) for time-based option awards over the vesting period.

        The tables below summarize the Company's stock options as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 and changes during the years then ended:

Options Outstanding
  Number of
Shares
  Weighted
Average
Exercise Price
 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

    566,963   $ 32.30  

Granted

    252,464     17.16  

Exercised

    (111,792 )   1.91  

Forfeited

    (180,665 )   44.62  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

    526,970     27.27  

Granted

         

Exercised

         

Forfeited

    (15,995 )   43.15  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

    510,975     26.77  

Granted

         

Exercised

         

Forfeited

    (167,649 )   46.18  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2013

    343,326   $ 17.29  
             
             

Amount exercisable at December 31,

             

2013

    262,017   $ 17.28  

2012

    319,793     32.53  

2011

    221,344     41.18  

 

 
  Options Outstanding   Options Exercisable  
Range of Exercise Prices
  Number
Outstanding
  Weighted
Average
Remaining
Contractual
Life (Years)
  Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
  Number
Exercisable
  Weighted
Average
Exercise
Price
 

$12.17  - 17.44

    128,348     0.70   $ 14.68     111,284   $ 15.07  

17.45  - 18.71

    192,733     2.89     18.71     128,488     18.71  

18.72  - 20.09

    22,245     0.03     20.09     22,245     20.09  
                             

    343,326     3.62   $ 17.29     262,017   $ 17.28  
                             
                             

        For the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company recorded share-based compensation expense of $0.6 million related to the Company's outstanding stock options, which was offset by related income tax benefits of approximately $0.3 million. For the year ended December 31, 2012, the Company recorded share-based compensation expense of $0.7 million related to the Company's outstanding stock options, which was offset by related income tax benefits of approximately $0.3 million. For the year ended December 31, 2011, the Company recorded an expense reversal of $0.2 million related to the recognition of forfeitures during the year, partially offset by income tax expense of $0.1 million.

        The weighted average remaining contractual term of stock options currently exercisable is 3.31 years.

85


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        All of the stock options outstanding at December 31, 2013 were time-based.

        During 2013, no stock options were exercised and as a result the provision for income taxes did not include current tax benefits related to the exercise of stock options. During 2013, a tax shortfall related to cancellations of $0.3 million was recognized. During 2012, no stock options were exercised and as a result the provision for income taxes did not include current tax benefits related to the exercise of stock options. During 2012, a tax shortfall related to cancellations of $0.1 million was recognized. During 2011, only incentive stock options were exercised for which the Company does not receive a tax deduction.

        The following table summarizes information about stock options at December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011:

($ in thousands, except per share amounts)
  2013   2012   2011  

Total intrinsic value of stock options exercised

          $ 1,978  

Weighted average grant date fair value of stock options granted during period, per share

            6.44  

Cash received from stock option exercises

            0.2  

        The total intrinsic value of outstanding and exercisable stock options at December 31, 2013 was $1.1 million and $0.9 million, respectively.

        As of December 31, 2013, there was $0.1 million of total unrecognized compensation costs related to outstanding stock options. These costs are expected to be recognized ratably over a weighted average period of approximately 0.24 years.

        Stock option exercises are settled from issuance of shares of the Company's common stock held in treasury to the extent available.

        Under the 2007 Plan, the Company is permitted to grant restricted share awards to employees. Generally, and except for awards granted under the VCSUA Subplan, restricted share awards granted since 2007 vest in one of the following manners: (a) cliff vest on the third anniversary of the grant date so long as the award recipient is employed on such date, or (b) serial vest on each of the second, third and fourth anniversaries of the date of grant so long as the award recipient is employed on the applicable vesting date and the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding each of the vesting dates is greater than the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding the grant date (market-based restricted stock units). Accordingly, not all restricted shares awarded will vest and be delivered. The Company recognizes share-based compensation expense (see Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies ) over this three-year period or four-year period, as applicable.

        Under the VCSUA Subplan, each eligible participant is granted a number of basic stock units on the date the year-end cash bonus would otherwise be paid to the participant equal to (i) the amount by which the participant's variable compensation is reduced as determined by the compensation committee, divided by (ii) the fair market value of a share of the Company's common stock on the date of grant. In addition, each participant is granted an additional number of matching stock units on the date of grant equal to 10% of the number of basic stock units granted (20% prior to 2012). Basic stock units under the VCSUA Subplan that are time-based vest in equal annual installments on each of the first, second and third anniversaries of the date of grant, if the participant remains continuously employed by the Company on each applicable vesting date. Matching stock units on time-based awards will vest 100% on the third anniversary of the date of grant, if the participant remains continuously

86


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

employed by the Company through such vesting date. Basic units under the VCSUA Subplan that are market-based vest in equal installments on each of the second, third and fourth anniversaries of the date of grant so long as the award recipient is employed on the applicable vesting date and the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding each of the vesting dates is greater than the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding the grant date. Matching stock units on market-based awards will vest 100% on the fourth anniversary of the date of grant so long as the award recipient is employed on the applicable vesting date and the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding the vesting date is greater than the 90-day average of the Company's common stock price preceding the grant date. All vested stock units are settled in shares of ITG common stock within 30 days after the date on which such matching stock units vest.

        During 2010, in conjunction with the acquisition of Majestic Research Corp. ("Majestic"), the Company granted "employment inducement awards" under Section 303A.08 of the New York Stock Exchange Listed Company Manual ("Inducement Awards") to certain Majestic employees. Stock units for 319,674 shares vested, or shall vest, in equal installments on each of the first four anniversaries of the grant date of the awards. Stock units for 415,579 shares are performance-based and vested, or shall vest, over the first four anniversaries of the award grant dates, based upon achievement of certain metrics as of the first and second anniversaries of the award grant dates.

        During 2011, in conjunction with the acquisition of RSEG, the Company granted Inducement Awards to certain RSEG employees. Stock units for 181,623 shares vested in equal installments on December 31, 2011, 2012 and 2013 and stock units for 181,328 shares vested, or shall vest, in equal installments on each of the first three anniversaries of the grant date of the awards.

        The Company recorded share-based compensation expense of $13.0 million ($0.4 million of which was recorded in restructuring charges), $12.4 million ($0.5 million of which was recorded in restructuring charges), and $20.6 million ($2.3 million of which was recorded in severance and restructuring charges) for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively, related to restricted share awards which were offset by related income tax benefits of approximately $5.2 million, $5.0 million and $8.4 million, respectively.

87


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        A summary of the status of the Company's restricted share awards as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 and changes during the years then ended are presented below:

 
  Number of Shares
underlying
Performance-Based
or Market-Based
Restricted
Stock Units
  Number of Shares
underlying Time-
Based Restricted
Stock Units
  Total Number of
Shares
  Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

    982,881     1,952,442     2,935,323     19.44  

Granted

    128,208     1,214,964     1,343,172     16.65  

Vested

    (66,271 )   (776,782 )   (843,053 )   23.29  

Forfeited

    (252,760 )   (127,378 )   (380,138 )   16.71  
                     

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

    792,058     2,263,246     3,055,304     17.49  

Granted

    216,740     1,176,006     1,392,746     10.63  

Vested

    (86,769 )   (963,991 )   (1,050,760 )   17.99  

Forfeited

    (244,198 )   (91,757 )   (335,955 )   26.10  
                     

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

    677,831     2,383,504     3,061,335     13.25  

Granted

    91,932     931,879     1,023,811     12.00  

Vested

    (64,865 )   (1,138,277 )   (1,203,142 )   14.47  

Forfeited

    (246,155 )   (197,622 )   (443,777 )   12.20  
                     

Outstanding at December 31, 2013

    458,743     1,979,484     2,438,227   $ 12.31  
                     
                     

        At December 31, 2013, 45,668 of the outstanding restricted share awards were performance-based restricted stock units and 413,075 were market-based restricted stock units.

        As of December 31, 2013, there was $13.6 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to outstanding restricted share awards. These costs are expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of approximately 1.69 years. During 2013, restricted shares with a grant date fair value of approximately $15.7 million vested.

        The provision for income taxes excludes excess current tax benefits related to the vesting of restricted share awards. There were no such tax benefits, but rather tax shortfalls of $1.2 million, $4.0 million and $2.2 million related to the vesting and cancellation of restricted share awards for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively. The tax shortfalls that occurred were the result of the tax deduction being less than the cumulative book compensation cost and are reflected as a decrease to additional paid-in capital.

        Under the 2007 Plan and the VCSUA Subplan, the Company is permitted to grant phantom share awards. Phantom share awards vest like any other award granted under the 2007 Plan and VCSUA Subplan as described above and are settled in cash. The Company recognizes share-based compensation expense (see Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies ) over the applicable vesting period. For the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, the Company recorded share-based compensation expense of $7.3 million, $2.6 million and $1.1 million, respectively related to phantom share awards offset by related tax benefits of $2.0 million, $0.7 million and $0.3 million, respectively.

88


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        A summary of the status of the Company's phantom share awards as of December 31, 2013, and changes during the year then ended are presented below:

 
  Number of
Shares
  Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

    259,370     18.51  

Granted

    205,760     18.67  

Vested

    (67,383 )   19.21  

Forfeited

         
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

    397,747     18.47  

Granted

    447,353     11.33  

Vested

    (135,049 )   19.46  

Forfeited

    (14,341 )   17.21  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

    695,710     13.72  

Granted

    249,365     12.01  

Vested

    (245,296 )   14.52  

Forfeited

    (28,017 )   14.92  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2013

    671,762   $ 12.74  
             
             

        At December 31, 2013, 74,207 of the outstanding phantom share awards were market-based.

        As of December 31, 2013, there was $6.9 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to grants of phantom share awards. These costs are expected to be recognized over a weighted average period of approximately 1.68 years. Effective January 1, 2014, the Company will no longer be granting phantom share awards.

SUA Subplan

        Effective June 30, 2003, employees earning total cash compensation per annum of $200,000 and greater participated in the SUA Subplan, a mandatory tax-deferred compensation program, which merged into the 2007 Plan as referenced above. Under the SUA Subplan, these employee participants were required to defer receipt of (and thus taxation on) a graduated portion of participants' total cash compensation for units representing the Company's common stock equal in value to 130% of the compensation deferred. The units representing 100% of the total compensation deferred were at all times fully vested and non-forfeitable; however the units were restricted to settlement to common shares half of which were distributed on the third anniversary of the deferral and the remaining half on the sixth anniversary of the deferral. The match representing 30% of the compensation deferred was contingent only on employment with the Company and vested 50% on the third anniversary of the deferral and the remaining 50% on the sixth year of the deferral.

        Effective January 1, 2006, the SUA Subplan was amended to make participation in the plan among eligible participants (employees earning total cash compensation per annum of $200,000 and greater) elective, rather than mandatory. In addition, beginning January 1, 2006, the plan deferred receipt of (and thus taxation on) a graduated portion of participants' total cash compensation for units representing the Company's common stock equal in value to 120% of the compensation deferred. The units representing 100% of the total compensation deferred were at all times fully vested and non-forfeitable; however the units were restricted to settlement to common shares distributed in whole

89


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

on the third anniversary of the deferral. The match representing 20% of the compensation deferred was contingent only on employment with the Company and vested 100% on the third anniversary of the deferral.

        Effective January 1, 2009, the SUA Subplan was further amended and restated. The amendment froze the SUA Subplan such that it did not apply to compensation earned for any calendar year after 2008 and provided participants with a special transition election with respect to cessation of participation in the SUA Subplan for bonus payments for 2008 that were due after December 31, 2008 and on or before March 15, 2009. Certain other amendments were made to the SUA Subplan in order to comply with section 409A of the Internal Revenue Code.

        While the Company did not record any additional share-based compensation costs during 2013 or 2012, approximately $0.2 million was reversed in 2011 as a result of forfeitures. Related income tax expense of less than $0.1 million was also recorded during 2011.

        A summary of activity under the SUA Subplan is as follows:

 
  Number of
Shares
  Weighted
Average
Grant Date
Fair Value
 

Outstanding at December 31, 2010

    364,167     29.82  

Granted

         

Vested

    (288,917 )   28.98  

Forfeited

    (3,670 )   15.40  
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2011

    71,580     33.95  

Granted

         

Vested

    (71,580 )   33.95  

Forfeited

         
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2012

         

Granted

         

Vested

         

Forfeited

         
             

Outstanding at December 31, 2013

      $  
             
             

        Shares issued under the SUA Subplan are from common shares held in treasury, to the extent available.

ITG Employee and Non-Employee Director Benefit Plans

        All U.S. employees are eligible to participate in the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Retirement Savings Plan ("RSP"). The RSP applies to all eligible compensation up to the Internal Revenue Service annual maximum which was $255,000 during 2013. Prior to January 1, 2011, the RSP's features included a guaranteed Company contribution of 3% of eligible compensation, a discretionary Company contribution between 0% and 8% of eligible compensation based on consolidated Company profits for the year and a 66 2 / 3 % Company matching contribution applied to a maximum of 6% of eligible compensation per year. Effective as of January 1, 2011, the guaranteed Company contribution of 3% was eliminated, and until December 31, 2011, the Company matching contribution applied to 50% of voluntary employee contributions, on a maximum of 6% of eligible compensation per year. Effective as

90


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

of January 1, 2012, the Company matching contribution applies to 50% of voluntary employee contributions, on a maximum of 4% of eligible compensation per year. The Company may still make discretionary contributions based on consolidated profits. Most of the Company's international employees are eligible to participate in similar defined contribution plans. The costs for these benefits were approximately $4.6 million, $5.5 million and $6.6 million in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively, and are included in compensation and employee benefits in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

        Non-employee directors receive an annual retainer fee of $60,000, with the exception of the chairman who receives $160,000 under the Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan, which was adopted in 2002. This retainer fee is payable, at the election of each director, either in (i) cash, (ii) Company common stock with a value equal to the retainer fee on the grant date or (iii) under a deferred compensation plan which provides deferred share units with a value equal to the retainer fee on the grant date which convert to freely sellable shares when the director retires from the Board of Directors. Directors who chose common stock or deferred share units, in the aggregate, received 33,010 units or shares, 39,571 units or shares, and 29,347 units in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively. At December 31, 2013, there were 131,855 deferred share units outstanding. The cost of the Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan was approximately $714,000, $854,000, and $769,000 in 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively, and is included in other general and administrative expenses in the Consolidated Statements of Operations.

        In November 1997, the Board of Directors approved the ITG Employee Stock Purchase Plan ("ESPP"), an employee stock purchase plan qualified under Section 423 of the Internal Revenue Code. The ESPP became effective February 1, 1998 and allows all full-time employees to purchase shares of ITG common stock at a 15% discount through automatic payroll deductions. In accordance with the provisions of ASC 718, the ESPP is compensatory. The Company recorded share-based compensation expense related to the ESPP of $242,000, $390,000, and $451,000 for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, respectively. Shares distributed under the ESPP are newly-issued shares.

(20) Earnings (Loss) Per Share

        The following is a reconciliation of the basic and diluted earnings per share computations for the years ended December 31 (dollars in thousands, except per share amounts):

 
  2013   2012   20111  

Net income (loss) for basic and diluted earnings per share

  $ 31,085   $ (247,859 ) $ (179,789 )
               
               

Shares of common stock and common stock equivalents:

                   

Weighted average shares—basic

    36,788     38,418     40,691  

Effect of dilutive securities

    1,326          
               

Weighted average shares—diluted

    38,114     38,418     40,691  
               
               

Earnings (loss) per share:

                   

Basic

  $ 0.84   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 )
               
               

Diluted

  $ 0.82   $ (6.45 ) $ (4.42 )
               
               

        At December 31, 2013 approximately 0.2 million share equivalents (based on the treasury stock method) were not included in the computation of diluted earnings per share because their effects

91


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

would have been anti-dilutive. The impact of all 3.6 million common stock equivalents in both 2012 and 2011 was anti-dilutive due to the fact that the Company reported a loss.

(21) Commitments and Contingencies

    Legal Matters

        The Company is periodically involved in litigation and various legal matters that arise in the normal course of business, including proceedings relating to regulatory matters. Such matters are subject to many uncertainties and outcomes that are not predictable. At the current time, the Company does not believe that any of these matters will have a material adverse effect on its financial position or future results of operations.

    Lease Commitments

        The Company has entered into lease and sublease agreements with third parties for certain offices and equipment, which expire at various dates through 2029. Rent expense for each of the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 was $17.6 million, $13.2 million and $12.9 million, respectively, and is recorded in occupancy and equipment expense in the Consolidated Statements of Operations. Rent expense for 2013 includes duplicate rent charges of $2.6 million while the Company built-out its new headquarters and a charge of $2.3 million recorded in the second quarter of 2013 for the remaining rent expense at its old headquarters upon completion of the move. Rent expense for 2012 includes duplicate rent charges of $1.4 million. The Company recognizes rent expense for escalation clauses, rent holidays, leasehold improvement incentives and other concessions using the straight-line method over the minimum lease term. Minimum future rental commitments under non-cancelable operating leases follow (dollars in thousands):

Year Ending December 31,
   
 

2014

    16,265  

2015

    16,288  

2016

    15,144  

2017

    9,367  

2018

    8,841  

2019 and thereafter

    74,228  
       

Total

  $ 140,133  
       
       

    Other Commitments

        Pursuant to employment arrangements, in the event of termination of employment without cause on December 31, 2013, the Company would be obligated to pay separation payments totaling $4.8 million.

        Pursuant to contracts expiring through 2018, the Company is obligated to purchase market data, maintenance and other services totaling $55.5 million.

92


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(22) Segment Reporting

        The Company is organized into four geographic operating segments through which the Company's chief operating decision maker manages the Company's business. The U.S., Canadian, European and Asia Pacific Operations segments provide the following types of products and services:

    Electronic Brokerage—includes self-directed trading using algorithms, smart routing and matching through POSIT in cash equities (including single stocks and portfolio lists), futures and options

    Research, Sales and Trading—includes (a) differentiated, unbiased, data-driven equity research through the use of innovative data mining and analysis, as well as detailed analysis of energy asset plays, and (b) portfolio trading and high-touch trading desks providing execution expertise and trading ideas based on investment research

    Platforms—includes trade order and execution management software applications in addition to network connectivity

    Analytics—includes tools enabling portfolio managers and traders to improve pre-trade and real-time execution performance, portfolio construction and optimization decisions and securities valuation.

        The accounting policies of the reportable segments are the same as those described in Note 2, Summary of Significant Accounting Policies. The Company allocates resources to, and evaluates the performance of, its reportable segments based on income or loss before income tax expense. Consistent with the Company's resource allocation and operating performance evaluation approach, the effects of inter-segment activities are eliminated except in limited circumstances where certain technology related costs are allocated to a segment to support that segment's revenue producing activities. Commissions and fees revenue for trade executions and commission share revenues are principally attributed to each segment based upon the location of execution of the related transaction. Recurring revenues are principally attributed based upon the location of the client using the respective service.

93


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        A summary of the segment financial information is as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  U.S.
Operations
  Canadian
Operations
  European
Operations
  Asia Pacific
Operations
  Consolidated  

2013

                               

Total revenues

  $ 318,036   $ 74,994   $ 91,792   $ 45,979   $ 530,801  

Income (loss) before income tax expense (1) (2) (3)

    15,687     11,441     18,106     (2,179 )   43,055  

Identifiable assets

    1,183,986     88,503     508,625     428,773     2,209,887  

Capital purchases

    28,367     1,188     3,323     671     33,549  

Depreciation and amortization

    43,017     3,437     6,012     1,140     53,606  

Share-based compensation

    10,932     6,852     2,223     854     20,861  

2012

                               

Total revenues

  $ 321,379   $ 76,913   $ 67,266   $ 38,878   $ 504,436  

(Loss) income before income tax expense (1) (2) (4)

    (248,101 )   10,397     (24,350 )   (8,401 )   (270,455 )

Identifiable assets

    1,238,822     99,625     518,335     339,977     2,196,759  

Capital purchases

    29,159     2,575     923     767     33,424  

Depreciation and amortization

    44,585     3,711     6,918     1,279     56,493  

Share-based compensation

    10,449     2,543     2,091     545     15,628  

2011

                               

Total revenues

  $ 375,521   $ 85,550   $ 70,670   $ 40,296   $ 572,037  

(Loss) income before income tax expense (1) (5) (6)

    (222,337 )   20,035     2,263     (6,589 )   (206,628 )

Identifiable assets

    1,351,062     83,453     336,454     407,100     2,178,069  

Capital purchases

    18,684     1,525     1,448     1,200     22,857  

Depreciation and amortization

    47,004     2,882     7,636     1,535     59,057  

Share-based compensation

    16,436     1,076     1,509     1,135     20,156  

(1)
In 2013, the Company incurred $1.6 million to implement a restructuring plan to close its technology research and development facility in Israel and migrate that function to an outsourced service provider model effective January 1, 2014. This plan primarily focused on reducing costs by limiting ITG's geographic footprint while maintaining the necessary technological expertise via a consulting arrangement. The Company also reduced previously-recorded 2012 and 2011 restructuring accruals of $1.6 million to reflect the sub-lease of previously-vacated office space and certain legal and other employee-related charges deemed unnecessary. During 2012, ITG implemented a restructuring plan to reduce operating costs by reducing workforce, market data and other general and administrative costs across ITG's businesses. The $9.5 million charge consisted entirely of employee separation costs. In 2011, the Company implemented a restructuring plan to improve margins and enhance shareholder returns primarily focused on reducing costs in workforce, consulting and infrastructure in the U.S. and Europe. The cost reduction plan resulted in a restructuring charge totaling $24.4 million for employee separation and lease consolidation costs.

(2)
During 2012, ITG began to build out and ready its new lower Manhattan headquarters while continuing to occupy its then-existing headquarters in midtown Manhattan and as a result incurred duplicate rent charges of $2.6 million in 2013 and $1.4 million in 2012.

94


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(3)
In the second quarter of 2013, ITG moved into its new headquarters and incurred a non-operating charge of $3.9 million, which included a reserve for the remaining lease obligation for the previous midtown Manhattan headquarters.

(4)
Loss before tax expense in 2012 includes the impact of a $274.3 million goodwill impairment charge. The segment breakdown of this charge is as follows: U.S. Operations—$245.1 million, European Operations—$28.5 million and Asia Pacific Operations—$0.7 million.

(5)
In 2011, goodwill with a carrying value of $470.1 million in the U.S. operating segment was deemed impaired and its fair value was determined to be $245.1 million, resulting in an impairment charge of $225.0 million. Also during 2011, the Company determined that the carrying value of its investment in Disclosure Insight, Inc. was fully impaired, resulting in a write-off of $4.3 million.

(6)
During 2011, the Company acquired Ross Smith Energy Group Ltd., a Calgary-based independent provider of research on the oil and gas industry. In connection with the acquisition, the Company incurred acquisition-related costs of $2.5 million, including legal fees, contract settlement costs and other professional fees.

        The table below details the total revenues for the products and services provided by our geographic segments (dollars in thousands):

 
  Year Ended
December 31,
 
 
  2013   2012  

Revenues:

             

Electronic Brokerage

  $ 279,830   $ 250,882  

Research, Sales and Trading

    107,383     106,427  

Platforms

    96,127     99,334  

Analytics

    46,004     46,508  

Corporate (non-product)

    1,457     1,285  
           

Total Revenues

  $ 530,801   $ 504,436  
           
           

        Prior to 2012, the Company considered all of its products and services as part of one integrated offering from each of its geographic segments. As a result, revenues by types of products and services for 2011 are not available.

        Long-lived assets, classified by the geographic region in which the Company operates, are as follows (dollars in thousands):

 
  2013   2012   2011  

Long-lived Assets at December 31,

                   

United States

  $ 116,812   $ 115,726   $ 360,309  

Canada

    5,676     7,174     6,873  

Europe

    11,413     10,260     40,052  

Asia Pacific

    2,046     2,305     3,162  
               

Total

  $ 135,947   $ 135,465   $ 410,396  
               
               

        The Company's long-lived assets primarily consist of premises and equipment, capitalized software, goodwill, other intangibles and debt issuance costs.

95


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

(23) Supplementary Financial Information (unaudited)

        The following tables set forth certain unaudited financial data for the Company's quarterly operations in 2013 and 2012. The following information has been prepared on the same basis as the annual information presented elsewhere in this report and, in the opinion of management, includes all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair presentation of the information for the quarterly periods presented. The operating results for any quarter are not necessarily indicative of results for any future period.

 
  (Unaudited) December 31, 2013   (Unaudited) December 31, 2012  
$ in thousands, expect per share
amounts
  Fourth
Quarter
  Third
Quarter
  Second
Quarter
  First
Quarter
  Fourth
Quarter
  Third
Quarter
  Second
Quarter
  First
Quarter
 

Total revenues

  $ 131,900   $ 127,558   $ 139,293   $ 132,050   $ 121,534   $ 119,617   $ 126,910   $ 136,375  

Expenses:

                                                 

Compensation and employee benefits

    50,839     49,664     51,202     49,549     47,100     47,135     49,540     52,587  

Transaction processing

    19,971     19,790     22,499     21,532     19,965     19,336     19,649     22,223  

Occupancy and equipment

    15,940     15,821     20,720     16,541     16,892     16,033     15,063     14,649  

Telecommunications and data processing services

    13,142     12,649     13,718     14,098     15,037     15,034     14,712     15,067  

Other general and administrative

    20,544     18,351     19,760     18,776     21,049     21,220     23,597     22,677  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

                            274,285      

Restructuring charges

            (75 )       9,499              

Interest expense

    821     593     699     602     562     678     624     678  
                                   

Total expenses

    121,257     116,868     128,523     121,098     130,104     119,436     397,470     127,881  
                                   

Income (loss) before income tax expense

    10,643     10,690     10,770     10,952     (8,570 )   181     (270,560 )   8,494  

Income tax expense (benefit)

    981     2,975     5,684     2,330     (2,117 )   (51 )   (23,464 )   3,036  
                                   

Net income (loss)

  $ 9,662   $ 7,715     5,086   $ 8,622   $ (6,453 )   232   $ (247,096 ) $ 5,458  
                                   
                                   

Basic earnings (loss) per share

  $ 0.27   $ 0.21   $ 0.14   $ 0.23   $ (0.17 ) $ 0.01   $ (6.40 ) $ 0.14  
                                   
                                   

Diluted earnings (loss) per share

  $ 0.26   $ 0.20   $ 0.13   $ 0.22   $ (0.17 ) $ 0.01   $ (6.40 ) $ 0.14  
                                   
                                   

Basic weighted average number of common shares outstanding

    36,287     36,544     36,956     37,378     37,709     38,301     38,607     39,112  
                                   
                                   

Diluted weighted average number of common shares outstanding

    37,685     37,781     38,000     38,615     37,709     39,252     38,607     40,303  
                                   
                                   

96


Table of Contents


INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (Continued)

        Earnings per share for quarterly periods are based on the weighted average common shares outstanding in individual quarters; thus, the sum of earnings per share of the quarters may not equal the amounts reported for the full year.

 
  (Unaudited) December 31, 2013   (Unaudited) December 31, 2012  
As a percentage of Total Revenues
  Fourth
Quarter
  Third
Quarter
  Second
Quarter
  First
Quarter
  Fourth
Quarter
  Third
Quarter
  Second
Quarter
  First
Quarter
 

Total revenues

    100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %   100.0 %

Expenses:

                                                 

Compensation and employee benefits

    38.5     38.9     36.8     37.5     38.8     39.4     39.0     38.6  

Transaction processing

    15.1     15.5     16.2     16.3     16.4     16.2     15.5     16.3  

Occupancy and equipment

    12.1     12.4     14.9     12.5     13.9     13.4     11.9     10.7  

Telecommunications and data processing services

    10.0     9.9     9.8     10.7     12.4     12.6     11.6     11.0  

Other general and administrative

    15.6     14.4     14.2     14.2     17.3     17.7     18.6     16.6  

Goodwill and other asset impairment

                            216.1      

Restructuring charges

            (0.1 )       7.8              

Interest expense

    0.6     0.5     0.5     0.5     0.5     0.6     0.5     0.5  
                                   

Total expenses

    91.9     91.6     92.3     91.7     107.1     99.8     313.2     93.8  
                                   

Income (loss) before income tax expense

    8.1     8.4     7.7     8.3     (7.1 )   0.2     (213.2 )   6.2  

Income tax expense (benefit)

    0.7     2.3     4.1     1.8     (1.7 )   (0.0 )   (18.5 )   2.2  
                                   

Net income (loss)

    7.3 %   6.0 %   3.7 %   6.5 %   (5.3 )%   0.2 %   (194.7 )%   4.0 %
                                   
                                   

(24) Subsequent Event

        On January 31, 2014, ITG Inc. as borrower, and Parent Company as guarantor entered into a new $150 million two-year revolving credit agreement (the "New Credit Agreement") with a syndicate of banks and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., as Administrative Agent. The New Credit Agreement includes an accordion feature that allows for potential expansion of the facility up to $225 million. The terms and conditions of the New Credit Agreement are substantially the same as the initial Credit Agreement that matured on January 31, 2014 (see Note 14, Borrowings ).

        The Term Loan, Master Lease Agreement and the BMO facility were all amended in January 2014 to require compliance with the financial covenants of the New Credit Agreement for as long as the New Credit Agreement is outstanding.

97


Table of Contents

Item 9.    Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure

        There were no changes in, or disagreements with, accountants reportable herein.

Item 9A.    Controls and Procedures

Conclusion Regarding the Effectiveness of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

        Under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our principal executive officer and principal financial officer, we conducted an evaluation of our disclosure controls and procedures, as such term is defined under Rule 13a-15(e) promulgated under the Exchange Act. Based on this evaluation, our principal executive officer and our principal financial officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were effective as of the end of the period covered by this annual report.

Changes in Internal Control over Financial Reporting

        There were no changes in the Company's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the quarter ended December 31, 2013 that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.

Management's Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

        The management of ITG is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. ITG's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed under the supervision of ITG's chief executive and chief financial officers, and effected by ITG's board of directors, management and other personnel, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of ITG's financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with U.S. GAAP and includes policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of ITG, (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, and that receipts and expenditures of ITG are being made only in accordance with authorizations of ITG's management and directors and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of ITG's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

        Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of the effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with policies and procedures may deteriorate.

        Management assessed the effectiveness of ITG's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013. In making this assessment, management used the criteria set forth by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in Internal Control—Integrated Framework . Based on its assessment and those criteria, management has concluded that ITG maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013.

        The effectiveness of ITG's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013 has been audited by KPMG LLP, ITG's independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report on the following page, which expressed an unqualified opinion on the effectiveness of ITG's internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013.

98


Table of Contents


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors and Stockholders
Investment Technology Group, Inc.:

        We have audited Investment Technology Group, Inc.'s (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). The Company's management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management's Report on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company's internal control over financial reporting based on our audit.

        We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

        A company's internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company's internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company's assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

        Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

        In our opinion, Investment Technology Group, Inc. maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control—Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

        We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States), the consolidated statements of financial condition of Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2013, and our report dated March 13, 2014 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

/s/ KPMG LLP

New York, New York

March 17, 2014

99


Table of Contents

Item 9B.    Other Information

        None

PART III

Item 10.    Directors, Executive Officers and Corporate Governance

        Information with respect to this item is contained in the Proxy Statement for the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 11.    Executive Compensation

        Information with respect to this item is contained in the Proxy Statement for the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 12.    Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management and Related Stockholder Matters

        Information with respect to this item is contained in the Proxy Statement for the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 13.    Certain Relationships and Related Transactions, and Director Independence

        Information with respect to this item is contained in the Proxy Statement for the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Item 14.    Principal Accounting Fees and Services

        Information with respect to this item is contained in the Proxy Statement for the 2014 Annual Meeting of Stockholders, which is incorporated herein by reference.


PART IV

Item 15.    Exhibits, Financial Statement Schedules

(a)(1) Financial Statements

        Included in Part II of this report:

 
  Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

 
50

Consolidated Statements of Financial Condition

 
51

Consolidated Statements of Operations

 
52

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)

 
53

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholders' Equity

 
54

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 
55

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 
56

(a)(2)  Schedules

        Schedules are omitted because the required information either is not applicable or is included in the financial statements or the notes thereto.

100


Table of Contents

(a)(3) Exhibits

Exhibits
Number
  Description
     3.1   Certificate of Incorporation of the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 3.1 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999).

 

   3.2

 

Amended and Restated By-laws of the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 3 to the Form 8-K dated February 15, 2007).

 

   4.1

 

Form of Certificate for Common Stock of the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 4.1 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999).

 

 10.1

+

Credit Agreement, dated January 31, 2011 by and among ITG Inc., Investment Technology Group, Inc., the several banks and other financial institutions or entities from time to time parties thereto as lenders, Bank of America, N.A., as syndication agent, Bank of Montreal as document agent, and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. as administrative agent (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.2 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010).

 

 10.2


Credit Agreement, dated January 31, 2014 by and among ITG Inc., Investment Technology Group, Inc., the several banks and other financial institutions or entities from time to time parties thereto as lenders, Bank of America, N.A. and Bank of Montreal, as syndication agents, and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. as administrative agent.

 

 10.3

 

Lease, dated October 4, 1996 between Spartan Madison Corp. and the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.5.3 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997).

 

 10.3.1

 

First Supplemental Agreement, dated as of January 29, 1997 between Spartan Madison Corp. and the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.5.4 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997).

 

 10.3.2

 

Second Supplemental Agreement, dated as of November 25, 1997 between Spartan Madison Corp. and the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.5.5 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1997).

 

 10.3.3

 

Third Supplemental Agreement, dated as of September 29, 1999 between Spartan Madison Corp. and the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.5.9 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999).

 

 10.3.4

 

Fourth Supplemental Agreement, dated as of February 21, 2006 between TAG 380, LLC and the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.4.17 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2006).

 

 10.4

 

Lease, dated as of February 24, 2012, between Brookfield Properties OLP Co. LLC and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.47 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011).

 

 10.5

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Pay-For-Performance Incentive Plan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.13.2 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.5.1

*

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Pay-For-Performance Incentive Plan (2014).

 

 10.6

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. Amended and Restated 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.1 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q dated August 5, 2010).

 

 10.6.1

*

Investment Technology Group, Inc. Amended and Restated 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (2014).

101


Table of Contents

Exhibits
Number
  Description
   10.7   Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Grant Agreement for Employees (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.25 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.7.1

*

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Grant Agreement for Employees (2014).

 

 10.8

 

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Performance Stock Unit Grant Agreement for Employees (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.26 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.9

 

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Nonqualified Stock Option Agreement for Employees (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.24 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.10

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.37 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2009).

 

 10.10.1

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (formerly the Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan) (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.2 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q dated November 8, 2011).

 

 10.10.2

*

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (formerly the Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan) (2014).

 

 10.11

 

Form of Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan between the Company and certain employees of the Company (2010) (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.38 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2009).

 

 10.12

 

Form of KEEP Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan between the Company and Executive Committee Members of the Company (2010) (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.3 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q dated May 10, 2010).

 

 10.13

 

Form of Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan between the Company and certain employees of the Company (2011) (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.43 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010).

 

 10.14

 

Form of KEEP Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan between the Company and Executive Committee Members of the Company (2011) (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.44 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010).

 

 10.15

 

Form of Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan between the Company and certain employees of the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.43 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011).

 

 10.16

 

Form of KEEP Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan between the Company and Executive Committee Members of the Company (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.44 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011).

102


Table of Contents

Exhibits
Number
  Description
   10.17 * Form of Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan between the Company and certain employees of the Company (2014).

 

 10.18

*

Form of Grant Notice under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan between the Company and Executive Committee Members of the Company (2014).

 

 10.19

*

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Employee Stock Purchase Plan.

 

 10.20

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. Deferred Compensation Plan, dated as of January 1, 1999 (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.4.7 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 1999).

 

 10.21

 

Sixth Amended and Restated Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.3.21 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2006).

 

 10.21.1

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.3 to Form 10-Q dated November 8, 2007).

 

 10.21.2

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.14.2 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.21.3

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.2 to the Form 8-K dated October 14, 2008).

 

 10.22

 

Form of Amended and Restated Change in Control Agreement (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.10 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2010).

 

 10.23

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors' Retainer Fee Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.19.2 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.24

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors' Equity Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.5.3 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.24.1

 

Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors' Equity Subplan (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.1 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2012).

 

 10.25

 

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Grant Agreement for Non-Employee Directors (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.4 to Form 10-Q dated November 8, 2007).

 

 10.26

 

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Grant Agreement (Annual Stock Units) for Non-Employee Directors (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.2 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended March 31, 2012).

 

 10.27

 

Form of Investment Technology Group, Inc. Non-Qualified Stock Option Grant Agreement for Non-Employee Directors (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.7 to Form 10-Q dated November 8, 2007).

103


Table of Contents

Exhibits
Number
  Description
   10.28   Amended and Restated Employment Agreement, dated April 20, 2010, between Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Robert C. Gasser (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.1 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q dated May 10, 2010).

 

 10.29

 

Form of Non-Qualified Stock Option Grant Agreement between Investment Technology Group, Inc and Robert C. Gasser (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.36 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2007).

 

 10.30

 

Offer letter dated December 21, 2009 between Steven R. Vigliotti and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.40 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2009).

 

 10.31

 

Amended and Restated Employee Advisor Agreement, dated May 30, 2008, between Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Raymond L. Killian, Jr. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.1 to Form 10-Q dated August 7, 2008).

 

 10.32

 

Separation Agreement dated as of February 3, 2010 between Howard C. Naphtali and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.40 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2011).

 

 10.33

 

Retirement Agreement and General Release, effective August 1, 2011 between Christopher Heckman and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.30 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012)

 

 10.34

 

Offer Letter dated as of September 14, 2011 between David J. Stevens and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.3 to the Quarterly Report on Form 10-Q dated November 8, 2011).

 

 10.35

^

Agreement, effective December 24, 2012, between David J. Stevens and Investment Technology Group, Inc. (incorporated by reference as Exhibit 10.32 to the Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2012)

 

 21.1

*

Subsidiaries of Company.

 

 23.1

*

Consent of KPMG LLP.

 

 31.1

*

Rule 13a-14(a) Certification.

 

 31.2

*

Rule 13a-14(a) Certification.

 

 32.1

*

Section 1350 Certification.

 

 101.INS

*

XBRL Report Instance Document.

 

 101.SCH

*

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document.

 

 101.PRE

*

XBRL Taxonomy Presentation Linkbase Document.

 

 101.CAL

*

XBRL Calculation Linkbase Document.

 

 101.LAB

*

XBRL Taxonomy Label Linkbase Document.
       

*
Filed herewith.

+
Portions of this agreement have been omitted pursuant to a request for confidential treatment filed on February 28, 2011.

×
Portions of this agreement have been omitted pursuant to a request for confidential treatment filed on March 11, 2014.

^
Portions of this agreement have been omitted pursuant to a request for confidential treatment filed on March 5, 2013.

        See list of exhibits at Item 15(a)(3) above and exhibits following.

104


Table of Contents


SIGNATURES

        Pursuant to the requirements of Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.


 

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

 

By:

 

/s/ STEVEN R. VIGLIOTTI

Steven R. Vigliotti
Chief Financial Officer and
Duly Authorized Signatory of Registrant

Dated: March 13, 2014

        Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, this report has been signed below by the following persons on behalf of the Registrant and in the capacities and on the dates indicated.

Signature
 
Title
 
Date

 

 

 

 

 
/s/ MAUREEN O'HARA

Maureen O'Hara
  Chairman of Board of Directors   March 17, 2014

/s/ ROBERT C. GASSER

Robert C. Gasser

 

Chief Executive Officer, President and Director

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ STEVEN R. VIGLIOTTI

Steven R. Vigliotti

 

Managing Director and Chief Financial Officer (Principal Financial Officer)

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ ANGELO BULONE

Angelo Bulone

 

Managing Director and Controller (Principal Accounting Officer)

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ MINDER CHENG

Minder Cheng

 

Director

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ CHRISTOPHER V. DODDS

Christopher V. Dodds

 

Director

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ TIMOTHY L. JONES

Timothy L. Jones

 

Director

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ KEVIN J.P. O'HARA

Kevin J.P. O'Hara

 

Director

 

March 17, 2014

/s/ STEVEN S. WOOD

Steven S. Wood

 

Director

 

March 17, 2014

105




Exhibit 10.2

 

 

 

$150,000,000

 

CREDIT AGREEMENT

 

among

 

ITG INC.,

 

as Borrower,

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

as Guarantor,

 

The Several Lenders from Time to Time Parties Hereto,

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A.,

 

and

 

BANK OF MONTREAL,

 

as Syndication Agents,

 

and

 

JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A.,

 

as Administrative Agent

 

Dated as of January 31, 2014

 

 

 

J.P. MORGAN SECURITIES LLC, BMO CAPITAL MARKETS CORP. and

 

MERRILL LYNCH, PIERCE, FENNER & SMITH INCORPORATED

 

as Joint Lead Arrangers and Joint Bookrunners

 

The material marked by asterisks within brackets ([**]) on pages 2, 13 and 41 of this document has been omitted pursuant to a request for confidential treatment from the Commission in accordance with 17 C.F.R. § 240.24b-2.

 



 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

 

 

Page

 

 

SECTION 1.

DEFINITIONS

1

 

 

1.1

Defined Terms

1

1.2

Other Definitional Provisions

18

 

 

SECTION 2.

AMOUNT AND TERMS OF COMMITMENTS

19

 

 

2.1

Revolving Commitments

19

2.2

Procedure for Revolving Loan Borrowing

19

2.3

Swingline Loans

20

2.4

Procedure for Swingline Borrowing; Refunding of Swingline Loans

20

2.5

Commitment Fees, etc.

22

2.6

Termination or Reduction of Revolving Commitments

23

2.7

Optional Prepayments

23

2.8

Daily Calculation of Loan Value; Mandatory Prepayments

23

2.9

Interest Rates and Payment Dates

24

2.10

Computation of Interest and Fees

24

2.11

Pro Rata Treatment and Payments

24

2.12

Requirements of Law

25

2.13

Taxes

26

2.14

Change of Lending Office

29

2.15

Replacement of Lenders

29

2.16

Defaulting Lenders

29

2.17

Incremental Commitments

30

 

 

SECTION 3.

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

31

 

 

3.1

Financial Condition

31

3.2

No Change

31

3.3

Existence; Compliance with Law

31

3.4

Power; Authorization; Enforceable Obligations

32

3.5

No Legal Bar

32

3.6

Litigation

32

3.7

No Default

32

3.8

Ownership of Property; Liens

32

3.9

Intellectual Property

33

3.10

Taxes

33

3.11

Federal Regulations

33

3.12

ERISA

33

3.13

Membership in FINRA; Registration, etc.

34

3.14

Subsidiaries

34

3.15

Use of Proceeds

34

3.16

Environmental Matters

34

3.17

Accuracy of Information, etc.

35

 



 

3.18

Security Documents

35

3.19

Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions

36

 

 

SECTION 4.

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

36

 

 

4.1

Conditions to Closing Date

36

4.2

Conditions to Each Extension of Credit

37

 

SECTION 5.

AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

38

 

5.1

Financial Statements

38

5.2

Certificates; Other Information

39

5.3

Payment of Obligations

39

5.4

Maintenance of Existence; Compliance

39

5.5

Maintenance of Property; Insurance

40

5.6

Inspection of Property; Books and Records; Discussions

40

5.7

Notices

40

5.8

Compliance with Regulatory Requirements

40

5.9

Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions

41

 

 

SECTION 6.

NEGATIVE COVENANTS

41

 

 

6.1

Financial Condition Covenants

41

6.2

Liens

41

6.3

Fundamental Changes

43

6.4

Disposition of Property

43

6.5

Restricted Payments

44

6.6

Capital Expenditures

44

6.7

Investments

45

6.8

Transactions with Affiliates

45

6.9

Changes in Fiscal Periods

45

6.10

Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions

45

6.11

Lines of Business

46

 

 

SECTION 7.

GUARANTEE

46

 

 

7.1

Guarantee

46

7.2

No Subrogation

46

7.3

Amendments, etc. with respect to the Obligations

47

7.4

Guarantee Absolute and Unconditional

47

7.5

Reinstatement

48

7.6

Payments

48

 

 

SECTION 8.

EVENTS OF DEFAULT

48

 

 

 

SECTION 9.

THE AGENTS

51

 

 

9.1

Appointment

51

 



 

9.2

Delegation of Duties

51

9.3

Exculpatory Provisions

51

9.4

Reliance by Administrative Agent

51

9.5

Notice of Default

52

9.6

Non-Reliance on Agents and Other Lenders

52

9.7

Indemnification

52

9.8

Agent in Its Individual Capacity

53

9.9

Successor Administrative Agent

53

9.10

Syndication Agents

53

 

 

SECTION 10.

MISCELLANEOUS

53

 

 

10.1

Amendments and Waivers

53

10.2

Notices

54

10.3

No Waiver; Cumulative Remedies

55

10.4

Survival of Representations and Warranties

56

10.5

Payment of Expenses

56

10.6

Successors and Assigns; Participations and Assignments

57

10.7

Adjustments; Set-off

59

10.8

Counterparts

60

10.9

Severability

60

10.10

Integration

60

10.11

GOVERNING LAW

60

10.12

Submission To Jurisdiction; Waivers

60

10.13

Acknowledgements

61

10.14

Releases of Guarantees and Liens

61

10.15

Confidentiality

61

10.16

WAIVERS OF JURY TRIAL

62

10.17

USA PATRIOT Act

62

 



 

SCHEDULES :

 

1.1A                       Commitments

1.1B                       Broker-Dealer Licenses and Memberships

1.1C                       Broker-Dealer Subsidiaries

3.1                                Guarantee Obligations

3.4                                Consents, Authorizations, Filings and Notices

3.12                         ERISA

3.14                         Subsidiaries

3.18(a)  UCC Filing Jurisdictions

6.2(f)                   Existing Liens

6.6                                Exempt Capital Expenditures

6.7(h)                 Existing Investments

 

EXHIBITS :

 

A                                        Form of Security Agreement

B                                        Form of Compliance Certificate

C                                        Form of Closing Certificate

D                                        Form of Assignment and Assumption

E                                         Form of Exemption Certificate

F                                          Form of Borrowing Request

G                                        Form of Pledged Eligible Assets Notice

H                                       Form of Borrowing Base B Limit Notice

 



 

CREDIT AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”), dated as of January 31, 2014, among ITG INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Borrower ”), INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Guarantor ”), the several banks and other financial institutions or entities from time to time parties to this Agreement (including, for the avoidance of doubt, any Incremental Lender, the “ Lenders ”), BANK OF AMERICA, N.A. and BANK OF MONTREAL, as syndication agents (in such capacities, the “ Syndication Agents ”) and JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., as administrative agent.

 

The parties hereto hereby agree as follows:

 

SECTION 1.                             DEFINITIONS

 

1.1                                Defined Terms .  As used in this Agreement, the terms listed in this Section 1.1 shall have the respective meanings set forth in this Section 1.1.

 

Administrative Agent ”:  JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., together with its Affiliates, as the arranger of the Commitments and as the administrative agent for the Lenders under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, together with any of its successors.

 

Affiliate ”:  as to any Person, any other Person that, directly or indirectly, is in control of, is controlled by, or is under common control with, such Person.  For purposes of this definition, “control” of a Person means the power, directly or indirectly, to direct or cause the direction of the management and policies of such Person, whether by contract or otherwise.  For purposes of Section 6.8, “Affiliate” shall also include a Person with the power, directly or indirectly, to vote 10% or more of the securities having ordinary voting power for the election of directors (or persons performing similar functions) of such Person.

 

Agent Indemnitee ”: as defined in Section 9.7.

 

Agents ”:  the collective reference to the Administrative Agent and the Syndication Agents.

 

Agreement ”:  as defined in the preamble hereto.

 

Anti-Corruption Laws ”:  all laws, rules, and regulations of any jurisdiction applicable to the Borrower, the Guarantor or their respective Subsidiaries from time to time concerning or relating to bribery or corruption.

 

Applicable Margin ”:  2.50%.

 

Applicable Percentage ”:  as to any Lender at any time, the percentage which such Lender’s Commitment then constitutes of the Total Commitments or, at any time after the Commitments shall have expired or terminated, the percentage which the aggregate principal amount of such Lender’s Revolving Loans then outstanding constitutes of the aggregate principal amount of all Revolving Loans then outstanding.

 

Approved Fund ”:  as defined in Section 10.6(b).

 

Assignee ”:  as defined in Section 10.6(b).

 

Assignment and Assumption ”:  an Assignment and Assumption, substantially in the form of Exhibit D.

 



 

Available Commitment ”:  as to any Lender at any time, an amount equal to the excess, if any, of (a) such Lender’s Commitment then in effect over (b) such Lender’s Revolving Extensions of Credit then outstanding; provided , that in calculating any Lender’s Revolving Extensions of Credit for the purpose of determining such Lender’s Available Commitment pursuant to Section 2.5(a), the aggregate principal amount of Swingline Loans then outstanding shall be deemed to be zero.

 

Bankruptcy Event ”: with respect to any Person, such Person becomes the subject of a bankruptcy or insolvency proceeding, or has had a receiver, conservator, trustee, administrator, custodian, assignee for the benefit of creditors or similar Person charged with the reorganization or liquidation of its business appointed for it, or, in the good faith determination of the Administrative Agent, has taken any action in furtherance of, or indicating its consent to, approval of, or acquiescence in, any such proceeding or appointment, provided that a Bankruptcy Event shall not result solely by virtue of any ownership interest, or the acquisition of any ownership interest, in such Person by a Governmental Authority or instrumentality thereof, provided , further , that such ownership interest does not result in or provide such Person with immunity from the jurisdiction of courts within the United States or from the enforcement of judgments or writs of attachment on its assets or permit such Person (or such Governmental Authority or instrumentality) to reject, repudiate, disavow or disaffirm any contracts or agreements made by such Person.

 

Benefited Lender ”:  as defined in Section 10.7(a).

 

Board ”:  the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System of the United States (or any successor).

 

Borrower ”:  as defined in the preamble hereto.

 

Borrowing ”:  Revolving Loans made or continued by the Lenders, or Swingline Loans made or continued by the applicable Swingline Lenders, in either case on the same date.

 

Borrowing Base A Loans ”:  any Loans which are secured by Pledged Eligible Assets.

 

Borrowing Base B Limit ”:  at any time, an amount equal to [**] of the excess, if any, of the Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits at such time over the Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits in effect as at the close of business on the day in the prior calendar month (or, if the certificate for such prior calendar month with respect to Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits has not been delivered pursuant to Section 5.2(c), the preceding calendar month) that was the day having the 10 th  lowest Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits during such calendar month.

 

Borrowing Base B Limit Notice ”:  as defined in Section 2.2(a).

 

Borrowing Base B Loans ”:  any Loans the purpose and use of which is to satisfy NSCC Deposit Requirements.

 

Borrowing Date ”:  any Business Day specified by the Borrower as a date on which the Borrower requests the Lenders to make Loans hereunder.

 

Borrowing Request ”:  as defined in Section 2.2(a).

 

Broker-Dealer Licenses and Memberships ”:  (a) the memberships of each Broker Dealer Subsidiary that is a Domestic Subsidiary with NSCC, DTC and FINRA, (b) the other memberships listed

 

2



 

on Schedule 1.1B of each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary, (c) the licenses with Governmental Authorities listed on Schedule 1.1B of each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary.

 

Broker-Dealer Registrations ”:  the registrations of each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary with the SEC and all other Governmental Authorities which require registration and have jurisdiction over such Broker-Dealer Subsidiary.

 

Broker-Dealer Subsidiaries ”: the Subsidiaries of the Guarantor listed on Schedule 1.1C and any other Subsidiary of the Guarantor that becomes a registered broker-dealer after the date hereof.

 

Business ”:  as defined in Section 3.16(b).

 

Business Day ”:  a day other than a Saturday, Sunday or other day on which commercial banks in New York City are authorized or required by law to close, provided , that with respect to determinations of the Eurodollar Rate, such day is also a day for trading by and between banks in Dollar deposits in the interbank eurodollar market.

 

Capital Expenditures ”:  for any period, with respect to any Person, the aggregate of all expenditures by such Person and its Subsidiaries for the acquisition or leasing (pursuant to a capital lease) of furniture, fixtures and equipment (including replacements, capitalized repairs and improvements during such period) that should be capitalized under GAAP on a consolidated balance sheet of such Person and its Subsidiaries.

 

Capital Lease Obligations ”:  as to any Person, the obligations of such Person to pay rent or other amounts under any lease of (or other arrangement conveying the right to use) real or personal property, or a combination thereof, which obligations are required to be classified and accounted for as capital leases on a balance sheet of such Person under GAAP and, for the purposes of this Agreement, the amount of such obligations at any time shall be the capitalized amount thereof at such time determined in accordance with GAAP.

 

Capital Stock ”:  any and all shares, interests, participations or other equivalents (however designated) of capital stock of a corporation, any and all equivalent ownership interests in a Person (other than a corporation) and any and all warrants, rights or options to purchase any of the foregoing.

 

Cash Equivalents ”:  (a) marketable direct obligations issued by, or unconditionally guaranteed by, the United States Government or issued by any agency thereof and backed by the full faith and credit of the United States, in each case maturing within one year from the date of acquisition; (b) certificates of deposit, time deposits, eurodollar time deposits or overnight bank deposits having maturities of six months or less from the date of acquisition issued by any Lender or by any commercial bank organized under the laws of the United States or any state thereof having combined capital and surplus of not less than $500,000,000; (c) commercial paper of an issuer rated at least A-1 by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services (“ S&P ”) or P-1 by Moody’s Investors Service, Inc. (“ Moody’s ”), or carrying an equivalent rating by a nationally recognized rating agency, if both of the two named rating agencies cease publishing ratings of commercial paper issuers generally, and maturing within six months from the date of acquisition; (d) repurchase obligations of any Lender or of any commercial bank satisfying the requirements of clause (b) of this definition, having a term of not more than 30 days, with respect to securities issued or fully guaranteed or insured by the United States government; (e) securities with maturities of one year or less from the date of acquisition issued or fully guaranteed by any state, commonwealth or territory of the United States, by any political subdivision or taxing authority of any such state, commonwealth or territory or by any foreign government, the securities of which state,

 

3



 

commonwealth, territory, political subdivision, taxing authority or foreign government (as the case may be) are rated at least A by S&P or A by Moody’s; (f) securities with maturities of six months or less from the date of acquisition backed by standby letters of credit issued by any Lender or any commercial bank satisfying the requirements of clause (b) of this definition; (g) money market mutual or similar funds that invest exclusively in assets satisfying the requirements of clauses (a) through (f) of this definition; or (h) money market funds that (1) comply with the criteria set forth in SEC Rule 2a-7 under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, (2) are rated AAA by S&P and Aaa by Moody’s and (3) have portfolio assets of at least $5,000,000,000 or (i) instruments equivalent to those referred to in clauses (a) through (h) above denominated in Euros or any other foreign currency comparable in credit quality and tenor to those referred to above and commonly used by corporations for cash management purposes in any jurisdiction outside the United States to the extent reasonably required in connection with any business conducted by any Subsidiary organized in such jurisdiction.

 

Closing Date ”:  the date on which the conditions precedent set forth in Section 4.1 shall have been satisfied, which date shall not be later than January 31, 2014.

 

Code ”:  the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

 

Collateral ”:  all property and assets of the Borrower with respect to which a Lien is purported to be granted in favor of the Administrative Agent pursuant to a Security Document.

 

Commitment ”:  as to any Lender, the obligation of such Lender to make Revolving Loans and participate in Swingline Loans in an aggregate principal amount not to exceed the amount set forth under the heading “Commitment” opposite such Lender’s name on Schedule 1.1A, in the Assignment and Assumption pursuant to which such Lender became a party hereto, or in the Incremental Assumption Agreement pursuant to which such Lender shall have assumed its Incremental Commitment, as the same may be changed from time to time pursuant to the terms hereof.  The original amount of the Total Commitments is $150,000,000.

 

Commitment Fee Rate ”:  0.50% per annum.

 

Commitment Period ”:  the period from and including the Closing Date to the Termination Date.

 

Commonly Controlled Entity ”:  an entity, whether or not incorporated, that is under “common control” with any Loan Party within the meaning of Section 4001 of ERISA or is part of a group that includes any Loan Party and that is treated as a single employer with any Loan Party under Section 414 of the Code.

 

Compliance Certificate ”:  a certificate duly executed by a Responsible Officer substantially in the form of Exhibit B.

 

Confidential Information Memorandum ”:  the Confidential Information Memorandum dated December 2013 and furnished to certain Lenders.

 

Consolidated EBITDA ”:  for any period, Consolidated Net Income for such period plus , without duplication and to the extent reflected as a charge in the statement of such Consolidated Net Income for such period, the sum of (a) income tax expense, (b) interest expense, amortization or writeoff of debt discount and debt issuance costs and commissions, discounts and other fees and charges associated with Indebtedness, excluding any items in this clause (b) attributable to Excluded Debt, (c) depreciation and amortization expense, excluding amortization expense attributable to Excluded Debt, (d)

 

4



 

amortization of intangibles (including, but not limited to, goodwill) and organization costs, (e) any extraordinary or nonrecurring or unusual charges, expenses or losses, (f) non-recurring fees, expenses or charges related to any offering of equity interests, Investments permitted hereunder, Permitted Acquisitions or Indebtedness permitted hereunder (in each case, whether or not successful), (g) any net after-tax loss from discontinued operations and any net after-tax losses on disposal of discontinued operations; (h) any net after-tax losses, or any subsequent charges or expenses, attributable to business dispositions or asset dispositions having occurred at any time other than in the ordinary course of business, (i) any non-cash impairment charges or asset write-off resulting from the application of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142 or No. 144 and the amortization of intangibles arising pursuant to Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 141; (j) any non-cash expense realized or resulting from any employee benefit plans, post-employment benefit plans, deferred stock compensation plan or grants of stock appreciation or similar rights, stock options, restricted stock or other rights to officers, directors and employees of such Person or any of its Subsidiaries; (k) non-cash losses and expenses resulting from fair value accounting required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133 and fair value accounting pursuant to customary securities industries practices; (l) non-cash charges for deferred tax asset valuation allowances and (m) any amortization or depreciation or any one-time non-cash charges resulting from purchase accounting in connection with any Permitted Acquisition that is consummated hereafter and minus , the sum of (a) to the extent included in the statement of such Consolidated Net Income for such period, the sum of (i) any extraordinary, unusual or non-recurring income or gains (including, whether or not otherwise includable as a separate item in the statement of such Consolidated Net Income for such period, gains on the sales of assets outside of the ordinary course of business), (ii) income tax benefits (to the extent not netted from income tax expense), (iii) any other non-cash income, (iv) any net after-tax income from discontinued operations and any net after-tax gains on disposal of discontinued operations, (v) any net after-tax gains attributable to business dispositions or asset dispositions having occurred at any time other than in the ordinary course of business, (vi) any non-cash gains resulting from the application of Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 142 or No. 144 and (vii) non-cash gains or income resulting from fair value accounting required by Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 133 and fair value accounting pursuant to customary securities industries practices and (b) any cash payments made during such period in respect of items described in clause (j) above subsequent to the fiscal quarter in which the relevant non-cash expenses or losses were reflected as a charge in the statement of Consolidated Net Income, all as determined on a consolidated basis.  For the purposes of calculating Consolidated EBITDA for any period of four consecutive fiscal quarters (each, a “ Reference Period ”) pursuant to any determination of the Consolidated Leverage Ratio, (i) if at any time during such Reference Period the Guarantor or any Subsidiary shall have made any Material Disposition, the Consolidated EBITDA for such Reference Period shall be reduced by an amount equal to the Consolidated EBITDA (if positive) attributable to the property that is the subject of such Material Disposition for such Reference Period or increased by an amount equal to the Consolidated EBITDA (if negative) attributable thereto for such Reference Period and (ii) if during such Reference Period the Borrower or any Subsidiary shall have made a Material Acquisition, Consolidated EBITDA for such Reference Period shall be calculated after giving pro forma effect thereto as if such Material Acquisition occurred on the first day of such Reference Period.  As used in this definition, “Material Acquisition” means any acquisition of property or series of related acquisitions of property that (a) constitutes assets comprising all or substantially all of an operating unit of a business or constitutes all or substantially all of the common stock of a Person and (b) involves the payment of consideration by the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries in excess of $1,000,000; and “Material Disposition” means any Disposition of property or series of related Dispositions of property that (a) constitutes assets comprising all or substantially all of an operating unit of a business of the Guarantor and/or its Subsidiaries or constitutes all or substantially all of the common stock of any Subsidiary and (b) yields gross proceeds to the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries in excess of $1,000,000.

 

5


 

Consolidated Leverage Ratio ”:  at any date, the ratio of (a) Consolidated Total Debt on such date to (b) Consolidated EBITDA for the four fiscal quarters of the Guarantor most recently ended on or prior to such date.

 

Consolidated Net Income ”:  for any period, the consolidated net income (or loss) of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries, determined on a consolidated basis in accordance with GAAP; provided that there shall be excluded (a) the income (or deficit) of any Person accrued prior to the date it becomes a Subsidiary of the Guarantor or is merged into or consolidated with the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries, (b) the income (or deficit) of any Person (other than a Subsidiary of the Guarantor) in which the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries has an ownership interest, except to the extent that any such income is actually received by the Guarantor or such Subsidiary in the form of dividends or similar distributions and (c) the undistributed earnings of any Subsidiary of the Guarantor to the extent that the declaration or payment of dividends or similar distributions by such Subsidiary is not at the time permitted by the terms of any Contractual Obligation (other than under any Loan Document) or Requirement of Law applicable to such Subsidiary; provided , further , that clause (c) above shall not exclude the undistributed earnings of any Subsidiary in situations where the only restriction on the ability of such Subsidiary to declare or pay dividends or make similar distributions arises from regulatory restrictions (or Contractual Obligations relating to compliance with law or regulatory restrictions).

 

Consolidated Tangible Net Worth ”:  at any date, all amounts that would, in conformity with GAAP, be included on a consolidated balance sheet of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries under stockholders’ equity at such date minus the amount of all intangible items included therein, including, without limitation, goodwill, franchises, licenses, patents, trademarks, trade names, copyrights, service marks, brand names and write-ups of assets (but only to the extent that such items would be included on a consolidated balance sheet of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries in accordance with GAAP).

 

Consolidated Total Debt ”:  at any date, the aggregate principal amount of all Indebtedness of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries at such date, determined on a consolidated basis (to the extent such Indebtedness would be included on a balance sheet prepared in accordance with GAAP) but excluding Excluded Debt.

 

Continuing Directors ”:  the directors of the Guarantor on the Closing Date, and each other director, if, in each case, such other director’s nomination for election to the board of directors of the Guarantor is recommended by at least a majority of the then Continuing Directors.

 

Contractual Obligation ”:  as to any Person, any provision of any security issued by such Person or of any agreement, instrument or other undertaking to which such Person is a party or by which it or any of its property is bound.

 

Credit Party ”: the Administrative Agent, the Swingline Lenders or any other Lender.

 

Cumulative Consolidated Net Income ”: as at any date of determination, Consolidated Net Income for the period (taken as one accounting period) commencing on January 1, 2014 and ending on the last day of the most recent fiscal quarter for which financial statements have been delivered pursuant to Section 5.1(a) or (b).

 

Default ”: any of the events specified in Section 8, whether or not any requirement for the giving of notice, the lapse of time, or both, has been satisfied.

 

Defaulting Lender ”: any Lender that (a) has failed, within two Business Days of the date required to be funded or paid, to (i) fund any portion of its Loans, (ii) fund any portion of its

 

6



 

participations in Swingline Loans or (iii) pay over to any Credit Party any other amount required to be paid by it hereunder, unless, in the case of clause (i) above, such Lender notifies the Administrative Agent in writing that such failure is the result of such Lender’s good faith determination that a condition precedent to funding (specifically identified and including the particular default, if any) has not been satisfied, (b) has notified the Borrower or any Credit Party in writing, or has made a public statement to the effect, that it does not intend or expect to comply with any of its funding obligations under this Agreement (unless such writing or public statement indicates that such position is based on such Lender’s good faith determination that a condition precedent (specifically identified and including the particular default, if any) to funding a loan under this Agreement cannot be satisfied) or generally under other agreements in which it commits to extend credit, (c) has failed, within three Business Days after request by a Credit Party, acting in good faith, to provide a certification in writing from an authorized officer of such Lender that it will comply with its obligations (and is financially able to meet such obligations) to fund prospective Loans and participations in then outstanding Swingline Loans under this Agreement, provided that such Lender shall cease to be a Defaulting Lender pursuant to this clause (c) upon such Credit Party’s receipt of such certification in form and substance satisfactory to it and the Administrative Agent, or (d) has become the subject of a Bankruptcy Event.

 

Deficiency ”: as defined in Section 2.8(a).

 

Deficiency Notice ”: as defined in Section 2.8(a).

 

Disposition ”:  with respect to any property, any sale, lease, Sale/Leaseback Transaction, assignment, conveyance, transfer or other disposition thereof.  The terms “ Dispose ” and “ Disposed of ” shall have correlative meanings.

 

Diversified Pool ”: at any time, all Pledged Eligible Assets not included at such time in the Non-Diversified Pool.

 

Dollars ” and “ $ ”:  dollars in lawful currency of the United States.

 

Domestic Subsidiary ”:  any Subsidiary of the Borrower organized under the laws of any jurisdiction within the United States.

 

DTC ”: The Depository Trust Company and its successors and assigns.

 

Eligible Assets ”: at any time, common and preferred equity securities, ADRs and exchange-traded funds that are, in each case, then listed on the NYSE, NASDAQ or Amex (regardless of the venue used to execute trades with respect to such securities); provided , in any event, that “ Eligible Assets ” shall not include leveraged exchange-traded funds, synthetic exchanged-traded funds (other than Qualified Synthetic ETFs), warrants, options, limited partnership interests or convertible preferred securities; and provided further that (i) for purposes of determining the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets in the Diversified Pool, securities issued by any single issuer and its Affiliates (other than Eligible ETFs) shall constitute “Eligible Assets” only to the extent that the Market Value of such securities of such single issuer and its Affiliates does not exceed 20% of the aggregate Market Value of all Pledged Eligible Assets in the Diversified Pool at such time and (ii) for purposes of determining the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets in the Non-Diversified Pool, securities issued by any single issuer and its Affiliates (other than Eligible ETFs) shall constitute “Eligible Assets” only to the extent that the Market Value of such securities of such single issuer and its Affiliates does not exceed $30,000,000 at such time.

 

7



 

Eligible ETFs ”: any reasonably diversified exchange-traded funds that the Borrower requests be considered an “Eligible ETF” for purposes hereof, subject to the consent of the Administrative Agent to such exchange-traded fund being considered an “Eligible ETF” (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed).  For the avoidance of doubt, neither leveraged exchange-traded funds nor synthetic exchange-traded funds (other than Qualified Synthetic ETFs) shall constitute “Eligible ETFs”.

 

Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits ”: NSCC Margin Deposits, other than (x) any such deposits relating to individual transactions that are outstanding for more than five Business Days, (y) any portion of any NSCC Margin Deposit relating to losses incurred by the Borrower for its own account or the account of any of its Affiliates and (z) any portion of any NSCC Margin Deposit that, as reasonably determined by the Borrower, acting in good faith, is subject to any counterclaim deduction, defense, setoff or similar rights by NSCC or DTC other than to the extent constituting or arising out of the underlying obligation for which such deposit was delivered (but only to the extent of any such counterclaim, deduction, defense, setoff or similar rights).  The amount of Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits at any time shall not exceed the NSCC Deposit Requirements applicable to the Borrower at such time.

 

Environmental Laws ”:  any and all foreign, Federal, state, local or municipal laws, rules, orders, regulations, statutes, ordinances, codes, decrees, requirements of any Governmental Authority or other Requirements of Law (including common law) regulating, relating to or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning protection of human health or the environment, as now or may at any time hereafter be in effect.

 

ERISA ”:  the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended from time to time.

 

Eurocurrency Reserve Requirements ”:  for any day, the aggregate (without duplication) of the maximum rates (expressed as a decimal fraction) of reserve requirements in effect on such day (including basic, supplemental, marginal and emergency reserves) under any regulations of the Board or other Governmental Authority having jurisdiction with respect thereto dealing with reserve requirements prescribed for eurocurrency funding (currently referred to as “Eurocurrency Liabilities” in Regulation D of the Board) maintained by a member bank of the Federal Reserve System.

 

Eurodollar Base Rate ”:  for any day, the rate per annum determined on the basis of the rate for deposits in Dollars for an interest period of one month commencing two Business Days thereafter appearing on Reuters Page LIBOR01 (or any successor or substitute page which displays an average British Bankers Association Interest Settlement Rate) as of 11:00 A.M., London time, on such day (or, if such day is not a Business Day, the preceding Business Day).  In the event that such rate does not so appear, the “ Eurodollar Base Rate ” shall be determined by reference to such other comparable publicly available service for displaying eurodollar rates as may be selected by the Administrative Agent or, in the absence of such availability, by reference to the rate at which the Administrative Agent is offered Dollar deposits at or about 11:00 A.M., New York City time, on such day (or, if such day is not a Business Day, the preceding Business Day)  in the London interbank eurodollar market where its eurodollar and foreign currency and exchange operations are then being conducted for delivery on such day for an interest period of one month commencing two Business Days thereafter.

 

Eurodollar Rate ”:  for any day, a rate per annum determined for such day in accordance with the following formula (rounded upward to the nearest 1/100th of 1%):

 

8



 

Eurodollar Base Rate

1.00 - Eurocurrency Reserve Requirements

 

Event of Default ”:  any of the events specified in Section 8, provided that any requirement for the giving of notice, the lapse of time, or both, has been satisfied.

 

Exchange Act ”: as defined in Section 8(k)(i).

 

Excluded Debt ”: Indebtedness incurred (a) in the ordinary course of business by or on behalf of any Broker-Dealer Subsidiary that is (i) secured by marketable securities under customary terms (including, without limitation, all Borrowing Base A Loans) or (ii) unsecured but where such Subsidiary holds, or will have the right to hold pursuant to pending securities transactions and in accordance with applicable laws and regulations, unencumbered marketable securities sufficient, at the time of the securities transaction which gave rise to any such Indebtedness, to refinance such Indebtedness in the ordinary course of business on a secured basis using such securities as collateral or (b) by the Borrower pursuant to this Agreement in connection with Borrowing Base B Loans.

 

Excluded Taxes ”: as defined in Section 2.13(a).

 

Existing Credit Agreement ”:  the Credit Agreement, dated January 31, 2011, among the Borrower, the Guarantor, the lenders from time to time party thereto, Bank of America, N.A., as syndication agent, Bank of Montreal, as documentation agent, and JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A., as administrative agent.

 

FATCA ”: Sections 1471 through 1474 of the Code as of the date hereof and any existing or future regulations or official interpretations thereof.

 

Federal Funds Effective Rate ”: for any day, the weighted average of the rates on overnight Federal funds transactions with members of the Federal Reserve System arranged by interbank Federal funds brokers, as published on the next succeeding Business Day by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, or, if such rate is not so published for any day that is a Business Day, the average of the quotations for such day for such transactions received by the Administrative Agent from three interbank Federal funds brokers of recognized standing selected by it.

 

Federal Funds Rate ”: for any day for any Borrowing, a rate per annum equal to the greater of (a) the rate of interest per annum which is the average of the rates on the offered side of the Federal funds market quoted by three interbank Federal funds brokers at the approximate time of such Borrowing (for the first day of such Borrowing and until the next Business Day) and 12:00 Noon (New York City time) (for each subsequent Business Day while such Borrowing is outstanding and until the next Business Day), selected by the Administrative Agent, for Federal Funds and (b) the Eurodollar Rate for such day.  For the avoidance of doubt, the Federal Funds Rate shall be determined on each Business Day on which a Borrowing of Loans is requested or outstanding, as provided herein.

 

Fee Payment Date ”:  (a) the third Business Day following the last day of each March, June, September and December and (b) the last day of the Commitment Period.

 

FINRA ”:  the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc., or any other self-regulatory body which succeeds to the functions of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, Inc.

 

FOCUS Report ”: the Financial and Operational Combined Uniform Single Report on Form X-17A-15. A “Part II FOCUS Report” is a report filed on Form X-17A-5 Part II.

 

9



 

Funding Default ”: the failure by a Defaulting Lender to fund any portion of its Loans as of the time required to be funded by it hereunder or to acquire participating interests in Swingline Loans in accordance with Section 2.4.

 

Funding Office ”:  the office of the Administrative Agent specified in Section 10.2 or such other office as may be specified from time to time by the Administrative Agent as its funding office by written notice to the Borrower and the Lenders.

 

GAAP ”:  generally accepted accounting principles in the United States as in effect from time to time, except that (i) for purposes of Section 6.1, GAAP shall be determined on the basis of such principles in effect on the date hereof and consistent with those used in the preparation of the most recent audited financial statements referred to in Section 3.1 and (ii) right-to-use assets and lease commitment liabilities arising from lease-related Accounting Changes effected at any time after the Closing Date, to the extent such assets and liabilities would not have been classified or recognized as assets or liabilities under GAAP as in effect as of the Closing Date, shall not be given effect for any purpose under this Agreement.  In the event that any “Accounting Change” (as defined below) shall occur and such change results in a change in the method of calculation of financial covenants, standards or terms in this Agreement, then, at the request of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, the Borrower and the Administrative Agent agree to enter into negotiations in order to amend such provisions of this Agreement so as to reflect equitably such Accounting Changes with the desired result that the criteria for evaluating the Borrower’s financial condition shall be the same after such Accounting Changes as if such Accounting Changes had not been made.  Until such time as such an amendment shall have been executed and delivered by the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the Required Lenders, all financial covenants, standards and terms in this Agreement shall continue to be calculated or construed as if such Accounting Changes had not occurred.  “Accounting Changes” refers to changes in accounting principles required by the promulgation of any rule, regulation, pronouncement or opinion by the Financial Accounting Standards Board of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants or, if applicable, the SEC.

 

Governmental Authority ”:  any nation or government, any state or other political subdivision thereof, any agency, authority, instrumentality, regulatory body, court, central bank or other entity exercising executive, legislative, judicial, taxing, regulatory or administrative functions of or pertaining to government, any securities exchange and any self-regulatory organization (including the National Association of Insurance Commissioners).

 

Group Members ”:  the collective reference to the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries.

 

Guarantee Obligation ”:  as to any Person (the “ guaranteeing person ”), any obligation, including a reimbursement, counterindemnity or similar obligation, of the guaranteeing Person that guarantees or in effect guarantees, or which is given to induce the creation of a separate obligation by another Person (including any bank under any letter of credit) that guarantees or in effect guarantees, any Indebtedness, leases, dividends or other obligations (the “ primary obligations ”) of any other third Person (the “ primary obligor ”) in any manner, whether directly or indirectly, including any obligation of the guaranteeing person, whether or not contingent, (i) to purchase any such primary obligation or any property constituting direct or indirect security therefor, (ii) to advance or supply funds (1) for the purchase or payment of any such primary obligation or (2) to maintain working capital or equity capital of the primary obligor or otherwise to maintain the net worth or solvency of the primary obligor, (iii) to purchase property, securities or services primarily for the purpose of assuring the owner of any such primary obligation of the ability of the primary obligor to make payment of such primary obligation or (iv) otherwise to assure or hold harmless the owner of any such primary obligation against loss in respect thereof; provided , however , that the term Guarantee Obligation shall not include endorsements of

 

10



 

instruments for deposit or collection in the ordinary course of business.  The amount of any Guarantee Obligation of any guaranteeing person shall be deemed to be the lower of (a) an amount equal to the stated or determinable amount of the primary obligation in respect of which such Guarantee Obligation is made and (b) the maximum amount for which such guaranteeing person may be liable pursuant to the terms of the instrument embodying such Guarantee Obligation, unless such primary obligation and the maximum amount for which such guaranteeing person may be liable are not stated or determinable, in which case the amount of such Guarantee Obligation shall be such guaranteeing person’s maximum reasonably anticipated liability in respect thereof as determined by the Borrower in good faith.

 

Guarantor ”:  as defined in the preamble hereto.

 

Increased Amount Date ”: as defined in Section 2.17(a).

 

Incremental Amount ” shall mean, at any time, the excess, if any, of (a) $75.0 million over (b) the aggregate amount of all Incremental Commitments established prior to such time pursuant to Section 2.17.

 

Incremental Assumption Agreement ”: an Incremental Assumption Agreement in form and substance reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent, among the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and one or more Incremental Lenders.

 

Incremental Commitment ”: any increased or incremental Commitment provided pursuant to Section 2.17.

 

Incremental Lender ”: a Lender with a Commitment or an outstanding Revolving Loan as a result of an Incremental Commitment.

 

Indebtedness ”:  of any Person at any date, without duplication, (a) all indebtedness of such Person for borrowed money, (b) all obligations of such Person for the deferred purchase price of property or services (other than (i) trade payables incurred in the ordinary course of such Person’s business and (ii) earn-out obligations until such obligations become a liability on the balance sheet of such Person in accordance with GAAP), (c) all obligations of such Person evidenced by notes, bonds, debentures or other similar instruments, (d) all indebtedness created or arising under any conditional sale or other title retention agreement with respect to property acquired by such Person (even though the rights and remedies of the seller or lender under such agreement in the event of default are limited to repossession or sale of such property), (e) all Capital Lease Obligations of such Person, (f) all obligations of such Person, contingent or otherwise, as an account party or applicant under or in respect of acceptances, letters of credit, surety bonds or similar arrangements, (g) the liquidation value of all mandatorily redeemable preferred Capital Stock of such Person, (h) all Guarantee Obligations of such Person in respect of obligations of the kind referred to in clauses (a) through (g) above, (i) all obligations of the kind referred to in clauses (a) through (h) above secured by (or for which the holder of such obligation has an existing right, contingent or otherwise, to be secured by) any Lien on property (including accounts and contract rights) owned by such Person, whether or not such Person has assumed or become liable for the payment of such obligation, (j) for the purposes of Section 8(e) only, all obligations of such Person in respect of Swap Agreements and (k) for the purposes of Section 8(e) only, all obligations or liabilities of such Person arising from a Repo Transaction; provided , that the term “Indebtedness” shall not include (A) payments with respect to deferred employee compensation and (B) agreements providing for indemnification, for the adjustment of purchase price or for similar adjustments in connection with a Permitted Acquisition or a Disposition permitted by Section 6.4.  The Indebtedness of any Person shall include the Indebtedness of any other entity (including any partnership in which such Person is a general partner) to the extent such Person is liable therefor as a result of such Person’s

 

11



 

ownership interest in or other relationship with such entity, except to the extent the terms of such Indebtedness expressly provide that such Person is not liable therefor.

 

Indemnified Liabilities ”: as defined in Section 10.5.

 

Indemnitee ”: as defined in Section 10.5.

 

Insolvency ”:  with respect to any Multiemployer Plan, the condition that such Plan is insolvent within the meaning of Section 4245 of ERISA.

 

Insolvent ”:  pertaining to a condition of Insolvency.

 

Intellectual Property ”:  the collective reference to all rights, priorities and privileges relating to intellectual property, whether arising under United States, multinational or foreign laws or otherwise, including copyrights, copyright licenses, patents, patent licenses, trademarks, trademark licenses, technology, know-how and processes, and all rights to sue at law or in equity for any infringement or other impairment thereof, including the right to receive all proceeds and damages therefrom.

 

Interest Payment Date ”:  the last day of each March, June, September and December to occur while the corresponding Loan is outstanding.

 

Investments ”:  as defined in Section 6.7.

 

IRS ”: as defined in Section 2.13(f).

 

Lenders ”:  as defined in the preamble hereto.

 

Lien ”:  any mortgage, pledge, hypothecation, assignment, deposit arrangement, encumbrance, lien (statutory or other), charge or other security interest or any preference, priority or other security agreement or preferential arrangement of any kind or nature whatsoever (including any conditional sale or other title retention agreement and any capital lease having substantially the same economic effect as any of the foregoing).

 

Limited Permitted Liens ”: as defined in the Security Agreement.

 

Liquidity Ratio ”:  at any time, the ratio of (a) the sum of (i) unencumbered marketable securities (after taking into account prudent and customary financing haircuts) and cash and Cash Equivalents held by the Borrower that would not be reflected as “restricted” or “segregated” on a consolidated balance sheet of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries and (ii) Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits (solely to the extent of the lesser of (x) the excess, if any, of the Borrowing Base B Limit at such time over the aggregate amount of all Borrowing Base B Loans outstanding on such date and (y) the Available Commitments) to (b) the sum of the aggregate principal amount of its unsecured Indebtedness and accrued compensation liabilities, excluding (i) liabilities for intercompany advances funded by the Guarantor or one of its Subsidiaries with long-term capital and (ii) all Loans under this Agreement.

 

Loan ”:  any loan made by any Lender pursuant to this Agreement.

 

Loan Documents ”:  this Agreement, the Security Documents, the Notes and any amendment, waiver, supplement or other modification to any of the foregoing.

 

12



 

Loan Parties ”:  the Borrower and the Guarantor.

 

Loan Value ”: (a) as to the Pledged Eligible Assets in the Diversified Pool at any time, the product of (i) [**] and (ii) the aggregate Market Value of all Pledged Eligible Assets as most recently determined by the Administrative Agent and (b) as to the Pledged Eligible Assets in the Non-Diversified Pool at any time, the product of (i) [**] and (ii) the aggregate Market Value of all Pledged Eligible Assets as most recently determined by the Administrative Agent.

 

Market Value ”: as to any Pledged Eligible Asset, the market value determined by the Administrative Agent in its usual and customary manner for loans to broker-dealers based on pricing information with respect to such Pledged Eligible Asset reasonably available to the Administrative Agent from one or more pricing services selected by the Administrative Agent in its reasonable discretion.

 

Material Adverse Effect ”:  a material adverse effect on (a) the business, property, operations or financial condition of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries taken as a whole or (b) the validity or enforceability of this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents or the rights or remedies of the Administrative Agent or the Lenders hereunder or thereunder.  For the avoidance of doubt, any non-cash writedown of goodwill or other intangible assets shall not in and of itself be a Material Adverse Effect for purposes hereof.

 

Material Group Member ”: the Borrower, the Guarantor or any Material Subsidiary.

 

Material Subsidiary ”: any Subsidiary of the Guarantor that, as of the last day of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of the Guarantor, had assets or revenues (on a consolidated basis including its Subsidiaries) with a value in excess of 2.0% of the consolidated assets of the Guarantor or 2.0% of the consolidated revenues of the Guarantor; provided , that in the event Subsidiaries that would otherwise not be Material Subsidiaries shall in the aggregate account for a percentage in excess of 5.0% of the consolidated assets of the Guarantor or 5.0% of the consolidated revenues of the Guarantor as of the end of and for the most recently completed fiscal year, then one or more of such Subsidiaries as designated by the Guarantor (or, if the Guarantor shall make no designation, one or more of such Subsidiaries in descending order based on their respective contributions to the consolidated assets of the Guarantor), shall be included as Material Subsidiaries to the extent necessary to eliminate such excess.

 

Materials of Environmental Concern ”:  any gasoline or petroleum (including crude oil or any fraction thereof) or petroleum products or any hazardous or toxic substances, materials or wastes, defined or regulated as such in or under any Environmental Law, including asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyls and urea-formaldehyde insulation.

 

Minimum TNW ”: as defined in Section 6.1.

 

Multiemployer Plan ”:  a Plan that is a multiemployer plan as defined in Section 4001(a)(3) of ERISA.

 

Net Capital ”: as defined in paragraph (c)(2) of Rule 15c3-1 of the Exchange Act.

 

Non-Diversified Pool ”: at any time, the Pledged Eligible Assets as noted in a notice by the Borrower to the Administrative Agent as being included in the “Non-Diversified Pool” at such time.

 

Non-Consenting Lender ”: as defined in Section 2.15(b).

 

Non-Excluded Taxes ”:  as defined in Section 2.13(a).

 

13



 

Non-U.S. Lender ”:  as defined in Section 2.13(f).

 

Notes ”:  the collective reference to any promissory note evidencing Loans.

 

NSCC ”:  the National Securities Clearing Corporation.

 

NSCC Deposit Requirements ”:  cash collateral requirements established by NSCC in connection with securities clearing services provided by NSCC, as such requirements may be adjusted from time to time.

 

NSCC Margin Deposits ”:  deposits made by the Borrower with NSCC in connection with securities clearing services provided to it by NSCC.

 

Obligations ”:  the unpaid principal of and interest on (including interest accruing after the maturity of the Loans and interest accruing after the filing of any petition in bankruptcy, or the commencement of any insolvency, reorganization or like proceeding, relating to the Borrower, whether or not a claim for post-filing or post-petition interest is allowed in such proceeding) the Loans and all other obligations and liabilities of the Borrower to the Administrative Agent or to any Lender, whether direct or indirect, absolute or contingent, due or to become due, or now existing or hereafter incurred, which may arise under, out of, or in connection with, this Agreement, any other Loan Document or any other document made, delivered or given in connection herewith or therewith, whether on account of principal, interest, reimbursement obligations, fees, indemnities, costs, expenses (including all fees, charges and disbursements of counsel to the Administrative Agent or to any Lender that are required to be paid by the Borrower pursuant hereto) or otherwise.

 

Other Taxes ”:  any and all present or future stamp or documentary taxes or any other excise or property taxes, charges or similar levies arising from any payment made hereunder or from the execution, delivery or enforcement of, or otherwise with respect to, this Agreement or any other Loan Document (but not Excluded Taxes).

 

Participant ”:  as defined in Section 10.6(c).

 

Participant Register ”: as defined in Section 10.6(c).

 

Patriot Act ”: as defined in Section 10.17.

 

PBGC ”:  the Pension Benefit Guaranty Corporation established pursuant to Subtitle A of Title IV of ERISA (or any successor).

 

Permitted Acquisition ”: any acquisition by any Group Member of all or substantially all the assets of, or shares or other equity interests in, a Person or division or line of business of a Person, provided that (a) no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would result therefrom and (b) the Guarantor and the Subsidiaries shall be in compliance, on a pro forma basis after giving effect to such acquisition, with the covenants contained in Section 6.1 recomputed as at the last day of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of the Guarantor and the Subsidiaries as if such acquisition and related financings or other transactions had occurred on the first day of each relevant period for testing such compliance.

 

Permitted Liens ”: as defined in the Security Agreement.

 

14



 

Person ”:  an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, business trust, joint stock company, trust, unincorporated association, joint venture, Governmental Authority or other entity of whatever nature.

 

Plan ”:  at a particular time, any employee benefit plan that is covered by ERISA and in respect of which a Loan Party or a Commonly Controlled Entity is (or, if such plan were terminated at such time, would under Section 4069 of ERISA be deemed to be) an “employer” as defined in Section 3(5) of ERISA.

 

Pledged Eligible Assets ”: Eligible Assets that have been pledged to the Administrative Agent for the benefit of the Lenders to secure the obligations of the Borrower in respect of Borrowing Base A Loans pursuant to the terms of the Security Agreement.

 

Pledged Eligible Assets Notice ”: as defined in Section 2.2(a).

 

pro forma ”:  all pro forma computations required to be made hereunder giving effect to any acquisition, investment, sale, disposition, merger or similar event shall reflect on a pro forma basis such event and, to the extent applicable, the historical earnings and cash flows associated with the assets acquired or disposed of and any related incurrence or reduction of Indebtedness, and may also reflect (x) any projected synergies or similar benefits expected to be realized as a result of such event to the extent such synergies or similar benefits would be permitted to be reflected in financial statements prepared in compliance with Article 11 of Regulation S-X under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and (y) any other demonstrable cost-savings and other synergies and adjustments not included in the foregoing clause (x) that are reasonably anticipated by the Borrower to be achieved in connection with any such event for the 12-month period following the consummation of such event, which the Borrower determines are reasonable and as set forth in a certificate of the chief financial officer of the Borrower; provided , that the aggregate additions to Consolidated EBITDA, for any period being tested, pursuant to this clause (y) shall not exceed 15% of the amount which could have been Consolidated EBITDA in the absence of the adjustment pursuant to this clause (y).

 

Properties ”: as defined in Section 3.16(a).

 

Proposed Change ”: as defined in Section 2.15(b).

 

Qualified Synthetic ETF ”:  a synthetic exchange-traded fund that (x) is not a levered exchange-traded fund and (y) has not entered into any derivative transaction with a counterparty other than a financial market utility that has been designated by the Financial Stability Oversight Council as systemically important under Title VIII of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010.

 

Quarterly Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements ”: the unaudited condensed consolidated balance sheet of the Borrower and the related statements of income and cash flows and the related notes, disclosures, and other narrative materials provided to FINRA on a quarterly basis.

 

Refunded Swingline Loans ”: as defined in Section 2.4.

 

Register ”:  as defined in Section 10.6(b).

 

Regulation U ”:  Regulation U of the Board as in effect from time to time.

 

15


 

Reorganization ”:  with respect to any Multiemployer Plan, the condition that such Plan is in reorganization within the meaning of Section 4241 of ERISA.

 

Repo Transaction ”: any of the following: repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, sell buy backs and buy sell backs agreements, securities lending and borrowing agreements and any other agreement or transaction similar to those referred to above in this definition.

 

Reportable Event ”:  any of the events set forth in Section 4043(c) of ERISA, other than those events as to which the thirty day notice period is waived as of the date hereof under PBGC Reg. § 4043.

 

Required Lenders ”:  at any time, Lenders holding more than 50% of the Total Commitments then in effect or, if all of the Commitments have been terminated, the Total Extensions of Credit then outstanding, subject to Section 2.16.

 

Requirement of Law ”:  as to any Person, the Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws or other organizational or governing documents of such Person, and any law, treaty, rule or regulation or determination of an arbitrator or a court or other Governmental Authority, in each case applicable to or binding upon such Person or any of its property or to which such Person or any of its property is subject. Notwithstanding anything in this Agreement to the contrary, any reference in this Agreement to the adoption of or a change in a Requirement of Law after the date hereof (or substantially similar reference) shall be deemed to include (x) all requests, rules, guidelines, requirements and directives promulgated by the Bank for International Settlements, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (or any successor or similar authority) or by United States or foreign regulatory authorities, in each case pursuant to Basel III and (y) the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act and all requests, rules, guidelines or directives thereunder or issued in connection therewith, in each case, regardless of the date enacted, adopted or issued.

 

Responsible Officer ”:  the chief executive officer, president, chief financial officer, treasurer, controller or head of operations), but in any event, with respect to financial matters, the chief financial officer or controller of such Loan Party.

 

Restricted Payments ”:  as defined in Section 6.5.

 

Revolving Extensions of Credit ”:  as to any Lender at any time, an amount equal to the sum of (a) the aggregate principal amount of all Revolving Loans held by such Lender then outstanding and (b) such Lender’s Applicable Percentage of the aggregate principal amount of Swingline Loans then outstanding.

 

Revolving Loans ”:  as defined in Section 2.1(a).

 

Sale/Leaseback Transaction ”: an arrangement relating to property now owned or hereafter acquired by any Group Member whereby such Group Member transfers such property to a Person and a Group Member leases it from such Person, other than leases among Group Members.

 

Sanctions ”:  economic or financial sanctions or trade embargoes imposed, administered or enforced from time to time by (a) the U.S. government, including those administered by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of the Treasury or the U.S. Department of State or (b) the United Nations Security Council, the European Union or Her Majesty’s Treasury of the United Kingdom.

 

16



 

Sanctioned Country ”:  at any time, a country or territory which is the subject or target of any Sanctions.

 

Sanctioned Person ”:  at any time, (a) any Person listed in any Sanctions-related list of designated Persons maintained by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the U.S. Department of the Treasury or the U.S. Department of State or by the United Nations Security Council, the European Union or any EU member state, (b) any Person operating, organized or resident in a Sanctioned Country or (c) any Person controlled by any such Person.

 

SEC ”:  the Securities and Exchange Commission, any successor thereto and any analogous Governmental Authority.

 

Security Agreement ”: the Security Agreement dated as of the date hereof among the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, for the benefit of the Lenders, substantially in the form of Exhibit A, as the same may be amended, supplemented or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

Security Documents ”:  the collective reference to the Security Agreement and all other security documents hereafter delivered to the Administrative Agent granting a Lien on any property of any Person to secure the obligations and liabilities of any Loan Party under any Loan Document.

 

Single Employer Plan ”:  any Plan other than a Multiemployer Plan that is subject to Title IV of ERISA.

 

Subsidiary ”:  as to any Person, a corporation, partnership, limited liability company or other entity of which shares of stock or other ownership interests having ordinary voting power (other than stock or such other ownership interests having such power only by reason of the happening of a contingency) to elect a majority of the board of directors or other managers of such corporation, partnership or other entity are at the time owned, or the management of which is otherwise controlled, directly or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, or both, by such Person.  Unless otherwise qualified, all references to a “Subsidiary” or to “Subsidiaries” in this Agreement shall refer to a Subsidiary or Subsidiaries of the Guarantor.

 

Supermajority Lenders ”:  at any time, Lenders holding more than 75% of the Commitments then in effect, or, if all of the Commitments have been terminated, the Total Extensions of Credit then outstanding, subject to Section 2.16.

 

Swap Agreement ”:  any agreement with respect to any swap, forward, future or derivative transaction or option or similar agreement involving, or settled by reference to, one or more rates, currencies, commodities, equity or debt instruments or securities, or economic, financial or pricing indices or measures of economic, financial or pricing risk or value or any similar transaction or any combination of these transactions; provided that no phantom stock or similar plan providing for payments only on account of services provided by current or former directors, officers, employees or consultants of the Borrower or any of its Subsidiaries shall be a “Swap Agreement”.

 

Swingline Lenders ”:  each Lender designated as such by the Borrower, with the consent of such Lender, in a written or telephonic notice to the Administrative Agent for one or more Borrowings of Swingline Loans in an aggregate amount as so consented to by such Lender.

 

Swingline Loans ”:  as defined in Section 2.3.

 

Swingline Participation Amount ”:  as defined in Section 2.4.

 

17



 

Syndication Agents ”:  as defined in the preamble hereto.

 

Termination Date ”:  January 29, 2016.

 

Total Commitments ”:  at any time, the aggregate amount of the Commitments then in effect.

 

Total Extensions of Credit ”:  at any time, the aggregate amount of the Revolving Extensions of Credit of the Lenders outstanding at such time.

 

Transferee ”:  any Assignee or Participant.

 

United States ”:  the United States of America.

 

U.S. Lender ”: as defined in Section 2.13(f).

 

Wholly Owned Subsidiary ”:  as to any Person, any other Person all of the Capital Stock of which (other than directors’ qualifying shares required by law) is owned by such Person directly and/or through other Wholly Owned Subsidiaries.

 

1.2                                Other Definitional Provisions .  (a) Unless otherwise specified therein, all terms defined in this Agreement shall have the defined meanings when used in the other Loan Documents or any certificate or other document made or delivered pursuant hereto or thereto.

 

(b)  As used herein and in the other Loan Documents, and any certificate or other document made or delivered pursuant hereto or thereto, (i) accounting terms relating to any Group Member not defined in Section 1.1 and accounting terms partly defined in Section 1.1, to the extent not defined, shall have the respective meanings given to them under GAAP ( provided that, notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, all accounting or financial terms used herein shall be construed, and all financial computations pursuant hereto shall be made, without giving effect to (x) any election under Accounting Standards Codification 825-10-25 (previously referred to as Statement of Financial Accounting Standards 159) (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar effect) to value any Indebtedness or other liabilities of any Group Member at “fair value”, as defined therein or (y) any treatment of Indebtedness in respect of convertible debt instruments under Accounting Standards Codification 470-20 (or any other Accounting Standards Codification or Financial Accounting Standard having a similar result or effect) to value any such Indebtedness in a reduced or bifurcated manner as described therein, and such Indebtedness shall at all times be valued at the full stated principal amount thereof), (ii) the words “include”, “includes” and “including” shall be deemed to be followed by the phrase “without limitation”, (iii) the word “incur” shall be construed to mean incur, create, issue, assume, become liable in respect of or suffer to exist (and the words “incurred” and “incurrence” shall have correlative meanings), (iv) the words “asset” and “property” shall be construed to have the same meaning and effect and to refer to any and all tangible and intangible assets and properties, including cash, Capital Stock, securities, revenues, accounts, leasehold interests and contract rights, and (v) references to agreements or other Contractual Obligations shall, unless otherwise specified, be deemed to refer to such agreements or Contractual Obligations as amended, supplemented, restated or otherwise modified from time to time.

 

(c)  The words “hereof”, “herein” and “hereunder” and words of similar import, when used in this Agreement, shall refer to this Agreement as a whole and not to any particular provision of this Agreement, and Section, Schedule and Exhibit references are to this Agreement unless otherwise specified.

 

18



 

(d)  The meanings given to terms defined herein shall be equally applicable to both the singular and plural forms of such terms.

 

SECTION 2.                             AMOUNT AND TERMS OF COMMITMENTS

 

2.1                                Revolving Commitments .  (a)                                 Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, each Lender severally agrees to make revolving credit loans (“ Revolving Loans ”) to the Borrower from time to time on any Business Day during the Commitment Period, at such times as the Borrower may request in accordance with Section 2.2, in an aggregate principal amount at any one time outstanding which, when added to such Lender’s Applicable Percentage of the aggregate principal amount of Swingline Loans then outstanding, does not exceed the amount of such Lender’s Commitment; provided , however , that (i) no Revolving Loan shall be made to the extent the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Loans would exceed the Total Commitments, (ii) no Borrowing Base A Loans shall be made to the extent that the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Borrowing Base A Loans would exceed the aggregate Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets (including the Pledged Eligible Assets referred to in Section 2.2(a)(ii) with respect to such Revolving Loan) and (iii) no Borrowing Base B Loans shall be made to the extent that the aggregate amount of all Borrowing Base B Loans would exceed the Borrowing Base B Limit; provided further that Borrowing Base B Loans may not be borrowed on any date in any rolling period of 90 consecutive days if Borrowing Base B Loans have already been outstanding for 30 days during such period.  During the Commitment Period, the Borrower may borrow, prepay the Revolving Loans in whole or in part, and reborrow, all in accordance with the terms and conditions hereof.

 

(b)  The Borrower shall repay all outstanding Revolving Loans on the Termination Date.

 

(c)  The failure of any Lender to make any Revolving Loan required to be made by it shall not relieve any other Lender of its obligations hereunder; provided that the Commitments of the Lenders are several and no Lender shall be responsible for any other Lender’s failure to make Revolving Loans as required.

 

2.2                                Procedure for Revolving Loan Borrowing .  (a)  The Borrower may borrow Revolving Loans during the Commitment Period on any Business Day, provided that the Borrower shall deliver to the Administrative Agent, no later than 4:00 P.M., New York City time, on the requested Borrowing Date, (i) irrevocable notice in substantially the form of Exhibit F hereto (a “ Borrowing Request ”), specifying (A) the amount of Revolving Loans to be borrowed, (B) whether such Loans are to be Borrowing Base A Loans or Borrowing Base B Loans or a combination thereof and (C) the requested Borrowing Date and (ii) (A) in the case of Borrowing Base A Loans, a notice in substantially the form of Exhibit G (a “ Pledged Eligible Assets Notice ”) detailing the Pledged Eligible Assets that will secure the requested Loans and (B) in the case of Borrowing Base B Loans, a notice substantially in the form of Exhibit H (a “ Borrowing Base B Limit Notice ”) detailing the Borrowing Base B Limit, after giving effect to the borrowing of the Borrowing Base B Loans requested thereby and application of the proceeds thereof as Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits (which shall not be less than the aggregate principal amount of the Borrowing Base B Loans to be outstanding after giving effect to the Borrowing Base B Loans requested in the related Borrowing Request).  The Borrowing Request and Pledged Eligible Assets notice, if applicable, shall be delivered by facsimile transmission (with any such transmission deemed delivered upon receipt by Borrower of a facsimile transmission confirmation) to the Loan & Agency and IB Loan Operations Departments of the Administrative Agent at the addresses set forth in Section 10.2.  The Borrower shall give notification, by telephone, to the Administrative Agent that the Borrowing Request and Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, if applicable, have been delivered to the Administrative Agent.  Upon its receipt of a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, the Administrative Agent shall calculate the Loan Value of the Eligible Assets identified therein, including those referred to in clause (ii), and promptly notify the Borrower if the requirements of Section 2.1(a)(ii) are not satisfied.

 

19



 

(b)   Each borrowing under the Commitments shall be in an amount equal to $5,000,000 or a whole multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof (or, if the then aggregate Available Commitments are less than $5,000,000, such lesser amount); provided , that each Swingline Lender may request, on behalf of the Borrower, borrowings under the Commitments in other amounts pursuant to Section 2.4.  Upon receipt of any such notice from the Borrower, the Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each Lender thereof.  Each Lender will make the amount of its pro rata share of each borrowing available to the Administrative Agent for the account of the Borrower at the Funding Office promptly, but in any event prior to 5:00 P.M., New York City time, on the Borrowing Date requested by the Borrower, in funds immediately available to the Administrative Agent.  Such borrowing (or, in the case of a borrowing of Borrowing Base A Loans, the portion thereof which is covered by the Loan Value of the Eligible Assets identified in the applicable Pledged Eligible Assets Notice as calculated by the Administrative Agent pursuant to Section 2.2(a)) will then be made available to the Borrower by the Administrative Agent by its transferring the aggregate amount made available to the Administrative Agent by the Lenders (or the relevant portion thereof) and in like funds as received by the Administrative Agent to a settlement bank for the Borrower or to DTC or NSCC or otherwise as directed by the Borrower, in either case on behalf of the Borrower and as directed by it.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Administrative Agent shall transfer the proceeds of any Borrowing Base A Loans as set forth above prior to the related pledge of Eligible Assets being confirmed, so long as such Eligible Assets have been identified by the Borrower in a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice as being due to be delivered to it or otherwise become available through DTC on the same day as such Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, in each case in accordance with the terms of the Security Agreement.

 

2.3                                Swingline Loans .  (a)  Subject to the terms and conditions hereof, the Swingline Lenders may, in their sole discretion, agree to make a portion of the credit otherwise available to the Borrower under the Commitments from time to time during the Commitment Period by making swing line loans (“ Swingline Loans ”) to the Borrower; provided that (i) the Borrower shall not use the proceeds of any Swingline Loan to refinance or repay any outstanding Swingline Loan and (ii) the Borrower shall not request, and the Swingline Lenders shall not make, any Swingline Loans if, after giving effect to the making of such Swingline Loans, the aggregate amount of the Available Commitments would be less than zero; provided , however , that (i) no Swingline Loan shall be made to the extent the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Loans would exceed the Total Commitments (ii) no Swingline Loan that is a Borrowing Base A Loan shall be made to the extent that the aggregate unpaid principal amount of all Borrowing Base A Loans would exceed the aggregate Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets (including the Pledged Eligible Assets referred to in Section 2.4(a)(ii) with respect to such Swingline Loan) and (iii) no Swingline Loan that is a Borrowing Base B Loan shall be made to the extent that the aggregate principal amount of all Borrowing Base B Loans would exceed the Borrowing Base B Limit; provided further that Borrowing Base B Loans may not be borrowed on any date in any rolling period of 90 consecutive days if Borrowing Base B Loans have already been outstanding on 30 days during such period.  During the Commitment Period, the Borrower may borrow, repay the Swingline Loans in whole or in part and reborrow, all in accordance with the terms and conditions hereof.

 

(b)  The Borrower shall repay to the Swingline Lenders the then unpaid principal amount of any Swingline Loans on the earlier of the Termination Date and the fourth Business Day after such Swingline Loans are made.

 

(c)  For the avoidance of doubt, the provision of Swingline Loans by any Swingline Lender shall be in addition to, and shall not relieve such Lender from, its obligation to make Revolving Loans ratably in proportion to the amount of, its Commitment.

 

2.4                                Procedure for Swingline Borrowing; Refunding of Swingline Loans .  (a)  The Borrower may borrow Swingline Loans during the Commitment Period on any Business Day, subject to

 

20



 

the consent of the applicable Swingline Lender or Swingline Lenders, provided that the Borrower shall deliver to the Administrative Agent, no later than 4:00 P.M. (or such later time as agreed by such Swingline Lender), New York City time, on the requested Borrowing Date, (i) a Borrowing Request specifying (A) the amount of Swingline Loans to be borrowed and the Swingline Lender or Lenders that agreed to make such Swingline Loans (and the respective amounts thereof to be made by them), (B) whether such Loans are to be Borrowing Base A Loans or Borrowing Base B Loans or a combination thereof and (C) the requested Borrowing Date (which shall be a Business Day during the Commitment Period) and (ii) in the case of Borrowing Base A Loans, a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice and in the case of Borrowing Base B Loans, a Borrowing Base B Limit Notice; provided further that Borrowing Base B Loans may not be borrowed on any date in any rolling period of 90 consecutive days if Borrowing Base B Loans have already been outstanding on 30 days during such period.  The Borrowing Request and Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, if applicable, shall be delivered by facsimile transmission (with any such transmission deemed delivered upon receipt by the Borrower of a facsimile transmission confirmation) to the Loan & Agency and IB Loan Operations Departments of the Administrative Agent at the addresses set forth in Section 10.2, with a copy to each applicable Swingline Lender.  The Borrower shall give notification, by telephone, to the Administrative Agent that the Borrowing Request has been delivered to the Administrative Agent.  Each Swingline Lender that has agreed to make Swingline Loans covered by such request shall promptly confirm such agreement to the Administrative Agent.  Upon its receipt of a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, the Administrative Agent shall calculate the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets, including those referred to in clause (ii), and promptly notify the Borrower and each applicable Swingline Lender if the requirements of Section 2.1(a)(ii) are not satisfied.

 

(b)  Each borrowing of Swingline Loans shall be in an amount equal to $5,000,000 or a whole multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof and shall be made by the applicable Swingline Lender or Lenders.  Not later than 5:00 P.M. (or, if earlier, within one hour following the Borrowing Request with respect thereto) on the Borrowing Date specified in a notice in respect of Swingline Loans, each Swingline Lender participating in such Swingline Loans shall make available to the Administrative Agent at the Funding Office an amount in immediately available funds equal to the amount of such Swingline Loans to be made by such Swingline Lender.  The Administrative Agent shall make the proceeds of such Swingline Loan (or, in the case of a Borrowing of Borrowing Base A Loans, the portion thereof which is covered by the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets as calculated by the Administrative Agent pursuant to Section 2.4(a)) available to the Borrower on such Borrowing Date by its transferring the aggregate amount made available to the Administrative Agent by such Swingline Lenders and in like funds as received by the Administrative Agent to a settlement bank for the Borrower or to DTC or NSCC or otherwise as directed by the Borrower, in either case on behalf of the Borrower and as directed by it.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained in this Agreement, the Administrative Agent shall transfer the proceeds of any Swingline Loans that are Borrowing Base A Loans as set forth above prior to the related pledge of Eligible Assets being confirmed, so long as such Eligible Assets have been identified by the Borrower in a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice as being due to be delivered to it or otherwise become available through DTC on the same day as such Pledged Eligible Assets Notice, in each case in accordance with the terms of the Security Agreement.

 

(c)  Each Swingline Lender, at any time and from time to time in its sole and absolute discretion may, on behalf of the Borrower (which hereby irrevocably directs each Swingline Lender to act on its behalf), on notice given by such Swingline Lender on any Business Day no later than 4:00 P.M., New York City time to the Administrative Agent, which will in turn promptly notify each Lender, request each Lender to make, and each Lender hereby agrees to make, a Revolving Loan, in an amount equal to such Lender’s Applicable Percentage of the aggregate amount of the Swingline Loans (the “ Refunded Swingline Loans ”) outstanding on the date of such notice, to repay the Swingline Lenders.  Each Lender shall make the amount of such Revolving Loan available to the Administrative Agent at the Funding Office in immediately available funds promptly, but in any event prior to 5:00 P.M., New York City time,

 

21



 

on the date of such notice.  The proceeds of such Revolving Loans shall be immediately made available by the Administrative Agent to the Swingline Lenders on a ratable basis for application by the Swingline Lenders to the repayment of the Refunded Swingline Loans.  The Borrower irrevocably authorizes each Swingline Lender to charge the Borrower’s accounts with the Administrative Agent (up to the amount available in each such account) in order to immediately pay the amount of such Refunded Swingline Loans to the extent amounts received from the Lenders are not sufficient to repay in full such Refunded Swingline Loans (with the proceeds of any such charge to be shared on a ratable basis with the other Swingline Lender in a manner consistent with the procedures described in Section 10.7(a)).

 

(d)  If prior to the time a Revolving Loan would have otherwise been made pursuant to Section 2.4(c), one of the events described in Section 8(f) shall have occurred and be continuing with respect to the Borrower or if for any other reason, as determined by any Swingline Lender in its sole discretion, Revolving Loans may not be made as contemplated by Section 2.4(c), each Lender shall, on the date such Revolving Loan was to have been made pursuant to the notice referred to in Section 2.4(c), purchase for cash an undivided participating interest in the then outstanding Swingline Loans by paying to the Administrative Agent for distribution to the applicable Swingline Lenders on a ratable basis an amount (the “ Swingline Participation Amount ”) equal to (i) such Lender’s Applicable Percentage times (ii) the sum of the aggregate principal amount of Swingline Loans then outstanding that were to have been repaid with such Revolving Loans.

 

(e)  Whenever, at any time after a Swingline Lender has received from any Lender such Lender’s Swingline Participation Amount in respect of the Swingline Loans made by such Swingline Lender, a Swingline Lender receives any payment on account of the Swingline Loans, such Swingline Lender will distribute to such Lender through the Administrative Agent its Swingline Participation Amount (appropriately adjusted, in the case of interest payments, to reflect the period of time during which such Lender’s participating interest was outstanding and funded and, in the case of principal and interest payments, to reflect such Lender’s pro rata portion of such payment if such payment is not sufficient to pay the principal of and interest on all Swingline Loans by such Swingline Lender then due); provided , however , that in the event that such payment received by such Swingline Lender is required to be returned, such Lender will return to such Swingline Lender any portion thereof previously distributed to it by such Swingline Lender.

 

(f)  Each Lender’s obligation to purchase participating interests pursuant to Section 2.4(d) shall be absolute and unconditional and shall not be affected by any circumstance, including (i) any setoff, counterclaim, recoupment, defense or other right that such Lender or the Borrower may have against a Swingline Lender, the Borrower or any other Person for any reason whatsoever, (ii) the occurrence or continuance of a Default or an Event of Default or the failure to satisfy any of the other conditions specified in Section 4, (iii) any adverse change in the condition (financial or otherwise) of the Borrower, (iv) any breach of this Agreement or any other Loan Document by the Borrower, any other Loan Party or any other Lender or (v) any other circumstance, happening or event whatsoever, whether or not similar to any of the foregoing.

 

2.5                                Commitment Fees, etc.   (a)  The Borrower agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent for the account of each Lender (subject to Section 2.16) a commitment fee for the period from and including the date hereof to the last day of the Commitment Period, computed at the Commitment Fee Rate on the average daily amount of the Available Commitment of such Lender during the period for which payment is made, payable quarterly in arrears on each Fee Payment Date, commencing on the first such date to occur after the date hereof.

 

22



 

(b)  The Borrower agrees to pay to the Administrative Agent the fees in the amounts and on the dates as set forth in any agreements with the Administrative Agent and to perform any other obligations contained therein.

 

2.6                                Termination or Reduction of Revolving Commitments .  The Borrower shall have the right, upon not less than three Business Days’ notice to the Administrative Agent, to terminate the Commitments or, from time to time, to reduce the amount of the Commitments; provided that no such termination or reduction of Commitments shall be permitted if, after giving effect thereto and to any prepayments of the Revolving Loans and Swingline Loans made on the effective date thereof, the Total Extensions of Credit would exceed the Total Commitments.  Any such reduction shall be in an amount equal to $5,000,000, or a whole multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof, and shall reduce permanently the Commitments then in effect.

 

2.7                                Optional Prepayments .  The Borrower may at any time prior to 4:00 P.M., New York City Time, on any Business Day, prepay the Loans, in whole or in part, without premium or penalty, upon irrevocable notice delivered to the Administrative Agent no later than 1:00 P.M., New York City time, on the date of such prepayment, which notice shall specify the date and amount of prepayment and whether the prepayment is of Borrowing Base A Loans or Borrowing Base B Loans.  Upon receipt of any such notice the Administrative Agent shall promptly notify each relevant Lender thereof.  If any such notice is given, the amount specified in such notice shall be due and payable on the date specified therein.  Partial prepayments of Revolving Loans shall be in an aggregate principal amount of $5,000,000 or a whole multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof.  Partial prepayments of Swingline Loans shall be in an aggregate principal amount of $5,000,000 or a whole multiple of $1,000,000 in excess thereof.

 

2.8                                Daily Calculation of Loan Value; Mandatory Prepayments; Release of Pledged Eligible Assets .

 

(a)  At or prior to 11:00 A.M., New York City time, on each Business Day on which any Borrowing Base A Loans shall remain outstanding, the Administrative Agent shall calculate the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets (which calculation shall be made as of the close of business on the previous Business Day) and shall promptly provide such calculation to the Borrower.  In the event that the Administrative Agent determines that the aggregate principal amount of Borrowing Base A Loans outstanding on such Business Day exceeds the Loan Value of such Pledged Eligible Assets (a “ Deficiency ”), the Administrative Agent shall promptly notify the Borrower of such Deficiency in writing (any such notice, a “ Deficiency Notice ”).  In the event of a Deficiency, the Borrower shall, within one Business Day of receipt of a Deficiency Notice, either prepay Borrowing Base A Loans in an amount at least equal to such Deficiency or pledge additional Eligible Assets with a Loan Value at least equal to such Deficiency.

 

(b)  At or prior to 10:00 A.M., New York City time, on each Business Day on which any Borrowing Base B Loans shall remain outstanding, the Borrower shall deliver to the Administrative Agent a Borrowing Base B Limit Notice as of such Business Day.  In the event that the aggregate principal amount of outstanding Borrowing Base B Loans exceeds the Borrowing Base B Limit, the Borrower shall, on such Business Day, prepay Borrowing Base B Loans in an amount sufficient to cure such deficiency.  The Borrower shall also prepay the Borrowing Base B Loans in full on the first Business Day on which Borrowing Base B Loans have been outstanding for more than 30 days in any rolling period of 90 consecutive days.

 

(c)  Any Pledged Eligible Asset shall be released from the pledge thereof in favor of the Lenders promptly upon the request of the Borrower; provided that (i) no Event of Default has occurred and is continuing at such time and (ii) a Deficiency would not be in existence after giving effect to such

 

23



 

release and the anticipated receipt anytime on the date of such release of any cash proceeds to be used for the prepayment of Borrowing Base A Loans or additional Eligible Assets identified by the Borrower to be used as substitute Pledged Eligible Assets.  For the avoidance of doubt, if the requirements in clauses (i) and (ii) above are satisfied, the Administrative Agent shall release Pledged Eligible Assets prior to its receipt of the cash proceeds relating to the settlement of a sale of such Pledged Eligible Assets or the confirmation of a pledge to it of substitute Eligible Assets, so long as such cash proceeds or substitute Eligible Assets (including the source thereof) have been identified by the Borrower to the Administrative Agent as being due to be received by it on the same day.

 

(d)  Any prepayment made pursuant to this Section 2.8 shall be accompanied by a notice delivered to the Administrative Agent specifying the date and amount of such prepayment and whether such prepayment is of Borrowing Base A Loans or Borrowing Base B Loans.

 

2.9                                Interest Rates and Payment Dates .  (a)   Each Loan shall bear interest at a rate per annum equal to the Federal Funds Rate plus the Applicable Margin.

 

(b)  (i) If any principal of or interest on any Loan or any fee or other amount payable by the Borrower hereunder shall not be paid when due (whether at the stated maturity, by acceleration or otherwise), such overdue amount shall bear interest at a rate per annum equal to the rate then applicable to the Loans plus 2% from the date of such non-payment until such amount is paid in full (as well after as before judgment) and (ii) if any Eligible Assets referred to in the last sentence of Section 2.2(b) are not pledged prior to the close of the DTC free pledge process on the same day as the Pledged Eligible Assets Notice relating to such Eligible Assets, if an Event of Default specified in Section 8 (c)(ii) shall occur and be continuing, the portion of the Borrowing Base A Loans then outstanding not covered by the Loan Value of the Pledged Eligible Assets shall bear interest at a rate per annum equal to the rate then applicable to the Loans plus 2%.

 

(c)  Interest shall be payable in arrears on each Interest Payment Date, provided that interest accruing pursuant to paragraph (b) of this Section shall be payable from time to time on demand.

 

2.10                         Computation of Interest and Fees .  (a)   Interest and fees payable pursuant hereto shall be calculated on the basis of a 360-day year for the actual days elapsed.  The Administrative Agent shall as soon as practicable notify the Borrower and the relevant Lenders of each determination of a Federal Funds Rate.  Any change in the interest rate on a Loan shall become effective as of the opening of business on the day on which such change becomes effective.  The Administrative Agent shall as soon as practicable notify the Borrower and the relevant Lenders of the effective date and the amount of each such change in interest rate.

 

(b)  Each determination of an interest rate by the Administrative Agent pursuant to any provision of this Agreement shall be conclusive and binding on the Borrower and the Lenders in the absence of manifest error.  The Administrative Agent shall, at the request of the Borrower, deliver to the Borrower a statement showing the quotations used by the Administrative Agent in determining any interest rate pursuant to Section 2.11(a).

 

2.11                         Pro Rata Treatment and Payments .  (a)   Each borrowing of Revolving Loans by the Borrower from the Lenders hereunder, each payment by the Borrower on account of any commitment fee and any reduction of the Commitments of the Lenders shall be made pro rata according to the Applicable Percentages of the Lenders at the time thereof.

 

24



 

(b)  Subject to Section 2.16, each payment (including each prepayment) by the Borrower on account of principal of and interest on the Revolving Loans shall be made pro rata according to the respective outstanding principal amounts of the Revolving Loans then held by the Lenders.

 

(c)  All payments (including prepayments) to be made by the Borrower hereunder, whether on account of principal, interest, fees or otherwise, shall be made without setoff or counterclaim and shall, except as otherwise provided herein, be made prior to 4:00 P.M., New York City time, on the due date thereof to the Administrative Agent, for the account of the Lenders, at the Funding Office, in Dollars and in immediately available funds.  Subject to Section 2.16, the Administrative Agent shall distribute such payments to the Lenders promptly upon receipt in like funds as received.  If any payment hereunder becomes due and payable on a day other than a Business Day, such payment shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day.  In the case of any extension of any payment of principal pursuant to the preceding sentence, interest thereon shall be payable at the then applicable rate during such extension.

 

(d)  Unless the Administrative Agent shall have been notified in writing by any Lender prior to its receipt of a Borrowing Request with respect to a borrowing that such Lender will not make the amount that would constitute its share of such borrowing available to the Administrative Agent, the Administrative Agent may assume that such Lender is making such amount available to the Administrative Agent, and the Administrative Agent may, in reliance upon such assumption, make available to the Borrower a corresponding amount.  If such amount is not made available to the Administrative Agent by the required time on the Borrowing Date therefor, such Lender shall pay to the Administrative Agent, on demand, such amount with interest thereon, at a rate equal to the greater of (i) the Federal Funds Effective Rate and (ii) a rate determined by the Administrative Agent in accordance with banking industry rules on interbank compensation, for the period until such Lender makes such amount immediately available to the Administrative Agent.  A certificate of the Administrative Agent submitted to any Lender with respect to any amounts owing under this paragraph shall be conclusive in the absence of manifest error.  If such Lender’s share of such borrowing is not made available to the Administrative Agent by such Lender within three Business Days after such Borrowing Date, the Administrative Agent shall also be entitled to recover such amount with interest thereon at the rate per annum applicable to Loans, on demand, from the Borrower.

 

(e)  Unless the Administrative Agent shall have been notified in writing by the Borrower prior to the date of any payment due to be made by the Borrower hereunder that the Borrower will not make such payment to the Administrative Agent, the Administrative Agent may assume that the Borrower is making such payment, and the Administrative Agent may, but shall not be required to, in reliance upon such assumption, make available to the Lenders their respective pro rata shares of a corresponding amount.  If such payment is not made to the Administrative Agent by the Borrower within three Business Days after such due date, the Administrative Agent shall be entitled to recover, on demand, from each Lender to which any amount which was made available pursuant to the preceding sentence, such amount with interest thereon at the rate per annum equal to the daily average Federal Funds Effective Rate.  Nothing herein shall be deemed to limit the rights of the Administrative Agent or any Lender against the Borrower.

 

2.12                         Requirements of Law .  (a)   If any Lender shall have determined that the adoption of or any change in any Requirement of Law, including regarding capital adequacy, liquidity requirements or required or targeted reserves or special deposits, or in the interpretation or application thereof or compliance by such Lender or any corporation controlling such Lender with any request or directive, including regarding capital adequacy, liquidity requirements or required or targeted reserves or special deposits (whether or not having the force of law), from any Governmental Authority, made subsequent to the date hereof shall have the effect of reducing the rate of return on such Lender’s or such

 

25


 

corporation’s capital or assets as a consequence of its obligations or Loans hereunder to a level below that which such Lender or such corporation could have achieved but for such adoption, change or compliance (taking into consideration such Lender’s or such corporation’s policies with respect to capital adequacy or liquidity) by an amount deemed by such Lender to be material, then from time to time, after submission by such Lender to the Borrower (with a copy to the Administrative Agent) of a written request therefor, the Borrower shall pay to such Lender such additional amount or amounts as will compensate such Lender or such corporation for such reduction.  This Section 2.12 shall not apply with respect to any (i) Excluded Taxes, (ii) Non-Excluded Taxes imposed (x) on or with respect to any payments pursuant to this Agreement or any other Loan Document, or (y) on gross or net income, profits, or revenue (including franchise taxes imposed in lieu of net income taxes or value-added or similar taxes), or (iii) Other Taxes, in each case, whether or not Borrower is responsible for such taxes pursuant to Section 2.13 (for the absence of doubt, the Borrower’s responsibility for any taxes pursuant to this Section 2.12 shall be without duplication of any additional amounts paid pursuant to Section 2.13).

 

(b)  A certificate as to any additional amounts payable pursuant to this Section submitted by any Lender to the Borrower (with a copy to the Administrative Agent) shall be conclusive in the absence of manifest error.  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Section, the Borrower shall not be required to compensate a Lender pursuant to this Section for any amounts incurred more than nine months prior to the date that such Lender notifies the Borrower of such Lender’s intention to claim compensation therefor; provided that, if the circumstances giving rise to such claim have a retroactive effect, then such nine-month period shall be extended to include the period of such retroactive effect.  The obligations of the Borrower pursuant to this Section shall survive the termination of this Agreement and the payment of the Loans and all other amounts payable hereunder.

 

2.13                         Taxes .  (a)  Except as otherwise provided by law, all payments made by or on account of the Borrower under this Agreement shall be made free and clear of, and without deduction or withholding for or on account of, any present or future income, stamp or other taxes, levies, imposts, duties, charges, fees, deductions or withholdings, now or hereafter imposed, levied, collected, withheld or assessed by any Governmental Authority, excluding any such amounts resulting from (A) net income taxes and franchise taxes (imposed in lieu of net income taxes) imposed on the Administrative Agent or any Lender (or Transferee) or any other recipient of any payment to be made by or on account of any obligation of the Borrower hereunder as a result of a present or former connection between the Administrative Agent or such Lender (or Transferee) or any other recipient and the jurisdiction of the Governmental Authority imposing such tax or any political subdivision or taxing authority thereof or therein (other than any such connection arising solely from the Administrative Agent or such Lender having executed, delivered or performed its obligations or received a payment under, or enforced, this Agreement or any other Loan Document), (B) any branch profits taxes imposed by the United States or any similar tax imposed by any other jurisdiction described in clause (A) above, (C) any taxes to the extent such taxes are imposed as a result of a Lender not providing the proper forms or other documentation described in paragraph (e) or (f) of this Section, (D) United States withholding taxes imposed pursuant to a Requirement of Law in effect (treating FATCA as in effect on and as of the date hereof) at the time such Lender (or Assignee) becomes a party to this Agreement, except to the extent that such Lender’s assignor (if any) was entitled, at the time of assignment, to receive additional amounts from the Borrower with respect to such withholding taxes pursuant to this paragraph or (E) any taxes that are imposed as a result of any relocation of a Lender’s office to which payment by the Borrower is made and which relocation occurs after the Lender becomes a Lender (such excluded items, “ Excluded Taxes ”); provided that, if any taxes, levies, imposts, duties, charges, fees, deductions or withholdings other than Excluded Taxes (“ Non-Excluded Taxes ”) or Other Taxes are required to be withheld from any amounts payable to the Administrative Agent or any Lender hereunder, the amounts so payable to the Administrative Agent or such Lender shall be increased to the extent necessary to yield to the Administrative Agent or such Lender (after payment of all Non-Excluded Taxes and Other Taxes) interest

 

26



 

or any such other amounts payable hereunder at the rates or in the amounts specified in this Agreement as if no such deductions or withholdings had been made.

 

(b)  In addition, the Borrower shall pay any Other Taxes to the relevant Governmental Authority in accordance with applicable law.

 

(c)  Whenever any Non-Excluded Taxes or Other Taxes are payable by the Borrower, as promptly as possible thereafter the Borrower shall send to the Administrative Agent a certified copy of an original official receipt received by the Borrower showing payment thereof or, if such receipt is not available from the Governmental Authority, other documentary evidence reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent.  Without duplication of any additional amounts paid pursuant to Section 2.13(a), if (i) the Borrower fails to pay any Non-Excluded Taxes or Other Taxes when due to the appropriate taxing authority (and after having had the ability to contest in good faith the payment of such taxes), (ii) fails to remit to the Administrative Agent the required receipts or other required documentary evidence or (iii) any Non-Excluded Taxes or Other Taxes are directly imposed on the Administrative Agent or any Lender, the Borrower shall indemnify the Administrative Agent and the Lenders for any incremental taxes, interest or penalties that may become payable by the Administrative Agent or any Lender as a result of any such failure or direct imposition, whether or not such Non-Excluded Taxes, Other Taxes, incremental taxes, interest or penalties were correctly or legally imposed or assessed by the relevant Governmental Authority; provided however that the Administrative Agent or Lender provides proper documentation of the amount owing to such Governmental Authority.

 

(d)  Each Lender shall indemnify the Administrative Agent for the full amount of any taxes, levies, imposts, duties, charges, fees, deductions, withholdings or similar charges imposed by any Governmental Authority that are attributable to such Lender and that are payable or paid by the Administrative Agent, together with all interest, penalties, reasonable costs and expenses arising therefrom or with respect thereto, as determined by the Administrative Agent in good faith. A certificate as to the amount of such payment or liability delivered to any Lender by the Administrative Agent shall be conclusive absent manifest error.

 

(e)  Each Lender that is entitled to an exemption from or reduction of any applicable withholding tax with respect to payments under this Agreement shall deliver to the Borrower (with a copy to the Administrative Agent), at the time or times prescribed by applicable law or reasonably requested by the Borrower, such properly completed and executed documentation prescribed by applicable law or reasonably requested by the Borrower as will permit such payments to be made without withholding or at a reduced rate; provided that such Lender is legally entitled to complete, execute and deliver such documentation and, with respect to any non-U.S. withholding taxes, in such Lender’s judgment the completion, execution or submission of any such documentation prescribed by the applicable law of such jurisdiction (other than any documentation prescribed by the applicable law of the jurisdiction in which such Lender is organized or its lending office is located) would not materially prejudice the legal position of such Lender or subject such Lender to any material unreimbursed cost.

 

(f)  Without limiting the generality of Section 2.13(e) above, each Lender that is not a “United States Person” as defined in Section 7701(a)(30) of the Code (a “ Non-U.S. Lender ” and any other lender, a “ U.S. Lender ”) shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (or, in the case of a Participant, to the Lender from which the related participation shall have been purchased) two copies of either U.S. Internal Revenue Service (“ IRS ”) Form W-8BEN or Form W-8ECI, as applicable, or, in the case of a Non-U.S. Lender claiming exemption from U.S. federal withholding tax under Section 871(h) or 881(c) of the Code with respect to payments of “portfolio interest”, a statement substantially in the form of Exhibit E and an IRS Form W-8BEN, or any subsequent versions thereof or successors thereto, in each case, properly completed and duly executed by such Non-U.S. Lender claiming complete exemption

 

27



 

from, or a reduced rate of, U.S. federal withholding tax on all payments by or on behalf of the Borrower under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents; provided , however, that any initial Lender that is a Non-U.S. Lender shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent such forms described above claiming complete exemption from U.S. federal withholding tax on all payments by or on behalf of the Borrower under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.  Such forms shall be delivered by each Non-U.S. Lender on or before the date it becomes a party to this Agreement (or, in the case of any Participant, on or before the date such Participant purchases the related participation).  In the case of a Non-U.S. Lender that does not act (or ceases to act) for its own account with respect to any portion of any sums paid or payable to such Lender under this Agreement, including a Non-U.S. Lender that is treated as a partnership for U.S. federal income tax purposes, such Non-U.S. Lender shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent two properly completed and duly executed copies of IRS Form W-8IMY, together with the appropriate IRS Form W-8BEN, W-8ECI or W-8IMY, W-9 and/or non- bank certificate with respect to each beneficial owner, and any other certificate or statement of exemption required under the Code or the regulations thereunder, to establish that such Non-U.S. Lender is not acting for its own account with respect to any portion of any such sums payable to such Non-U.S. Lender and to establish that any such amounts may be received without deduction for, or at a reduced rate of, United States federal withholding tax, In addition, each Non-U.S. Lender shall deliver such forms promptly upon the obsolescence or invalidity of any form previously delivered by such Non-U.S. Lender.  Each Non-U.S. Lender shall promptly notify the Borrower and the Administrative Agent at any time it determines that it is no longer in a position to provide any previously delivered certificate to the Borrower (or any other form of certification adopted by the U.S. taxing authorities for such purpose).  Each U.S. Lender shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent (or in the case of a Participant, to the Lender from which the related Participation shall have been purchased) two copies of IRS Form W-9 certifying such U.S. Lender is exempt from U.S. withholding tax.  Notwithstanding any other provision of this paragraph, a Lender shall not be required to deliver any form pursuant to this paragraph that such Lender is not legally able to deliver.  If a payment made to a Lender under any Loan Document would be subject to U.S. Federal withholding tax imposed by FATCA if such Lender were to fail to comply with the applicable reporting requirements of FATCA (including those contained in Section 1471(b) or 1472(b) of the Code, as applicable), such Lender shall deliver to the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, at the time or times prescribed by law and at such time or times reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, such documentation prescribed by applicable law (including as prescribed by Section 1471(b)(3)(C)(i) of the Code) and such additional documentation reasonably requested by the Borrower or the Administrative Agent as may be necessary for the Borrower or the Administrative Agent to comply with its obligations under FATCA, to determine that such Lender has or has not complied with such Lender’s obligations under FATCA or to determine the amount to deduct and withhold from such payment.

 

(g)  If the Administrative Agent or any Lender determines, in its sole discretion, that it has received a refund of any Non-Excluded Taxes or Other Taxes as to which it has been indemnified by the Borrower or with respect to which the Borrower has paid additional amounts pursuant to this Section 2.13, it shall pay over such refund to the Borrower (but only to the extent of indemnity payments made, or additional amounts paid, by the Borrower under this Section 2.13 with respect to the Non-Excluded Taxes or Other Taxes giving rise to such refund), net of all out-of-pocket expenses of the Administrative Agent or such Lender and without interest (other than any interest paid by the relevant Governmental Authority with respect to such refund); provided , that the Borrower, upon the request of the Administrative Agent or such Lender, agrees to repay the amount paid over to the Borrower (plus any penalties, interest (to the extent accrued from the date such refund is paid over to the Borrower) or other charges imposed by the relevant Governmental Authority) to the Administrative Agent or such Lender in the event the Administrative Agent or such Lender is required to repay such refund to such Governmental Authority. This paragraph shall not be construed to require the Administrative Agent or any Lender to make

 

28



 

available its tax returns (or any other information relating to its taxes which it deems confidential) to the Borrower or any other Person.

 

(h)  The agreements in this Section 2.13 shall survive the termination of this Agreement and the payment of the Loans and all other amounts payable hereunder.

 

2.14                         Change of Lending Office .  Each Lender agrees that, upon the occurrence of any event giving rise to the operation of Section 2.12 or 2.13(a) with respect to such Lender, it will, if requested by the Borrower, use reasonable efforts to designate another lending office for any Loans affected by such event with the object of avoiding the consequences of such event; provided , that such designation is made on terms that, in the sole judgment of such Lender, cause such Lender and its lending office(s) to suffer no economic, legal or regulatory disadvantage, and provided , further , that nothing in this Section shall affect or postpone any of the obligations of the Borrower or the rights of any Lender pursuant to Section 2.12 or 2.13(a).

 

2.15                         Replacement of Lenders .  (a)                                    The Borrower shall be permitted to replace, or terminate the Commitment of, any Lender that (A) requests or becomes entitled to (and does not waive) reimbursement for amounts owing pursuant to Section 2.12 or 2.13(a) or (B) becomes a Defaulting Lender; provided that (x) in the case of a replacement (i) such replacement does not conflict with any Requirement of Law, (ii) no Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing at the time of such replacement, (iii) prior to any such replacement, such Lender shall have taken no action under Section 2.14 that has eliminated the continued need for payment of amounts owing pursuant to Section 2.12 or 2.13, (iv) the replacement financial institution shall purchase, at par, all Loans and other amounts owing to such replaced Lender on or prior to the date of replacement, (v) the replacement financial institution shall be reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent and each Swingline Lender, if any, that holds Swingline Loans outstanding at the time of such replacement (such approvals not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed), (vi) the replaced Lender shall be obligated to make such replacement in accordance with the provisions of Section 10.6 (provided that the Borrower shall be obligated to pay the registration and processing fee referred to therein), and (vii) until such time as such replacement shall be consummated, the Borrower shall pay all additional amounts (if any) required pursuant to Section 2.12 or 2.13, as the case may be, and (y) any such replacement or termination shall not be deemed to be a waiver of any rights that the Borrower, the Administrative Agent or any other Lender shall have against the replaced Lender.

 

(b)  If, in connection with any proposed amendment, modification, waiver or termination pursuant to Section 10.1 (a “ Proposed Change ”) requiring the consent of all affected Lenders, the consent of the Required Lenders is obtained, but the consent of other Lenders whose consent is required is not obtained (any such Lender whose consent is not obtained as described in this clause (b) being referred to as a “ Non-Consenting Lender ”), then, a Person or Persons designated by the Borrower and reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent and each Swingline Lender, if any, that holds Swingline Loans at such time, shall have the right (but shall have no obligation) to purchase from such Non-Consenting Lenders, and such Non-Consenting Lenders agree that they shall, upon the Borrower’s request, sell and assign to such Person or Persons, all of the Loans and Commitments of such Non-Consenting Lenders for an amount equal to the principal balance of all Loans held by the Non-Consenting Lenders and all accrued interest and fees with respect thereto through the date of sale, such purchase and sale to be consummated at par pursuant to an Assignment and Assumption; provided that such Person shall not be the Borrower or any of its Affiliates.

 

2.16                         Defaulting Lenders . Notwithstanding any provision of this Agreement to the contrary, if any Lender becomes a Defaulting Lender, then the following provisions shall apply for so long as such Lender is a Defaulting Lender:

 

29



 

(a)  fees shall cease to accrue on the unfunded portion of the Commitment of such Defaulting Lender pursuant to Section 2.5;

 

(b)   the Commitment and Loans of such Defaulting Lender shall not be included in determining whether all Lenders, the Supermajority Lenders or the Required Lenders have taken or may take any action hereunder (including any consent to any amendment or waiver pursuant to Section 10.1), provided that any waiver, amendment or modification requiring the consent of all Lenders or each affected Lender which affects such Defaulting Lender disproportionately when compared to other affected Lenders shall require the consent of such Defaulting Lender;

 

(c)  unless otherwise agreed by the Administrative Agent and the Borrower, any amount payable to such Defaulting Lender hereunder (whether on account of principal, interest, fees or otherwise) shall, in lieu of being distributed to such Defaulting Lender, be retained by the Administrative Agent in a segregated account and, subject to any applicable requirements of law, be applied at such time or times as may be determined by the Administrative Agent (i)  first , to the payment of any amounts owing by such Defaulting Lender to the Administrative Agent hereunder, (ii)  second , to the funding of any Loan in respect of which such Defaulting Lender has failed to fund its portion thereof as required by this Agreement, as determined by the Administrative Agent, and (iii)  third , to such Defaulting Lender or as otherwise directed by a court of competent jurisdiction..

 

The rights and remedies against a Defaulting Lender under this Section 2.16 are in addition to all other rights and remedies which the Borrower may have against such Defaulting Lender with respect to any Funding Default and which the Administrative Agent or any Lender may have against such Defaulting Lender with respect to any Funding Default.

 

2.17                         Incremental Commitments .

 

(a)  The Borrower may, by written notice to the Administrative Agent from time to time, request Incremental Commitments in an amount not to exceed the Incremental Amount from one or more Incremental Lenders (which may include any existing Lender) willing to provide such Incremental Commitments, as the case may be, in their own discretion; provided , that (i) each Incremental Lender shall be subject to the approval of the Administrative Agent and each Swingline Lender (which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed) unless such Incremental Lender is a Lender, and (ii) each Incremental Commitment shall be on the same terms as the existing Commitments and in all respects shall become a part of the Commitments hereunder on such terms; provided, that, the Applicable Margin and Commitment Fee Rate applicable to the then-existing Commitments shall automatically be increased (but in no event decreased) to the extent necessary to cause any Incremental Commitment to comply with this clause (ii).  Such notice shall set forth (i) the amount of the Incremental Commitments being requested (which shall be in minimum increments of $1 million and a minimum amount of $25 million (or such lesser amount as the Administrative Agent may agree) or equal to the remaining Incremental Amount), (ii) the aggregate amount of Incremental Commitments, which shall not exceed the Incremental Amount, and (iii) the date on which such Incremental Commitments are requested to become effective (the “ Increased Amount Date ”).

 

(b)  The Borrower and each Incremental Lender shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Incremental Assumption Agreement.  Each of the parties hereto hereby agrees that upon the effectiveness of any Incremental Assumption Agreement, this Agreement shall be deemed amended to the extent (but only to the extent) necessary to increase the Commitments by the amount of the Incremental Commitments evidenced thereby.  Any such deemed amendment may be memorialized in writing by the Administrative Agent with the Borrowers’ consent (not to be unreasonably withheld) and furnished to the other parties hereto.

 

30



 

(c)  Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Incremental Commitment shall become effective under this Section 2.17 unless (i) on the date of such effectiveness, the conditions set forth in paragraphs (c) and (d) of Section 4.2 shall be satisfied and the Administrative Agent shall have received a certificate to that effect dated such date and executed by a Responsible Officer of the Borrower, and (ii) the Administrative Agent shall have received legal opinions, board resolutions and other closing certificates and documentation to the extent reasonably required by the Administrative Agent, in each case consistent with those delivered on the Closing Date under Section 4.1 and such additional documents and filings as the Administrative Agent may reasonably require to assure that the Revolving Loans in respect of Incremental Commitments are secured by the Collateral ratably with all other Revolving Loans.

 

(d)  Each of the parties hereto hereby agrees that the Administrative Agent may take any and all action as may be reasonably necessary to ensure all Revolving Loans in respect of Incremental Commitments, when originally made, are included in each Borrowing of outstanding Revolving Loans on a pro rata basis.

 

SECTION 3.                             REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

To induce the Administrative Agent and the Lenders to enter into this Agreement and to make the Loans, each Loan Party hereby represents and warrants to the Administrative Agent and each Lender that:

 

3.1                                Financial Condition .  The audited consolidated balance sheets of each Loan Party and its respective Subsidiaries as at December 31, 2010, December 31, 2011 and December 31, 2012, and the related consolidated statements of income and of cash flows for the fiscal years ended on such dates, reported on by and accompanied by an unqualified report from KPMG LLP, present fairly the consolidated financial condition of each Loan Party and its respective Subsidiaries as at such date, and the consolidated results of their operations and consolidated cash flows for the respective fiscal years then ended.  The unaudited consolidated balance sheets of each Loan Party and its respective Subsidiaries as at March 31, 2013, June 30, 2013 and September 30, 2013, the unaudited consolidated statements of income and cash flows for the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries for the nine-month period ended September 30, 2013 and the Quarterly Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements for the Borrower and its Subsidiaries for its fiscal quarter ended September 30, 2013, present fairly the consolidated financial condition of each Loan Party and its respective Subsidiaries as at such date, and the consolidated results of their operations and consolidated cash flows for the nine- or three-month, as the case may be, period then ended (subject to normal year-end audit adjustments).  All such financial statements, including the related schedules and notes thereto, have been prepared in accordance with GAAP applied consistently throughout the periods involved (except as approved by the aforementioned firm of accountants and disclosed therein).  As of the Closing Date, the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, have no material Guarantee Obligations, material contingent liabilities or material liabilities for taxes, or any long-term leases or unusual forward or long-term commitments, including any interest rate or foreign currency swap or exchange transaction or other obligation in respect of derivatives, that are not reflected in the most recent financial statements referred to in this paragraph, referred in the notes thereto or described under the heading “Legal Proceedings” of the Guarantor’s Form 10-Q, filed November 12, 2013 (for the period ended September 30, 2013) or listed on Schedule 3.1 hereto.

 

3.2                                No Change .  Since December 31, 2012, there has been no development or event that has had or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

3.3                                Existence; Compliance with Law .  Each Material Group Member (a) is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization, (b) has the power and authority, and the legal right, to own and operate its property, to lease the property it

 

31



 

operates as lessee and to conduct the business in which it is currently engaged, (c) in the case of each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary, has obtained the Broker-Dealer Licenses and Memberships and Broker-Dealer Registrations, which, in each case, are the licenses, memberships and registrations necessary in the normal conduct of its business, (d) is duly qualified as a foreign corporation or other organization and in good standing under the laws of each jurisdiction where its ownership, lease or operation of property or the conduct of its business requires such qualification and (e) is in compliance with all Requirements of Law, except, in the case of clauses (c), (d) and (e) above, to the extent that the failure to comply therewith would not, in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

3.4                                Power; Authorization; Enforceable Obligations .  Each Loan Party has the power and authority, and the legal right, to make, deliver and perform the Loan Documents to which it is a party and, in the case of the Borrower, to obtain extensions of credit hereunder.  Each Loan Party has taken all necessary organizational action to authorize the execution, delivery and performance of the Loan Documents to which it is a party and, in the case of the Borrower, to authorize the extensions of credit on the terms and conditions of this Agreement.  No consent or authorization of, filing with, notice to or other act by or in respect of, any Governmental Authority, FINRA or any other Person is required in connection with the extensions of credit hereunder or with the execution, delivery, performance, validity or enforceability of this Agreement or any of the Loan Documents, except (i) consents, authorizations, filings and notices described in Schedule 3.4, which consents, authorizations, filings and notices have been obtained or made and are in full force and effect, (ii) the filings referred to in Section 3.18 or (iii) such other consents, authorizations, filings and notices the failure to receive or make would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.  Each Loan Document has been duly executed and delivered on behalf of each Loan Party party thereto.  This Agreement constitutes, and each other Loan Document upon execution will constitute, a legal, valid and binding obligation of each Loan Party party thereto, enforceable against each such Loan Party in accordance with its terms, except as enforceability may be limited by applicable bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization, moratorium or similar laws affecting the enforcement of creditors’ rights generally and by general equitable principles (whether enforcement is sought by proceedings in equity or at law).

 

3.5                                No Legal Bar .  The execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, the borrowings hereunder and the use of the proceeds thereof will not violate any Requirement of Law or any material Contractual Obligation of any Group Member and will not result in, or require, the creation or imposition of any material Lien on any of their respective properties or revenues pursuant to any Requirement of Law or any such material Contractual Obligation (other than the Liens created by the Security Documents).

 

3.6                                Litigation .  Except for matters described under the heading “Legal Proceedings” of the Guarantor’s Form 10-Q, filed November 12, 2013 (for the period ended September 30, 2013), no litigation, investigation or proceeding of or before any arbitrator or Governmental Authority or FINRA is pending or, to the knowledge any Loan Party, threatened by or against any Group Member or against any of their respective properties or revenues (a) with respect to any of the Loan Documents or any of the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby, or (b) that would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

3.7                                No Default .  No Group Member is in default under or with respect to any of its Contractual Obligations in any respect that would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.  No Default or Event of Default has occurred and is continuing.

 

3.8                                Ownership of Property; Liens .  Each Group Member has title in fee simple to, or a valid leasehold interest in, all its real property, and good title to, or a valid leasehold interest in, all its other property, except in each case as would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse

 

32



 

Effect, and none of such property of the Guarantor is subject to any Lien except as permitted by Section 6.2.

 

3.9                                Intellectual Property .  Each Material Group Member owns, or is licensed to use, all Intellectual Property necessary for the conduct of its business as currently conducted, except as may have been disclosed in a Loan Party’s filings with the SEC prior to the date hereof, no claim has been asserted and is pending by any Person challenging or questioning the use of any Intellectual Property or the validity or effectiveness of any Intellectual Property, nor does any Loan Party know of any valid basis for any such claim, and the use of Intellectual Property by each Material Group Member does not infringe on the rights of any Person in any respect, except in each case as would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

3.10                         Taxes .  Each Group Member has filed or caused to be filed all Federal, state and other material tax returns that are required to be filed and has paid all taxes shown to be due and payable on said returns or on any assessments made against it or any of its property and all other taxes, fees or other charges imposed on it or any of its property by any Governmental Authority other than (a) any taxes the amount or validity of which are currently being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and with respect to which reserves in conformity with GAAP have been provided on the books of the relevant Group Member or (b) except in the case of filing consolidated Federal income tax returns, to the extent that the failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to result in a Material Adverse Effect.  To the knowledge of any Loan Party, no material tax lien (other than any lien described in Section 6.2(a)) has been filed with respect to any such tax, fee or other charge.

 

3.11                         Federal Regulations .  (a)  The Borrower is an “exempted borrower” within the meaning of such quoted term under Regulation U, and no part of the proceeds of any Loans, and no other extensions of credit hereunder, will be used for any purpose that violates the provisions of the Regulations of the Board.

 

(b)  Each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary that is a Domestic Subsidiary is a broker and dealer subject to the provisions of Regulation T of the Board.  Each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary that is a Domestic Subsidiary maintains procedures and internal controls reasonably designed to ensure that such Broker-Dealer Subsidiary does not extend or maintain credit to or for its customers other than in accordance with the provisions of Regulation T, and members of each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary that is a Domestic Subsidiary regularly supervise its activities and the activities of members and employees of such Broker-Dealer Subsidiary to insure that such Broker-Dealer Subsidiary does not extend or maintain credit to or for its customers other than in accordance with the provisions of Regulation T, except for occasional inadvertent failures to comply with Regulation T in connection with transactions which are not material either in number or amount.

 

3.12                         ERISA . Except as set forth on Schedule 3.12, neither a Reportable Event nor a failure to satisfy the minimum funding standards (within the meaning of Sections 412 or 430 of the Code or Section 302 of ERISA) has occurred during the five-year period prior to the date on which this representation is made with respect to any Plan, and each Plan has complied in all material respects with the applicable provisions of ERISA and the Code.  No termination of a Single Employer Plan has occurred, and no Lien in favor of the PBGC or a Single Employer Plan has arisen, during such five-year period.  The present value of all accrued benefits under each Single Employer Plan (based on those assumptions used to fund such Plans) did not, as of the last annual valuation date prior to the date on which this representation is made, exceed the value of the assets of such Plan allocable to such accrued benefits by a material amount and there has been no determination that any Single Employer Plan is in “at risk” status (within the meaning of Section 430 of the Code or Section 303 of ERISA).  No Loan Party or Commonly Controlled Entity has had a complete or partial withdrawal from any Multiemployer Plan that

 

33



 

has resulted or would reasonably be expected to result in a material liability under ERISA, and no Loan Party or any Commonly Controlled Entity would become subject to any material liability under ERISA if any such Loan Party or any such Commonly Controlled Entity were to withdraw completely from all Multiemployer Plans as of the valuation date most closely preceding the date on which this representation is made.  No such Multiemployer Plan is in Reorganization or Insolvent, and no Loan Party or Commonly Controlled Entity has received a notice of a determination that any Multiemployer Plan is in “endangered” or “critical” status (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 305 of ERISA).

 

3.13                         Membership in FINRA; Registration, etc .  Each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary that (a) is a Domestic Subsidiary is a member in good standing of FINRA and is duly registered as a broker-dealer with the SEC and in each state where the conduct of a material portion of its business requires such registration and (b) is not a Domestic Subsidiary is duly registered as a broker-dealer with the applicable governing body where the conduct of its business requires such registration.  Each Loan Party is not an “investment company”, or a company “controlled” by an “investment company”, within the meaning of the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended.  No Loan Party is subject to regulation under any Requirement of Law (other than Regulation X of the Board) that limits its ability to borrow Loans under the provisions hereof.

 

3.14                         Subsidiaries .  Except as disclosed to the Administrative Agent by the Borrower in writing from time to time after the Closing Date, (a) Schedule 3.14 sets forth the name and jurisdiction of incorporation of each Subsidiary of a Loan Party and, as to each such Subsidiary, the percentage of issued Capital Stock owned by any Loan Party or any Subsidiary of a Loan Party and (b) all of the issued and outstanding shares of capital stock or other ownership interests of such Subsidiaries have been (to the extent such concepts are relevant with respect to such ownership interests) duly authorized and issued and are fully paid and non-assessable.

 

3.15                         Use of Proceeds .  (a) The proceeds of the Borrowing Base A Loans shall be used to meet the liquidity needs of the Borrower arising as a result of or in connection with (i) financing security positions arising from non-standard settlements, (ii) financing security positions arising from disruptions caused by a default of a depositary or the rejection of securities deliveries in connection with executed trades or due to problems with the Fed Wire or other money transfer system, (iii) financing failed settlements, (iv) clearing fund deposit requirements, (v) on the Closing Date, refinancing any amounts outstanding under the Existing Credit Agreement or (vi) other working capital purposes.

 

(b) The proceeds of the Borrowing Base B Loans shall only be used to satisfy NSCC Deposit Requirements.

 

3.16                         Environmental Matters .  Except as, in the aggregate, would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect:

 

(a)  the facilities and properties owned, leased or operated by any Group Member (the “ Properties ”) do not contain, and have not previously contained, any Materials of Environmental Concern in amounts or concentrations or under circumstances that constitute or constituted a violation of, or could give rise to liability under, any Environmental Law;

 

(b)  no Group Member has received or is aware of any notice of violation, alleged violation, non-compliance, liability or potential liability regarding environmental matters or compliance with Environmental Laws with regard to any of the Properties or the business operated by any Group Member (the “ Business ”), nor does any Loan Party have knowledge or reason to believe that any such notice will be received or is being threatened;

 

34



 

(c)  Materials of Environmental Concern have not been transported or disposed of from the Properties in violation of, or in a manner or to a location that could give rise to liability under, any Environmental Law, nor have any Materials of Environmental Concern been generated, treated, stored or disposed of at, on or under any of the Properties in violation of, or in a manner that could give rise to liability under, any applicable Environmental Law;

 

(d)  no judicial proceeding or governmental or administrative action is pending or, to the knowledge of any Loan Party, threatened, under any Environmental Law to which any Group Member is or will be named as a party with respect to the Properties or the Business, nor are there any consent decrees or other decrees, consent orders, administrative orders or other orders, or other administrative or judicial requirements outstanding under any Environmental Law with respect to the Properties or the Business;

 

(e)  there has been no release or threat of release of Materials of Environmental Concern at or from the Properties, or arising from or related to the operations of any Group Member in connection with the Properties or otherwise in connection with the Business, in violation of or in amounts or in a manner that could give rise to liability under Environmental Laws;

 

(f)  the Properties and all operations at the Properties are in compliance, and have in the last five years been in compliance, with all applicable Environmental Laws, and there is no contamination at, under or about the Properties or violation of any Environmental Law with respect to the Properties or the Business; and

 

(g)  no Group Member has assumed any liability of any other Person under Environmental Laws.

 

3.17                         Accuracy of Information, etc .  No statement or information contained in this Agreement, any other Loan Document, the Confidential Information Memorandum or any other document, certificate or statement furnished by or on behalf of any Loan Party to the Administrative Agent or the Lenders, or any of them, for use in connection with the transactions contemplated by this Agreement or the other Loan Documents, taken as a whole, contained as of the date such statement, information, document or certificate was so furnished (or, in the case of the Confidential Information Memorandum, as of the date of this Agreement), any untrue statement of a material fact or omitted to state a material fact necessary to make the statements contained herein or therein not misleading; provided , that the projections and pro forma financial information contained in the materials referenced above are based upon good faith estimates and assumptions believed by management of the Borrower to be reasonable at the time made, it being recognized by the Lenders that such financial information as it relates to future events is not to be viewed as fact and that actual results during the period or periods covered by such financial information may differ from the projected results set forth therein by a material amount.

 

3.18                         Security Documents .  The Security Agreement is effective to create in favor of the Administrative Agent, for the benefit of the Lenders, a legal, valid and enforceable security interest in the Collateral described therein and proceeds thereof.  In the case of the Collateral described in the Security Agreement, when financing statements and other filings specified on Schedule 3.18(a) in appropriate form are filed in the offices specified on Schedule 3.18(a), the Security Agreement shall create a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in, all right, title and interest of the Borrower in such Collateral and the proceeds thereof, as security for the Obligations (as defined in the Security Agreement), in each case to the extent perfection can be obtained by filing Uniform Commercial Code financing statements or such other filings specified on Schedule 3.18(a)), in each case prior and superior in right to any other person (other than Permitted Liens).  In the case of the Collateral described in the

 

35


 

Security Agreement a Lien on which can be perfected by control, when the Administrative Agent has control of such Collateral, the Security Agreement shall create a fully perfected Lien on, and security interest in such Collateral and the proceeds thereof, in each case prior and superior in right to any other Person (except for Limited Permitted Liens), except to the extent otherwise provided in the Uniform Commercial Code.

 

3.19                         Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions .  The Borrower and the Guarantor have implemented and maintain in effect policies and procedures designed to ensure compliance by the Borrower, the Guarantor, their respective Subsidiaries and their respective directors, officers, employees and agents with Anti-Corruption Laws and applicable Sanctions, and the Guarantor, the Borrower, their respective Subsidiaries and their respective officers and employees, and to the knowledge of the Borrower and the Guarantor, their respective directors and agents, are in compliance with Anti-Corruption Laws and applicable Sanctions in all material respects.  None of (a) the Guarantor, the Borrower, any of their respective Subsidiaries or any of their respective directors, officers or employees, or (b)  to the knowledge of the Guarantor or the Borrower, any agent of the Guarantor, the Borrower or any of their respective Subsidiaries that will act in any capacity in connection with or benefit from the credit facility established hereby, is a Sanctioned Person.  No Borrowing, use of proceeds or other transaction contemplated by the Credit Agreement will violate Anti-Corruption Laws or applicable Sanctions.

 

SECTION 4.                             CONDITIONS PRECEDENT

 

4.1                                Conditions to Closing Date .  The effectiveness of this Agreement and the obligation of each Lender to make Loans hereunder is subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions precedent (if not otherwise waived in accordance with Section 10.1) on the Closing Date:

 

(a)          Credit Agreement; Security Agreement.   The Administrative Agent shall have received (i) this Agreement, executed and delivered by the Administrative Agent, the Borrower, the Guarantor and each Person listed on Schedule 1.1A and (ii) the Security Agreement, executed and delivered by the Borrower.

 

(b)          Financial Statements .  The Administrative Agent shall have received the financial statements referred to in Section 3.1 (it being understood that any public filing of such financials with the SEC shall constitute delivery of such financials).

 

(c)           Approvals .  All governmental and third party approvals (including shareholder approvals, if any) necessary in connection with the continuing operations of the Group Members and the transactions contemplated hereby shall have been obtained and be in full force and effect.

 

(d)          Lien Searches .  The Administrative Agent shall have received the results of a recent lien search in each of the jurisdictions and offices in the United States where liens on material assets of the Borrower are required to be filed or recorded.

 

(e)           Fees .  The Lenders and the Administrative Agent shall have received all fees required to be paid, and all expenses for which invoices have been presented (including the reasonable fees and expenses of legal counsel), on or before the Closing Date.

 

(f)            Closing Certificate; Certified Certificate of Incorporation; Good Standing Certificates .  The Administrative Agent shall have received (i) a certificate of each Loan Party, dated the Closing Date, substantially in the form of Exhibit C, with appropriate insertions and attachments, including the certificate of incorporation of each Loan Party that is a corporation

 

36



 

certified by the relevant authority of the jurisdiction of organization of such Loan Party, and (ii) a long form good standing certificate for each Loan Party from its jurisdiction of organization.

 

(g)           Legal Opinions .  The Administrative Agent shall have received the following executed legal opinions:

 

(i)              the legal opinion of K&L Gates, counsel to the Borrower and its Subsidiaries, in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent; and

 

(ii)           the legal opinion of P. Mats Goebels, general counsel of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries, in form and substance reasonably acceptable to the Administrative Agent.

 

(h)          Filings, Registrations and Recordings .  Each document (including any Uniform Commercial Code financing statement) required by the Security Documents or under law or reasonably requested by the Administrative Agent to be filed, registered or recorded in order to create in favor of the Administrative Agent, for the benefit of the Lenders, a perfected Lien on the Collateral described therein, prior and superior in right to any other Person (other than with respect to Liens expressly permitted by Section 6.2), shall be in proper form for filing, registration or recordation.

 

(i)              Patriot Act and Anti-Money Laundering Legislation .  The Administrative Agent and the Lenders shall have received all documentation and other information required by regulatory authorities under applicable “know your customer” rules and the Patriot Act reasonably requested by such Person at least two Business Days prior to the Closing Date in writing.

 

(j)             Existing Credit Agreement .  The Administrative Agent shall have received satisfactory evidence that the Existing Credit Agreement shall have been terminated and all amounts thereunder (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) shall have been paid in full and (ii) satisfactory arrangements shall have been made for the termination of all Liens granted in connection therewith.

 

4.2                                Conditions to Each Extension of Credit .  The agreement of each Lender to make any extension of credit requested to be made by it on any date is subject to the satisfaction of the following conditions precedent:

 

(a)               Borrowing Notices .  The Administrative Agent and, in the case of Swingline Loans, the Swingline Lender or Swingline Lenders, shall have received a Borrowing Request and a Pledged Eligible Assets Notice or a Borrowing Base B Limit Notice, as applicable and each required telephonic notice provided in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.4(a), as applicable.

 

(b)               DTC Pledge .  With respect to Borrowing Base A Loans, the Borrower shall have instructed DTC to credit the Eligible Assets contemplated to be delivered pursuant to Section 2.1 or 2.3, as applicable, as identified in the applicable Pledged Eligible Assets Notice to the pledgee account of the Administrative Agent with DTC upon, if necessary, delivery of such Eligible Assets to the Borrower or payment by it therefor.

 

(c)                Representations and Warranties .  Each of the representations and warranties made by any Loan Party in or pursuant to the Loan Documents shall be true and correct in all material respects on and as of such date as if made on and as of such date or, if such representation and warranty relates to a specific date, then as of such date; and, in the case of a Borrowing Base A

 

37



 

Loan to be secured with Pledged Eligible Assets from a Non-Diversified Pool, such Pledged Eligible Assets are designated to be delivered by the Borrower pursuant to a purchase or sale transaction at an agreed price.

 

(d)               No Default .  No Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing on such date or after giving effect to the extensions of credit requested to be made on such date.

 

Each borrowing by the Borrower hereunder shall constitute a representation and warranty by the Borrower as of the date of such extension of credit that the conditions contained in this Section 4.2 have been satisfied.

 

SECTION 5.                             AFFIRMATIVE COVENANTS

 

Each Loan Party hereby agrees that, so long as the Commitments remain in effect or any Loan or other amount (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) is owing to any Lender or the Administrative Agent hereunder, such Loan Party shall and shall cause each of its Subsidiaries to:

 

5.1                                Financial Statements .  Furnish to the Administrative Agent (which will promptly furnish such information to the Lenders):

 

(a)          not later than the earlier of (x) 90 days after the end of each fiscal year of the Guarantor and (y) the date on which the same is required to be filed with the SEC, (i) a copy of the audited consolidated balance sheets of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries as at the end of such year and the related audited consolidated statements of income and of cash flows for such year, setting forth in each case in comparative form the figures for the previous year and (ii) a copy of the audited consolidated balance sheets of the Borrower and its Subsidiaries as at the end of such year and the related audited consolidated statements of income and cash flows for such fiscal year, in each case reported on without a “going concern” or like qualification or exception, or qualification arising out of the scope of the audit, by KPMG LLP or other independent certified public accountants of nationally recognized standing; and

 

(b)          (i) not later than the earlier of (x) 45 days after the end of each of the first three quarterly periods of each fiscal year of the Guarantor and (y) the date on which the same is required to be filed with the SEC, the unaudited consolidated balance sheets of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries as at the end of such quarter and the related unaudited consolidated statements of income and cash flows for such quarter and the portion of the fiscal year through the end of such quarter, setting forth in each case in comparative form the figures for the previous year, certified by a Responsible Officer of the Guarantor as being fairly stated in all material respects (subject to normal year-end audit adjustments), and (ii) not later than 45 days after the end of each quarterly period of each fiscal year of the Borrower, the Part II FOCUS Report of the Borrower for such quarter.

 

All such financial statements (other than Part II FOCUS Reports) shall fairly present in all material respects the financial condition and results of operations of each Loan Party to which such financial statements relate and such Loan Party’s respective consolidated Subsidiaries and shall be prepared in reasonable detail and in accordance with GAAP applied (except as approved by such accountants or officer, as the case may be, and disclosed in reasonable detail therein) consistently throughout the periods reflected therein and with prior periods, where applicable.  All such Part II FOCUS Reports shall fairly present in all material respects the financial condition and results of operations of the Borrower and shall be prepared in reasonable detail.  Documents required to be delivered pursuant to this Section 5.1 (to the

 

38



 

extent any such documents are included in materials otherwise filed with the SEC) may be delivered by posting such documents electronically with notice to the Administrative Agent and each Lender thereof and if so posted, shall be deemed to have been delivered on the date (i) on which such Loan Party posts such documents, or provides a link thereto on the Internet at the Guarantor’s website address at www.itg.com; or (ii) on which such documents are posted on such Loan Party’s behalf on IntraLinks/IntraAgency or another relevant website, if any, to which each Lender and the Administrative Agent have access (whether a commercial, third-party website or whether sponsored by the Administrative Agent).

 

5.2                                Certificates; Other Information .  Furnish to the Administrative Agent and each Lender (or, in the case of clause (d), to the relevant Lender):

 

(a)          concurrently with the delivery of any financial statements pursuant to Section 5.1, (i) a certificate of a Responsible Officer of the Guarantor stating that such Responsible Officer has obtained no knowledge of any Default or Event of Default except as specified in such certificate and (ii) in the case of quarterly or annual financial statements, (x) a Compliance Certificate containing all information and calculations necessary for determining compliance by each Group Member with the provisions of this Agreement referred to therein as of the last day of the fiscal quarter or fiscal year of the Borrower, as the case may be, and (y) to the extent not previously disclosed to the Administrative Agent, a description of any change in the jurisdiction of organization of any Loan Party;

 

(b)          within five Business Days after the same are sent, copies of all financial statements and reports that the Guarantor sends to the public holders of any class of its debt securities or public equity securities, to the extent not otherwise provided on the Internet at the Guarantor’s website address at www.itg.com;

 

(c)           within five Business Days after the end of each calendar month, a certificate of a Responsible Officer of the Borrower indicating the Eligible NSCC Margin Deposits in effect for each Business Day in the most recently ended calendar month; and

 

(d)          promptly, such additional financial and other information as any Lender may from time to time reasonably request through the Administrative Agent.

 

5.3                                Payment of Obligations .  Pay, discharge or otherwise satisfy at or before maturity or before they become delinquent, as the case may be, all its obligations of whatever nature (including taxes), except where (a) the amount or validity thereof is currently being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings and reserves in conformity with GAAP with respect thereto have been provided on the books of the relevant Group Member or (b) such failure would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

5.4                                Maintenance of Existence; Compliance .  (a)(i)  Preserve, renew and keep in full force and effect its organizational existence and (ii) take all reasonable action to maintain all rights, privileges, Broker-Dealer Licenses and Memberships, Broker-Dealer Registrations and franchises necessary or desirable in the normal conduct of its business, except, in each case, as otherwise permitted by Section 6.3 or Section 6.4(e) and except to the extent (other than with respect to the preservation of the existence of the Loan Parties) that failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect; and (b) comply with all Contractual Obligations and Requirements of Law except to the extent that failure to comply therewith would not, in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

39



 

5.5                                Maintenance of Property; Insurance .  (a)  Keep all property useful and necessary in its business in good working order and condition, ordinary wear and tear excepted, except where the failure to do so would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect and (b) maintain with financially sound and reputable insurance companies insurance on all its property in at least such amounts and against at least such risks (but including in any event public liability, product liability and business interruption) as are usually insured against in the same general area by companies engaged in the same or a similar business.

 

5.6                                Inspection of Property; Books and Records; Discussions .  (a)  Keep proper books of records and account in which full, true and correct entries in conformity with GAAP and all Requirements of Law shall be made of all material dealings and transactions in relation to its business and activities and (b) upon reasonable prior notice to the Loan Parties, permit representatives of any Lender to visit and inspect any of its properties and examine and make abstracts from any of its books and records and to discuss the business, operations, properties and financial and other condition of the Group Members with officers and employees of the Group Members and with their independent certified public accountants, all at any reasonable time during normal business hours and so often as may reasonably be desired.

 

5.7                                Notices .  Promptly give notice to the Administrative Agent and each Lender of (to the extent not promptly delivered on the Internet at the Guarantor’s website address at www.itg.com):

 

(a)          the occurrence of any Default or Event of Default;

 

(b)          any litigation or proceeding affecting any Group Member (i) in which the amount involved is $5,000,000 or more and not covered by insurance or (ii) which relates to any Loan Document;

 

(c)           the following events, as soon as possible and in any event within 30 days after any Loan Party knows or has reason to know thereof:  (i) the occurrence of any Reportable Event with respect to any Plan, the determination that any Single Employer Plan is in “at risk” status (within the meaning of Section 430 of the Code or Section 303 of ERISA), the creation of any Lien in favor of the PBGC or a Single-Employer Plan or any withdrawal from, or the termination, Reorganization or Insolvency of, any Multiemployer Plan or determination that any Multiemployer Plan is in “endangered” or “critical” status (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 305 of ERISA), or (ii) the institution of proceedings by the PBGC, any Loan Party, any Commonly Controlled Entity or any Multiemployer Plan with respect to the withdrawal from or Reorganization or Insolvency of any Multiemployer Plan, the termination of any Single-Employer Plan, or determination that any Multiemployer Plan is in “endangered” or “critical” status (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 305 of ERISA);  and

 

(d)          any development or event that, in the reasonable judgment of any Loan Party, has had or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

 

Each notice pursuant to this Section 5.7 shall be accompanied by a statement of a Responsible Officer of the Guarantor setting forth details of the occurrence referred to therein and stating what action the relevant Group Member proposes to take with respect thereto.

 

5.8                                Compliance with Regulatory Requirements .  The Borrower will, and the Guarantor will cause each Broker-Dealer Subsidiary to comply with all material rules and regulations of the SEC and FINRA applicable to it (including such rules and regulations dealing with net capital

 

40



 

requirements); except where the failure to so comply is immaterial non-compliance with such rules and regulations.

 

5.9                                Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions .  The Guarantor and the Borrower will maintain in effect and enforce policies and procedures designed to ensure compliance by the Borrower, its Subsidiaries and their respective directors, officers, employees and agents with Anti-Corruption Laws and applicable Sanctions.

 

SECTION 6.                             NEGATIVE COVENANTS

 

Each Loan Party hereby agrees that, so long as the Commitments remain in effect or any Loan or other amount (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) is owing to any Lender or the Administrative Agent hereunder, such Loan Party shall not, and shall not permit any of its Subsidiaries to, directly or indirectly:

 

6.1                                Financial Condition Covenants .

 

(a)  Maximum Consolidated Leverage Ratio .  Permit the Consolidated Leverage Ratio at any time of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries to exceed [**].

 

(b)  Minimum Consolidated Tangible Net Worth .  Permit Consolidated Tangible Net Worth at any time to be less than (i) with respect to the Borrower, [**] or (ii) with respect to the Guarantor, [**] (in each case, the “ Minimum TNW ”); provided that, on any day of determination, the Minimum TNW of the Guarantor shall be reduced by 80% of the sum of (x) the value of goodwill (net of any impairment) acquired in connection with Permitted Acquisitions as determined in accordance with GAAP (calculated as of such date of determination) and (y) the aggregate amount of (i) dividends paid by the Guarantor and (ii) consideration paid in effecting any repurchases of Capital Stock of the Guarantor by the Guarantor, in each case, since the Closing Date (in the case of this clause (y), to the extent in excess of Cumulative Consolidated Net Income); provided further that in no event shall the Minimum TNW of the Guarantor be reduced below [**].

 

(c)  Minimum Regulatory Capital .  Permit the Net Capital of the Borrower at any time to be less than [**] in excess of the minimum amount of Net Capital required by the Exchange Act.

 

(d)  Minimum Liquidity Ratio . Permit the Liquidity Ratio of the Borrower at any time to be less than [**].

 

6.2                                Liens .  Create, incur, assume or suffer to exist any Lien upon any property of the Guarantor, whether now owned or hereafter acquired, except:

 

(a)          Liens for taxes not yet due or that are being contested in good faith; provided that, to the extent required, adequate reserves with respect thereto are maintained on the books of the Guarantor in conformity with GAAP;

 

(b)          carriers’, warehousemen’s, mechanics’, materialmen’s, repairmen’s or other like Liens arising in the ordinary course of business that are not overdue for a period of more than 30 days or that are being contested in good faith by appropriate proceedings;

 

(c)           pledges or deposits in connection with workers’ compensation, unemployment insurance and other social security legislation;

 

41



 

(d)          deposits to secure the performance of bids, trade contracts (other than for borrowed money), leases, statutory obligations, surety and appeal bonds, performance bonds and other obligations of a like nature incurred in the ordinary course of business;

 

(e)           easements, rights-of-way, restrictions and other similar encumbrances incurred in the ordinary course of business that, in the aggregate, are not substantial in amount and that do not in any case materially detract from the value of the property subject thereto or materially interfere with the ordinary conduct of the business of the Guarantor;

 

(f)            Liens in existence on the date hereof listed on Schedule 6.2(f) and Liens incurred to secure any Indebtedness to refinance Indebtedness secured by such Liens; provided that no such Lien is spread to cover any additional property after the Closing Date (other than (A) after-acquired property that is related to the property covered by such Lien and (B) proceeds and products of such property) and that the principal amount of Indebtedness secured thereby is not increased;

 

(g)           Liens on fixed or capital assets acquired, constructed or improved by the Guarantor; provided that (i) such security interests are incurred prior to or within 180 days after such acquisition or the completion of such construction or improvement, (ii) the Indebtedness secured thereby does not exceed 100% of the cost of acquiring, constructing or improving such fixed or capital assets and (iii) such security interests shall not apply to any other property of the Guarantor (other than (A) after-acquired property that is related to the property covered by such Lien and (B) proceeds and products of such property);

 

(h)          Liens created pursuant to the Security Documents;

 

(i)              any interest or title of a lessor under any lease entered into by the Guarantor in the ordinary course of its business and covering only the assets so leased;

 

(j)             any Lien existing on any property or asset prior to the acquisition thereof by the Guarantor; provided that (i) such Lien is not created in contemplation of or in connection with such acquisition, (ii) such Lien shall not apply to any other property or assets of the Guarantor and (iii) such Lien shall secure only those obligations which it secures on the date of such acquisition, and extensions, renewals and replacements thereof that do not increase the outstanding principal amount thereof as of such date;

 

(k)          Liens incidental to the conduct of its business or the ownership of its property and assets which were not incurred in connection with the borrowing of money or the obtaining of advances or credit, and which do not in the aggregate detract from the value of its property or assets or impair the use thereof in the operation of its business;

 

(l)              Liens securing judgments for the payment of money not constituting an Event of Default under Section 8(h) or securing appeal or other surety bonds relating to such judgments;

 

(m)      Liens securing Indebtedness of the Guarantor; provided that such Indebtedness is stated to mature after (and includes no fixed repayment or repurchase obligations other than customary amortization and customary mandatory prepayments or redemptions for similar Indebtedness prior to) the date that is 180 days after the Termination Date;

 

(n)          Liens securing Indebtedness of the Guarantor if the obligations of the Guarantor under Section 7 are secured equally and ratably with or senior to the Liens securing such

 

42



 

Indebtedness; provided that if requested by the Borrower with respect to such Liens, the Administrative Agent shall (and is hereby authorized to), on behalf of itself and the Lenders, enter into an intercreditor agreement reasonably satisfactory to the Administrative Agent providing that such new Liens will be secured equally and ratably with, or junior to (as directed by the Borrower) the Liens granted in respect of the Obligations, on customary terms;

 

(o)          Liens on fixed assets owned by and leaseholds of the Guarantor; provided that the aggregate principal amount at any time outstanding of obligations secured by such Liens incurred pursuant to this clause (o) shall not exceed $30,000,000; and

 

(p)          any extension, renewal or replacement (or successive extensions, renewals or replacements) in whole or in part of any Lien referred to in clauses (f), (g) and (j); provided that (i) the obligations secured thereby shall be limited to the obligations secured by the Lien so extended, renewed or replaced (and, to the extent provided in the foregoing clauses, extensions, renewals and replacements thereof) and (ii) such Lien shall be limited to all or a part of the assets that secured the Lien so extended, renewed or replaced (and any (A) after-acquired property that is related to the property covered by such Lien and (B) proceeds and products of such property).

 

6.3                                Fundamental Changes .  Merge, consolidate or amalgamate, or liquidate, wind up or dissolve itself (or suffer any liquidation or dissolution), or Dispose of all or substantially all of its property or business, except that:

 

(a)          the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries may merge, amalgamate or consolidate with any Person; provided that (A) in the case of any merger, amalgamation or consolidation involving the Borrower, the Borrower shall be the continuing or surviving corporation and (B) in the case of any merger or consolidation involving the Guarantor, the Guarantor shall be the surviving Person;

 

(b)          any Subsidiary of the Guarantor (other than the Borrower) may Dispose of all or substantially all of its assets (i) to the Guarantor or any Subsidiary or (ii) pursuant to a Disposition permitted by Section 6.4;

 

(c)           any Investment expressly permitted by Section 6.7 may be structured as a merger, consolidation or amalgamation; and

 

(d)          any Subsidiary of the Guarantor (other than the Borrower) may liquidate, wind up or dissolve if the Guarantor determines in good faith that such liquidation or dissolution is in the best interests of the Loan Parties and the Borrower and is not materially disadvantageous to the Lenders.

 

6.4                                Disposition of Property .  Dispose of any of its property, whether now owned or hereafter acquired, or, in the case of any Subsidiary, issue or sell any shares of such Subsidiary’s Capital Stock to any Person, except:

 

(a)          the Disposition of obsolete or worn out property in the ordinary course of business;

 

(b)          the sale of inventory and other assets (including securities and derivatives) in the ordinary course of business;

 

(c)           Dispositions permitted by clause (i) of Section 6.3(b);

 

43



 

(d)          the sale or issuance of the Capital Stock of any Subsidiary of the Guarantor (other than the Borrower) to any Group Member;

 

(e)           (i) the sale by any Loan Party of its property or assets to another Loan Party, (ii) the sale by any Subsidiary of the Guarantor (other than the Borrower) of its property or assets to another Group Member;

 

(f)            any Restricted Payment or Investment that is permitted to be made, and is made, under Section 6.5 or 6.7, respectively;

 

(g)           the lease, assignment or sublease of any real or personal property in the ordinary course of business;

 

(h)          sales or grants of licenses or sublicenses to use the Guarantor’s or any of its Subsidiaries’ trademarks, patents, trade secrets, know-how or other intellectual property and technology to the extent that such sale, license or sublicense does not prohibit the licensor from using such trademark, patent, trade secret, know-how, technology or other intellectual property and is in the ordinary course of business;

 

(i)              the sale by the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries of computer and other similar equipment not to exceed $30,000,000 in the aggregate;

 

(j)             any Disposition of property or issuance or sale of any shares of the Capital Stock of any Subsidiary of the Guarantor (other than the Borrower) so long as (i) no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would exist after giving effect thereto, (ii) such Disposition to a Person that is not a Group Member is for consideration at least equivalent to the fair market value of such property or Capital Stock and (iii) the Guarantor shall be in compliance, on a pro forma basis after giving effect to such Disposition, with the covenants contained in Section 6.1 recomputed as at the last day of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of the Guarantor and the Subsidiaries as if such Disposition had occurred on the first day of each relevant period for testing such compliance; and

 

(k)          the Disposition of any property in a Sale/Leaseback Transaction within six months of the acquisition of such property.

 

6.5                                Restricted Payments .  Declare or pay any dividend (other than dividends payable solely in common stock of the Person making such dividend) on, or make any payment on account of, or set apart assets for a sinking or other analogous fund for, the purchase, redemption, defeasance, retirement or other acquisition of, any Capital Stock of the Guarantor, whether now or hereafter outstanding, or make any other distribution in respect thereof, either directly or indirectly, whether in cash or property or in obligations of the Guarantor (collectively, “ Restricted Payments ”), except that the Guarantor may make Restricted Payments so long as no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would exist after giving effect thereto.

 

6.6                                Capital Expenditures .  Make or commit to make any Capital Expenditure, except (a) Capital Expenditures described on Schedule 6.6 hereto and (b) Capital Expenditures of the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries in the ordinary course of business not exceeding $40,000,000 per fiscal year; provided , that such amount referred to above, if not so expended in the fiscal year for which it is permitted, may be carried over for expenditure in any succeeding fiscal year.

 

44



 

6.7                                Investments .  Make any advance, loan, extension of credit (by way of guaranty or otherwise) or capital contribution to, or purchase any Capital Stock, bonds, notes, debentures or other debt securities of, or any assets constituting a business unit of, or make any other investment in, any other Person (all of the foregoing, “ Investments ”), except:

 

(a)          extensions of trade credit in the ordinary course of business;

 

(b)          investments in Cash Equivalents (and other Investments in the ordinary course of a broker-dealer business);

 

(c)           Guarantee Obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business by the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries of obligations of the Guarantor or any Subsidiary;

 

(d)          loans and advances to employees of any Group Member in the ordinary course of business (including for travel, entertainment and relocation expenses) in an aggregate amount for all Group Members not to exceed $1,000,000 at any one time outstanding;

 

(e)           other Investments constituting Permitted Acquisitions;

 

(f)            intercompany Investments by any Group Member in another Group Member;

 

(g)           Investments consisting of extensions of credit entered into or made or that are received in the ordinary course of business in accordance with normal practice and Investments in Swap Agreements;

 

(h)          Investments existing on the date hereof and set forth on Schedule 6.7(h) and any modification, replacement, renewal, reinvestment or extension thereof; provided that the amount of the original Investment is not increased except by the terms of such Investment as in effect on the date hereof or as otherwise permitted by this Section 6.7; and

 

(i)              in addition to Investments otherwise expressly permitted by this Section, any Investment by the Guarantor or any of its Subsidiaries so long as (i) no Default shall have occurred and be continuing or would exist after giving effect thereto and (ii) the Guarantor shall be in compliance, on a pro forma basis after giving effect to such Investment, with the covenants contained in Section 6.1 recomputed as at the last day of the most recently ended fiscal quarter of the Guarantor and the Subsidiaries as if such Investment had occurred on the first day of each relevant period for testing such compliance.

 

6.8                                Transactions with Affiliates .  Enter into any transaction, including any purchase, sale, lease or exchange of property, the rendering of any service or the payment of any management, advisory or similar fees, with any Affiliate (other than any other Group Member) unless such transaction is (a) (i) otherwise permitted under this Agreement, (ii) in the ordinary course of business of the relevant Group Member, or (iii) upon fair and reasonable terms no less favorable to the relevant Group Member than it would obtain in a comparable arm’s length transaction with a Person that is not an Affiliate or (b) a Restricted Payment permitted by Section 6.5.

 

6.9                                Changes in Fiscal Periods .  Permit the fiscal year of a Loan Party to end on a day other than December 31 or change a Loan Party’s method of determining fiscal quarters.

 

45


 

6.10                         Anti-Corruption Laws and Sanctions

 

.  The Borrower will not request any Borrowing, and the Borrower shall not use, and shall procure that its Subsidiaries and its or their respective directors, officers, employees and agents shall not use, the proceeds of any Borrowing directly or, to their knowledge, indirectly (a) in furtherance of an offer, payment, promise to pay, or authorization of the payment or giving of money, or anything else of value, to any Person in violation of any Anti-Corruption Laws, (b) for the purpose of funding, financing or facilitating any activities, business or transaction of or with any Sanctioned Person, or in any Sanctioned Country, or (c) in any manner that would result in the violation of any Sanctions applicable to any party hereto.

 

6.11                         Lines of Business .  Enter into any business (including, for the avoidance of doubt, through any Investment permitted by Section 6.7), either directly or through any Subsidiary, except for those businesses in which the Guarantor and its Subsidiaries are engaged on the Closing Date and businesses similar, ancillary, complementary or otherwise reasonably related thereto or that are a reasonable extension, development or expansion thereof.

 

SECTION 7.                             GUARANTEE

 

7.1                                Guarantee .

 

(a)  The Guarantor hereby unconditionally and irrevocably, guarantees to the Administrative Agent, for the ratable benefit of the Lenders, and their respective successors, indorsees, transferees and assigns, the prompt and complete payment and performance by the Borrower when due (whether at the stated maturity, by acceleration or otherwise) of the Obligations.(b)  Anything herein or in any other Loan Document to the contrary notwithstanding, the maximum liability of the Guarantor hereunder and under the other Loan Documents shall in no event exceed the amount which can be guaranteed by the Guarantor under applicable federal and state laws relating to the insolvency of debtors.

 

(c)  The Guarantor agrees that the Obligations may at any time and from time to time exceed the amount of the liability of the Guarantor hereunder without impairing the guarantee contained in this Section 7 or affecting the rights and remedies of the Administrative Agent or any Lender hereunder.

 

(d)  The guarantee contained in this Section 7 shall remain in full force and effect until all the Obligations (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) and the obligations of the Guarantor under the guarantee contained in this Section 7 shall have been satisfied by payment in full and the Commitments shall be terminated, notwithstanding that from time to time during the term of this Agreement the Borrower may be free from any Obligations.

 

(e)  No payment made by the Borrower, the Guarantor or any other Person or received or collected by the Administrative Agent or any Lender from the Borrower, the Guarantor or any other Person by virtue of any action or proceeding or any set-off or appropriation or application at any time or from time to time in reduction of or in payment of the Obligations shall be deemed to modify, reduce, release or otherwise affect the liability of the Guarantor hereunder which shall, notwithstanding any such payment (other than any payment made by the Guarantor in respect of the Obligations or any payment received or collected from the Guarantor in respect of the Obligations), remain liable for the Obligations up to the maximum liability of the Guarantor hereunder until the Obligations are paid in full and the Commitments are terminated.

 

7.2                                No Subrogation .  Notwithstanding any payment made by the Guarantor hereunder or any set-off or application of funds of the Guarantor by the Administrative Agent or any Lender, the Guarantor shall not be entitled to be subrogated to any of the rights of the Administrative Agent or any

 

46



 

Lender against the Borrower or any collateral security or guarantee or right of offset held by the Administrative Agent or any Lender for the payment of the Obligations, nor shall the Guarantor seek or be entitled to seek any contribution or reimbursement from the Borrower in respect of payments made by the Guarantor hereunder, until all amounts owing to the Administrative Agent and the Lenders by the Borrower on account of the Obligations (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) are paid in full and the Commitments are terminated.  If any amount shall be paid to the Guarantor on account of such subrogation rights at any time when all of the Obligations (other than contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) shall not have been paid in full, such amount shall be held by the Guarantor in trust for the Administrative Agent and the Lenders, segregated from other funds of the Guarantor, and shall, forthwith upon receipt by the Guarantor, be turned over to the Administrative Agent in the exact form received by the Guarantor (duly indorsed by the Guarantor to the Administrative Agent, if required), to be applied against the Obligations, whether matured or unmatured, in such order as the Administrative Agent may determine.

 

7.3                                Amendments, etc. with respect to the Obligations .  The Guarantor shall remain obligated hereunder notwithstanding that, without any reservation of rights against the Guarantor and without notice to or further assent by the Guarantor, any demand for payment of any of the Obligations made by the Administrative Agent or any Lender may be rescinded by the Administrative Agent or such Lender and any of the Obligations continued, and the Obligations, or the liability of any other Person upon or for any part thereof, or any collateral security or guarantee therefor or right of offset with respect thereto, may, from time to time, in whole or in part, be renewed, extended, increased, amended, modified, accelerated, compromised, waived, surrendered or released by the Administrative Agent or any Lender, and this Agreement and the other Loan Documents and any other documents executed and delivered in connection therewith may be amended, modified, supplemented or terminated, in whole or in part, as the Administrative Agent (or the Required Lenders, the Supermajority Lenders or all Lenders, as the case may be) may deem advisable from time to time, and any collateral security, guarantee or right of offset at any time held by the Administrative Agent or any Lender for the payment of the Obligations may be sold, exchanged, waived, surrendered or released.  Neither the Administrative Agent nor any Lender shall have any obligation to protect, secure, perfect or insure any Lien at any time held by it as security for the Obligations or for the guarantee contained in this Section 7 or any property subject thereto.

 

7.4                                Guarantee Absolute and Unconditional .  The Guarantor waives any and all notice of the creation, renewal, extension or accrual of any of the Obligations and notice of or proof of reliance by the Administrative Agent or any Lender upon the guarantee contained in this Section 7 or acceptance of the guarantee contained in this Section 7; the Obligations, and any of them, shall conclusively be deemed to have been created, contracted or incurred, or renewed, extended, amended, increased or waived, in reliance upon the guarantee contained in this Section 7; and all dealings between the Borrower and the Guarantor, on the one hand, and the Administrative Agent and the Lenders, on the other hand, likewise shall be conclusively presumed to have been had or consummated in reliance upon the guarantee contained in this Section 7.  The Guarantor waives diligence, presentment, protest, demand for payment and notice of default or nonpayment to or upon the Borrower or the Guarantor with respect to the Obligations.  The Guarantor understands and agrees that the guarantee contained in this Section 7 shall be construed as a continuing, absolute and unconditional guarantee of payment without regard to (a) the validity or enforceability of this Agreement or any other Loan Document, any of the Obligations or any other collateral security therefor or guarantee or right of offset with respect thereto at any time or from time to time held by the Administrative Agent or any Lender, (b) any defense, set-off or counterclaim (other than a defense of payment or performance) which may at any time be available to or be asserted by the Borrower or any other Person against the Administrative Agent or any Lender, or (c) any other circumstance whatsoever (with or without notice to or knowledge of the Borrower or the Guarantor) which constitutes, or might be construed to constitute, an equitable or legal discharge of the Borrower for the Obligations, or of the Guarantor under the guarantee contained in this Section 7, in bankruptcy or in

 

47



 

any other instance.  When making any demand hereunder or otherwise pursuing its rights and remedies hereunder against the Guarantor, the Administrative Agent or any Lender may, but shall be under no obligation to, make a similar demand on or otherwise pursue such rights and remedies as it may have against the Borrower or any other Person or against any collateral security or guarantee for the Obligations or any right of offset with respect thereto, and any failure by the Administrative Agent or any Lender to make any such demand, to pursue such other rights or remedies or to collect any payments from the Borrower or any other Person or to realize upon any such collateral security or guarantee or to exercise any such right of offset, or any release of the Borrower or any other Person or any such collateral security, guarantee or right of offset, shall not relieve the Guarantor of any obligation or liability hereunder, and shall not impair or affect the rights and remedies, whether express, implied or available as a matter of law, of the Administrative Agent or any Lender against the Guarantor.  For the purposes hereof “demand” shall include the commencement and continuance of any legal proceedings.

 

7.5                                Reinstatement .  The guarantee contained in this Section 7 shall continue to be effective, or be reinstated, as the case may be, if at any time payment, or any part thereof, of any of the Obligations is rescinded or must otherwise be restored or returned by the Administrative Agent or any Lender upon the insolvency, bankruptcy, dissolution, liquidation or reorganization of the Borrower or the Guarantor, or upon or as a result of the appointment of a receiver, intervenor or conservator of, or trustee or similar officer for, the Borrower or the Guarantor or any substantial part of its property, or otherwise, all as though such payments had not been made.

 

7.6                                Payments .  The Guarantor hereby guarantees that payments hereunder will be paid to the Administrative Agent without set-off or counterclaim in Dollars at the Funding Office.

 

SECTION 8.                             EVENTS OF DEFAULT

 

If any of the following events shall occur and be continuing:

 

(a)          the Borrower shall fail to pay any principal of any Loan when due in accordance with the terms hereof; or the Borrower shall fail to pay any interest on any Loan or any other amount payable hereunder or under any other Loan Document, within five days after any such interest or other amount becomes due in accordance with the terms hereof; or

 

(b)          any representation or warranty made or deemed made by any Loan Party herein or in any other Loan Document or that is contained in any certificate (including any certification of any financial statement) furnished by it at any time under or in connection with this Agreement or any such other Loan Document shall prove to have been inaccurate in any material respect on or as of the date made or deemed made; or

 

(c)           (i) any Loan Party shall default in the observance or performance of any agreement contained in Section 6 hereof or (ii) the Borrower shall fail to cure the Deficiency, if any, arising as a result of its failure to effect a DTC pledge of any Eligible Assets referred to in the last sentence of Section 2.2(b) prior to the close of the DTC free pledge process on the same day as the Pledged Eligible Assets Notice relating to such Eligible Assets has been furnished to the Administrative Agent (it being understood that any such Deficiency shall be deemed cured upon repayment by the Borrower to the Administrative Agent of an amount equal to such Deficiency by 4:00 P.M. New York City time on such date); or

 

(d)          any Loan Party shall default in the observance or performance of any other agreement contained in this Agreement or any other Loan Document (other than as provided in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this Section), and such default shall continue unremedied for a

 

48



 

period of 30 days after notice to the Borrower from the Administrative Agent or the Required Lenders; or

 

(e)           any Material Group Member shall (i) default in making any payment of any principal of any Indebtedness (including any Guarantee Obligation, but excluding the Loans and the Guarantee Obligations with respect thereto described in Section 7 hereof) on the scheduled or original due date with respect thereto; or (ii) default in making any payment of any interest on any such Indebtedness beyond the period of grace, if any, provided in the instrument or agreement under which such Indebtedness was created; or (iii) default in the observance or performance of any other agreement or condition relating to any such Indebtedness or contained in any instrument or agreement evidencing, securing or relating thereto, or any other event shall occur or condition exist, the effect of which default or other event or condition is to cause, or to permit the holder or beneficiary of such Indebtedness (or a trustee or agent on behalf of such holder or beneficiary) to cause (with all applicable grace periods having expired), with the giving of notice if required, such Indebtedness to become due prior to its stated maturity (or, in the case of any Swap Agreement, other than in accordance with its terms); provided , that a default, event or condition described in clause (i), (ii) or (iii) of this paragraph (e) shall not at any time constitute an Event of Default unless, at such time, one or more defaults, events or conditions of the type described in clauses (i), (ii) and (iii) of this paragraph (e) shall have occurred and be continuing with respect to Indebtedness the outstanding principal amount of which exceeds in the aggregate $25,000,000; or

 

(f)            (i) any Material Group Member shall commence any case, proceeding or other action (A) under any existing or future law of any jurisdiction, domestic or foreign, relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or relief of debtors, seeking to have an order for relief entered with respect to it, or seeking to adjudicate it a bankrupt or insolvent, or seeking reorganization, arrangement, adjustment, winding-up, liquidation, dissolution, composition or other relief with respect to it or its debts, or (B) seeking appointment of a receiver, trustee, custodian, conservator or other similar official for it or for all or any substantial part of its assets, or any Material Group Member shall make a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors; or (ii) there shall be commenced against any Material Group Member any case, proceeding or other action of a nature referred to in clause (i) above that (A) results in the entry of an order for relief or any such adjudication or appointment or (B) remains undismissed or undischarged for a period of 60 days; or (iii) there shall be commenced against any Material Group Member any case, proceeding or other action seeking issuance of a warrant of attachment, execution, distraint or similar process against all or any substantial part of its assets that results in the entry of an order for any such relief that shall not have been vacated, discharged, or stayed or bonded pending appeal within 60 days from the entry thereof; or (iv) any Material Group Member shall take any action in furtherance of, or indicating its consent to, approval of, or acquiescence in, any of the acts set forth in clause (i), (ii), or (iii) above; or (v) any Material Group Member shall generally not, or shall be unable to, or shall admit in writing its inability to, pay its debts as they become due; or

 

(g)                (i) any Person shall engage in any “prohibited transaction” (as defined in Section 406 of ERISA or Section 4975 of the Code) involving any Plan, (ii) any failure to satisfy the minimum funding standards (as defined in Sections 412 or 430 of the Code or 302 of ERISA), whether or not waived, shall exist with respect to any Plan, any Single Employer Plan shall be determined to be in “at risk” status (within the meaning of Section 430 of the Code or Section 303 of ERISA), or any Lien in favor of the PBGC or a Single-Employer Plan shall arise on the assets of any Loan Party or any Commonly Controlled Entity, (iii) a Reportable Event shall occur with respect to, or proceedings shall commence to have a trustee appointed, or a trustee shall be

 

49



 

appointed, to administer or to terminate, any Single Employer Plan, which Reportable Event or commencement of proceedings or appointment of a trustee is, in the reasonable opinion of the Required Lenders, likely to result in the termination of such Single Employer Plan under Title IV of ERISA, (iv) any Single Employer Plan shall terminate under Title IV of ERISA, (v) any Loan Party or any Commonly Controlled Entity shall, or in the reasonable opinion of the Required Lenders is likely to, incur any liability in connection with a withdrawal from, or the Insolvency or Reorganization of, a Multiemployer Plan or a determination that such Multiemployer Plan is, or the determination that a Multiemployer Plan is expected to be, in “endangered” or “critical status” (within the meaning of Section 432 of the Code or Section 305 of ERISA), or (vi) any other event or condition shall occur or exist with respect to a Plan; and in each case in clauses (i) through (vi) above, such event or condition, together with all other such events or conditions, if any, would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect; or

 

(h)          one or more judgments or decrees shall be entered against any Material Group Member involving in the aggregate a liability (not paid or to the extent not covered by insurance) of $25,000,000 or more, and all such judgments or decrees shall not have been waived, vacated, discharged, stayed or bonded pending appeal within 30 days from the entry thereof; or

 

(i)              except as expressly permitted hereunder or thereunder, any of the Security Documents shall cease, for any reason, to be in full force and effect, or any Loan Party shall so assert in writing, or any Lien created by any of the Security Documents shall cease to be enforceable and of the same effect and priority purported to be created thereby; or

 

(j)             except as expressly permitted hereunder or thereunder, the guarantee contained in Section 7 of this Agreement shall cease, for any reason, to be in full force and effect or any Loan Party or any Affiliate of any Loan Party shall so assert; or

 

(k)          (i) any “person” or “group” (as such terms are used in Sections 13(d) and 14(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “ Exchange Act ”)), shall become, or obtain rights (whether by means or warrants, options or otherwise) to become, the “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rules 13(d)-3 and 13(d)-5 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of more than 35% of the outstanding common stock of the Guarantor; or (ii) the board of directors of the Guarantor shall cease to consist of a majority of Continuing Directors;

 

then, and in any such event, (A) if such event is an Event of Default specified in clause (i) or (ii) of paragraph (f) above with respect to the Borrower, automatically the Commitments shall immediately terminate and the Loans (with accrued interest thereon) and all other amounts owing under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents shall immediately become due and payable, and (B) if such event is any other Event of Default, either or both of the following actions may be taken:  (i) with the consent of the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent may, or upon the request of the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent shall, by notice to the Borrower declare the Commitments to be terminated forthwith, whereupon the Commitments shall immediately terminate; and (ii) with the consent of the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent may, or upon the request of the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent shall, by notice to the Borrower, declare the Loans (with accrued interest thereon) and all other amounts owing under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents to be due and payable forthwith, whereupon the same shall immediately become due and payable.  Except as expressly provided above in this Section, presentment, demand, protest and all other notices of any kind are hereby expressly waived by the Borrower.

 

50



 

SECTION 9.                             THE AGENTS

 

9.1                                Appointment .  Each Lender hereby irrevocably designates and appoints the Administrative Agent as the agent of such Lender under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and each such Lender irrevocably authorizes the Administrative Agent, in such capacity, to take such action on its behalf under the provisions of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents and to exercise such powers and perform such duties as are expressly delegated to the Administrative Agent by the terms of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, together with such other powers as are reasonably incidental thereto.  Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary elsewhere in this Agreement, the Administrative Agent shall not have any duties or responsibilities, except those expressly set forth herein, or any fiduciary relationship with any Lender, and no implied covenants, functions, responsibilities, duties, obligations or liabilities shall be read into this Agreement or any other Loan Document or otherwise exist against the Administrative Agent.

 

9.2                                Delegation of Duties .  The Administrative Agent may execute any of its duties under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents by or through agents or attorneys-in-fact and shall be entitled to advice of counsel concerning all matters pertaining to such duties.  The Administrative Agent shall not be responsible for the negligence or misconduct of any agents or attorneys in-fact selected by it with reasonable care.

 

9.3                                Exculpatory Provisions .  Neither any Agent nor any of their respective officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys-in-fact or Affiliates shall be (i) liable for any action lawfully taken or omitted to be taken by it or such Person under or in connection with this Agreement or any other Loan Document (except to the extent that any of the foregoing are found by a final and nonappealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction to have resulted from its or such Person’s own gross negligence or willful misconduct) or (ii) responsible in any manner to any of the Lenders for any recitals, statements, representations or warranties made by any Loan Party or any officer thereof contained in this Agreement or any other Loan Document or in any certificate, report, statement or other document referred to or provided for in, or received by the Agents under or in connection with, this Agreement or any other Loan Document or for the value, validity, effectiveness, genuineness, enforceability or sufficiency of this Agreement or any other Loan Document or for any failure of any Loan Party a party thereto to perform its obligations hereunder or thereunder.  The Agents shall not be under any obligation to any Lender to ascertain or to inquire as to the observance or performance of any of the agreements contained in, or conditions of, this Agreement or any other Loan Document, or to inspect the properties, books or records of any Loan Party.

 

9.4                                Reliance by Administrative Agent .  The Administrative Agent shall be entitled to rely, and shall be fully protected in relying, upon any instrument, writing, resolution, notice, consent, certificate, affidavit, letter, telecopy, telex or teletype message, email, statement, order or other document or conversation believed by it to be genuine and correct and to have been signed, sent or made by the proper Person or Persons and upon advice and statements of legal counsel (including counsel to the Loan Parties), independent accountants and other experts selected by the Administrative Agent.  The Administrative Agent may deem and treat the payee of any Note as the owner thereof for all purposes unless a written notice of assignment, negotiation or transfer thereof shall have been filed with the Administrative Agent.  The Administrative Agent shall be fully justified in failing or refusing to take any action under this Agreement or any other Loan Document unless it shall first receive such advice or concurrence of the Required Lenders (or, if so specified by this Agreement, all Lenders) as it deems appropriate or it shall first be indemnified to its satisfaction by the Lenders against any and all liability and expense that may be incurred by it by reason of taking or continuing to take any such action.  The Administrative Agent shall in all cases be fully protected in acting, or in refraining from acting, under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents in accordance with a request of the Required Lenders (or, if so

 

51



 

specified by this Agreement, all Lenders), and such request and any action taken or failure to act pursuant thereto shall be binding upon all the Lenders and all future holders of the Loans.

 

9.5                                Notice of Default .  The Administrative Agent shall not be deemed to have knowledge or notice of the occurrence of any Default or Event of Default unless the Administrative Agent has received notice from a Lender or a Loan Party referring to this Agreement, describing such Default or Event of Default and stating that such notice is a “notice of default”.  In the event that the Administrative Agent receives such a notice, the Administrative Agent shall give notice thereof to the Lenders.  The Administrative Agent shall take such action with respect to such Default or Event of Default as shall be reasonably directed by the Required Lenders (or, if so specified by this Agreement, all Lenders); provided that unless and until the Administrative Agent shall have received such directions, the Administrative Agent may (but shall not be obligated to) take such action, or refrain from taking such action, with respect to such Default or Event of Default as it shall deem advisable in the best interests of the Lenders.

 

9.6                                Non-Reliance on Agents and Other Lenders .  Each Lender expressly acknowledges that neither the Agents nor any of their respective officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys-in-fact or Affiliates have made any representations or warranties to it and that no act by any Agent hereafter taken, including any review of the affairs of a Loan Party or any Affiliate of a Loan Party, shall be deemed to constitute any representation or warranty by any Agent to any Lender.  Each Lender represents to the Agents that it has, independently and without reliance upon any Agent or any other Lender, and based on such documents and information as it has deemed appropriate, made its own appraisal of and investigation into the business, operations, property, financial and other condition and creditworthiness of the Loan Parties and their Affiliates and made its own decision to make its Loans hereunder and enter into this Agreement.  Each Lender also represents that it will, independently and without reliance upon any Agent or any other Lender, and based on such documents and information as it shall deem appropriate at the time, continue to make its own credit analysis, appraisals and decisions in taking or not taking action under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, and to make such investigation as it deems necessary to inform itself as to the business, operations, property, financial and other condition and creditworthiness of the Loan Parties and their Affiliates.  Except for notices, reports and other documents expressly required to be furnished to the Lenders by the Administrative Agent hereunder, the Administrative Agent shall not have any duty or responsibility to provide any Lender with any credit or other information concerning the business, operations, property, condition (financial or otherwise), prospects or creditworthiness of any Loan Party or any Affiliate of a Loan Party that may come into the possession of the Administrative Agent or any of its officers, directors, employees, agents, attorneys-in-fact or Affiliates.

 

9.7                                Indemnification .  The Lenders agree to indemnify each Agent and its officers, directors, employees, Affiliates, advisors and controlling persons (each, an “ Agent Indemnitee ”) (to the extent not reimbursed by the Borrower and without limiting the obligation of the Borrower to do so), ratably according to their respective Applicable Percentages in effect on the date on which indemnification is sought under this Section (or, if indemnification is sought after the date upon which the Commitments shall have terminated and the Loans shall have been paid in full, ratably in accordance with such Applicable Percentages immediately prior to such date), from and against any and all liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements of any kind whatsoever that may at any time (whether before or after the payment of the Loans) be imposed on, incurred by or asserted against such Agent Indemnitee in any way relating to or arising out of, the Commitments, this Agreement, any of the other Loan Documents or any documents contemplated by or referred to herein or therein or the transactions contemplated hereby or thereby or any action taken or omitted by such Agent Indemnitee under or in connection with any of the foregoing; provided that no Lender shall be liable for the payment of any portion of such liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements that are found by a final and

 

52



 

nonappealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction to have resulted from such Agent Indemnitee’s gross negligence or willful misconduct.  The agreements in this Section shall survive the termination of this Agreement and the payment of the Loans and all other amounts payable hereunder.

 

9.8                                Agent in Its Individual Capacity .  Each Agent and its Affiliates may make loans to, accept deposits from and generally engage in any kind of business with any Loan Party as though such Agent were not an Agent.  With respect to its Loans made or renewed by it, each Agent shall have the same rights and powers under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents as any Lender and may exercise the same as though it were not an Agent, and the terms “Lender” and “Lenders” shall include each Agent in its individual capacity.

 

9.9                                Successor Administrative Agent .  The Administrative Agent may resign as Administrative Agent upon 10 days’ notice to the Lenders and the Borrower.  If the Administrative Agent shall resign as Administrative Agent under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, then the Required Lenders shall appoint from among the Lenders a successor agent for the Lenders, which successor agent shall (unless an Event of Default under Section 8(a) or Section 8(f) with respect to the Borrower shall have occurred and be continuing) be subject to approval by the Borrower (which approval shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed), whereupon such successor agent shall succeed to the rights, powers and duties of the Administrative Agent, and the term “Administrative Agent” shall mean such successor agent effective upon such appointment and approval, and the former Administrative Agent’s rights, powers and duties as Administrative Agent shall be terminated, without any other or further act or deed on the part of such former Administrative Agent or any of the parties to this Agreement or any holders of the Loans.  If no successor agent has accepted appointment as Administrative Agent by the date that is 10 days following a retiring Administrative Agent’s notice of resignation, the retiring Administrative Agent’s resignation shall nevertheless thereupon become effective, and the Lenders shall assume and perform all of the duties of the Administrative Agent hereunder until such time, if any, as the Required Lenders appoint a successor agent as provided for above.  After any retiring Administrative Agent’s resignation as Administrative Agent, the provisions of this Section 9 and Section 10.5 shall inure to its benefit as to any actions taken or omitted to be taken by it while it was Administrative Agent under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents.

 

9.10                         Syndication Agents .  The Syndication Agents shall not have any duties or responsibilities hereunder in their capacities as such.

 

SECTION 10.                      MISCELLANEOUS

 

10.1                         Amendments and Waivers .  Neither this Agreement, any other Loan Document, nor any terms hereof or thereof may be amended, supplemented or modified except in accordance with the provisions of this Section 10.1.  The Required Lenders and each Loan Party party to the relevant Loan Document may, or, with the written consent of the Required Lenders, the Administrative Agent and each Loan Party party to the relevant Loan Document may, from time to time, (a) enter into written amendments, supplements or modifications hereto and to the other Loan Documents for the purpose of adding any provisions to this Agreement or the other Loan Documents or changing in any manner the rights of the Lenders or of the Loan Parties hereunder or thereunder or (b) waive, on such terms and conditions as the Required Lenders or the Administrative Agent, as the case may be, may specify in such instrument, any of the requirements of this Agreement or the other Loan Documents or any Default or Event of Default and its consequences; provided , however , that, subject to Section 2.15(b), no such waiver and no such amendment, supplement or modification shall (i) forgive the principal amount or extend the final scheduled date of maturity of any Loan, reduce the stated rate of any interest or fee payable hereunder (except (x) in connection with the waiver of applicability of any post-default increase in interest rates (which waiver shall be effective with the consent of the Required Lenders) and (y) that

 

53



 

any amendment or modification of defined terms used in the financial covenants in this Agreement shall not constitute a reduction in the rate of interest or fees for purposes of this clause (i)) or extend the scheduled date of any payment thereof, or increase the amount or extend the expiration date of any Lender’s Commitment, in each case without the written consent of each Lender directly affected thereby; (ii) eliminate or reduce the voting rights of any Lender under this Section 10.1 without the written consent of such Lender; (iii) reduce any percentage specified in the definitions of Required Lenders or Supermajority Lenders or consent to the assignment or transfer by the Borrower of any of its rights and obligations under this Agreement and the other Loan Documents, release any Collateral (except as provided for in the Loan Documents) or release the Guarantor from its obligations under the guarantee contained in Section 7 of this Agreement, in each case without the written consent of all Lenders; (iv) amend, modify or waive any provisions in Section 2.11(a), (b) and (c) without the written consent of each Lender adversely affected thereby; (v) amend or modify the definitions of “Eligible Assets” or “Loan Value”, to the extent such amendment or modification would result in a less restrictive standard than set forth in such definitions, in each case without the written consent of the Supermajority Lenders (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, notwithstanding the foregoing clause (v), exchange-traded funds (other than leveraged exchange-traded funds and synthetic exchange-traded funds (other than Qualified Synthetic ETFs)) shall be considered “Eligible ETFs” upon the request of the Borrower and with the consent of the Administrative Agent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed));  (vi) amend, modify or waive any provision of Section 9 without the written consent of the Administrative Agent; (vii) amend, modify or waive any of the rights or duties of the Swingline Lenders without the written consent of each Swingline Lender, if any, that holds a Swingline Loan that is outstanding at the time that such amendment, modification or waiver becomes effective; (viii) amend, modify or waive any provision of Section 2.16 or the definition of the term “Defaulting Lender” without the written consent of the Administrative Agent or, if any Swingline Loans are outstanding at such time, the applicable Swingline Lender or Swingline Lenders (for the avoidance of doubt, this clause (viii) shall be the only clause in this proviso applicable to any such amendment, modification or waiver of Section 2.16 or the definition of the term “Defaulting Lender”) or (ix) amend, modify or waive the provisions of Section 9 of the Security Agreement related to the order of payment of the Obligations thereunder, without the written consent of all Lenders.  Any such waiver and any such amendment, supplement or modification shall apply equally to each of the Lenders and shall be binding upon the Loan Parties, the Lenders, the Administrative Agent and all future holders of the Loans.  In the case of any waiver, the Loan Parties, the Lenders and the Administrative Agent shall be restored to their former position and rights hereunder and under the other Loan Documents, and any Default or Event of Default waived shall be deemed to be cured and not continuing; but no such waiver shall extend to any subsequent or other Default or Event of Default, or impair any right consequent thereon.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Administrative Agent shall be authorized and directed to enter into an intercreditor agreement on the terms described in Section 6.2(n) without the consent of any of the Lenders.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, technical and conforming modifications to the Loan Documents may be made with the consent of the Borrower and the Administrative Agent to the extent necessary to integrate any Incremental Commitments on substantially the same basis as the Loans (including, for the avoidance of doubt, the amendments contemplated by the proviso of Section 2.17(a)(ii)).

 

10.2                         Notices .  All notices, requests and demands to or upon the respective parties hereto to be effective shall be in writing (including by telecopy), and, unless otherwise expressly provided herein, shall be deemed to have been duly given or made when delivered, or three Business Days after being deposited in the mail, postage prepaid, or, in the case of telecopy notice, when received, addressed as follows in the case of the Borrower and the Administrative Agent, and as set forth in an administrative questionnaire delivered to the Administrative Agent in the case of the Lenders, or to such other address as may be hereafter notified by the respective parties hereto:

 

54



 

Borrower:

Investment Technology Group, Inc.
One Liberty Plaza
165 Broadway
New York, New York 10006

 

Attention: General Counsel

 

Telecopy: (212) 444-6494

 

Telephone: (212) 588-4000

 

 

 

with a copy to:

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc.
One Liberty Plaza
165 Broadway
New York, New York 10006

 

Attention: Chief Financial Officer

 

Telecopy: (212) 444-4151

 

Telephone: (212) 588-4000

 

 

Administrative Agent:

JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A.
500 Stanton Christiana Road
3/Ops2
Newark, DE 19713

 

Attention: Heshan Wanigasekera

 

Telecopy: (302) 634-8459

 

Telephone: (302) 634-4166

with a copy to:
JPMorgan Chase Bank, N.A. (MC: DE3-5000)
500 Stanton Christiana Road
Newark, Delaware 19713
Attention: Ryan Helthall
Telecopy: (917) 464-9985
Telephone: (302) 552-0858

 

provided that any notice, request or demand to or upon the Administrative Agent or the Lenders shall not be effective until received.

 

Notices and other communications to the Lenders hereunder may be delivered or furnished by electronic communications pursuant to procedures approved by the Administrative Agent; provided that the foregoing shall not apply to notices pursuant to Section 2 unless otherwise agreed by the Administrative Agent and the applicable Lender.  The Administrative Agent or the Borrower may, in its discretion, agree to accept notices and other communications to it hereunder by electronic communications pursuant to procedures approved by it; provided that approval of such procedures may be limited to particular notices or communications.

 

10.3                         No Waiver; Cumulative Remedies .  No failure to exercise and no delay in exercising, on the part of the Administrative Agent or any Lender, any right, remedy, power or privilege hereunder or under the other Loan Documents shall operate as a waiver thereof; nor shall any single or partial exercise of any right, remedy, power or privilege hereunder preclude any other or further exercise thereof or the exercise of any other right, remedy, power or privilege.  The rights, remedies, powers and privileges herein provided are cumulative and not exclusive of any rights, remedies, powers and privileges provided by law.

 

55


 

10.4                         Survival of Representations and Warranties .  All representations and warranties made hereunder, in the other Loan Documents and in any document, certificate or statement delivered pursuant hereto or in connection herewith shall survive the execution and delivery of this Agreement and the making of the Loans and other extensions of credit hereunder.

 

10.5                         Payment of Expenses .  The Borrower agrees (a) to pay or reimburse the Administrative Agent and its Affiliates (without duplication) for all of their reasonable out-of-pocket costs and expenses incurred in connection with the development, preparation and execution of, and any amendment, supplement or modification to, this Agreement and the other Loan Documents and any other documents prepared in connection herewith or therewith, the syndication of the credit facilities provided for herein and the consummation and administration of the transactions contemplated hereby and thereby, including the reasonable fees and disbursements of counsel to the Administrative Agent and filing and recording fees and expenses, with statements with respect to the foregoing to be submitted to the Borrower prior to the Closing Date (in the case of amounts to be paid on the Closing Date) and from time to time thereafter on a quarterly basis or such other periodic basis as the Administrative Agent shall deem appropriate, (b) to pay or reimburse each Lender and the Administrative Agent for all its costs and expenses incurred in connection with the enforcement or preservation of any rights under this Agreement, the other Loan Documents and any such other documents, including the fees and disbursements of counsel (including the allocated reasonable fees and expenses of in-house counsel) to each Lender and of counsel to the Administrative Agent, (c) to pay, indemnify, and hold each Lender and the Administrative Agent harmless from, any and all recording and filing fees and any and all liabilities with respect to, or resulting from any delay in paying, stamp, excise and other similar taxes, if any, that may be payable or determined to be payable in connection with the execution and delivery of, or consummation or administration of any of the transactions contemplated by, or any amendment, supplement or modification of, or any waiver or consent under or in respect of, this Agreement, the other Loan Documents and any such other documents, and (d) to pay, indemnify, and hold each Lender and the Administrative Agent and their respective officers, directors, employees, Affiliates, agents, advisors and controlling persons (each, an “ Indemnitee ”) harmless from and against any and all other liabilities, obligations, losses, damages, penalties, actions, judgments, suits, costs, expenses or disbursements of any kind or nature whatsoever with respect to the execution, delivery, enforcement, performance and administration of this Agreement, the other Loan Documents and any such other documents, including any of the foregoing relating to the use of proceeds of the Loans or the violation of, noncompliance with or liability under, any Environmental Law applicable to the operations of any Group Member or any of the Properties and the reasonable fees and expenses of legal counsel (limited to not more than one counsel, plus, if necessary, one local counsel per jurisdiction (unless a conflict exists, in which case the reasonable fees and expenses of one additional legal counsel (plus one local counsel per jurisdiction, if necessary) for each group of affected Lenders that is, as among themselves, not conflicted, shall be covered) and except for allocated costs of in-house counsel) in connection with claims, actions or proceedings by any Indemnitee against any Loan Party under any Loan Document (all the foregoing in this clause (d), collectively, the “ Indemnified Liabilities ”), regardless of whether any Indemnitee is a party thereto, provided , that the Borrower shall have no obligation hereunder to any Indemnitee with respect to Indemnified Liabilities to the extent such Indemnified Liabilities are found by a final and nonappealable decision of a court of competent jurisdiction to have resulted from the bad faith, gross negligence or willful misconduct of such Indemnitee.  Without limiting the foregoing, and to the extent permitted by applicable law, the Guarantor agrees not to assert and to cause its Subsidiaries not to assert, and hereby waives and agrees to cause its Subsidiaries to waive, all rights for contribution or any other rights of recovery with respect to all claims, demands, penalties, fines, liabilities, settlements, damages, costs and expenses of whatever kind or nature, under or related to Environmental Laws, that any of them might have by statute or otherwise against any Indemnitee.  All amounts due under this Section 10.5 shall be payable not later than 10 days after written demand therefor.  Statements payable by the Borrower pursuant to this Section 10.5 shall be submitted to the attention of the General Counsel of the Borrower (Telephone No. 212-588-4000) (Telecopy No. 212-

 

56



 

444-6494) with a copy to the attention of the Chief Financial Officer of the Borrower (Telephone No. 212-588-4000) (Telecopy No. 212-444-4151), both at the address of the Borrower set forth in Section 10.2, or to such other Person or address as may be hereafter designated by the Borrower in a written notice to the Administrative Agent.  The agreements in this Section 10.5 shall survive the termination of this Agreement and the repayment of the Loans and all other amounts payable hereunder.

 

10.6                         Successors and Assigns; Participations and Assignments .  (a)  The provisions of this Agreement shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective successors and assigns permitted hereby, except that (i) the Borrower may not assign or otherwise transfer any of its rights or obligations hereunder without the prior written consent of each Lender (and any attempted assignment or transfer by the Borrower without such consent shall be null and void) and (ii) no Lender may assign or otherwise transfer its rights or obligations hereunder except in accordance with this Section.

 

(b)(i)  Subject to the conditions set forth in paragraph (b)(iii) below, any Lender may assign to one or more assignees (each, an “ Assignee ”) other than (x) the Borrower or the Guarantor or any of their respective Affiliates, (y) any Defaulting Lender or any of its Subsidiaries, or any Person who, upon becoming a Lender hereunder, would constitute any of the foregoing Persons described in clause (x) or (y) or (z) a natural Person, all or a portion of its rights and obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitments and the Loans at the time owing to it) with the prior written consent of:

 

(A) the Borrower (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld), provided that (x) no consent of the Borrower shall be required for an assignment to a Lender, an Affiliate of a Lender, an Approved Fund (as defined below) or, if an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing, any other Person and (y) the Borrower’s consent shall be deemed to have been given if the Borrower shall not have responded within five Business Days of an assignment request;

 

(B) the Administrative Agent (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld); and

 

(C) each Swingline Lender that holds any Swingline Loan outstanding at the time such assignment is consummated (such consent not to be unreasonably withheld).

 

(ii) Assignments shall be subject to the following additional conditions:

 

(A) except in the case of an assignment to a Lender, an Affiliate of a Lender or an Approved Fund or an assignment of the entire remaining amount of the assigning Lender’s Commitments or Loans, the amount of the Commitments or Loans of the assigning Lender subject to each such assignment (determined as of the date the Assignment and Assumption with respect to such assignment is delivered to the Administrative Agent) shall not be less than $5,000,000 unless each of the Borrower and the Administrative Agent otherwise consent, provided that (1) no such consent of the Borrower shall be required if an Event of Default has occurred and is continuing and (2) such amounts shall be aggregated in respect of each Lender and its Affiliates or Approved Funds, if any;

 

(B) the parties to each assignment shall execute and deliver to the Administrative Agent an Assignment and Assumption, together with a processing and recordation fee of $3,500; and

 

(C) the Assignee, if it shall not be a Lender, shall deliver to the Administrative Agent an administrative questionnaire.

 

57



 

For the purposes of this Section 10.6, “ Approved Fund ” means any Person (other than a natural person) that is engaged in making, purchasing, holding or investing in bank loans and similar extensions of credit in the ordinary course of its business and that is administered or managed by (a) a Lender, (b) an Affiliate of a Lender or (c) an entity or an Affiliate of an entity that administers or manages a Lender.

 

(iii) Subject to acceptance and recording thereof pursuant to paragraph (b)(v) below, from and after the effective date specified in each Assignment and Assumption the Assignee thereunder shall be a party hereto and, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Assumption, have the rights and obligations of a Lender under this Agreement, and the assigning Lender thereunder shall, to the extent of the interest assigned by such Assignment and Assumption, be released from its obligations under this Agreement (and, in the case of an Assignment and Assumption covering all of the assigning Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement, such Lender shall cease to be a party hereto but shall continue to be entitled to the benefits of Section 2.12 or 2.13).  Any assignment or transfer by a Lender of rights or obligations under this Agreement that does not comply with this Section 10.6 shall be treated for purposes of this Agreement as a sale by such Lender of a participation in such rights and obligations in accordance with paragraph (c) of this Section.

 

(iv) The Administrative Agent, acting for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, shall maintain at one of its offices a copy of each Assignment and Assumption delivered to it and a register for the recordation of the names and addresses of the Lenders, and the Commitments of, and principal amount of the Loans owing to, each Lender pursuant to the terms hereof from time to time (the “ Register ”).  The entries in the Register shall be conclusive, and the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the Lenders shall treat each Person whose name is recorded in the Register pursuant to the terms hereof as a Lender hereunder for all purposes of this Agreement, notwithstanding notice to the contrary.  The Register shall be available for inspection by the Borrower and any Lender at any reasonable time, and from time to time, upon reasonable prior notice.

 

(v)  Upon its receipt of a duly completed Assignment and Assumption executed by an assigning Lender and an Assignee, the Assignee’s completed administrative questionnaire (unless the Assignee shall already be a Lender hereunder), the processing and recordation fee referred to in paragraph (b) of this Section and any written consent to such assignment required by paragraph (b) of this Section, the Administrative Agent shall accept such Assignment and Assumption and record the information contained therein in the Register.  No assignment shall be effective for purposes of this Agreement unless it has been recorded in the Register as provided in this paragraph.

 

(c)(i)  Any Lender may, without the consent of the Borrower or the Administrative Agent, sell participations to one or more banks or other entities (a “ Participant ”) in all or a portion of such Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement (including all or a portion of its Commitments and the Loans owing to it); provided that (A) such Lender’s obligations under this Agreement shall remain unchanged, (B) such Lender shall remain solely responsible to the other parties hereto for the performance of such obligations and (C) the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the other Lenders shall continue to deal solely and directly with such Lender in connection with such Lender’s rights and obligations under this Agreement.  Any agreement pursuant to which a Lender sells such a participation shall provide that such Lender shall retain the sole right to enforce this Agreement and to approve any amendment, modification or waiver of any provision of this Agreement; provided that such agreement may provide that such Lender will not, without the consent of the Participant, agree to any amendment, modification or waiver that (1) requires the consent of each Lender directly affected thereby pursuant to the proviso to the second sentence of Section 10.1 and (2) directly affects such Participant.  Subject to paragraph (c)(iii) of this Section, the parties hereto agree that each Participant shall be entitled to the benefits of Sections 2.12 and 2.13, and in the case of Section 2.13(e) and (f) subject to the same

 

58



 

obligations, to the same extent as if it were a Lender and had acquired its interest by assignment pursuant to paragraph (b) of this Section.  To the extent permitted by law, each Participant also shall be entitled to the benefits of Section 10.7(b) as though it were a Lender, provided such Participant shall be subject to Section 10.7(a) as though it were a Lender.

 

(ii) Each Lender that sells a participation, acting solely for this purpose as an agent of the Borrower, shall maintain a register on which it enters the name and address of each Participant and the principal amounts (and stated interest) of each Participant’s interest in the Loans or other obligations under this Agreement (the “ Participant Register ”); provided that no Lender shall have any obligation to disclose all or any portion of the Participant Register to any Person (including the identity of any Participant or any information relating to a Participant’s interest in any Commitments, Loans or its other obligations under any Loan Document) except to the extent that such disclosure is necessary to establish that such Commitment, Loan or other obligation is in registered form under Section 5f.103-1(c) of the United States Treasury Regulations. The entries in the Participant Register shall be conclusive, and such Lender and the Administrative Agent shall treat each person whose name is recorded in the Participant Register pursuant to the terms hereof as the owner of such participation for all purposes of this Agreement, notwithstanding notice to the contrary.

 

(iii)  A Participant shall not be entitled to receive any greater payment under Section 2.12 or 2.13 than the applicable Lender would have been entitled to receive with respect to the participation sold to such Participant, unless the sale of the participation to such Participant is made with the Borrower’s prior written consent.  Any Participant that is a Non-U.S. Lender shall not be entitled to the benefits of Section 2.13 unless such Participant complies with Sections 2.13(e) and (f).

 

(d)  Any Lender may at any time pledge or assign a security interest in all or any portion of its rights under this Agreement to secure obligations of such Lender, including any pledge or assignment to secure obligations to a Federal Reserve Bank, and this Section shall not apply to any such pledge or assignment of a security interest; provided that no such pledge or assignment of a security interest shall release a Lender from any of its obligations hereunder or substitute any such pledgee or Assignee for such Lender as a party hereto.

 

(e)  The Borrower, upon receipt of written notice from the relevant Lender, agrees to issue Notes to any Lender requiring Notes to facilitate transactions of the type described in paragraph (d) above.

 

10.7                         Adjustments; Set-off .  (a)  Except to the extent that this Agreement expressly provides for payments to be allocated to a particular Lender, if any Lender (a “ Benefited Lender ”) shall receive any payment of all or part of the Obligations owing to it, or receive any collateral in respect thereof (whether voluntarily or involuntarily, by set-off, pursuant to events or proceedings of the nature referred to in Section 8(f), or otherwise), in a greater proportion than any such payment to or collateral received by any other Lender, if any, in respect of the Obligations owing to such other Lender, such Benefited Lender shall purchase for cash from the other Lenders a participating interest in such portion of the Obligations owing to each such other Lender, or shall provide such other Lenders with the benefits of any such collateral, as shall be necessary to cause such Benefited Lender to share the excess payment or benefits of such collateral ratably with each of the Lenders; provided , however , that if all or any portion of such excess payment or benefits is thereafter recovered from such Benefited Lender, such purchase shall be rescinded, and the purchase price and benefits returned, to the extent of such recovery, but without interest.

 

(b)  In addition to any rights and remedies of the Lenders provided by law, each Lender shall have the right, without prior notice to the Borrower, any such notice being expressly waived by the

 

59



 

Borrower to the extent permitted by applicable law, upon any amount becoming due and payable by the Borrower hereunder (whether at the stated maturity, by acceleration or otherwise), to set off and appropriate and apply against such amount any and all deposits (general or special, time or demand, provisional or final), in any currency, and any other credits, indebtedness or claims, in any currency, in each case whether direct or indirect, absolute or contingent, matured or unmatured, at any time held or owing by such Lender or any branch or agency thereof to or for the credit or the account of the Borrower, as the case may be.  Each Lender agrees promptly to notify the Borrower and the Administrative Agent after any such setoff and application made by such Lender, provided that the failure to give such notice shall not affect the validity of such setoff and application.

 

10.8                         Counterparts .  This Agreement may be executed by one or more of the parties to this Agreement on any number of separate counterparts, and all of said counterparts taken together shall be deemed to constitute one and the same instrument.  Delivery of an executed signature page of this Agreement by facsimile transmission shall be effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart hereof.  A set of the copies of this Agreement signed by all the parties shall be lodged with the Borrower and the Administrative Agent.

 

10.9                         Severability .  Any provision of this Agreement that is prohibited or unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall, as to such jurisdiction, be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or unenforceability without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof, and any such prohibition or unenforceability in any jurisdiction shall not invalidate or render unenforceable such provision in any other jurisdiction.

 

10.10                  Integration .  This Agreement and the other Loan Documents represent the entire agreement of the Borrower, the Administrative Agent and the Lenders with respect to the subject matter hereof and thereof, and there are no promises, undertakings, representations or warranties by the Administrative Agent or any Lender relative to the subject matter hereof not expressly set forth or referred to herein or in the other Loan Documents.

 

10.11                  GOVERNING LAW .  THIS AGREEMENT AND THE RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS OF THE PARTIES UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED AND INTERPRETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAW OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK.

 

10.12                  Submission To Jurisdiction; Waivers .  Each Loan Party hereby irrevocably and unconditionally:

 

(a)          submits for itself and its property in any legal action or proceeding relating to this Agreement and the other Loan Documents to which it is a party, or for recognition and enforcement of any judgment in respect thereof, to the exclusive general jurisdiction of the courts of the State of New York in Manhattan, the courts of the United States for the Southern District of New York in Manhattan, and appellate courts from any thereof;

 

(b)          consents that any such action or proceeding may be brought in such courts and waives any objection that it may now or hereafter have to the venue of any such action or proceeding in any such court or that such action or proceeding was brought in an inconvenient court and agrees not to plead or claim the same;

 

(c)           agrees that service of process in any such action or proceeding may be effected by mailing a copy thereof by registered or certified mail (or any substantially similar form of mail),

 

60



 

postage prepaid, to the Borrower, as the case may be at its address set forth in Section 10.2 or at such other address of which the Administrative Agent shall have been notified pursuant thereto;

 

(d)          agrees that nothing herein shall affect the right to effect service of process in any other manner permitted by law or shall limit the right to sue in any other jurisdiction; and

 

(e)           waives, to the maximum extent not prohibited by law, any right it may have to claim or recover in any legal action or proceeding referred to in this Section any special, exemplary, punitive or consequential damages.

 

10.13                  Acknowledgements .  Each Loan Party hereby acknowledges that:

 

(a)               it has been advised by counsel in the negotiation, execution and delivery of this Agreement and the other Loan Documents;

 

(b)               neither the Administrative Agent nor any Lender has any fiduciary relationship with or duty to the Borrower arising out of or in connection with this Agreement or any of the other Loan Documents, and the relationship between Administrative Agent and Lenders, on one hand, and the Borrower, on the other hand, in connection herewith or therewith is solely that of debtor and creditor; and

 

(c)                no joint venture is created hereby or by the other Loan Documents or otherwise exists by virtue of the transactions contemplated hereby among the Lenders or among the Loan Parties and the Lenders.

 

10.14                  Releases of Guarantees and Liens .  (a)  Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein or in any other Loan Document, the Administrative Agent is hereby irrevocably authorized by each Lender (without requirement of notice to or consent of any Lender except as expressly required by Section 10.1) to take any action requested by the Borrower having the effect of releasing any Collateral or guarantee obligations (i) to the extent necessary to permit consummation of any transaction not prohibited by any Loan Document (including, for the avoidance of doubt, in the circumstances described in Section 2.8(c) hereof) or that has been consented to in accordance with Section 10.1 or (ii) under the circumstances described in paragraph (b) below.

 

(b)  At such time as the Loans and the other Obligations under the Loan Documents (other than obligations under or in respect of contingent indemnification obligations for which no claim has been made) shall have been paid in full and the Commitments have been terminated, the Collateral shall be released from the Liens created by the Security Documents, and the Security Documents and all obligations (other than those expressly stated to survive such termination) of the Administrative Agent and each Loan Party under the Loan Documents (including the Obligations) shall terminate, all without delivery of any instrument or performance of any act by any Person.

 

10.15                  Confidentiality .  Each of the Administrative Agent and each Lender agrees to keep, and to cause its Affiliates to keep, confidential all non-public information provided to it by any Loan Party, the Administrative Agent or any Lender pursuant to or in connection with this Agreement that is designated by the provider thereof as confidential; provided that nothing herein shall prevent the Administrative Agent or any Lender from disclosing any such information (a) to the Administrative Agent or any other Lender, (b) subject to an agreement to comply with the provisions of this Section, to any actual or prospective Transferee or any direct or indirect counterparty to any Swap Agreement (or any professional advisor to such counterparty), (c) to its Affiliates, its and its Affiliates employees, directors, officers and agents, including accountants, legal counsel and other advisors or to any other Lender or

 

61



 

Participant (it being understood that such disclosure will be made only to such Persons who have the need to know such information and only if the Persons to whom such disclosure is made are informed of the confidential nature of such Information, instructed to keep such information confidential and receive such information in connection with (i) their evaluation of the ability of the Borrower to repay the Loans and perform their other obligations under the Loan Documents, (ii) administering the Obligations under this Agreement, (iii) servicing the Borrowings hereunder, (iv) protecting their interests under this Agreement or (v) performing any similar function in connection with any other extension of credit by the Lenders to the Guarantor or a Subsidiary (excluding any transaction in any public security of the Guarantor or a Subsidiary), (d) upon the request or demand of any Governmental Authority, (e) in response to any order of any court or other Governmental Authority or as may otherwise be required pursuant to any Requirement of Law, (f) if requested or required to do so in connection with any litigation or similar proceeding, (g) that has been publicly disclosed other than as a result of a known breach of any requirement to keep such information confidential, (h) to the National Association of Insurance Commissioners or any similar organization or any nationally recognized rating agency that requires access to information about a Lender’s investment portfolio in connection with ratings issued with respect to such Lender, or (i) in connection with the exercise of any remedy hereunder or under any other Loan Document.

 

10.16                  WAIVERS OF JURY TRIAL .  THE LOAN PARTIES, THE ADMINISTRATIVE AGENT AND THE LENDERS HEREBY IRREVOCABLY AND UNCONDITIONALLY WAIVE TRIAL BY JURY IN ANY LEGAL ACTION OR PROCEEDING RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY OTHER LOAN DOCUMENT AND FOR ANY COUNTERCLAIM THEREIN.

 

10.17                  USA PATRIOT Act .  Each Lender subject to the USA PATRIOT Act (Title III of Pub. L. 107-56 (signed into law October 26, 2001)) (the “ Patriot Act ”) hereby notifies the Borrower that pursuant to the requirements of the Patriot Act, it is hereby required to obtain, verify and record information that identifies the Borrower, which information includes the name and address of the Borrower and other information that will allow such Lender to identify the Borrower in accordance with the Act. The Borrower shall provide all documentation and information that each Lender reasonably requests (a) in order to satisfy such Lender’s obligations under the Patriot Act or (b) that is required by bank regulatory authorities under applicable “know your customer” rules and regulations.

 

[Remainder of Page Intentionally Left Blank]

 

62


 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be duly executed and delivered by their proper and duly authorized officers as of the day and year first above written.

 

 

ITG INC.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Steven Vigliotti

 

 

Name: Steven Vigliotti

 

 

Title: CFO

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ P. Mats Goebels

 

 

Name: P. Mats Goebels

 

 

Title: Managing Director/General Counsel and

 

 

Secretary

 

 

 

 

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Steven Vigliotti

 

 

Name: Steven Vigliotti

 

 

Title: CFO

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ P. Mats Goebels

 

 

Name: P. Mats Goebels

 

 

Title: Managing Director/General Counsel and

 

 

Secretary

 

Signature Page to the ITG Inc. Credit Agreement

 



 

 

JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., as Administrative

Agent and as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Leo Lai

 

 

Name: Leo Lai

 

 

Title: Executive Director

 

 

Signature Page to the ITG Inc. Credit Agreement

 



 

 

BANK OF AMERICA, N.A., as Syndication Agent and

as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Dan Tancredi

 

 

Name: Dan Tancredi

 

 

Title: Vice President

 

Signature Page to the ITG Inc. Credit Agreement

 



 

 

BANK OF MONTREAL, as Syndication Agent

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Linda C. Haven

 

 

Name: Linda C. Haven

 

 

Title: Managing Director

 

Signature Page to the ITG Inc. Credit Agreement

 



 

 

BMO HARRIS BANK N.A., as a Lender

 

 

 

 

 

By:

/s/ Linda C. Haven

 

 

Name: Linda C. Haven

 

 

Title: Managing Director

 

Signature Page to the ITG Inc. Credit Agreement

 




Exhibit 10.5.1

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

PAY-FOR-PERFORMANCE INCENTIVE PLAN

 

1. PURPOSE

 

The primary purpose of this Pay-For-Performance Incentive Plan (the “Plan”) is to allow Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries to award annual incentives to Eligible Employees (as defined below) that meet the exception to section 162(m) of the Code (as defined below) for “qualified performance-based compensation.”  The Company may also use the Plan to assist it in attracting, retaining, and rewarding employees who occupy key positions relating to the Company and specified business units, and motivating such employees to expend greater efforts in promoting the growth and annual profitability of the Company and its subsidiaries, through the award of annual incentives.

 

2. DEFINITIONS

 

In addition to the terms defined in Section 1 hereof, the following terms used in the Plan shall have the meanings set forth below:

 

(a) “Award” means the amount potentially payable to a Participant upon achievement of specified Performance Objectives for a Performance Period, as provided in Section 4, subject to possible forfeiture and other terms and conditions of the Plan.

 

(b) “Business Unit” means the Company or any department, division, subsidiary, or other business unit or function of the Company for which separate operational financial results are available to the Committee, as designated by the Committee from time to time.

 

(c) “Business Unit Income” means the pre-tax income of a specified Business Unit for the Performance Period, subject to the provisions of Section 4(b).

 

(d) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended. References to any provision of the Code or regulation thereunder shall be deemed to include successor provisions or regulations.

 

(e) “Committee” means the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the Company, or such subcommittee thereof as may be designated by the Board of Directors or the Compensation Committee to administer the Plan. In appointing members of the Committee, the Board shall consider whether each member qualifies as an “outside director” for purposes of section 162(m) of the Code and regulations thereunder.

 

(f)  “Disability” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in section 22(e)(3) of the Code.

 

1



 

(g) “Eligible Employee” means each executive officer or key employee who is in charge of a Business Unit or whose performance can be expected to have a substantial effect on the results of a Business Unit, as determined by the Committee.

 

(h) “Participant” means an Eligible Employee granted an Award by the Committee for a designated Performance Period.

 

(i) “Performance Objectives” means the measures of performance pre-established by the Committee in accordance with Section 4, the achievement of which, in a given Performance Period, is a condition of payment of final Awards.

 

(j) “Performance Period” means the fiscal year (or such other period established by the Committee) to which an Award relates; provided, however, that, with respect to any Participant, the Committee may determine to grant an Award after the start of a Performance Period, and for any such Participant, the Performance Period shall be the portion of the fiscal year (or such other period established by the Committee) subsequent to such grant, as determined by the Committee, in each case, in compliance with section 162(m) of the Code.

 

(k) “Revenues” means all revenues generated by a specified Business Unit for the Performance Period.

 

(l) “EVA” (economic value added) means the amount by which a Business Unit’s after-tax income exceeds the cost of the capital used by the Business Unit during the Performance Period. To determine such cost of the capital used, the Committee will, when it establishes a Performance Objective based on EVA, determine the average cost of capital for the Company (stated as a percentage) for the Performance Period, which cost of capital will be multiplied by the amount of capital actually used by the Business Unit during the Performance Period.

 

3. ADMINISTRATION

 

(a) Generally. The Committee shall administer the Plan in accordance with its terms, and shall have all powers necessary to accomplish such purpose. The Committee shall have the power and authority to construe and interpret the Plan, to define the terms used herein, to prescribe, amend, and rescind rules and regulations as well as forms and notices relating to the administration of the Plan, and to make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration of the Plan. Any action or determination of the Committee with respect to the Plan shall be conclusive and binding upon all persons, including the Company, Participants, and stockholders.

 

(b) Limitation of Liability. Each member of the Committee shall be entitled to, in good faith, rely or act upon any report or other information furnished to him or her by any officer or other employee of the Company or any subsidiary, the Company’s independent certified public accountants, or any executive compensation consultant, legal counsel, or other professional retained by the Company to assist in the administration of the Plan. Neither a member of the Committee nor any officer or employee of the Company or a subsidiary acting on behalf of the Committee shall be personally liable for any action, determination, or interpretation taken or

 

2



 

made in good faith with respect to the Plan, and such persons shall, to the extent permitted by law, be fully indemnified, reimbursed, and protected by the Company, as provided in the Company’s Certificate of Incorporation and By-Laws, with respect to any such action, determination, or interpretation.

 

4. AWARDS

 

(a) Granting of Awards. Prior to the date on which Performance Objectives must be established in order to comply with section 162(m) of the Code with respect to each Performance Period, the Committee, in its sole discretion, shall select the Eligible Employees to whom Awards will be granted for such Performance Period and will establish the amount of each Award or the formula by which such amount may be determined, the Performance Objectives relating to such Award, and other terms of such Award. An Eligible Employee may be granted an Award for more than one Business Unit.

 

(b) Performance Objectives. The Performance Objectives for an Award shall consist of a specified percentage or percentages of the Business Unit Income, Revenues and/or EVA of a Business Unit, the results of which the Committee believes will be substantially affected by the performance of the Participant. The Committee may specify that the final Award shall be a payment of such specified percentage or percentages to the Participant, or shall be a payment of an amount specified or determined by formula in some other manner but conditioned upon achievement of such specified percentage or percentages (in each case subject to the terms of the Plan). The Committee may specify in the Performance Objectives a target amount of Business Unit Income, Revenues, or EVA of such Business Unit required before any or specified parts of the Award will become payable, and may express the Performance Objectives by way of a comparison with like measures of Business Unit performance in one or more prior periods or similar measures of performance of other companies or businesses.  At the time the Committee establishes the Performance Objective, it shall include such terms as may be necessary so that achievement of such Performance Objective is substantially uncertain. The Committee shall, in its sole discretion, establish Awards and Performance Objectives, subject to Section 4(c). Performance Objectives shall be objective and shall otherwise meet the requirements of section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code and regulations thereunder (including Treasury Regulation 1.162-27(e)(2)). Performance Objectives may differ for Awards to different Participants. Only the business criteria specified in this Section 4(b) may be used in establishing Performance Objectives upon which the maximum amount of final payment of an Award is conditioned, although the Committee may consider other measures of performance as a basis for reducing such amount (including under Section 4(d)). To the extent consistent with section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code and regulations thereunder (including Treasury Regulation 1.162-27(e)(2)), the Committee may do the following:

 

(i) provide that the Business Unit Income, Revenues, or EVA of the Business Unit considered as the Performance Objective shall be adjusted downward to reflect specified charges, expenses, and other amounts (including amounts that would otherwise constitute bonuses (under the Plan or otherwise), capital charges, general and administrative expenses, or taxes);

 

3



 

(ii) adjust or modify Awards or terms of Awards and Performance Objectives (x) in recognition of unusual or nonrecurring events affecting the Company or any Business Unit, or the financial statements or results thereof, or in response to changes in applicable laws (including tax, disclosure, and other laws), regulations, accounting principles, or other circumstances deemed relevant by the Committee, (y) with respect to any Participant whose position or duties with the Company or any subsidiary changes during a Performance Period, or (z) with respect to any person who first becomes a Participant after the first day of the Performance Period, in each case subject to Section 4(h);

 

(iii) defer all or any part of any interim payments until certification of the final Award for the Performance Period;

 

(iv) defer all or any part of final Award payments, including until the earliest time such payments may be made without causing them to fail to be deductible by the Company under section 162(m) of the Code; such deferrals may include deferrals in the form of units valued by reference to the value of Company stock, settleable in cash or by issuance of shares drawn from any other plan of the Company under which issuance of such shares to a Participant is authorized; and

 

(v) consider other performance criteria in exercising discretion under Section 4(d) hereof.

 

(c) Maximum Award. The maximum percentage of Business Unit Income, Revenues and EVA of a Business Unit that may be specified as the Performance Objectives and therefore potentially payable under an Award to any Participant for any Performance Period shall be 30%, 10%, and 25%, respectively. In addition, the maximum combined percentage of the Business Unit Income, Revenues and EVA of a Business Unit that may be specified as the Performance Objectives for Awards to all Participants with respect to any one Business Unit shall be 30%, 10% and 25%, respectively.

 

(d) Determination of Amounts Payable; Limits on Discretion. As promptly as practicable following the end of each Performance Period, the Committee shall determine whether and the extent to which the terms of Awards have been satisfied, including the extent to which Performance Objectives have been achieved and other material terms of Awards have been satisfied, and the amounts payable to each Participant with respect to his or her Award. Such determinations shall be set forth in a written certification (including for this purpose approved minutes of the meeting at which such determinations were made). The Committee may, in its sole discretion, in view of its assessment of the business strategy of the Company and Business Units thereof, performance of comparable organizations, economic and business conditions, personal performance of the Participant, and any other circumstances deemed relevant, decrease the amount determined to be payable as a final Award or cancel such Award. Other provisions of the Plan notwithstanding, the Committee shall have no discretion to increase the amounts payable with respect to an Award.

 

(e) Termination. If a Participant ceases to be employed by the Company or a participating subsidiary prior to the end of a Performance Period for any reason other than death, Disability,

 

4



 

normal retirement, or early retirement with the approval of the Committee, no final Award for such Performance Period shall be payable to such Participant. If such cessation of employment results from such Participant’s death, Disability, normal retirement, or early retirement with the approval of the Committee, the Committee shall determine, in its sole discretion and in such manner as it may deem reasonable (subject to Section 4(h)), the amount payable as a final Award under Section 4(d) achieved or resulting from the portion of such Performance Period completed at the date of cessation of employment, and the amount of the final Award payable based on such determinations. The Committee may base such determination on the performance achieved for the full year, in which case its determination shall be made as promptly as practicable following the Performance Period.  Any amount payable on account of normal or early retirement shall be paid based on actual performance for the Performance Period.  Such determinations shall be set forth in a written certification, as specified in Section 4(d). Such Participant or his or her beneficiary shall be entitled to receive payment of such final Award, reduced by any payments previously received, on or after January 1 but before March 15 of the year following the year in which the relevant Performance Period ends; provided that such payment may only be made at the earliest time such payment may be made without causing the payment to fail to be deductible by the Company under Code section 162(m). In the event the final Award is less than the payments previously made to the Participant, the Participant shall repay such amounts to the Company forthwith. The foregoing notwithstanding, no payment shall be made hereunder if such payment shall be duplicative of severance amounts paid to the Participant or his or her beneficiary.

 

(f) Payment of Awards. Except as provided in Section 4(e) and this Section 4(f) and subject to the other provisions of Section 4, each Participant may receive interim payments as frequently as semimonthly, at the Committee’s discretion, provided, however, that any such payments made exceeding the final Award as certified by the Committee shall be repaid to the Company forthwith. If and to the extent specified by the Committee, each Participant shall have the right to defer his or her receipt of part or all of any payment due with respect to an Award under and in accordance with the terms and conditions of any deferred compensation plan then available to Participant as an employee of the Company. If a Participant dies prior to payment (including deferred payment) of a final Award hereunder, any payments due to such Participant shall be paid to the Participant’s estate, unless the Participant designated a certain person(s) as beneficiary(ies) in an election form filed with the Committee and specifically applicable to amounts payable under the Plan at the same time such payments would have otherwise been payable to the Participant in accordance with Section 4(e) and without regard to any deferral election.  Notwithstanding the foregoing terms of this Section 4(f), payment of awards to Participants covered by Code section 162(m) shall only be accelerated following the attainment of a Performance Objective, with an appropriate adjustment to such accelerated payment to reflect the time value of money, in accordance with the requirements of Code section 162(m).

 

(g) Tax Withholding. The Company and any participating subsidiary shall have the right to deduct from any amount payable hereunder any amounts that federal, state, local, and foreign tax laws require to be withheld with respect to such payment.

 

5



 

(h) Conformity of Plan to Code section 162(m). It is the intent of the Company that compensation under the Plan (other than post-termination compensation) shall constitute “performance-based compensation” within the meaning of Code section 162(m)(4)(C) and regulations thereunder (including Treasury Regulation 1.162-27(e)). Accordingly, terms used in the Plan shall be interpreted in a manner consistent with section 162(m) of the Code and regulations thereunder (including Treasury Regulation 1.162-27). If any provision of the Plan or any agreement evidencing an Award hereunder does not comply or is inconsistent with the provisions of section 162(m)(4)(C) of the Code or regulations thereunder (including Treasury Regulation 1.162-27(e)) required to be met in order that compensation (other than post-termination compensation) shall constitute “performance-based compensation,” such provision shall be construed or deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such requirements, and no adjustment to an Award or its related Performance Objectives shall be authorized or made, and no post-termination payment shall be authorized or made under Section 4(e), if and to the extent that such authorization or the making of such adjustment or payment would contravene such requirements.

 

5. GENERAL PROVISIONS

 

(a) No Rights to Final Award or Rights to Participate. Until the Committee has determined to make a final Award to a Participant under Section 4(d) or (e), a Participant’s selection to participate, grant of an Award, and other events under the Plan shall not be construed as a commitment that any Award shall become a final Award or that payment will be made with respect to an Award under the Plan. Nothing in the Plan shall be deemed to give any Eligible Employee any right to participate in the Plan except upon determination of the Committee under Section 4. The foregoing and Section 5(b) notwithstanding, the Committee may authorize legal commitments with respect to Awards under the terms of an employment agreement or other agreement with a Participant, to the extent of the Committee’s authority under the Plan, including commitments that limit the Committee’s future discretion under the Plan, but in all cases subject to Section 4(h).

 

(b) No Rights to Employment. Nothing contained in the Plan or in any documents evidencing an Award shall confer upon any Eligible Employee or Participant any right to continue as an Eligible Employee or in the employ of the Company or a subsidiary or constitute any contract or agreement of employment, or interfere in any way with the right of the Company or a subsidiary to reduce such person’s compensation, to change the position held by such person, or to terminate the employment of such person, with or without cause.

 

(c) Non-Transferability. No benefit payable under, or interest in, this Plan shall be transferable by a Participant except upon a Participant’s death by will or the laws of descent and distribution or to a designated beneficiary, or otherwise be subject in any manner to anticipation, alienation, sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, encumbrance, or charge, and any such attempted action shall be void.

 

(d) Unfunded Plan. The Plan is intended to constitute an “unfunded” plan for incentive and deferred compensation. With respect to any amounts payable to a Participant pursuant to an

 

6



 

Award, nothing contained in the Plan (or in any documents related thereto), nor the creation or adoption of the Plan, the grant of any Award, or the taking of any other action pursuant to the provisions of the Plan shall give any such Participant any rights that are greater than those of a general creditor of the Company.

 

(e) Participation in Other Compensation or Benefit Plans. Nothing in the Plan shall preclude any Participant from participation in any other compensation or benefit plan of the Company.

 

(f) Governing Law. The Plan and all related documents shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York (except to the extent the Delaware General Corporation Law and provisions of federal law may be applicable), without reference to principles of conflict of laws. If any provision hereof shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid and unenforceable, the remaining provisions of the Plan shall continue to be fully effective.

 

(g)  Section 409A.  The Plan is intended to comply with the short-term deferral rule set forth in the regulations under section 409A of the Code, in order to avoid application of section 409A to the Plan.  If and to the extent that any payment under this Plan is deemed to be deferred compensation subject to the requirements of section 409A, this Plan shall be administered so that such payments are made in accordance with the requirements of section 409A, including, to the extent applicable, the requirement that amounts that constitute deferred compensation subject to the requirements of Code section 409A payable to “specified employees” (within the meaning of such term under Code section 409A) on a “separation from service” (within the meaning of such term under Code section 409A) be subject to a six-month delay of payment following separation from service.  In no event shall a Participant, directly or indirectly, designate the calendar year of payment.

 

(h) Amendment and Termination of Plan and Awards. The Board of Directors may, at any time, terminate or, from time to time, amend, modify, or suspend the Plan, provided that any such action shall be subject to stockholder approval if and to the extent required by law, regulation, or the rules of any stock exchange or automated quotation system upon which the Company’s Common Stock may be listed or quoted, or to comply with Code section 162(m). Except as provided in Section 4 (including the limitation under Section 4(h)) and under Section 5(a), the Committee may modify the terms and provisions of any Awards theretofore awarded to any Participants which have not become final Awards and been settled by payment (or would have been settled by payment but for an election to defer payment pursuant to Section 4(f)).

 

(i) Effective Date. The Plan was originally effective as of January 1, 1997, for Performance Periods beginning on or after such date, and shall remain in effect until such time as it may be terminated pursuant to Section 5(h).  The effective date of the Plan as amended and restated herein is February 5, 2014.

 

(j) Stockholder Approval. Prior to completion of the initial Performance Period under the Plan, the Plan was submitted to, and approved in a separate vote by, the affirmative votes of the

 

7



 

holders of a majority of voting securities present in person or represented by proxy and entitled to vote on the subject matter, at a meeting of Company stockholders duly held in accordance with the Delaware General Corporation Law and section 162(m) of the Code. In addition, the Committee may determine to submit the Plan to stockholders for reapproval at such times, if any, required in order that compensation under the Plan shall qualify as “performance-based compensation” under Code section 162(m) and the regulations thereunder.

 

(k) Recoupment Policy.  All Awards under this Plan will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to any Participant, as in effect from time to time and as approved by the Committee or Board.

 

As approved by the Compensation Committee and adopted by the Board of Directors on March 26, 1997.

 

Amended by the Board of Directors on June 30, 2000.

 

Amended and Restated by the Board of Directors on March 19, 2003.

 

Amended and Restated by the Board of Directors effective February 7, 2008.

 

Amended and Restated by the Board of Directors effective April 10, 2013.

 

Amended and Restated by the Board of Directors effective February 5, 2014.

 

8




Exhibit 10.6.1

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

2007 OMNIBUS EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN

 

Amended and Restated Effective February 5, 2014

 



 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

2007 OMNIBUS EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN

 

1.                                       Purpose

 

The purpose of the Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the “Plan”) is to provide (i) designated employees of Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries, and (ii) non-employee members of the board of directors of the Company with the opportunity to receive grants of stock options, stock units, stock awards, dividend equivalents and other stock-based awards.  The Company believes that the Plan will encourage the participants to contribute materially to the growth of the Company, thereby benefiting the Company’s stockholders, and will align the economic interests of the participants with those of the stockholders.  The Plan was originally effective on May 8, 2007 upon approval by the stockholders of the Company, and previously amended and restated on May 12, 2009 upon approval by the stockholders of the Company, August 18, 2009, May 11, 2010 upon approval by the stockholders of the Company and June 11, 2013 upon approval by the stockholders of the Company.  This amendment and restatement is effective February 5, 2014.

 

The Investment Technology Group, Inc. Non-Employee Directors Stock Option Plan (the “Director Plan”), the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Amended and Restated 1994 Stock Option and Long-term Incentive Plan (the “1994 Plan”), the Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (the “SUA Subplan”), the Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors’ Retainer Fee Subplan (the “Directors’ Retainer Fee Subplan”), and the Amended and Restated Investment Technology Group, Inc. Directors’ Equity Subplan (the “Directors’ Equity Subplan”, and together with the Directors’ Retainer Fee Subplan, the “Subplans”) were merged with and into this Plan as of May 8, 2007.  No additional grants were made thereafter under the Director Plan and the 1994 Plan.  Outstanding grants under the Director Plan, the 1994 Plan, the SUA Subplan and the Subplans as of May 8, 2007 continued, or will continue, in effect according to their terms as in effect on May 8, 2007 (subject to such amendments as the Committee (as defined below) determines appropriate, consistent with the terms of the Director Plan, the 1994 Plan, the SUA Subplan or the Subplans, as applicable), and the shares with respect to such outstanding grants were, or will be, issued or transferred under this Plan.  After May 8, 2007, the Subplans, and the SUA Subplan until it was frozen effective on January 1, 2009, continued in effect as subplans of the Plan and grants and/or deferrals may continue to be made under the Subplans with shares associated with such grants and/or deferrals being issued under this Plan.  Effective as of January 1, 2009, the Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (formerly known as the Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan) was added as a subplan under the Plan.

 

2.                                       Definitions

 

Whenever used in this Plan, the following terms will have the respective meanings set forth below:

 

(a)           “Board” means the Company’s Board of Directors.

 



 

(b)           “Change in Control” means and shall be deemed to have occurred:

 

(i)            if any person (within the meaning of the Exchange Act), other than the Company or a Related Party, is or becomes the “beneficial owner” (as defined in Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act), directly or indirectly, of Voting Securities representing 35% percent or more of the total voting power of all the then-outstanding Voting Securities; or

 

(ii)           if the individuals who, as of the date hereof, constitute the Board, together with those who first become directors subsequent to such date and whose recommendation, election or nomination for election to the Board was approved by a vote of at least a majority of the directors then still in office who either were directors as of the date hereof or whose recommendation, election or nomination for election was previously so approved, cease for any reason to constitute a majority of the members of the Board; or

 

(iii)          upon consummation of a merger, consolidation, recapitalization or reorganization of the Company, reverse split of any class of Voting Securities, or an acquisition of securities or assets by the Company other than (i) any such transaction in which the holders of outstanding Voting Securities immediately prior to the transaction receive (or retain), with respect to such Voting Securities, voting securities of the surviving or transferee entity representing more than 50 percent of the total voting power outstanding immediately after such transaction, with the voting power of each such continuing holder relative to other such continuing holders not substantially altered in the transaction, or (ii) any such transaction which would result in a Related Party beneficially owning more than 50 percent of the voting securities of the surviving or transferee entity outstanding immediately after such transaction; or

 

(iv)          upon consummation of the sale or disposition by the Company of all or substantially all of the Company’s assets, other than any such transaction which would result in a Related Party owning or acquiring more than 50 percent of the assets owned by the Company immediately prior to the transaction; or

 

(v)           if the stockholders of the Company approve a plan of complete liquidation of the Company.

 

(c)           “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

 

(d)           “Committee” means (i) with respect to Grants to Employees, the Compensation Committee of the Board or another committee appointed by the Board to administer the Plan, (ii) with respect to Grants made to Non-Employee Directors, the Board, and (iii) with respects to Grants that are intended to be “qualified performance-based compensation” under section 162(m) of the Code, a committee that consists of two or more persons appointed by the Board, all of whom shall be “outside directors” as defined under section 162(m) of the Code and related Treasury regulations.

 

(e)           “Company” means Investment Technology Group, Inc. and any successor corporation.

 

(f)            “Company Stock” means the common stock of the Company.

 

2



 

(g)           “Dividend Equivalent” means an amount determined by multiplying the number of shares of Company Stock subject to a Grant by the per-share cash dividend, or the per-share fair market value (as determined by the Committee) of any dividend in consideration other than cash, paid by the Company on its Company Stock.

 

(h)           “Employee” means a person classified as an employee of the Employer (including an officer or director who is also an employee) for payroll purposes, as determined in the sole discretion of the Employer.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a person is engaged in a non-employee status (including, but not limited to, as an independent contractor, an individual being paid through an employee leasing company or other third party agency) and is subsequently reclassified by the Company, the Internal Revenue Service, or a court as an employee for payroll purposes, such person, for purposes of this Plan, shall be deemed an Employee from the actual (and not the effective) date of such reclassification, unless expressly provided otherwise by the Company.

 

(i)            “Employer” means the Company and its subsidiaries.

 

(j)            “Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.

 

(k)           “Exercise Price” means the per share price at which shares of Company Stock may be purchased under an Option, as designated by the Committee.

 

(l)            “Fair Market Value,” unless otherwise required by an applicable provision of the Code, as of any date, means the closing sales price of the Common Stock as reported on the New York Stock Exchange on the date of grant; provided, however, that at any time that the Common Stock is not quoted on the New York Stock Exchange on such trading days, Fair Market Value shall be determined by the Committee in its discretion.

 

(m)          “Grant” means an Option, Stock Unit, Stock Award, SAR, Dividend Equivalent or Other Stock-Based Award granted under the Plan.

 

(n)           “Grant Agreement” means the written instrument that sets forth the terms and conditions of a Grant, including all amendments thereto.

 

(o)           “Incentive Stock Option” means an Option that is intended to meet the requirements of an incentive stock option under section 422 of the Code.

 

(p)           “Non-Employee Director” means a member of the Board who is not an employee of the Employer.

 

(q)           “Nonqualified Stock Option” means an Option that is not intended to be taxed as an incentive stock option under section 422 of the Code.

 

(r)            “Option” means an option to purchase shares of Company Stock, as described in Section 7.

 

3



 

(s)            “Other Stock-Based Award” means any Grant based on, measured by or payable in, Company Stock (other than a Grant described in Sections 7, 8, 9 or 10(a) of the Plan), as described in Section 10(b).

 

(t)            “Participant” means an Employee or Non-Employee Director designated by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

 

(u)           “Person” means an individual, a partnership, a corporation, a limited liability company, an association, a joint stock company, an estate, a trust, a joint venture, an unincorporated organization or a governmental entity or any department, agency or political subdivision thereof.

 

(v)           “Plan” means this Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan, as in effect from time to time.

 

(w)          “Related Party” means (a) a Subsidiary of the Company; (b) an employee or group of employees of the Company or any Subsidiary of the Company; (c) a trustee or other fiduciary holding securities under an employee benefit plan of the Company or any majority-owned Subsidiary of the Company; or (d) a corporation owned directly or indirectly by the stockholders of the Company in substantially the same proportion as their ownership of Voting Securities.

 

(x)           “SAR” means a stock appreciation right as described in Section 10(a).

 

(y)           “Stock Award” means an award of Company Stock as described in Section 9.

 

(z)           “Stock Unit” means an award of a phantom unit representing a share of Company Stock, as described in Section 8.

 

(aa)         “Subsidiary” or “Subsidiaries” means, with respect to any Person, any corporation, partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity of which (a) if a corporation, fifty (50) percent or more of the total voting power of shares of stock entitled (without regard to the occurrence of any contingency) to vote in the election of directors, managers or trustees thereof is at the time owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by that Person or one or more of the other Subsidiaries of that Person or combination thereof; or (b) if a partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity, fifty (50) percent or more of the partnership or other similar ownership interest thereof is at the time owned or controlled, directly or indirectly, by any Person or one or more Subsidiaries of that Person or a combination thereof.  For purposes of this definition, a Person or Persons will be deemed to have a fifty (50) percent or more ownership interest in a partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity if such Person or Persons are allocated fifty (50) percent or more of partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity gains or losses or control the managing director or member or general partner of such partnership, limited liability company, association or other business entity.

 

(bb)         “Voting Securities or Security” means any securities of the Company which carry the right to vote generally in the election of directors.

 

4



 

3.                                       Administration

 

(a)           Committee .  The Plan shall be administered and interpreted by the Compensation Committee of the Board or another committee appointed by the Board to administer the Plan with respect to grants to Employees.  The Plan shall be administered and interpreted by the Board with respect to grants to Non-Employee Directors.  The Board or committee, as applicable, that has authority with respect to a specific Grant shall be referred to as the “Committee” with respect to that Grant.  Ministerial functions may be performed by an administrative committee comprised of Company employees appointed by the Committee.

 

(b)           Committee Authority .  The Committee shall have the sole authority to (i) determine the Participants to whom Grants shall be made under the Plan, (ii) determine the type, size and terms and conditions of the Grants to be made to each such Participant, (iii) determine the time when the grants will be made and the duration of any applicable exercise or restriction period, including the criteria for exercisability and the acceleration of exercisability, (iv) amend the terms and conditions of any previously issued Grant, subject to the provisions of Section 18 below, and (v) deal with any other matters arising under the Plan.

 

(c)           Committee Determinations .  The Committee shall have full power and express discretionary authority to administer and interpret the Plan, to make factual determinations and to adopt or amend such rules, regulations, agreements and instruments for implementing the Plan and for the conduct of its business as it deems necessary or advisable, in its sole discretion.  The Committee’s interpretations of the Plan and all determinations made by the Committee pursuant to the powers vested in it hereunder shall be conclusive and binding on all persons having any interest in the Plan or in any awards granted hereunder.  All powers of the Committee shall be executed in its sole discretion, in the best interest of the Company, not as a fiduciary, and in keeping with the objectives of the Plan and need not be uniform as to similarly situated Participants.

 

4.                                       Grants

 

(a)           Grants under the Plan may consist of Options as described in Section 7, Stock Units as described in Section 8, Stock Awards as described in Section 9, and SARs or Other Stock-Based Awards as described in Section 10.  All Grants shall be subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate and as are specified in writing by the Committee to the Participant in the Grant Agreement.

 

(b)           All Grants shall be made conditional upon the Participant’s acknowledgement, in writing or by acceptance of the Grant, that all decisions and determinations of the Committee shall be final and binding on the Participant, his or her beneficiaries and any other person having or claiming an interest under such Grant.  Grants under a particular Section of the Plan need not be uniform as among the Participants.

 

5



 

5.                                       Shares Subject to the Plan

 

(a)           Shares Authorized .  The total aggregate number of shares of Company Stock that may be issued under the Plan is the sum of the following (i) 2,100,000 new shares of Company Stock plus (ii) that number of shares of Company Stock subject to outstanding grants under the Plan as of June 11, 2013 plus (iii) that number of shares remaining available for issuance under the Plan but not subject to previously exercised, vested or paid grants as of June 11, 2013; subject to the limitation that of the 1,300,000 shares added to the number of shares of Company Stock authorized for issuance under the Plan on May 12, 2009, 50,000 shares have or shall be used solely to grant Options.

 

(b)           Source of Shares; Share Counting .  Shares issued under the Plan may be authorized but unissued shares of Company Stock or reacquired shares of Company Stock, including shares purchased by the Company on the open market for purposes of the Plan.  If and to the extent Options or SARs granted under the Plan (including options granted under the Director Plan, the 1994 Plan and the Subplans) terminate, expire, or are canceled, forfeited, exchanged or surrendered without having been exercised, and if and to the extent that any Stock Awards, Stock Units, or Other Stock-Based Awards (including any stock awards, stock units or other-stock based awards granted under the Director Plan, the 1994 Plan, the SUA Subplan and the Subplans) are forfeited or terminated, or otherwise are not paid in full, the shares reserved for such Grants shall again be available for purposes of the Plan.  Shares of Company Stock surrendered in payment of the Exercise Price of an Option shall again be available for purposes of the Plan.  To the extent any Grants are paid in cash, and not in shares of Company Stock, any shares previously subject to such Grants shall again be available for issuance or transfer under the Plan.

 

(c)           Individual Limits .  All Grants under the Plan shall be expressed in shares of Company Stock.  The maximum aggregate number of shares of Company Stock with respect to which all Grants may be made under the Plan to any individual during any calendar year shall be 1,000,000 shares, subject to adjustment as described in subsection (d) below.  A Participant may not accrue Dividend Equivalents during any calendar year in excess of $1,000,000.  The individual limits of this subsection (c) shall apply without regard to whether the Grants are to be paid in Company Stock or cash.  All cash payments (other than with respect to Dividend Equivalents) shall equal the Fair Market Value of the shares of Company Stock to which the cash payments relate.

 

(d)           Adjustments .  If there is any change in the number or kind of shares of Company Stock outstanding by reason of a stock dividend, spinoff, stock split or reverse stock split, or by reason of a combination, reorganization, recapitalization or reclassification affecting the outstanding Company Stock as a class without the Company’s receipt of consideration, the maximum number of shares of Company Stock available for Grants, the maximum number of shares of Company Stock that any individual participating in the Plan may be granted in any year, the number of shares covered by outstanding Grants, the kind of shares issued under the Plan and outstanding Grants, and the price per share of outstanding Grants shall be equitably adjusted by the Committee, as the Committee deems appropriate, to reflect any increase or decrease in the number of, or change in the kind or value of, issued shares of Company Stock to

 

6



 

preclude, to the extent practicable, the enlargement or dilution of rights and benefits under Grants; provided, however, that any fractional shares resulting from such adjustment shall be eliminated.  In addition, the Committee shall have discretion to make the foregoing equitable adjustments in any circumstances in which an adjustment is not mandated by this subsection (d) or applicable law, including in the event of a Change in Control.  Any adjustments to outstanding Grants shall be consistent with section 409A or 422 of the Code, to the extent applicable.  Any adjustments determined by the Committee shall be final, binding and conclusive.

 

6.                                       Eligibility for Participation

 

(a)           Eligible Persons .  All Employees, including Employees who are officers or members of the Board, and all Non-Employee Directors shall be eligible to participate in the Plan.

 

(b)           Selection of Participants .  The Committee shall select the Employees and Non-Employee Directors to receive Grants and shall determine the number of shares of Company Stock subject to each Grant.

 

7.                                       Options

 

(a)           General Requirements . The Committee may grant Options to an Employee or Non-Employee Director upon such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate under this Section 7.  The Committee shall determine the number of shares of Company Stock that will be subject to each Grant of Options to Employees and Non-Employee Directors.

 

(b)           Type of Option, Price and Term .

 

(i)            The Committee may grant Incentive Stock Options or Nonqualified Stock Options or any combination of the two, all in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth herein.  Incentive Stock Options may be granted only to Employees of the Company or its parents or subsidiaries, as defined in section 424 of the Code.  Nonqualified Stock Options may be granted to Employees or Non-Employee Directors.

 

(ii)           The Exercise Price of Company Stock subject to an Option shall be determined by the Committee and may be equal to or greater than the Fair Market Value of a share of Company Stock on the date the Option is granted.  However, an Incentive Stock Option may not be granted to an Employee who, at the time of grant, owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any parent or subsidiary, as defined in section 424 of the Code, unless the Exercise Price per share is not less than 110% of the Fair Market Value of the Company Stock on the date of grant.

 

(iii)          The Committee shall determine the term of each Option, which shall not exceed ten years from the date of grant.  However, an Incentive Stock Option that is granted to an Employee who, at the time of grant, owns stock possessing more than 10% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of the Company or any parent or subsidiary, as defined in section 424 of the Code, may not have a term that exceeds five years from the date of grant.

 

7


 

(c)                                   Exercisability of Options.

 

(i)                                      Options shall become exercisable in accordance with such terms and conditions as may be determined by the Committee and specified in the Grant Agreement.  The Committee may accelerate the exercisability of any or all outstanding Options at any time for any reason.

 

(ii)                                   The Committee may provide in a Grant Agreement that the Participant may elect to exercise part or all of an Option before it otherwise has become exercisable.  Any shares so purchased shall be restricted shares and shall be subject to a repurchase right in favor of the Company during a specified restriction period, with the repurchase price equal to the lesser of (A) the Exercise Price or (B) the Fair Market Value of such shares at the time of repurchase, or such other restrictions as the Committee deems appropriate.

 

(iii)                                Options granted to persons who are non-exempt employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, may not be exercisable for at least six months after the date of grant (except that such Options may become exercisable, as determined by the Committee, upon the Participant’s death, Disability or retirement, or upon a Change in Control or other circumstances permitted by applicable regulations).

 

(d)                                  Termination of Employment or Service .  Except as provided in the Grant Agreement, an Option may only be exercised while the Participant is employed by the Employer, or providing service as a Non-Employee Director.  The Committee shall determine in the Grant Agreement under what circumstances and during what time periods a Participant may exercise an Option after termination of employment or service.

 

(e)                                   Exercise of Options .  A Participant may exercise an Option that has become exercisable, in whole or in part, by delivering a notice of exercise to the Company.  The Participant shall pay the Exercise Price for the Option (i) in cash, (ii) if permitted by the Committee, by delivering shares of Company Stock owned by the Participant and having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the Exercise Price or by attestation to ownership of shares of Company Stock having an aggregate Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the Exercise Price, (iii) by payment through a broker in accordance with procedures permitted by Regulation T of the Federal Reserve Board, or (iv) by such other method as the Committee may approve.  Shares of Company Stock used to exercise an Option shall have been held by the Participant for the requisite period of time to avoid adverse accounting consequences to the Company with respect to the Option.  Payment for the shares pursuant to the Option, and any required withholding taxes, must be received by the time specified by the Committee depending on the type of payment being made, but in all cases prior to the issuance of the Company Stock.

 

(f)                                    Limits on Incentive Stock Options .  Each Incentive Stock Option shall provide that, if the aggregate Fair Market Value of the stock on the date of the grant with respect to which Incentive Stock Options are exercisable for the first time by a Participant during any calendar year, under the Plan or any other stock option plan of the Company or a parent or subsidiary, as defined in section 424 of the Code, exceeds $100,000, then the Option, as to the excess, shall be treated as a Nonqualified Stock Option.  An Incentive Stock Option shall not be

 

8



 

granted to any person who is not an Employee of the Company or a parent or subsidiary, as defined in section 424 of the Code.

 

8.                                       Stock Units

 

(a)                                  General Requirements .  The Committee may grant Stock Units to an Employee or Non-Employee Director, upon such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate under this Section 8.  Each Stock Unit shall represent the right of the Participant to receive a share of Company Stock or an amount based on the value of a share of Company Stock.  All Stock Units shall be credited to bookkeeping accounts on the Company’s records for purposes of the Plan.

 

(b)                                  Terms of Stock Units .  The Committee may grant Stock Units that are payable on terms and conditions determined by the Committee, which may include payment based on achievement of performance goals.  Stock Units may be paid at the end of a specified vesting or performance period, or payment may be deferred to a date authorized by the Committee.  The Committee shall determine the number of Stock Units to be granted and the requirements applicable to such Stock Units.

 

(c)                                   Payment With Respect to Stock Units .  Payment with respect to Stock Units shall be made in cash, in Company Stock, or in a combination of the two, as determined by the Committee.  The Grant Agreement shall specify the maximum number of shares that can be issued under the Stock Units.

 

(d)                                  Requirement of Employment or Service .  The Committee shall determine in the Grant Agreement under what circumstances a Participant may retain Stock Units after termination of the Participant’s employment or service, and the circumstances under which Stock Units may be forfeited.

 

9.                                       Stock Awards

 

(a)                                  General Requirements . The Committee may issue shares of Company Stock to an Employee or Non-Employee Director under a Stock Award, upon such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate under this Section 9.  Shares of Company Stock issued pursuant to Stock Awards may be issued for cash consideration or for no cash consideration, and subject to restrictions or no restrictions, as determined by the Committee.  The Committee may establish conditions under which restrictions on Stock Awards shall lapse over a period of time or according to such other criteria as the Committee deems appropriate, including restrictions based upon the achievement of specific performance goals.  The Committee shall determine the number of shares of Company Stock to be issued pursuant to a Stock Award.

 

(b)                                  Requirement of Employment or Service .  The Committee shall determine in the Grant Agreement under what circumstances a Participant may retain Stock Awards after termination of the Participant’s employment or service, and the circumstances under which Stock Awards may be forfeited.

 

9



 

(c)                                   Restrictions on Transfer .  While Stock Awards are subject to restrictions, a Participant may not sell, assign, transfer, pledge or otherwise dispose of the shares of a Stock Award except upon death as described in Section 15(a).  Each certificate for a share of a Stock Award shall contain a legend giving appropriate notice of the restrictions in the Grant.  The Participant shall be entitled to have the legend removed when all restrictions on such shares have lapsed.  The Company may retain possession of any certificates for Stock Awards until all restrictions on such shares have lapsed.

 

(d)                                  Right to Vote and to Receive Dividends .  The Committee shall determine to what extent, and under what conditions, the Participant shall have the right to vote shares of Stock Awards and to receive any dividends or other distributions paid on such shares during the restriction period.

 

10.                                Stock Appreciation Rights and Other Stock-Based Awards

 

(a)                                  SARs .  The Committee may grant SARs to an Employee or Non-Employee Director separately or in tandem with an Option.  The following provisions are applicable to SARs:

 

(i)                                      Base Amount .  The Committee shall establish the base amount of the SAR at the time the SAR is granted.  The base amount of each SAR shall be equal to the per share Exercise Price of the related Option or, if there is no related Option, an amount that is at least equal to the Fair Market Value of a share of Company Stock as of the date of Grant of the SAR.

 

(ii)                                   Tandem SARs .  The Committee may grant tandem SARs either at the time the Option is granted or at any time thereafter while the Option remains outstanding; provided, however, that, in the case of an Incentive Stock Option, SARs may be granted only at the date of the grant of the Incentive Stock Option.  In the case of tandem SARs, the number of SARs granted to a Participant that shall be exercisable during a specified period shall not exceed the number of shares of Company Stock that the Participant may purchase upon the exercise of the related Option during such period.  Upon the exercise of an Option, the SARs relating to the Company Stock covered by such Option shall terminate.  Upon the exercise of SARs, the related Option shall terminate to the extent of an equal number of shares of Company Stock.

 

(iii)                                Exercisability .  An SAR shall be exercisable during the period specified by the Committee in the Grant Agreement and shall be subject to such vesting and other restrictions as may be specified in the Grant Agreement.  The Committee may grant SARs the exercise of which is subject to achievement of performance goals or other conditions.  The Committee may accelerate the exercisability of any or all outstanding SARs at any time for any reason.  The Committee shall determine in the Grant Agreement under what circumstances and during what periods a Participant may exercise an SAR after termination of employment or service.  A tandem SAR shall be exercisable only while the Option to which it is related is exercisable.

 

(iv)                               Grants to Non-Exempt Employees .  SARs granted to persons who are non-exempt employees under the Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended, may not be

 

10



 

exercisable for at least six months after the date of grant (except that such SARs may become exercisable, as determined by the Committee, upon the Participant’s death, Disability or retirement, or upon a Change in Control or other circumstances permitted by applicable regulations).

 

(v)                                  Value of SARs .  When a Participant exercises SARs, the Participant shall receive in settlement of such SARs an amount equal to the value of the stock appreciation for the number of SARs exercised.  The stock appreciation for an SAR is the amount by which the Fair Market Value of the underlying Company Stock on the date of exercise of the SAR exceeds the base amount of the SAR as described in subsection (i).

 

(vi)                               Form of Payment .  The Committee shall determine whether the stock appreciation for an SAR shall be paid in the form of shares of Company Stock, cash or a combination of the two.  For purposes of calculating the number of shares of Company Stock to be received, shares of Company Stock shall be valued at their Fair Market Value on the date of exercise of the SAR.  If shares of Company Stock are to be received upon exercise of an SAR, cash shall be delivered in lieu of any fractional share.

 

(b)                                  Other Stock-Based Awards .  The Committee may grant other awards not specified in Sections 7, 8 or 9 or subsection (a) above that are based on or measured by Company Stock to Employees and Non-Employee Directors, on such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate.  Other Stock-Based Awards may be granted subject to achievement of performance goals or other conditions and may be payable in Company Stock or cash, or in a combination of the two, as determined by the Committee in the Grant Agreement.

 

11.                                Dividend Equivalents .

 

(a)                                  General Requirements .  When the Committee makes a Grant under the Plan, the Committee may grant Dividend Equivalents in connection with the Grant, under such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate under this Section 11.  Dividend Equivalents may be paid to Participants currently or may be deferred, as determined by the Committee.  All Dividend Equivalents that are not paid currently shall be credited to bookkeeping accounts on the Company’s records for purposes of the Plan.  Dividend Equivalents may be accrued as a cash obligation, or may be converted to Stock Units for the Participant, and deferred Dividend Equivalents may accrue interest, all as determined by the Committee.  The Committee may provide that Dividend Equivalents shall be payable based on the achievement of specific performance goals.

 

(b)                                  Payment with Respect to Dividend Equivalents .  Dividend Equivalents may be payable in cash or shares of Company Stock or in a combination of the two, as determined by the Committee.

 

12.                                Qualified Performance-Based Compensation

 

(a)                                  Designation as Qualified Performance-Based Compensation .  The Committee may determine that Stock Units, Stock Awards, Dividend Equivalents or Other Stock-Based

 

11



 

Awards granted to an Employee shall be considered “qualified performance-based compensation” under section 162(m) of the Code, in which case the provisions of this Section 12 shall apply.  The Committee may also grant Options or SARs under which the exercisability of the Options is subject to achievement of performance goals as described in this Section 12 or otherwise.

 

(b)                                  Performance Goals .  When Grants are made under this Section 12, the Committee shall establish in writing (i) the objective performance goals that must be met, (ii) the period during which performance will be measured, (iii) the maximum amounts that may be paid if the performance goals are met, and (iv) any other conditions that the Committee deems appropriate and consistent with the requirements of section 162(m) of the Code for “qualified performance-based compensation.”  The performance goals shall satisfy the requirements for “qualified performance-based compensation,” including the requirement that the achievement of the goals be substantially uncertain at the time they are established and that the performance goals be established in such a way that a third party with knowledge of the relevant facts could determine whether and to what extent the performance goals have been met.  The Committee shall not have discretion to increase the amount of compensation that is payable, but may reduce the amount of compensation that is payable, pursuant to Grants identified by the Committee as “qualified performance-based compensation.”

 

(c)                                   Criteria Used for Objective Performance Goals .  The Committee shall use objectively determinable performance goals based on one or more of the following criteria:  stock price, earnings per share, price-earnings multiples, net earnings, operating earnings, revenue, number of days sales outstanding in accounts receivable, productivity, margin, EBITDA (earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization), net capital employed, return on assets, shareholder return, return on equity, return on capital employed, growth in assets, unit volume, sales, cash flow, market share, relative performance to a comparison group designated by the Committee, or strategic business criteria consisting of one or more objectives based on meeting specified revenue goals, market penetration goals, customer growth, geographic business expansion goals, cost targets or goals relating to acquisitions or divestitures.  The performance goals may relate to one or more business units or the performance of the Company as a whole, or any combination of the foregoing.  Performance goals need not be uniform as among Participants.

 

(d)                                  Timing of Establishment of Goals . The Committee shall establish the performance goals in writing either before the beginning of the performance period or during a period ending no later than the earlier of (i) 90 days after the beginning of the performance period or (ii) the date on which 25% of the performance period has been completed, or such other date as may be required or permitted under applicable regulations under section 162(m) of the Code.

 

(e)                                   Certification of Results .  The Committee shall certify the performance results for the performance period specified in the Grant Agreement after the performance period ends.  The Committee shall determine the amount, if any, to be paid pursuant to each Grant based on the achievement of the performance goals and the satisfaction of all other terms of the Grant Agreement.

 

12



 

(f)                                    Death, Disability or Other Circumstances .  The Committee may provide in the Grant Agreement that Grants under this Section 12 shall be payable, in whole or in part, in the event of the Participant’s death or disability, a Change in Control or under other circumstances consistent with the Treasury regulations and rulings under section 162(m) of the Code.

 

13.                                Deferrals

 

The Committee may permit or require a Participant to defer receipt of the payment of cash (including dividend equivalents) or the delivery of shares that would otherwise be due to the Participant in connection with any Grant.  The Committee shall establish rules and procedures for any such deferrals, consistent with applicable requirements of section 409A of the Code.

 

14.                                Withholding of Taxes

 

(a)                                  Required Withholding .  All Grants under the Plan shall be subject to applicable federal (including FICA), state and local tax withholding requirements.  The Company may require that the Participant or other person receiving or exercising Grants pay to the Company the amount of any federal, state or local taxes that the Company is required to withhold with respect to such Grants, or the Company may deduct from other wages paid by the Company the amount of any withholding taxes due with respect to such Grants.

 

(b)                                  Election to Withhold Shares .  If the Committee so permits, a Participant may elect to satisfy the Company’s tax withholding obligation with respect to Grants paid in Company Stock by having shares withheld, at the time such Grants become taxable, up to an amount that does not exceed the minimum applicable withholding tax rate for federal (including FICA), state and local tax liabilities.  The election must be in a form and manner prescribed by the Committee.

 

15.                                Transferability of Grants

 

(a)                                  Restrictions on Transfer .  Except as described in subsection (b) below, only the Participant may exercise rights under a Grant during the Participant’s lifetime, and a Participant may not transfer those rights except by will or by the laws of descent and distribution.  When a Participant dies, the personal representative or other person entitled to succeed to the rights of the Participant may exercise such rights.  Any such successor must furnish proof satisfactory to the Company of his or her right to receive the Grant under the Participant’s will or under the applicable laws of descent and distribution.

 

(b)                                  Transfer of Nonqualified Stock Options to or for Family Members .  Notwithstanding subsection (a) above, the Committee may provide, in a Grant Agreement, that a Participant may transfer Nonqualified Stock Options to family members, or one or more trusts or other entities for the benefit of or owned by family members, consistent with the applicable securities laws, according to such terms as the Committee may determine; provided that the Participant receives no consideration for the transfer of an Option and the transferred Option shall continue to be subject to the same terms and conditions as were applicable to the Option immediately before the transfer.

 

13



 

16.                                Consequences of a Change in Control

 

(a)                                  In the event of a Change in Control, the Committee may take any one or more of the following actions with respect to some or all outstanding Grants, without the consent of any Participant: (i) the Committee may determine that outstanding Options and SARs shall be fully exercisable, and restrictions on outstanding Stock Awards and Stock Units shall lapse, as of the date of the Change in Control or at such other time as the Committee determines, (ii) the Committee may require that Participants surrender their outstanding Options and SARs in exchange for one or more payments by the Company, in cash or Company Stock as determined by the Committee, in an amount equal to the amount by which the then Fair Market Value of the shares of Company Stock subject to the Participant’s unexercised Options and SARs exceeds the Exercise Price, or Base Amount, as applicable, if any, and on such terms as the Committee determines, (iii) after giving Participants an opportunity to exercise their outstanding Options and SARs, the Committee may terminate any or all unexercised Options and SARs at such time as the Committee deems appropriate, (iv) with respect to Participants holding Stock Units, Other Stock-Based Awards or Dividend Equivalents, the Committee may determine that such Participants shall receive one or more payments in settlement of such Stock Units, Other Stock-Based Awards or Dividend Equivalents, in such amount and form and on such terms as may be determined by the Committee, (v) if the Company is the surviving corporation, the Committee may determine that Grants will remain outstanding after the Change in Control, or (vi) if the Company is not the surviving corporation, the Committee may determine that Grants that remain outstanding after the Change in Control shall be converted to similar grants of the surviving corporation (or a parent or subsidiary of the surviving corporation).  Such acceleration, surrender, termination, settlement or conversion shall take place as of the date of the Change in Control or such other date as the Committee may specify.

 

(b)                                  Other Transactions .  The Committee may provide in a Grant Agreement that a sale or other transaction involving a subsidiary or other business unit of the Company shall be considered a Change in Control for purposes of a Grant, or the Committee may establish other provisions that shall be applicable in the event of a specified transaction.

 

17.                                Requirements for Issuance of Shares

 

No Company Stock shall be issued in connection with any Grant hereunder unless and until all legal requirements applicable to the issuance of such Company Stock have been complied with to the satisfaction of the Committee.  The Committee shall have the right to condition any Grant made to any Participant hereunder on such Participant’s undertaking in writing to comply with such restrictions on his or her subsequent disposition of such shares of Company Stock as the Committee shall deem necessary or advisable, and certificates representing such shares may be legended to reflect any such restrictions.  Certificates representing shares of Company Stock issued under the Plan will be subject to such stop-transfer orders and other restrictions as may be required by applicable laws, regulations and interpretations, including any requirement that a legend be placed thereon.  Except as determined under Section 9(a), no Participant shall have any right as a shareholder with respect to Company Stock covered by a Grant until shares have been issued to the Participant.

 

14



 

18.                                Amendment and Termination of the Plan

 

(a)                                  Amendment .  The Board may amend or terminate the Plan at any time; provided, however, that the Board shall not amend the Plan without approval of the stockholders of the Company if such approval is required in order to comply with the Code or applicable laws, or to comply with applicable stock exchange requirements.  No amendment or termination of this Plan shall, without the consent of the Participant, materially impair any rights or obligations under any Grant previously made to the Participant under the Plan, unless such right has been reserved in the Plan or the Grant Agreement, or except as provided in Section 19(b) below.  Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, the Board may amend the Plan in such manner as it deems appropriate in the event of a change in applicable law or regulations.

 

(b)                                  No Repricing Without Stockholder Approval .  Except as otherwise provided in Section 5(d), the terms of outstanding Grants may not be amended to reduce the exercise price of outstanding Options or the base amount of outstanding SARs or to cancel outstanding Options or SARs in exchange for cash, other awards, Options with an exercise price that is less than the exercise price of the original Options or SARs with a base amount that is less than the base amount for the original SARs, without stockholder approval.

 

(c)                                   Stockholder Approval for “Qualified Performance-Based Compensation .”  If Grants are made under Section 12 above, the Plan must be reapproved by the Company’s stockholders no later than the first stockholders meeting that occurs in the fifth year following the year in which the stockholders previously approved the provisions of Section 12, if additional Grants are to be made under Section 12 and if required by section 162(m) of the Code or the regulations thereunder.

 

(d)                                  Termination of Plan .  The Plan shall terminate on May 7, 2017, unless the Plan is terminated earlier by the Board or is extended by the Board with the approval of the stockholders.  The termination of the Plan shall not impair the power and authority of the Committee with respect to an outstanding Grant.

 

19.                                Miscellaneous

 

(a)                                  Grants in Connection with Corporate Transactions and Otherwise .  Nothing contained in this Plan shall be construed to (i) limit the right of the Committee to make Grants under this Plan in connection with the acquisition, by purchase, lease, merger, consolidation or otherwise, of the business or assets of any corporation, firm or association, including Grants to employees thereof who become Employees, or for other proper corporate purposes, or (ii) limit the right of the Company to grant stock options or make other stock-based awards outside of this Plan.  Without limiting the foregoing, the Committee may make a Grant to an employee of another corporation who becomes an Employee by reason of a corporate merger, consolidation, acquisition of stock or property, reorganization or liquidation involving the Company in substitution for a grant made by such corporation.  The terms and conditions of the Grants may vary from the terms and conditions required by the Plan and from those of the substituted stock incentives, as determined by the Committee.

 

15



 

(b)                                  Compliance with Law .  The Plan, the exercise of Options and the obligations of the Company to issue or transfer shares of Company Stock under Grants shall be subject to all applicable laws and to approvals by any governmental or regulatory agency as may be required.  With respect to persons subject to section 16 of the Exchange Act, it is the intent of the Company that the Plan and all transactions under the Plan comply with all applicable provisions of Rule 16b-3 or its successors under the Exchange Act.  In addition, it is the intent of the Company that Incentive Stock Options comply with the applicable provisions of section 422 of the Code, that Grants of “qualified performance-based compensation” comply with the applicable provisions of section 162(m) of the Code and that, to the extent applicable, Grants are either exempt from, or comply with, the requirements of section 409A of the Code.  To the extent that any legal requirement of section 16 of the Exchange Act or section 422, 162(m) or 409A of the Code as set forth in the Plan ceases to be required under section 16 of the Exchange Act or section 422, 162(m) or 409A of the Code, that Plan provision shall cease to apply.  The Committee may revoke any Grant if it is contrary to law or modify a Grant to bring it into compliance with any valid and mandatory government regulation.  The Committee may also adopt rules regarding the withholding of taxes on payments to Participants.

 

(c)                                   Enforceability .  The Plan shall be binding upon and enforceable against the Company and its successors and assigns.

 

(d)                                  Funding of the Plan; Limitation on Rights .  This Plan shall be unfunded.  The Company shall not be required to establish any special or separate fund or to make any other segregation of assets to assure the payment of any Grants under this Plan.  Nothing contained in the Plan and no action taken pursuant hereto shall create or be construed to create a fiduciary relationship between the Company and any Participant or any other person.  No Participant or any other person shall under any circumstances acquire any property interest in any specific assets of the Company.  To the extent that any person acquires a right to receive payment from the Company hereunder, such right shall be no greater than the right of any unsecured general creditor of the Company.

 

(e)                                   Rights of Participants .  Nothing in this Plan shall entitle any Employee, Non-Employee Director or other person to any claim or right to receive a Grant under this Plan.  Neither this Plan nor any action taken hereunder shall be construed as giving any individual any rights to be retained by or in the employment or service of the Employer.

 

(f)                                    No Fractional Shares .  No fractional shares of Company Stock shall be issued or delivered pursuant to the Plan or any Grant.  The Committee shall determine whether cash, other awards or other property shall be issued or paid in lieu of such fractional shares or whether such fractional shares or any rights thereto shall be forfeited or otherwise eliminated.

 

(g)                                   Employees Subject to Taxation Outside the United States .  With respect to Participants who are subject to taxation in countries other than the United States, the Committee may make Grants on such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate to comply with the laws of the applicable countries, and the Committee may create such procedures, addenda and subplans and make such modifications as may be necessary or advisable to comply with such laws.

 

16



 

(h)                                  Governing Law .  The validity, construction, interpretation and effect of the Plan and Grant Agreements issued under the Plan shall be governed and construed by and determined in accordance with the laws of the State of New York, without giving effect to the conflict of laws provisions thereof.

 

(i)                                      Recoupment Policy .  All Grants under this Plan will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to any Employee, as in effect from time to time and as approved by the Committee or Board.

 

17




Exhibit 10.7.1

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.
STOCK UNIT GRANT AGREEMENT

FOR EMPLOYEES

 

THIS GRANT AGREEMENT, dated as of                                      (the “ Date of Grant ”), is entered into by and between Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “ Company ”), a Delaware corporation, and                               , an employee of the Company (the “ Employee ”).

 

WHEREAS, the Employee has been awarded the following Grant under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the “ Plan ”).  Capitalized terms used herein and not defined herein shall have the meanings set forth in the Plan.  In the event of any conflict between this Grant Agreement and the Plan, the Plan shall control.

 

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and mutual covenants contained herein, and for other good and valuable consideration, the parties hereto agree as follows:

 

1.                                       Grant of Stock Units .  Subject to the terms and conditions set forth in this Grant Agreement and the Plan, the Employee is hereby awarded          Stock Units that represent hypothetical shares of Company Stock on a one-for-one basis (the “ Stock Unit Grant ”).

 

2.                                       Grant Subject to Plan Provisions .  This Stock Unit Grant is granted pursuant to the Plan, the terms of which are incorporated herein by reference, and in all respects shall be interpreted in accordance with the Plan.  The Plan and the Plan prospectus are available at http://assetlib.itginc.com/stellent/groups/public/documents/itginc/047794.pdf and http://assetlib.itginc.com/stellent/groups/public/documents/itginc/047867.pdf, respectively; provided that paper copies of the Plan and the Plan prospectus are available upon request by contacting the Legal Department of the Company at ITG_Legal or 212.444.6378.  This Stock Unit Grant is subject to interpretations, regulations and determinations concerning the Plan established from time to time by the Committee in accordance with the provisions of the Plan, including, but not limited to, provisions pertaining to (a) the registration, qualification or listing of the shares issued under the Plan, (b) changes in capitalization, (c) requirements of applicable law and (d) all other Plan provisions.  The Committee has the authority to interpret and construe this Grant Agreement pursuant to the terms of the Plan, and its decisions are conclusive as to any questions arising hereunder.

 

3.                                       Stock Unit Account .  The Company shall establish and maintain a Stock Unit bookkeeping account (the “ Accoun t”) on its records for the Employee and shall record in the Account the number of Stock Units awarded to the Employee.  No shares of stock shall be issued to the Employee at the time the Stock Unit Grant is made.

 

4.                                       Vesting of the Stock Unit Grant .

 

(a)                                       Subject to Section 5 below and the other terms and conditions of this Grant Agreement and the Plan, this Stock Unit Grant shall become vested in full and all restrictions on the Stock Unit Grant shall lapse on the third anniversary of the Date of Grant if the Employee has remained continuously employed by the Employer from the Date of Grant through the vesting date; provided , however , that the Stock Unit Grant shall become immediately

 



 

vested in full (i) upon a Change in Control if the Employee is employed by the Employer as of the date of the Change in Control or (ii) upon the Employee’s Termination of Service (as defined below) due to the Employee’s death or Disability (as defined below).

 

Disability ” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in Section 22(e)(3) of the Code.

 

(b)                                       Unless otherwise provided by the Committee, all amounts receivable in connection with any adjustments to the Company Stock under Section 5(d) of the Plan shall be subject to the vesting schedule in this Section 4.

 

5.                                       Termination of Service; Violation of Code of Conduct; [Financial Restatement;] Forfeiture of Unvested Stock Unit Grant .  In the event of the Employee’s Termination of Service for any reason other than due to the Employee’s death or Disability prior to the date the Stock Unit Grant otherwise becomes vested in accordance with Section 4 above, the Stock Unit Grant shall immediately be forfeited by the Employee.  [ For non-Executive Committee members only:   In addition, whether or not the Employee incurs a Termination of Service, in the event that the Employee materially breaches the Employer’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, as such material breach is determined by the Committee in its sole discretion, prior to the date the Stock Unit Grant otherwise becomes vested in accordance with Section 4 above, the Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, that the Stock Unit Grant shall cease to vest effective as of the date of the Employee’s material breach, subject to compliance with applicable law.] [ For Executive Committee members only:   In addition, whether or not the Employee incurs a Termination of Service, if, prior to the date the Stock Unit Grant otherwise becomes vested in accordance with Section 4 above (i) the Employee materially breaches the Employer’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, as such material breach is determined by the Committee in its sole discretion, or (ii) the Company is required to prepare a restated financial statement that is filed with an external regulator because of material noncompliance of the Company with any financial reporting requirement, whether or not such restatement involves misconduct of the Employee, then the Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, that the Stock Unit Grant shall cease to vest effective as of the date of the material breach or the date on which the Company is notified of such requirement, as applicable, in each case, subject to compliance with applicable law.]

 

Termination of Service ” means the Employee ceases to be employed by the Employer.  An Employee employed by a Subsidiary of the Company shall also be deemed to incur a Termination of Service if such Subsidiary ceases to be a Subsidiary of the Company and such Employee does not immediately thereafter become employed by the Company or another Subsidiary of the Company.  Temporary absences from employment because of illness, vacation or leave of absence and transfers among Employers shall not be considered a Termination of Service.

 

6.                                       Distribution of Shares .  The Company shall distribute to the Employee (or the Employee’s heirs in the event of the Employee’s death) at the time of vesting of the Stock Unit Grant in accordance with Section 4 above (but not later than March 15 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which the Stock Units vest), a number of shares of Company Stock equal to the number of Stock Units then held by the Employee that became vested at such time, subject to reduction for withholding of shares pursuant to Section 9 below.

 

2



 

7.                                       Rights and Restrictions .  The Stock Unit Grant shall not be transferable, other than by will or under the laws of descent and distribution (or pursuant to a beneficiary designation authorized by the Committee).  Prior to vesting of the Stock Unit Grant and delivery of the shares of Company Stock to the Employee, the Employee shall not have any rights or privileges of a stockholder as to the shares of Company Stock subject to the Stock Unit Grant.  Specifically, the Employee shall not have the right to receive dividends or the right to vote such shares of Company Stock, nor shall the Employee have the right to sell, assign, pledge, hypothecate, encumber, transfer or otherwise dispose of, in whole or in part, the Stock Unit Grant, prior to vesting of the Stock Unit Grant and delivery of the shares of Company Stock.  The Employee shall not have any interest in any fund or specific assets of the Employer by reason of this Stock Unit Grant or the Account established for the Employee.

 

8.                                       Limitations .  Nothing herein shall limit the Company’s right to issue Company Stock, or Stock Units or other rights to purchase Company Stock subject to vesting, expiration and other terms and conditions deemed appropriate by the Company and its affiliates.  Nothing expressed or implied herein is intended or shall be construed to confer upon or give to any Person, other than the parties hereto, any right, remedy or claim under or by reason of this Grant Agreement or of any term, covenant or condition hereof.

 

9.                                       Withholding .  At the time of distribution pursuant to Section 6 above, and in accordance with any rules or regulations of the Committee then in effect, the Employer shall withhold, through an automatic share withholding procedure, Company Stock with a Fair Market Value (measured as of the distribution date) equal to the amount of the federal, state or local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld with respect to the distributions.  To the extent not withheld, the Employee shall pay to the Employer or make arrangements satisfactory to the Committee regarding payment of any federal, state or local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld at any time with respect to the Stock Unit Grant and the Employer shall, to the extent permitted or required by law, have the right to deduct from any payment of any kind otherwise due to the Employee, federal, state and local taxes of any kind required by law to be withheld.

 

10.                                Expenses of Issuance of Company Stock .  The issuance of stock certificates hereunder shall be without charge to the Employee.  The Company shall pay, and indemnify the Employee from and against any issuance, stamp or documentary taxes (other than transfer taxes) or charges imposed by any governmental body, agency or official (other than income taxes) by reason of the issuance of Company Stock.

 

11.                                Terms are Binding .  The terms of this Grant Agreement shall be binding upon the executors, administrators, heirs, successors, transferees and assignees of the Employee and the Company.

 

12.                                Compliance with Law .  The transfer of Company Stock hereunder shall be subject to the terms, conditions and restrictions as set forth in the governing instruments of the Company, Company policies, applicable federal and state securities laws or any other applicable laws or regulations, and approvals by any governmental or regulatory agency as may be required.  By signing this Grant Agreement, the Employee agrees not to sell any Company Stock at a time when applicable laws or the Company policies prohibit a sale.

 

3



 

13.                                References .  References herein to rights and obligations of the Employee shall apply, where appropriate, to the Employee’s legal representative or estate without regard to whether specific reference to such legal representative or estate is contained in a particular provision of this Grant Agreement.

 

14.                                Notices .  Any notice required or permitted to be given under this Grant Agreement shall be in writing and shall be deemed to have been given when delivered personally or by courier, or sent by certified or registered mail, postage prepaid, return receipt requested, duly addressed to the party concerned at the address indicated below or to such changed address as such party may subsequently, by similar process, give notice of:

 

If to the Company:

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc.

One Liberty Plaza

165 Broadway

New York, NY 10006

Attention: General Counsel

 

If to the Employee:

 

At the Employee’s most recent address shown on the Employer’s corporate records, or at any other address at which the Employee may specify in a notice delivered to the Company in the manner set forth herein.

 

15.                                No Right to Continued Employment .  This Stock Unit Grant shall not confer upon the Employee any right to continue in the employ of the Employer nor shall this Stock Unit Grant interfere with the right of the Employer to terminate the Employee’s employment at any time.

 

16.                                Section 409A .  It is intended that the Stock Unit Grant issued hereunder shall comply with Section 409A of the Code (and any regulations and guidelines issued thereunder) to the extent the Stock Unit Grant is subject thereto, and the Stock Unit Grant shall be interpreted on a basis consistent with such intent.  In no event shall the Employee, directly or indirectly, designate the calendar year in which the shares underlying the Stock Unit Grant will be distributed.  This Grant Agreement may be amended without the consent of the Employee in any respect deemed by the Committee to be necessary in order to preserve compliance with Section 409A of the Code.

 

17.                                Costs .  In any action at law or in equity to enforce any of the provisions or rights under this Grant Agreement, including any arbitration proceedings to enforce such provisions or rights, the unsuccessful party to such litigation or arbitration, as determined by the court in a final judgment or decree, or by the panel of arbitrators in its award, shall pay the successful party or parties all costs, expenses and reasonable attorneys’ fees incurred by the successful party or parties (including without limitation costs, expenses and fees on any appeals), and if the successful party recovers judgment in any such action or proceeding such costs, expenses and attorneys’ fees shall be included as part of the judgment.

 

4



 

18.                                Further Assurances .  The Employee agrees to perform all acts and execute and deliver any documents that may be reasonably necessary to carry out the provisions of this Grant Agreement, including but not limited to all acts and documents related to compliance with applicable federal and/or state securities laws.

 

19.                                Counterparts .  For convenience, this Grant Agreement may be executed in any number of identical counterparts, each of which shall be deemed a complete original in itself and may be introduced in evidence or used for any other purposes without the production of any other counterparts.

 

20.                                Governing Law .  This Grant Agreement shall be construed and enforced in accordance with Section 19(h) of the Plan.

 

21.                                Entire Agreement .  This Grant Agreement, together with the Plan, sets forth the entire agreement between the parties with reference to the subject matter hereof, and there are no agreements, understandings, warranties, or representations, written, express, or implied, between them with respect to the Stock Unit Grant other than as set forth herein or therein, all prior agreements, promises, representations and understandings relative thereto being herein merged.

 

22.                                Amendment; Waiver .  This Grant Agreement may be amended, modified, superseded, canceled, renewed or extended and the terms or covenants hereof may be waived only by a written instrument executed by the parties hereto or, in the case of a waiver, by the party waiving compliance.  Any such written instrument must be approved by the Committee to be effective as against the Company.  The failure of any party at any time or times to require performance of any provision hereof shall in no manner affect the right at a later time to enforce the same.  No waiver by any party of the breach of any term or provision contained in this Grant Agreement, whether by conduct or otherwise, in any one or more instances, shall be deemed to be, or construed as, a further or continuing waiver of any such breach, or a waiver of the breach of any other term or covenant contained in this Grant Agreement.

 

23.                                Severability .  Any provision of this Grant Agreement that is prohibited or unenforceable in any jurisdiction shall, as to such jurisdiction, be ineffective to the extent of such prohibition or unenforceability without invalidating the remaining provisions hereof, and any such prohibition or unenforceability in any jurisdiction shall not invalidate or render unenforceable such provision in any other jurisdiction.

 

24.                                Recoupment Policy .  The Employee hereby agrees that the Employee will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to the Employee as an employee of the Company or any of its affiliates, as in effect from time to time and as approved by the Board or the Committee, whether or not approved before or after the Date of Grant.

 

[SIGNATURE PAGE FOLLOWS]

 

5



 

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned have executed this Grant Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

 

 

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

 

 

Name: Robert C. Gasser

 

Title: CEO and President

 

I hereby accept the Stock Unit Grant described in this Grant Agreement, and I agree to be bound by the terms of the Plan and this Grant Agreement.  I hereby further agree that all the decisions and determinations of the Committee shall be final and binding.

 

 

 

 

 

 

[Insert Name of the Employee]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Brokerage Name

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Brokerage Account Number

 

6




Exhibit 10.10.2

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

2007 OMNIBUS EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN

VARIABLE COMPENSATION STOCK UNIT AWARD PROGRAM SUBPLAN

 

1.                                       Purpose

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “ Company ”) established the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (previously titled the Investment Technology Group, Inc. Equity Deferral Award Program Subplan) (the “ Program ”) as a sub-plan under the Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the “ Plan ”), effective as of January 1, 2009 (the “ Effective Date ”).  The Company amended and restated the Program to make certain design changes and to change the name of the Program, effective August 15, 2011, November 17, 2011 and January 1, 2014.  The Company hereby amends and restates the Program to make certain design changes, effective February 5, 2014.

 

The purpose of the Program is to provide an additional incentive to selected members of senior management and key employees to increase the success of the Company, by automatically substituting stock units for a portion of the variable compensation to be earned by such persons, which stock units represent an equity interest in the Company to be acquired and held under the Program on a long-term, tax-deferred basis and to otherwise promote the purposes of the Plan.

 

2.                                       Definitions

 

Capitalized terms used in the Program but not defined herein shall have the same meanings as defined in the Plan.  In addition to such terms and the terms defined in this Program, the following terms used in the Program shall have the meanings set forth below:

 

(a)                                             Actual Reduction Amount ” means the amount by which a Participant’s Variable Compensation is reduced, which may be up to 100% of such Variable Compensation, as determined by the Committee.

 

(b)                                             Administrator ” shall be the person or committee appointed by the Committee to perform the functions, and exercise the authority and responsibilities, set forth in Section 3(b) below.

 

(c)                                              Basic Unit ” means a Stock Unit together with any Dividend Equivalents credited thereon granted pursuant to Section 6(a) hereof.

 

(d)                                             Cause ” shall be deemed to exist where a Participant: (i) commits any act of fraud, willful misconduct or dishonesty in connection with the Participant’s employment; (ii) fails, refuses or neglects to timely perform any material duty or job responsibility and such failure, refusal or neglect is not cured after appropriate warning; (iii) commits a material violation of any law, rule, regulation or by-law of any governmental authority (state, federal or foreign), any securities exchange or association or other regulatory or self-regulatory body or agency applicable to the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or affiliates or any general written policy or directive of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries or affiliates; (iv) commits a crime involving dishonesty, fraud or unethical business conduct, or a felony; or (v) is expelled or suspended, or is subject to an order temporarily or permanently enjoining the Participant from an area of activity which constitutes a significant portion of the Participant’s activities by the Securities and Exchange Commission, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority, any national securities exchange or any self-regulatory agency or governmental authority, state, foreign or federal.

 

(e)                                              Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations promulgated thereunder.

 

(f)                                               Disability ” shall have the meaning ascribed to such term in section 22(e)(3) of the Code.

 

(g)                                              Matching Unit ” means a Stock Unit granted pursuant to Section 6(a) hereof.

 

(h)                                              Participant ” means any employee who has been selected by the Committee as eligible to participate

 



 

in the Program.

 

(i)                                                  Retirement ” means Termination of Employment (other than a termination for Cause) (i) on or after the Participant has reached age 65 or (ii) on or after the date on which (x) the sum of the age of the Participant and the Participant’s years of continuous service with the Company or its Subsidiaries total 70 or more and (y) the Participant has reached age 55 and has completed at least 10 years of continuous service with the Company or its Subsidiaries.

 

(j)                                                 Stock Unit ” means an award, granted pursuant to Section 8 of the Plan, representing a generally nontransferable right to receive one share of Company Stock at a specified future date, and for Basic Units only, together with a right to Dividend Equivalents as specified in Section 6(e) hereof, and subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan and the Program.  Stock Units are bookkeeping units, and do not represent ownership of Company Stock or any other equity security of the Company.

 

(k)                                              Termination of Employment ” means termination of a Participant’s employment by the Company or a Subsidiary for any reason, including due to death or Disability, immediately after which event the Participant is not employed by the Company or any Subsidiary.

 

(l)                                      Variable Compensation ” means the aggregate amount of discretionary variable compensation awarded to a Participant for a fiscal year before reduction pursuant to this Program and before deferral pursuant to any agreement or any other plan or program of the Company whereby compensation is deferred, including, without limitation, a plan whereby compensation is deferred in accordance with section 401(k) of the Code or reduced in accordance with section 125 of the Code and the Stock Unit Award Program Subplan.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, Variable Compensation may also include amounts awarded under the Company’s Pay-for Performance Program if the Committee so determines. In no event shall a Participant’s annual base salary be considered Variable Compensation.

 

3.                                       Administration

 

(a)                                             Committee Authority and Discretion .  The Program shall be administered and interpreted by the Committee.  The Committee shall have the authority and discretion under the Program as it has under the Plan, with the terms and conditions relating to the administration of the Plan incorporated herein by reference; provided, however, that terms of the grant of Stock Units hereunder may not be inconsistent with the express terms set forth in the Program.

 

(b)                                             Administrator .  The Administrator shall perform and exercise ministerial functions under the Program and other authority and responsibilities specifically delegated to it by the Committee, or explicitly set forth in this Program.  Without limiting the foregoing, the Administrator shall have the authority and responsibility to review and approve changes to the Program to facilitate administration of the Program.

 

(c)                                              Status as Subplan Under the Plan .  The Program constitutes a subplan implemented under the Plan, to be administered in accordance with the terms of the Plan.  Accordingly, all of the terms and conditions of the Plan are hereby incorporated by reference, and, if any provision of the Program or a statement or document relating to Stock Units granted hereunder conflicts with a provision of the Plan, the provision of the Plan shall govern.

 

4.                                       Stock Subject to the Program

 

Shares of Company Stock delivered upon settlement of Stock Units under the Program shall be shares reserved and available under the Plan.  Accordingly, Stock Units may be granted under the Program if sufficient shares are then reserved and available under the Plan, and the number of shares delivered in settlement of Stock Units hereunder shall be counted against the shares reserved and available under the Plan.  Stock Units granted under the Program in place of compensation under the Plan resulting from an award intended to comply with the applicable requirements of section 162(m) of the Code shall be subject to the annual per-person limitations under the Plan.  Stock Units granted under the Program in place of compensation under the Company’s Pay-for-Performance Incentive Plan shall be subject to annual per-person limitations under the Pay-for-Performance Plan.

 

2



 

5.                                       Mandatory Reduction of Variable Compensation

 

A Participant’s Variable Compensation to be earned for each calendar year of participation shall be automatically reduced by the Actual Reduction Amount.  In no event will the Actual Reduction Amount for any Participant with respect to any calendar year exceed the amount of the Participant’s Variable Compensation for the applicable calendar year.

 

6.                                       Grant of Stock Units

 

(a)                                             Automatic Grant of Stock Units .  Each Participant shall be automatically granted Basic Units on the date the year end Variable Compensation would otherwise be paid to the Participant in cash (the “ Date of Grant ”), in a number equal to the Participant’s Actual Reduction Amount divided by the Fair Market Value of a share of Company Stock on such Date.  In addition, each Participant shall be automatically granted Matching Units on the Date of Grant, in a number equal to 10% of the number of Basic Units granted under this Section 6(a) as of the Date of Grant.  With respect to any Participant paid in foreign currency, the number of Basic Units and Matching Units granted to any such Participant shall be based on such exchange rate as the Company reasonably determines.  All Stock Units shall be credited to Participants on the Date of Grant.

 

(b)                                             Discretionary Grants .  Notwithstanding any provision of the Program or the Plan to the contrary, the Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, to grant stock options representing a number of shares of Company Stock with a Black Scholes value equal to the Actual Reduction Amount, based on the current Fair Market Value of a share of Company Stock on the Date of Grant, in accordance with, and subject to, such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate.  Furthermore, notwithstanding any provision of the Program or the Plan to the contrary, the Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, to award Stock Units to any Participant at such time or times and subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee deems appropriate.

 

(c)                                              Vesting; Risk of Forfeiture; Cancellation of Certain Stock Units .

 

(i)                                      Basic Units shall vest in equal annual installments on each of the first, second and third anniversaries of the Date of Grant, if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company or its Subsidiaries on each applicable vesting date.  Matching Units shall vest 100% on the third anniversary of the Date of Grant, if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company or its Subsidiaries through such vesting date.  Except as provided in clauses (ii) through (iv) below, if the Participant’s employment with the Company or its Subsidiaries terminates for any reason prior to a vesting date, unless the Committee provides otherwise, all unvested Basic Units and Matching Units shall be forfeited to the Company.  Basic Units and Matching Units that vest pursuant to this Section 6(c)(i) shall be settled on the schedule set forth in Section 7(a) below.

 

(ii)                                   Notwithstanding any provision of the Program to the contrary, all Basic Units and Matching Units shall vest in full at the time a Participant’s employment terminates due to his or her death or Disability, and all Basic Units and Matching Units held by such Participant shall be settled within 60 days thereafter.

 

(iii)                                Notwithstanding any provision of the Program to the contrary, if a Participant’s employment is terminated on account of Retirement or by the Company for any reason other than Cause (but not on account of death or Disability), the Committee may, in its sole discretion, determine that, subject to the Participant’s execution and non-revocation of a written release of any and all claims against the Company and all related parties and an agreement containing confidentiality, non-competition, non-solicitation, invention assignment covenants and/or such other restrictions as the Committee determines, on a case-by-case basis at the time of the Participant’s termination of employment, in each case in a form acceptable to the Company, in its sole discretion, the Participant shall continue to vest in all Basic Units and Matching Units as if the Participant continued in employment with the Company on each applicable vesting date and the Basic Units and Matching Units shall be settled on the schedule set forth in Section 7(a) below; provided that any such arrangement shall be structured in a manner that complies with the applicable requirements of section 409A of the Code.  Notwithstanding any provision of this Section 6(c)(iii) to the contrary, the Committee shall be permitted to delegate its authority under this Section 6(c)(iii) to the Administrator as it deems appropriate.

 

(iv)                               Notwithstanding any provision of the Program to the contrary, all Basic Units and Matching

 

3



 

Units shall vest in full upon the occurrence of a Change in Control if the Participant is employed by the Company or its Subsidiaries on the date of the Change in Control, and in such event the Basic Units and Matching Units shall be settled within 30 days following the Change in Control.

 

(d)                                             Nontransferability .  Stock Units and all rights relating thereto shall not be transferable or assignable by a Participant, other than by will or the laws of descent and distribution, and shall not be pledged, hypothecated, or otherwise encumbered in any way or subject to execution, attachment, or similar process.

 

(e)                                              Dividend Equivalents on Basic Units .  Dividend Equivalents shall be credited on Basic Units in the manner set forth below.  In no event shall Dividend Equivalents be credited with respect to Matching Units.

 

(i)                        Cash and Non-Company Stock Dividends .  If the Company declares and pays a dividend or distribution on Company Stock in the form of cash or property other than shares of Company Stock, then a number of additional Stock Units shall be credited to each Participant as of the payment date for such dividend or distribution equal to (A) the number of Basic Units credited to the Participant as of the record date for such dividend or distribution multiplied by (B) the amount of cash plus the fair market value of any property other than shares actually paid as a dividend or distribution on each outstanding share of Company Stock at such payment date, divided by (C) the Fair Market Value of a share of Company Stock at such payment date.  Any such additional Stock Units credited to a Participant hereunder shall vest according to the same schedule as the underlying Basic Units to which they relate and shall be settled in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Program.

 

(ii)                                             Company Stock Dividends and Splits.   If the Company declares and pays a dividend or distribution on Company Stock in the form of additional shares of Company Stock, or there occurs a forward split of Company Stock, then a number of additional Stock Units shall be credited to each Participant as of the payment date for such dividend or distribution or forward split equal to (A) the number of Basic Units credited to the Participant as of the record date for such dividend or distribution or split multiplied by (B) the number of additional shares of Company Stock actually paid as a dividend or distribution or issued in such split in respect of each outstanding share of Company Stock.  Any such additional Stock Units credited to a Participant hereunder shall vest according to the same schedule as the underlying Basic Units to which they relate and shall be settled in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Program.

 

(f)                                               Adjustments to Stock Units .  The number of Stock Units credited to each Participant shall be appropriately adjusted, in order to prevent dilution or enlargement of the Participants’ rights with respect to such Stock Units, to reflect any changes in the number of outstanding shares of Company Stock resulting from any event referred to in Section 5(d) of the Plan, taking into account any Stock Units credited to the Participant in connection with such event under Section 6(e) hereof.

 

(g)                                              Fractional Shares .  The number of Stock Units credited to a Participant shall include fractional shares calculated to at least three decimal places, unless otherwise determined by the Committee.  Upon settlement of an award of Stock Units under this Program, fractional shares shall be settled in accordance with the terms of Section 7 hereof and Section 19(f) of the Plan.

 

7.                                       Settlement

 

(a)                                             Issuance and Delivery of Shares in Settlement .

 

(i)                                                Except as otherwise provided in Section 6(c) above in the case of a Participant’s Retirement, termination without Cause, death or Disability, or in the event of a Change in Control, Basic Units shall be settled by issuance and delivery to the Participant (or following his or her death, to the Participant’s designated beneficiary) of a number of shares of Company Stock equal to the number of vested Basic Units credited to the Participant as of the applicable date on which such Basic Units vest, within 30 days after the date on which such Basic Units vest as set forth in Section 6(c) above.

 

(ii)                                             Except as otherwise provided in Section 6(c) above in the case of a Participant’s Retirement, termination without Cause, death or Disability, or in the event of a Change in Control, Matching Units shall be settled by issuance and delivery to the Participant (or following his or her death, to the Participant’s designated

 

4



 

beneficiary) of a number of shares of Company Stock equal to the number of vested Matching Units credited to the Participant as of the applicable date on which such Matching Units vest within 30 days after the date on which such Matching Units vest as set forth in Section 6(c) above.

 

(iii)                                          The Committee may, in its discretion, make delivery of shares hereunder by depositing such shares into an account maintained for the Participant (or of which the Participant is a joint owner, with the consent of the Participant) established in connection with the Company’s Employee Stock Purchase Plan or another plan or arrangement providing for investment in Company Stock and under which the Participant’s rights are similar in nature to those under a stock brokerage account.  In the event there are fractional shares, the Company may settle any fractional share in accordance with Section 19(f) of the Plan.  In no event shall the Company in fact issue fractional shares.  Upon settlement of Stock Units, all obligations of the Company in respect of such Stock Units shall be terminated, and the shares so distributed shall no longer be subject to any restriction or other provision of the Program.

 

(b)                                             Tax Withholding .  The Company and any Subsidiary may deduct from any payment to be made to a Participant any amount that federal, state, local, or foreign tax law requires to be withheld with respect to the settlement of Stock Units.  At the election of the Committee, the Company may withhold from the shares of Company Stock to be distributed in settlement of Stock Units that number of shares having a Fair Market Value, at the settlement date, equal to the amount of such withholding taxes.

 

(c)                                              No Elective Deferral .  Participants may not elect to further defer settlement of Stock Units or otherwise to change the applicable settlement date under the Program.

 

8.                                       General Provisions

 

(a)                                             No Right to Continued Employment .  Neither the Program nor any action taken hereunder, including the grant of Stock Units, will be construed as giving any Participant the right to be retained in the employ of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, nor will it interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to terminate such Participant’s employment at any time.

 

(b)                                             No Rights to Participate; No Stockholder Rights .  No Participant or employee will have any claim to participate in the Program, and the Company will have no obligation to continue the Program.  A grant of Stock Units will confer on the Participant none of the rights of a stockholder of the Company (including no rights to vote or receive dividends or distributions) until settlement by delivery of Company Stock.

 

(c)                                              Changes to the Program .  The Committee may amend, alter, suspend, discontinue, or terminate the Program without the consent of the Participants; provided, however, that, without the consent of an affected Participant, no such action shall materially and adversely affect the rights of such Participant with respect to outstanding Stock Units.

 

(d)                                             Section 409A .  Except to the extent the Committee determines that Stock Units will continue to vest and be settled as provided in Section 6(c)(iii) above, it is intended that the Program and Stock Units issued hereunder be exempt from section 409A of the Code by settling such Stock Units within the short-term deferral exception set forth in the regulations under section 409A of the Code, and the Program and such Stock Units shall be interpreted on a basis consistent with such intent.  If the Committee determines that Stock Units will continue to vest under Section 6(c)(iii) above, to the extent that such determination results in such Stock Units being deemed to constitute deferred compensation subject to the requirements of section 409A of the Code, payment shall only be made under the Program upon an event and in a manner permitted by section 409A of the Code.  If any payment or benefit hereunder cannot be provided or made at the time specified herein without incurring sanctions on the Participant under section 409A of the Code, then such payment or benefit shall be provided in full at the earliest time thereafter when such sanctions will not be imposed.  For purposes of section 409A of the Code, each payment made under the Program shall be treated as a separate payment, and if a payment is not made by the designated payment date under the Program, the payment shall be made by December 31 of the calendar year in which the designated date occurs.  To the extent that any provision of the Program would cause a conflict with the requirements of section 409A of the Code, or would cause the administration of the Program to fail to satisfy the requirements of section 409A, such provision shall be deemed null and void to the extent permitted by applicable

 

5



 

law.  In no event shall a Participant, directly or indirectly, designate the calendar year of payment.  The Program may be amended in any respect deemed by the Committee to be necessary in order to preserve compliance with section 409A of the Code.

 

(e)                            Recoupment Policy .  All Stock Units under this Program will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to any Participant, as in effect from time to time and as approved by the Committee or Board.

 

9.                                       Effective Date and Termination of Program

 

The Program as set forth herein shall become effective as of the Effective Date.  Unless earlier terminated under Section 8(c) hereof, the Program shall terminate at such time after 2009 when no Stock Units previously granted under the Program remain outstanding.

 

Adopted by the Committee:

 

October 7, 2008

Revised by the Committee:

Amended and Restated by the Committee:

Amended by the Committee:

 

February 9, 2010

August 15, 2011

November 17, 2011

Amended and Restated by the Committee:

Amended and Restated by the Committee:

 

January 1, 2014

February 5, 2014

 

6




Exhibit 10.17

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

2007 OMNIBUS EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN
VARIABLE COMPENSATION STOCK UNIT AWARD PROGRAM SUBPLAN

 

GRANT NOTICE

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “ Company ”), pursuant to Section 6 of its Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (the “ Program ”), hereby grants to you as a Participant under the Program, Stock Units representing a generally nontransferable right to receive one share of Company Stock with respect to each underlying Stock Unit at a specified future date together with a right to Dividend Equivalents on Basic Units as specified in the Program (the “ Grant ”), subject to all of the terms and conditions as set forth herein, the Program and the Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the “ Plan ”).(1)  All capitalized terms herein that are not otherwise defined shall have the meanings ascribed to such terms in the Program or Plan, as applicable.

 

Participant:

 

Date of Grant:

 

Number of Basic Stock Units subject to Grant:

 

Number of Matching Stock Units subject to Grant:

 

 

Vesting Schedule : The Basic Units subject to this Grant shall vest in equal annual installments on each of the first, second and third anniversaries of the Date of Grant if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company on each applicable vesting date. The Matching Units granted with respect to the Basic Units subject to this Grant shall vest 100% on the third anniversary of the Date of Grant if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company through such date.  The Participant shall receive shares of Company Stock in settlement of the Basic Units and Matching Units in accordance with the terms of the Program, subject to the collection of applicable taxes in connection with the issuance of Company Stock.

 

Violation of Code of Conduct; Forfeiture of Unvested Basic Units and Matching Units :  If, prior to the date Basic Units and Matching Units otherwise become vested in accordance with the vesting schedule set forth above, the Participant materially breaches the Company’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, as such material breach is determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “ Board ”), or any other committee appointed by the Board to administer the Program (the “ Compensation Committee ”), in its sole discretion, the Compensation Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, that the Basic Units and Matching Units shall cease to vest effective as of the date of the Participant’s material breach, subject to compliance with applicable law.

 

Acknowledgements : You acknowledge receipt of this Grant Notice, the Program, the Plan and the Plan prospectus.(1)  You further acknowledge that this Grant is made under, and governed by the terms and conditions of, the Plan and the Program and you agree to be bound by such terms.  The Compensation Committee has the authority to interpret and construe this Grant pursuant to the terms of the Program and the Plan, and its decisions shall be conclusive as to any questions arising hereunder.

 

Recoupment Policy :  You agree that you will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to you as an employee of the Company or any of its affiliates, as in effect from time to time and as approved by the Board or the Compensation Committee, whether or not approved before or after the Date of Grant.

 


(1)   The Plan, Plan prospectus, and Program are available on ITG Exchange.  In addition, paper copies of the Plan, Plan prospectus and Program are available upon request by contacting the Legal Department of the Company at ITG_Legal.

 



 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

PARTICIPANT

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

 

 

By:

 

Name:

 

 

Brokerage Name:

 

Title:

 

 

Brokerage Account Number:

 

Date:

 

 

Date:

 

 




Exhibit 10.18

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

2007 OMNIBUS EQUITY COMPENSATION PLAN
VARIABLE COMPENSATION STOCK UNIT AWARD PROGRAM SUBPLAN

 

GRANT NOTICE

 

Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “ Company ”), pursuant to Section 6 of its Variable Compensation Stock Unit Award Program Subplan (the “ Program ”), hereby grants to you as a Participant under the Program, Stock Units representing a generally nontransferable right to receive one share of Company Stock with respect to each underlying Stock Unit at a specified future date together with a right to Dividend Equivalents on Basic Units as specified in the Program (the “ Grant ”), subject to all of the terms and conditions as set forth herein, the Program and the Investment Technology Group, Inc. 2007 Omnibus Equity Compensation Plan (the “ Plan ”).(1)  All capitalized terms herein that are not otherwise defined shall have the meanings ascribed to such terms in the Program or Plan, as applicable.

 

Participant:

 

Date of Grant:

 

Number of Basic Stock Units subject to Grant:

 

Number of Matching Stock Units subject to Grant:

 

 

Vesting Schedule : The Basic Units subject to this Grant shall vest in equal annual installments on each of the first, second and third anniversaries of the Date of Grant if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company on each applicable vesting date. The Matching Units granted with respect to the Basic Units subject to this Grant shall vest 100% on the third anniversary of the Date of Grant if the Participant remains continuously employed by the Company through such date.  The Participant shall receive shares of Company Stock in settlement of the Basic Units and Matching Units in accordance with the terms of the Program, subject to the collection of applicable taxes in connection with the issuance of Company Stock.

 

Violation of Code of Conduct; Financial Restatement; Forfeiture of Unvested Basic Units and Matching Units :  If, prior to the date the Basic Units and Matching Units otherwise become vested in accordance with the vesting schedule set forth above (i) the Participant materially breaches the Company’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, as such material breach is determined by the Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the Company (the “Board”), or any other committee appointed by the Board to administer the Program (the “ Compensation Committee ”) in its sole discretion, or (ii) the Company is required to prepare a restated financial statement that is filed with an external regulator because of material noncompliance of the Company with any financial reporting requirement, whether or not such restatement involves misconduct of the Participant, then the Compensation Committee may determine, in its sole discretion, that the Basic Units and Matching Units shall cease to vest effective as of the date of the material breach or the date on which the Company is notified of such requirement, as applicable, in each case, subject to compliance with applicable law.

 

Acknowledgements : You acknowledge receipt of this Grant Notice, the Program, the Plan and the Plan prospectus.(1)  You further acknowledge that this Grant is made under, and governed by the terms and conditions of, the Plan and the Program and you agree to be bound by such terms.  The Compensation Committee has the authority to interpret and construe this Grant pursuant to the terms of the Program and the Plan, and its decisions shall be conclusive as to any questions arising hereunder.

 

Recoupment Policy :  You agree that you will be subject to any compensation clawback or recoupment policies that may be applicable to you as an employee of the Company or any of its affiliates, as in effect from time to

 


(1)   The Plan, Plan prospectus, and Program are available on ITG Exchange.  In addition, paper copies of the Plan, Plan prospectus and Program are available upon request by contacting the Legal Department of the Company at ITG_Legal.

 



 

time and as approved by the Board or the Compensation Committee, whether or not approved before or after the Date of Grant.

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

PARTICIPANT

 

 

 

 

 

 

By:

 

 

By:

 

Name:

 

 

Brokerage Name:

 

Title:

 

 

Brokerage Account Number:

 

Date:

 

 

Date:

 

 




Exhibit 10.19

 

INVESTMENT TECHNOLOGY GROUP, INC.

 

AMENDED AND RESTATED EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN

 

1.                                       Purpose .  The purpose of this Amended and Restated Employee Stock Purchase Plan (the “Plan”) of Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the “Company”) is to encourage stock ownership by Employees (as defined below) of the Company and its Subsidiaries (as defined below) and thereby provide Employees with an incentive to contribute to the profitability and success of the Company, and to provide a benefit that will assist the Company in competing to attract and retain Employees of high quality.  The Plan, which is intended to qualify as an “employee stock purchase plan” meeting the requirements of Section 423 of the Code, is for the exclusive benefit of eligible Employees of the Company and its Subsidiaries.

 

2.                                       Definitions .  For purposes of the Plan, in addition to the terms defined in Section 1, terms are defined as set forth below:

 

(a)                                  “Account” means the account maintained on behalf of the Participant by the Custodian for the purpose of investing in Stock and engaging in other transactions permitted under the Plan.

 

(b)                                  “Administrator” means the person or persons designated to administer the Plan under Section 3(a).

 

(c)                                   “Board” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

 

(d)                                  “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.  References to any provision of the Code will be deemed to include successor provisions thereto and regulations thereunder.

 

(e)                                   “Custodian” means Computershare, or such successor thereto as may be appointed by the Board.

 

(f)                                    “Earnings” means that portion of a Participant’s compensation which constitutes salary, bonus or overtime pay under the payroll system of the Company and its Subsidiaries and payable to a Participant during a given pay period.

 

(g)                                   “Enrollment Date” means the first day of each Offering Period.

 

(h)                                  “Employee” means a person classified as an employee of the Company or a Subsidiary (including an officer or director who is also an employee) for payroll purposes, as determined in the sole discretion of the Company.  Notwithstanding the foregoing, if a person is engaged in a non-employee status (including, but not limited to, as an independent contractor, an individual being paid through an employee leasing company or other third party agency) and is subsequently reclassified by the Company, the Internal Revenue Service, or a court as an employee for payroll purposes, such person, for purposes of this Plan, shall be deemed an

 



 

Employee from the actual (and not the effective) date of such reclassification, unless expressly provided otherwise by the Company .

 

(i)                                      “Fair Market Value,” unless otherwise required by an applicable provision of the Code, as of any date, means the closing sales price of the Stock as reported on the New York Stock Exchange on the date as of which the valuation is made.

 

(j)                                     “Offering Period” means the approximately six-month period beginning on February 1 and ending on the last trading day of July or beginning August 1 and ending on the last trading day of January.  The first Offering Period began on February 1, 1998.

 

(k)                                  “Participant” means an Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary who satisfies the eligibility criteria set forth in Section 5 and is participating in the Plan.

 

(l)                                      “Purchase Date” means the last trading day of each Offering Period.

 

(m)                              “Purchase Right” means a Participant’s option to purchase shares, which is deemed to be outstanding and exercisable during an Offering Period in accordance with the Plan.  A Purchase Right represents an “option” as such term is used under Section 423 of the Code.

 

(n)                                  “Stock” means the common stock, par value $.01 per share, of the Company, and such other securities as may be substituted or resubstituted for Stock under Section 4.

 

(o)                                  “Subsidiary” or “Subsidiaries” means any corporation (other than the Company) in an unbroken chain of corporations beginning with the Company if each of the corporations (other than the last corporation in the unbroken chain) owns stock possessing more than 50% of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock in one of the other corporations in the chain, including a corporation that becomes a Subsidiary during the term of the Plan.

 

3.                                       Administration .

 

(a)                                  Administrator .  The Plan will be administered by an Administrator, which shall be the Board or such Board committee, officer, or committee of officers and Employees to which the Board may delegate administrative duties and authority (other than authority to amend the Plan).  The Administrator will have full authority to adopt, amend, suspend, waive, and rescind such rules and regulations and appoint such agents as it may deem necessary or advisable to administer the Plan, to correct any defect or supply any omission or reconcile any inconsistency in the Plan and to construe and interpret the Plan and rules and regulations thereunder, to furnish to the Custodian such information as the Custodian may require, and to make all other decisions and determinations under the Plan (including determinations relating to eligibility).  No person acting in connection with the administration of the Plan will, in that capacity, participate in deciding any matter relating to his or her participation in the Plan.

 



 

(b)                                  The Custodian .  The Custodian will act as custodian under the Plan, and will perform such duties as are set forth in the Plan and in any agreement between the Company and the Custodian.  The Custodian will establish and maintain, as agent for each Participant, an Account and any subaccounts as may be necessary or desirable for the administration of the Plan.

 

(c)                                   Other Administrative Provisions .  The Company will furnish information to the Custodian from its records as directed by the Administrator, and such records, including as to a Participant’s Earnings, will be conclusive on all persons unless determined by the Administrator to be incorrect.  Each Participant and other person claiming benefits under the Plan must furnish to the Company in writing an up-to-date mailing address and any other information as the Administrator or Custodian may reasonably request.  Any communication, statement, or notice mailed with postage prepaid to any such Participant or other person at the last mailing address filed with the Company will be deemed sufficiently given when mailed and will be binding upon the named recipient.  The Plan will be administered on a reasonable and nondiscriminatory basis, and Plan provisions and rules thereunder will apply in a uniform manner to all persons similarly situated.  All Participants will have equal rights and privileges (subject to the terms of the Plan) with respect to Purchase Rights outstanding during any given Offering Period.

 

4.                                       Stock Subject to Plan .  Subject to adjustment as hereinafter provided, the total number of shares of Stock reserved and available for issuance upon exercise of Purchase Rights or otherwise under the Plan will be 1,548,313.  Any shares of Stock delivered by the Company under the Plan may consist, in whole or in part, of authorized and unissued shares or treasury shares.  Shares acquired in the open market through dividend reinvestment will not count against this limit.  The number and kind of such shares of Stock subject to the Plan will be proportionately adjusted, as determined by the Board, in the event of any extraordinary dividend or other distribution, recapitalization, forward or reverse split, reorganization, merger, consolidation, spin-off, combination, repurchase, or share exchange, or other similar corporate transaction or event affecting the Stock.

 

5.                                       Enrollment and Contributions .

 

(a)                                  Eligibility .  An Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary may enroll in the Plan for any Offering Period if such Employee is employed at the Enrollment Date and was continuously so employed during the 15 days preceding the Enrollment Date, unless:

 

(i)                                      At the time of enrollment, the Employee’s customary employment is 20 hours or less per week or the Employee’s customary employment is for not more than five months in any calendar year, or the Employee cannot legally enter into the obligations of a Participant;

 

(ii)                                   Such person would upon enrollment be deemed to own, for purposes of Section 423(b)(3) of the Code, an aggregate of five percent or more of the total combined voting power or value of all outstanding shares of all classes of the Company or of any

 



 

parent or Subsidiary (including in such person’s ownership the maximum number of shares that he or she could acquire under Section 6(c)); or

 

(iii)                                Such person is disqualified from participation in such Offering Period under Section 7(b).

 

The Company will notify an Employee of the date as of which he or she is eligible to initially enroll in the Plan, and will make available to each eligible Employee the necessary enrollment forms.

 

(b)                                  Initial Enrollment .  An Employee who is or who will become eligible on or before a given Enrollment Date under Section 5(a) may, after receiving current information about the Plan, initially enroll in the Plan by executing and filing with the Administrator a properly completed enrollment form, including thereon the Employee’s election as to the rate of payroll contributions for the Offering Period.  To be effective for any Offering Period, such enrollment form must be filed at least 15 days before the Enrollment Date for the Offering Period.

 

(c)                                   Reenrollment for Subsequent Offering Periods .  A Participant whose enrollment in and payroll contributions under the Plan continue throughout an Offering Period will automatically be reenrolled in the Plan for the next Offering Period unless (i) the Participant terminates enrollment before the Enrollment Date for the next Offering Period in accordance with Section 7(a) or (ii) on such Enrollment Date he or she is ineligible to participate under Section 5(a) (including due to disqualification under Section 7(b)).  The rate of payroll contributions for a Participant who is automatically reenrolled for an Offering Period will be the same as the rate of payroll contributions in effect at the end of the preceding Offering Period, unless the Participant files a new enrollment form at least 15 days before the Enrollment Date for the Offering Period designating a different rate of payroll contributions.

 

(d)                                  Payroll Contributions .  An enrolled Participant will make contributions under the Plan by means of payroll deductions from each payroll period which ends during the Offering Period, at the rate elected by the Participant in his or her enrollment form filed nearest to, but not later than, 15 days before the Enrollment Date for the Offering Period.  The rate of payroll contributions elected by a Participant may not be more than ten percent of the Participant’s Earnings for each payroll period; provided , however , that the Board may specify a higher maximum rate, subject to Section 8(c) hereof.  The Administrator may specify, on the enrollment form, whether payroll contributions shall be a percentage of Earnings or a fixed dollar amount.  The foregoing and any election of a Participant notwithstanding, a Participant’s rate of payroll contributions will be adjusted downward by the Company at any time or from time to time as necessary to ensure that the limit on the amount of Stock purchased with respect to an Offering Period set forth in Section 6(c) is not exceeded.  A Participant may elect to increase, decrease, or discontinue payroll contributions for future Offering Periods by filing a new enrollment form at least 15 days before the Enrollment Date for the Offering Period.  A Participant may not elect to increase or decrease payroll contributions during an Offering Period, except that a Participant’s payroll contributions will be automatically discontinued upon the

 



 

filing of an election to withdraw payroll contributions prior to a Purchase Date or the filing of an election to withdraw or transfer shares if such filing occurs less than one year after the Purchase Date on which such shares were purchased, as specified in Sections 5(f), 7(a) and 7(b).

 

(e)                                   Holding of Payroll Contributions .  All payroll contributions by a Participant under the Plan will be received and held by the Company until the end of the Offering Period, and will represent unfunded obligations of the Company.  Such amounts are not required to be segregated and may be used by the Company for any corporate purpose.

 

(f)                                    Withdrawal of Payroll Contributions; Refund of Payroll Contributions Upon Termination of Employment .  A Participant may elect to withdraw all (but not less than all) of his or her payroll contributions for a given Offering Period by filing a notice of withdrawal with the Administrator not later than the close of business the business day prior to the Purchase Date for such Offering Period.  In addition, if the Participant ceases to be employed by the Company and its Subsidiaries prior to the Purchase Date, his or her payroll contributions for that Offering Period shall be refunded.  In either case, the Company shall promptly pay to the Participant (or his or her estate, in the event of death) the amount of such payroll contributions.  No further payroll contributions shall be made by the Participant in that Offering Period.  In addition, in the case of withdrawal the Participant shall be subject to possible disqualification from participation in the next Offering Period under Section 7(b).

 

(g)                                   Refund of Unused Payroll Contributions .  If any of a Participant’s payroll contributions are not applied to the purchase of shares on the Purchase Date (for example, if the number of shares purchased is limited under Section 6(c)), the portion of such payroll contributions not applied to the purchase of shares shall be promptly refunded to the Participant.

 

(h)                                  No Interest Payable on Payroll Contributions .  No amounts of interest will be credited or payable by the Company on payroll contributions pending investment in Stock, withdrawal, refund upon termination, or refund of any unused portion, or in any other circumstance under the Plan.

 

6.                                       Purchases of Stock .

 

(a)                                  Purchase Rights .  Enrollment in the Plan for any Offering Period by a Participant will constitute a grant by the Company of a Purchase Right to such Participant for such Offering Period.  Each Purchase Right will be subject to the terms set forth in this Section 6.

 

(b)                                  Purchase Price .  The purchase price at which each share of Stock will be purchased under a Purchase Right will equal 85% of the lesser of (i) Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the first trading day in the Offering Period and (ii) Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the last trading day in the Offering Period.

 

(c)                                   Number of Shares Purchased .  The number of shares of Stock that will be purchased upon exercise of a Participant’s Purchase Right for an Offering Period will equal the number of shares (including fractional shares) that can be purchased at the purchase price

 



 

specified in Section 6(b) with the aggregate amount of the Participant’s payroll contributions during the Offering Period; provided , however , that the number of shares of Stock subject to a Participant’s Purchase Right and purchasable in any Offering Period will not exceed the lesser of (i) the number derived by dividing $12,500 by 100% of the Fair Market Value of one share of Stock determined as of the first trading day in the Offering Period or (ii) the number of shares such that the Participant’s rights to purchase shares under all employee stock purchase plans qualifying under Section 423 of the Code of the Company and any parent or Subsidiary shall accrue at a rate which does not exceed $25,000 of the Fair Market Value of the Stock (determined at the time each such option is granted) as required under Section 423(b)(8) of the Code.

 

(d)                                  Automatic Exercise and Purchase .  The Purchase Right will be automatically exercised on the Purchase Date for the Offering Period.  At or as promptly as practicable after the Purchase Date for an Offering Period, the aggregate amount of the Participant’s payroll contributions for the Offering Period will be applied by the Company to the purchase of shares of Stock, in accordance with the terms of the Plan.  Thereupon, the Company will deliver the shares of Stock purchased to the Custodian for deposit into the Participant’s Account.  Payment for Stock purchased upon exercise of a Purchase Right will be made only through payroll contributions in accordance with Section 5; no optional payments will be permitted.

 

(e)                                   Expiration .  A Participant’s Purchase Right will expire on the earlier of the Purchase Date for the Offering Period (if not exercised) or the date on which the Participant’s enrollment in the Plan terminates.

 

(f)                                    Dividend Reinvestment; Other Distributions .  Cash dividends on any Stock credited to a Participant’s Account will be automatically reinvested in additional shares of Stock; such amounts will not be available in the form of cash to Participants.  All cash dividends paid on Stock credited to Participants’ Accounts will be paid over by the Company to the Custodian at the dividend payment date.  The Custodian will aggregate all purchases of Stock in connection with the Plan for a given dividend payment date.  Purchases of Stock for purposes of dividend reinvestment will be made as promptly as practicable (but not more than 30 days) after a dividend payment date.  The Custodian will make such purchases, as directed by the Administrator, either (i) in transactions on any securities exchange upon which Stock is traded, otherwise in the over-the-counter market, or in negotiated transactions, or (ii) directly from the Company at 100% of the Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the dividend payment date.  Any shares of Stock distributed as a dividend or distribution in respect of shares of Stock or in connection with a split of the Stock credited to a Participant’s Account will be credited to such Account.  In the event of any other non-cash dividend or distribution in respect of Stock credited to a Participant’s Account, the Custodian will, if reasonably practicable and at the direction of the Administrator, sell any property received in such dividend or distribution as promptly as practicable and use the proceeds to purchase additional shares of Stock in the same manner as cash paid over to the Custodian for purposes of dividend reinvestment.  Shares of Stock acquired under this Section 6(f) shall be subject to section 7(a) and 7(b) and, for such purposes, shall be

 



 

deemed to be acquired by a Participant at the same time as the Participant acquired the underlying shares in respect of which the shares were distributed under this Section 6(f).

 

(e)                                   Voting Rights .  Each Participant will be entitled to vote the number of shares of Stock credited to his or her Account (including any fractional shares credited to such account) on any matter as to which the approval of the Company’s stockholders is sought.  If a Participant does not vote or grant a valid proxy with respect to shares credited to his or her Account, such shares will be voted by the Custodian in accordance with any stock exchange or other rules governing the Custodian in the voting of shares held for customer accounts.  Similar procedures will apply in the case of any consent solicitation of Company stockholders.

 

7.                                       Withdrawal or Transfer of Shares, Disqualification, and Account Distribution Upon Termination .

 

(a)                                  Stock Withdrawals and Transfers .  A Participant may elect to withdraw shares of Stock from his or her Account in certificated form or to transfer such shares from his or her Account to an account of the Participant maintained with a broker-dealer or financial institution; provided , however , that an election to withdraw or transfer shares filed less than one year after the Purchase Date on which such shares were purchased shall be deemed an election to withdraw payroll contributions under Section 5(f) for the current Offering Period and shall result in disqualification from participation in the next Offering Period to the extent provided under Section 7(b).  If a Participant elects to withdraw shares, one or more certificates for whole shares shall be issued in the name of, and delivered to, the Participant, with such Participant receiving cash in lieu of fractional shares based on the Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the date of withdrawal.  If shares of Stock are transferred from a Participant’s Account to a broker-dealer or financial institution that maintains an account for the Participant, only whole shares shall be transferred and cash in lieu of any fractional share shall be paid over for the account of Participant based on the Fair Market Value of a share of Stock on the date of transfer, unless otherwise determined by the Administrator based on the Administrator’s determination that such broker-dealer or financial institution is capable of crediting fractional shares.  Other provisions of this Plan notwithstanding, if the Participant is then an Employee of the Company or its Subsidiaries, transfers will be made only to a broker-dealer or financial institution through which Employees are then permitted to sell Stock under the Company’s policies governing employee trading in Company securities.  Participants may not designate any other person to receive directly shares of Stock withdrawn or transferred under the Plan, although no restrictions apply under this Plan to shares that have been withdrawn or transferred.  A Participant seeking to withdraw or transfer shares of Stock must give instructions to the Custodian in such manner and form as may be prescribed by the Administrator and the Custodian, which instructions will be acted upon as promptly as practicable.  Withdrawals and transfers will be subject to any fees imposed in accordance with Section 8(a) hereof.

 

(b)                                  Disqualification .  If a Participant elects to withdraw payroll contributions at any time under Section 5(f) or elects to withdraw or transfer shares that were purchased at a Purchase Date less than one year before the date of filing the election to withdraw or transfer under Section 7(a) (which is also deemed to constitute an election to withdraw payroll

 



 

contributions), the Participant’s enrollment for the Offering Period in effect at the date of such withdrawal or transfer shall cease and the Participant shall be disqualified from participating in the next Offering Period beginning after the filing of such election to withdraw payroll contributions or withdraw or transfer shares.  The foregoing notwithstanding, the Administrator may permit a Participant to reenroll in the next Offering Period if the Participant demonstrates and the Administrator finds that the withdrawal of payroll contributions and/or the withdrawal or transfer of shares was necessary due to an unforeseeable financial emergency or hardship of the Participant.  For purposes of the Plan, a Participant shall be deemed to withdraw or transfer shares from his or her Account in the order in which the shares were acquired (i.e., first in-first out).

 

(c)                                   Distribution of Account Upon Termination .  Upon termination of employment of a Participant, the Custodian will continue to maintain the Participant’s Account until the earlier of such time as the Participant withdraws or transfers all Stock in the Account or one year after the Participant ceases to be employed by the Company and its Subsidiaries.  At the expiration of such one year period, the assets in Participant’s account shall be withdrawn or transferred as elected by the Participant or, in the absence of such election, as determined by the Administrator.  If a Participant dies while assets remain credited to his or her Account, all amounts payable to the Participant will be paid to his or her estate as promptly as practicable.

 

8.                                       General .

 

(a)                                  Costs .  Costs and expenses incurred in the administration of the Plan and maintenance of Accounts will be paid by the Company, including annual fees of the Custodian and any brokerage fees and commissions for the purchase of Stock upon reinvestment of dividends and distributions.  The foregoing notwithstanding, the Custodian may impose or pass through a reasonable fee for the withdrawal of Stock in the form of stock certificates (as permitted under Section 6(f)), and reasonable fees for other services unrelated to the purchase of Stock under the Plan, to the extent approved in writing by the Company and communicated to Participants.  In no circumstance shall the Company pay any brokerage fees and commissions for the sale of Stock acquired under the Plan by a Participant.

 

(b)                                  Statements to Participants .  The Custodian will reflect payroll contributions, purchases, dividends and distributions and reinvestment thereof, withdrawals and transfers of shares of Stock and other Plan transactions by appropriate adjustments to the Participant’s Account.  The Custodian will, not less frequently than semi-annually, provide or cause to be provided a written statement to the Participant showing the transactions in his or her Account and the date thereof, the number of shares of Stock purchased, the aggregate purchase price paid, the purchase price per share, the brokerage fees and commissions paid (if any), the total shares of Stock held for the Participant’s Account (computed to at least three decimal places), and other information.

 

(c)                                   Compliance with Section 423 .  It is the intent of the Company that this Plan comply in all respects with applicable requirements of Section 423 of the Code and regulations thereunder.  Accordingly, if any provision of this Plan does not comply with such

 



 

requirements, such provision will be construed or deemed amended to the extent necessary to conform to such requirements.

 

9.  General Provisions .

 

(a)                                  Compliance With Legal and Other Requirements .  The Plan, the granting and exercising of Purchase Rights hereunder, and the other obligations of the Company and the Custodian under the Plan will be subject to all applicable federal and state laws, rules, and regulations, and to such approvals by any regulatory or governmental agency as may be required.  The Company may, in its discretion, postpone the issuance or delivery of Stock upon exercise of Purchase Rights until completion of such registration or qualification of such Stock or other required action under any federal or state law, rule, or regulation, listing or other required action with respect to any automated quotation system or stock exchange upon which the Stock or other Company securities are designated or listed, or compliance with any other contractual obligation of the Company, as the Company may consider appropriate, and may require any Participant to make such representations and furnish such information as it may consider appropriate in connection with the issuance or delivery of Stock in compliance with applicable laws, rules, and regulations, designation or listing requirements, or other contractual obligations.

 

(b)                                  Limits on Encumbering Rights .  No right or interest of a Participant under the Plan, including any Purchase Right, may be pledged, encumbered, or hypothecated to or in favor of any party, subject to any lien, obligation, or liability of such Participant, or otherwise assigned, transferred, or disposed of except pursuant to the laws of descent or distribution, and any right of a Participant under the Plan will be exercisable during the Participant’s lifetime only by the Participant.

 

(c)                                   No Right to Continued Employment .  Neither the Plan nor any action taken hereunder, including the grant of a Purchase Right, will be construed as giving any Employee the right to be retained in the employ of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries, nor will it interfere in any way with the right of the Company or any of its Subsidiaries to terminate any Employee’s employment at any time.

 

(d)                                  Taxes .  The Company or any Subsidiary is authorized to withhold from any payment to be made to a Participant, including any payroll and other payments not related to the Plan, amounts of withholding and other taxes due in connection with any transaction under the Plan, and a Participant’s enrollment in the Plan will be deemed to constitute his or her consent to such withholding.  In addition, Participants are required to advise the Company of sales and other dispositions of Stock acquired under the Plan in order to permit the Company to comply with tax laws and to claim any tax deductions to which the Company may be entitled with respect to the Plan.

 

(e)                                   Changes to the Plan .  The Board may amend, alter, suspend, discontinue, or terminate the Plan without the consent of stockholders or Participants, provided , however ,  that any such action will be subject to the approval of the Company’s stockholders within one year after such Board action if such stockholder approval is required by any federal or state law

 



 

or regulation or the rules of any automated quotation system or stock exchange on which the Stock may then be quoted or listed, or if such stockholder approval is necessary in order for the Plan to continue to meet the requirements of Section 423 of the Code, and the Board may otherwise, in its discretion, determine to submit other such actions to stockholders for approval.  Upon termination of the Plan, the Board may elect to terminate all outstanding Purchase Rights at such time as the Board may designate; if such termination results in termination of any Purchase Right prior to its exercise, all of a Participant’s payroll contributions not invested in Stock will be returned to the Participant (without interest) as promptly as practicable.

 

(f)                                    No Rights to Participate; No Stockholder Rights .  No Participant or Employee will have any claim to participate in the Plan with respect to Offering Periods that have not commenced, and the Company will have no obligation to continue the Plan.  No Purchase Right will confer on any Participant any of the rights of a stockholder of the Company unless and until Stock is duly issued or transferred to the Custodian and credited to the Participant’s Account.

 

(g)                                   Fractional Shares .  Unless otherwise determined by the Administrator, purchases of Stock under the Plan executed by the Custodian may result in the crediting of fractional shares of Stock to the Participant’s Stock Account.  Such fractional shares will be computed to at least three decimal places.  Fractional shares will not, however, be issued by the Company, and certificates representing fractional shares will not be delivered to Participants under any circumstances.  If at any time fractional shares will not be credited to Participants’ Accounts, the Administrator shall determine whether a Participant’s payroll contributions remaining after the purchase of the greatest possible number of whole shares on a given Purchase Date will be refunded or will be retained and applied to purchases in the next Offering Period.

 

(h)                                  Nonexclusivity of the Plan .  Neither the adoption of the Plan by the Board nor its submission to the stockholders of the Company for approval will be construed as creating any limitations on the power of the Board to adopt such other compensatory arrangements as it may deem desirable, including, without limitation, the granting of stock options otherwise than under the Plan, and such arrangements may be either applicable generally or only in specific cases.

 

(i)                                      Governing Law .  The Plan and all related documents shall be governed by, and construed in accordance with, the laws of the State of New York (except to the extent the Delaware General Corporation Law and provisions of federal law may be applicable), without reference to principles of conflict of laws.  If any provision hereof shall be held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid and unenforceable, the remaining provisions of the Plan shall continue to be fully effective.

 

(k)                                  Effective Date .  The Plan was originally effective February 1, 1998, and previously amended and restated effective on May 12, 2009 (upon approval by the Company’s stockholders) and August 18, 2009.  The Plan as amended and restated herein is effective as of June 11, 2013.

 




QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 21.1

SUBSIDIARIES OF THE COMPANY

Name
  Jurisdiction of
Incorporation/Organization
ITG Inc.    Delaware
AlterNet Securities, Inc.    Delaware
ITG Software Solutions, Inc.    Delaware
ITG Global Trading Incorporated   Delaware
ITG Solutions Network, Inc.    Delaware
ITG Analytics, Inc.    Delaware
ITG Investment Research, Inc.    Delaware
ITG Platforms Inc.    Delaware
ITG Derivatives LLC   Illinois
Investment Technology Group International Limited   Ireland
ITG Ventures Limited   Ireland
Investment Technology Group Limited   Ireland
Investment Technology Group Europe Limited   Ireland
ITG Investment Technology Group (Israel) Ltd.    Israel
ITG Australia Limited   Australia
ITG Singapore Pte. Limited   Singapore
ITG Canada Corp.    Nova Scotia
TriAct Canada Marketplace LP   Ontario
ITG Hong Kong Limited   Hong Kong

Note: Certain subsidiaries were omitted from this list in accordance with Regulation S-K Item 601(b)(21)(ii).




QuickLinks


QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 23.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The Board of Directors
Investment Technology Group, Inc.:

        We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statements (No. 333-78309, No. 333-42725, No. 333-50804, No. 333-89290, No. 333-99087, No. 333-26309, No. 333-159271, No. 333-156634, No. 333-166855, No. 333-170116, No. 333-175017, No. 333-189267, and No. 333-189268) on Form S-8 of Investment Technology Group, Inc. of our reports dated March 13, 2014, with respect to the consolidated statements of financial condition of Investment Technology Group, Inc. and Subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013 and 2012, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income (loss), changes in stockholders' equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2013, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, which reports appear in the December 31, 2013 Annual Report on Form 10-K of Investment Technology Group, Inc.

/s/ KPMG LLP

New York, New York
March 17, 2014




QuickLinks


QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 31.1

CERTIFICATION

I, Robert C. Gasser, certify that:

1.
I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Investment Technology Group, Inc.;

2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.
The registrant's other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant's most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant's fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

5.
The registrant's other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit committee of the registrant's board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

a)
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

b)
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 17, 2014        

 

 

 

 

/s/ ROBERT C. GASSER

Robert C. Gasser
Chief Executive Officer



QuickLinks


QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 31.2

CERTIFICATION

I, Steven R. Vigliotti, certify that:

1.
I have reviewed this annual report on Form 10-K of Investment Technology Group, Inc.;

2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

4.
The registrant's other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant's disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant's most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant's fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

5.
The registrant's other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant's auditors and the audit committee of the registrant's board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

a)
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant's ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

b)
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant's internal control over financial reporting.

Date: March 17, 2014        

 

 

 

 

/s/ STEVEN R. VIGLIOTTI

Steven R. Vigliotti
Chief Financial Officer



QuickLinks


QuickLinks -- Click here to rapidly navigate through this document


Exhibit 32.1

Certification Under Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
(18 U.S.C., Section 1350)

        In connection with the Annual Report on Form 10-K of Investment Technology Group, Inc. (the "Company") for the year ended December 31, 2013, as filed with the SEC on the date hereof (the "Report"), Robert C. Gasser, as Chief Executive Officer of the Company, and Steven R. Vigliotti, as Chief Financial Officer of the Company, each hereby certifies, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. §1350, that to his knowledge:

(1)
The Report fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d), as applicable, of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the "Exchange Act"); and

(2)
The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.


/s/ ROBERT C. GASSER

Robert C. Gasser
Chief Executive Officer
March 17, 2014

 

/s/ STEVEN R. VIGLIOTTI

Steven R. Vigliotti
Chief Financial Officer
March 17, 2014

        The foregoing certification is being furnished solely pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350 and shall not be deemed filed by the Company for purposes of Section 18 of the Exchange Act. Such certification will not be deemed to be incorporated by reference into any filing under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, or the Exchange Act, except to the extent that the Company specifically incorporates it by reference.




QuickLinks